diff options
Diffstat (limited to '35139-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/35139-h.htm | 20489 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 16651 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 52266 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 47555 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img004.jpg | bin | 0 -> 59373 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49829 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img006.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42364 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img007.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42737 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img008.jpg | bin | 0 -> 19761 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img009.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13772 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img010.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11967 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img011.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15031 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img012.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13150 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img013.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13907 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img014.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12934 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img015.jpg | bin | 0 -> 10934 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img016.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8200 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img017.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9586 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img018.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11654 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img019.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9813 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img020.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9004 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img021.jpg | bin | 0 -> 4547 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img022.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15257 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img023.jpg | bin | 0 -> 10474 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img024.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12257 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img025.jpg | bin | 0 -> 14717 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img026.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8108 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img027.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15473 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img028.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30715 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img029.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24515 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img030.jpg | bin | 0 -> 24697 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img031.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21405 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img032.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21680 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img033.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28194 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img034.jpg | bin | 0 -> 4954 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img035.jpg | bin | 0 -> 7927 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img036.jpg | bin | 0 -> 6610 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img037.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8149 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img038.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3107 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img039.jpg | bin | 0 -> 9684 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img040.jpg | bin | 0 -> 10256 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img041.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12256 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img042.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11016 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img043.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20773 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img044.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27837 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img045.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27985 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img046.jpg | bin | 0 -> 7651 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img047.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11026 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img048.jpg | bin | 0 -> 5921 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img049.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18587 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img050.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11826 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img051.jpg | bin | 0 -> 10831 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img052.jpg | bin | 0 -> 11581 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img053.jpg | bin | 0 -> 14675 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img054.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18090 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img055.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15818 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img056.jpg | bin | 0 -> 12003 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img057.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42461 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img058.jpg | bin | 0 -> 20479 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img059.jpg | bin | 0 -> 56594 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img060.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42537 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img061.jpg | bin | 0 -> 26711 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img062.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27713 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img063.jpg | bin | 0 -> 22921 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img064.jpg | bin | 0 -> 4831 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img065.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3617 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img066.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2128 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img067.jpg | bin | 0 -> 638 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img068.jpg | bin | 0 -> 23495 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img069.jpg | bin | 0 -> 6143 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img070.jpg | bin | 0 -> 432237 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img070tb.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40339 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img071.jpg | bin | 0 -> 51415 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img072.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50467 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img073.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28879 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img074.jpg | bin | 0 -> 54356 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img075.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32971 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img076.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53205 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img077.jpg | bin | 0 -> 25061 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img078.jpg | bin | 0 -> 36084 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img079.jpg | bin | 0 -> 13938 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img080.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8001 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img081.jpg | bin | 0 -> 27240 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/img082.jpg | bin | 0 -> 28160 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1873 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2343 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2314 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab004.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1932 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2394 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab006.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2934 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab007.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2579 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab008.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2372 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab009.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2269 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab010.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2099 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab011.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1471 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab012.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1508 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab013.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2790 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab014.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2662 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab015.jpg | bin | 0 -> 3300 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab016.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1039 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab017.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1026 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab018.jpg | bin | 0 -> 958 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab019.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1198 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab020.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1588 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab021.jpg | bin | 0 -> 486 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab022.jpg | bin | 0 -> 523 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab023.jpg | bin | 0 -> 771 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab024.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1197 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab025.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1125 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab026.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1293 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab027.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1770 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab028.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1250 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab029.jpg | bin | 0 -> 723 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab030.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2636 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139-h/images/tab031.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2634 bytes |
115 files changed, 20489 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/35139-h/35139-h.htm b/35139-h/35139-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5503be --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/35139-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,20489 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html lang="en"> + +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<title>The Project Gutenberg e-Book of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates +of Cavalry of the Army of the United States; Author: War Department.</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- + +body {font-size: 1em; text-align: justify; margin-left: 8%; margin-right: 8%;} + +h1 {font-size: 115%; text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; line-height: 1.5em;} +h2 {font-size: 110%; text-align: center; margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 2em; line-height: 1.8em;} +h3 {font-size: 105%; text-align: center; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} + +a:focus, a:active { outline:#ffee66 solid 2px; background-color:#ffee66;} +a:focus img, a:active img {outline: #ffee66 solid 2px; } + +sup {line-height: 0em;} +sub {line-height: 0em;} + +p.tn {margin-left: 10%; width: 80%; text-indent: 0em;} + +ul.toc {list-style-type: none;} +ul.none {list-style-type: none;} +ul.index {list-style-type: none; margin-left: 5em;} +ol.none {list-style-type: none;} +li.nomarge {margin-top: -1em;} + +table {border-collapse: collapse; table-layout: fixed; + width: 90%; margin-left: 5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} + +.p2 {margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +.p4 {margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 1em;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 95%;} +.smaller {font-size: smaller;} + +.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} +.right {text-align: right;} +.right10 {text-align: right; margin-right: 10%;} +.right15 {text-align: right; margin-right: 15%;} +.right05em {text-align: right; padding-right: 0.5em;} +.right1em {text-align: right; padding-right: 1.2em;} +.right15em {text-align: right; padding-right: 1.4em;} +.ralign10 {position: absolute; right: 10%; top: auto;} +.valign {vertical-align: bottom;} + +.add1em {margin-left: 1em;} +.add2em {margin-left: 2em;} +.add3em {margin-left: 3em;} +.add5em {margin-left: 5em;} +.min2em {margin-left: -2em;} +.lspaced2em {letter-spacing: 2em;} +.thick {font-size: 120%; font-weight: bold;} + +.bot0 {margin-bottom: 0em;} +.top0 {margin-top: 0em;} +.bordt {border-color: black; border-top: solid; border-width: 1px;} +.bordb {border-color: black; border-bottom: solid; border-width: 1px;} +.bordr {border-color: black; border-right: solid; border-width: 1px;} +.bordl {border-color: black; border-left: solid; border-width: 1px;} + +.title {text-align: center; font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 95%; text-indent: 0em;} +.quote {margin-left: 5%; font-size: 95%; margin-bottom: 1.5em;} +.toc {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + +.pagenum {visibility: hidden; + position: absolute; right:0; text-align: right; + font-size: 10px; + font-weight: normal; font-variant: normal; + font-style: normal; letter-spacing: normal; + color: #C0C0C0; background-color: inherit;} + +.figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} +.figcenter p {text-indent: 0em;} +.floatright {float: right; clear: right; text-align: center; + padding: 5px; margin: 0 0 0 7px;} +.floatright p {text-indent: 0em;} +.floatleft {float: left; clear: left; text-align: center; + padding: 5px; margin: 0 7px 0 0;} +.floatleft p {text-indent: 0em;} +.nofloat {clear: both;} + +--> +</style> + +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and +Privates of Cavalry of the Army of the United States 1917 +to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for Cavalry Instruction +and Training, by U. S. War Department + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of Cavalry of the Army +of the United States 1917 to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for +Cavalry Instruction and Training + +Author: U. S. War Department + +Release Date: February 1, 2011 [EBook #35139] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED *** + + + + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<p class="p4 center">WAR DEPARTMENT</p> + +<h1>MANUAL<br> +<span class="smaller">FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND<br> + PRIVATES OF</span><br> + CAVALRY<br> +<span class="smaller">OF THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES</span></h1> + +<p class="p2 center">1917</p> + +<p class="p2 center">TO BE ALSO USED BY ENGINEER COMPANIES<br> + (MOUNTED) FOR CAVALRY INSTRUCTION<br> + AND TRAINING</p> + +<a id="img001" name="img001"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img001.jpg" width="200" height="201" alt="" title="U. S. A. War Office"> +</div> + +<p class="p2 center">WASHINGTON<br> + GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE<br> + 1917</p> + +<p class="p4 center"><span class="smcap">War Department</span>,<br> + Document No. 620.<br> + <i>Office of The Adjutant General.</i></p> + +<p class="p4 center">ADDITIONAL COPIES<br> + OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE PROCURED FROM<br> + THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS<br> + GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE<br> + WASHINGTON, D. C.<br> + AT<br> + 50 CENTS PER COPY</p> + +<p class="p4 right15 bot0">WAR DEPARTMENT,</p> +<p class="right10 top0"><span class="smcap">Washington</span>, <i>June 28, 1917</i>.</p> + +<p class="bot0">The following Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of +Cavalry is published for the information and guidance of all +concerned.</p> + +<p class="top0">[2582824 C.—A. G. O.]</p> + +<p class="smcap">By order of the Secretary of War:</p> + +<p class="right15 bot0">TASKER H. BLISS,</p> +<p class="right top0 bot0"><i>Major General, Acting Chief of Staff</i>.</p> + +<p class="smcap top0 bot0">Official:</p> +<p class="add2em smcap bot0 top0">H. P. McCain,</p> +<p class="add3em top0"><i>The Adjutant General</i>.</p> + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page005" name="page005"></a>(p. 005)</span> TABLE OF CONTENTS.</h2> + +<ul class="toc"> +<li> <span class="ralign10">Page.</span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter I. Military discipline and courtesy</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page009">9</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Oath of enlistment +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page009">9</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Obedience +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page009">9</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Loyalty +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page011">11</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Discipline +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page011">11</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. Military courtesy +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page013">13</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. Saluting +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page013">13</a></span></li> +<li>Section 7. Rules governing saluting +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page015">15</a></span></li> +<li>Section 8. Courtesies in conversation +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page018">18</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter II. Arms, uniforms, and equipment</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page020">20</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. The rifle +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page020">20</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Care of the rifle +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page021">21</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Cleaning the rifle +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page023">23</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Uniforms +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page027">27</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. The service kit +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page030">30</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. The surplus kit +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page032">32</a></span></li> +<li>Section 7. Assembling equipment +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page033">33</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter III. Rations and forage</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page036">36</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. The ration +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page036">36</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Individual cooking +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page037">37</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. The forage ration +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page041">41</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter IV. Personal hygiene and care of the feet </span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page043">43</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter V. Extracts from Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page050">50</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Definitions +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page050">50</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. General provisions, individual instruction +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page054">54</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page057">57</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. School of the trooper, mounted +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page112">112</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. General provisions, elementary collective instruction +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page134">134</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. Basic principles of the drill +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page134">134</a></span></li> +<li><span class="pagenum"><a id="page006" name="page006"></a>(p. 006)</span> Section 7. The school of the squad +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page139">139</a></span></li> +<li>Section 8. Tent pitching +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page176">176</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter VI. Field service</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page180">180</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Principles of training +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page180">180</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Combat +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page181">181</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Patrolling +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page199">199</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Advance guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page210">210</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. Rear guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page212">212</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. Flank guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page213">213</a></span></li> +<li>Section 7. Outposts +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page213">213</a></span></li> +<li>Section 8. Rifle trenches +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page219">219</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter VII. Marching and camping</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page223">223</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page223">223</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Marches, camps +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page225">225</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter VIII. Target practice</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page233">233</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Preliminary training and marksmanship +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page233">233</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Sight adjustment +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page233">233</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Table of sight corrections +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page235">235</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Aiming +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page235">235</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. Battle sight +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page236">236</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. Trigger squeeze +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page237">237</a></span></li> +<li>Section 7. Firing positions +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page238">238</a></span></li> +<li>Section 8. Calling the shot +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page240">240</a></span></li> +<li>Section 9. Coordination +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page241">241</a></span></li> +<li>Section 10. Advice to riflemen +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page241">241</a></span></li> +<li>Section 11. The course in small-arms firing +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page243">243</a></span></li> +<li>Section 12. Targets +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page244">244</a></span></li> +<li>Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page245">245</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter IX. Extracts from Manual of Interior Guard Duty</span>, 1914 +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page254">254</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Introduction +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page254">254</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Classification of interior guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page255">255</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Details and rosters +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page255">255</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Commander of the guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page258">258</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. Sergeant of the guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page263">263</a></span></li> +<li>Section 6. Corporal of the guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page266">266</a></span></li> +<li>Section 7. Musicians of the guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page271">271</a></span></li> +<li><span class="pagenum"><a id="page007" name="page007"></a>(p. 007)</span> Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page271">271</a></span></li> +<li>Section 9. Privates of the guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page273">273</a></span></li> +<li>Section 10. Orders for sentinels +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page273">273</a></span></li> +<li>Section 11. Countersigns and paroles +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page282">282</a></span></li> +<li>Section 12. Guard patrols +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page283">283</a></span></li> +<li>Section 13. Watchmen +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page283">283</a></span></li> +<li>Section 14. Compliments from guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page284">284</a></span></li> +<li>Section 15. Prisoners +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page286">286</a></span></li> +<li>Section 16. Guarding prisoners +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page289">289</a></span></li> +<li>Section 17. Stable guards +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page292">292</a></span></li> +<li>Section 18. Flags +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page296">296</a></span></li> +<li>Section 19. Reveille and retreat gun +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page298">298</a></span></li> +<li>Section 20. Guard mounting +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page298">298</a></span></li> +<li>Section 21. Relieving the old guard +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page306">306</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter X. Map reading and sketching</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page309">309</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. Military map reading +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page309">309</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. Sketching +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page322">322</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter XI. Message blanks</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page325">325</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter XII. Signals and codes</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page326">326</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter XIII. First-aid rules</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page338">338</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter XIV. Laws and regulations</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page350">350</a></span></li> +<li>Section 1. General provisions +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page350">350</a></span></li> +<li>Section 2. The Army of the United States +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page351">351</a></span></li> +<li>Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned officers +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page351">351</a></span></li> +<li>Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page353">353</a></span></li> +<li>Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page353">353</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Chapter XV. English-French vocabulary</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page371">371</a></span></li> + +<li class="min2em"><span class="smcap">Appendix. Form for last will and testament</span> +<span class="ralign10"><a href="#page389">389</a></span></li> +</ul> + +<h1 class="4"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page009" name="page009"></a>(p. 009)</span> MANUAL<br> +FOR<br> +NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES Of CAVALRY<br> +OF THE<br> +ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES.</h1> + +<h2>CHAPTER I.<br> +MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.</h2> + +<h3>Section 1. Oath of enlistment.</h3> + +<p>Every soldier on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself the +following obligation:</p> + +<p>"I, ——, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true faith +and allegiance to the United States of America; that I will serve them +honestly and faithfully against all-their enemies whomsoever; and that +I will obey the orders of the President of the United States, and the +orders of the officers appointed over me according to the Rules and +Articles of War." (109th Article of War.)</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Obedience.</h3> + +<p>The very first paragraph in the Army Regulations reads:</p> + +<p>"All persons in the military service are required to <b>obey strictly</b> and +to <b>execute promptly</b> the lawful orders of their superiors."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page010" name="page010"></a>(p. 010)</span> Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the +foundation upon which all military efficiency is built. Without it an +army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a mob and becomes +possessed of much of the power of an organized force. It is a quality +that is demanded of every person in the Army from the highest to the +lowest. Each enlisted man binds himself, by his enlistment oath, to +obedience. Each officer, in accepting his commission, must take upon +himself the same solemn obligation.</p> + +<p>Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawful orders of your +superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving the order, +whether he be an officer, a noncommissioned officer, or a private +acting as such, is your lawful superior. You may not like him, you may +not respect him, but you must respect his position and authority, and +reflect honor and credit upon yourself and your profession by yielding +to all superiors that complete and unhesitating obedience which is the +pleasure as well as the duty of every true soldier.</p> + +<p>Orders must be strictly carried out. It is not sufficient to comply +with only that part which suits you or which involves no work or +danger or hardship. Nor is it proper or permissible, when you are +ordered to do a thing in a certain way or to accomplish a work in a +definitely prescribed manner, for you to obtain the same results by +other methods.</p> + +<p>Obedience must be <b>prompt and unquestioning</b>. When any soldier (and this +word includes officers as well as enlisted men) receives an order, it +is not for him to consider whether the order is a good one or not, +whether it would have been better had such an order never been given, +or whether the duty might be better performed by some one else, or at +some other time, or in some other manner. His duty is, first, to +understand just what the order requires, and, second, to proceed at +once to carry out the order to the best of his ability.</p> + +<p>"Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certain +independence in the execution of the tasks to which they are assigned +and are expected to show initiative in meeting the different +situations as they arise. Every individual, from the highest commander +to the lowest private, must always remember that inaction and neglect +of opportunities will warrant more severe censure than an error in the +choice of the means." (<i>Preface, Field Service Regulations.</i>).</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page011" name="page011"></a>(p. 011)</span> Section 3. Loyalty.</h3> + +<p>But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to measure up to +that high standard of duty which is at once the pride and glory of +every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires and wishes of +your superiors in a hearty, willing, and cheerful manner are you +meeting all the requirements of your profession. For an order is but +the will of your superior, however it may be expressed. Loyalty means +that you are for your organization and its officers and +noncommissioned officers—not against them; that you always extend +your most earnest and hearty support to those in authority. No soldier +is a loyal soldier who is a knocker or a grumbler or a shirker. Just +one man of this class in a troop breeds discontent and dissatisfaction +among many others. You should, therefore, not only guard against doing +such things yourself but should discourage such actions among any of +your comrades.</p> + + +<h3>Section 4. Discipline.</h3> + +<p>"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey strictly +and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their superiors.</p> + +<p>"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kindness, and +justice. Punishments must conform to law and follow offenses as +promptly as circumstances will permit.</p> + +<p>"3. Superiors are forbidden to injure those under their authority by +tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive language. While +maintaining discipline and the thorough and prompt performance of +military duty, all officers, in dealing with enlisted men, will bear +in mind the absolute necessity of so treating them as to preserve +their self-respect. Officers will keep in as close touch as possible +with the men under their command and will strive to build up such +relations of confidence and sympathy as will insure the free approach +of their men to them for counsel and assistance. This relationship may +be gained and maintained without relaxation of the bonds of discipline +and with great benefit to the service as a whole.</p> + +<p>"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect +to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be +extended on all occasions.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page012" name="page012"></a>(p. 012)</span> "5. Deliberations or discussions among military men, +conveying praise or censure, or any mark of approbation, toward others +in the military service, and all publications relating to private or +personal transactions between officers are prohibited. Efforts to +influence legislation affecting the Army or to procure personal favor +or consideration should never be made except through regular military +channels; the adoption of any other method by any officer or enlisted +man will be noted in the military record of those concerned." (<i>Army +Regulations.</i>)</p> + +<p>"The discipline which makes the soldier of a free country reliable in +battle is not to be gained by harsh or tyrannical treatment. On the +contrary, such treatment is far more likely to destroy than to make an +army. It is possible to impart instruction and give commands in such +manner and in such tone of voice as to inspire in the soldier no +feeling but an intense desire to obey, while the opposite manner and +tone of voice can not fail to excite strong resentment and a desire to +disobey. The one mode or the other of dealing with subordinates +springs from a corresponding spirit in the breast of the commander. He +who feels the respect which is due to others can not fail to inspire +in them regard for himself, while he who feels, and hence manifests, +disrespect toward others, especially his inferiors, can not fail to +inspire hatred against himself." (<i>Address of Maj. Gen. John M. +Schofield to the United States Corps of Cadets, Aug. 11, 1879.</i>)</p> + +<p>When, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have learned your +duties, and obedience becomes second nature, you have acquired +discipline. It can not be acquired in a day nor a month. It is a +growth. It is the habit of obedience. To teach this habit of obedience +is the main object of the close-order drill, and, if good results are +to be expected, the greatest attention must be paid to even the +smallest details. The troop, platoon, or squad must be formed promptly +at the prescribed time—not a minute or even a second late. All must +wear the exact uniform prescribed and in the exact manner prescribed. +When at attention there must be no gazing about, no raising of hands, +no chewing or spitting in ranks. The manual of the rifle, the pistol, +the saber, and all movements must be executed absolutely as +prescribed. A drill of this kind <span class="pagenum"><a id="page013" name="page013"></a>(p. 013)</span> teaches discipline. A +careless, sloppy drill breeds disobedience and insubordination. In +other words, discipline simply means efficiency.</p> + + +<h3>Section 5. Military courtesy.</h3> + +<p>In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good breeding are +always respectful and courteous to those about them. It helps to make +life move along more smoothly. In civil life this courtesy is shown by +the custom of tipping the hat to ladies, shaking hands with friends, +and greeting persons with a nod or a friendly "Good morning," etc.</p> + +<p>In the Army courtesy is just as necessary, and for the same reasons. +It helps to keep the great machine moving without friction.</p> + +<p>"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect +to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be +extended on all occasions." (<i>Par. 4, Army Regulations, 1913.</i>)</p> + +<p>One method of extending this courtesy is by saluting. When in ranks +the question of what a private should do is simple—he obeys any +command that is given. It is when out of ranks that a private must +know how and when to salute.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. Saluting.</h3> + +<p>In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed to carry +weapons, and when they met each would hold up his right hand to show +that he had no weapon in it and that they met as friends. Slaves or +serfs, however, were not allowed to carry weapons, and slunk past the +free men without making any sign. In this way the salute came to be +the symbol or sign by which soldiers (free men) might recognize each +other. The lower classes began to imitate the soldiers in this +respect, although in a clumsy, apologetic way, and thence crept into +civil life the custom of raising the hand or nodding as one passed an +acquaintance. The soldiers, however, kept their individual salute, and +purposely made it intricate and difficult to learn in order that it +could be acquired only by the constant training all real soldiers +received. To this day armies have preserved their salute, and when +correctly done it is at once recognized and <span class="pagenum"><a id="page014" name="page014"></a>(p. 014)</span> never mistaken +for that of the civilian. All soldiers should be careful to execute +the salute exactly as prescribed. The civilian or the imitation +soldier who tries to imitate the military salute, invariably makes +some mistake which shows that he is not a real soldier; he gives it in +an apologetic manner, he fails to stand or march at attention, his +coat is unbuttoned or hat on awry, or he fails to look the person +saluted in the eye. There is a wide difference in the method of +rendering and meaning between the civilian salute as used by friends +in passing, or by servants to their employers, and the MILITARY +SALUTE, the symbol and sign of the military profession.</p> + +<p><b>To salute with the hand</b>, first assume the position of a soldier or +march at attention. Look the officer you are to salute straight in the +eye. Then, when the proper distance separates you, raise the right +hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches the lower part of +the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45°, +hand and wrist straight. Continue to look the officer you are saluting +straight in the eye and keep your hand in the position of salute until +the officer acknowledges the salute or until he has passed. Then drop +the hand smartly to the side. The salute is given with the right hand +only.</p> + +<p><b>To salute with the rifle</b>, bring the rifle to right shoulder arms if +not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the +stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, forefinger touching the end of the cocking piece. +Look the officer saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged +the salute or has passed, drop the left hand smartly to the side and +turn the head and eyes to the front. The rifle salute may also be +executed from the order or trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill +Regulations, and paragraph 111, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.</p> + +<p><b>To salute with the pistol when drawn</b>, assume the position of <b>Raise +Pistol</b>, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last +three fingers, forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and +inclined to the front at an angle of 30°, hand as high as the neck and +6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder. The pistol is +carried in the holster, except when about to be used. It will not be +drawn for the purpose <span class="pagenum"><a id="page015" name="page015"></a>(p. 015)</span> of saluting. When armed only with the +pistol in the holster, salute with the hand.</p> + +<p><b>To salute with the saber</b>, bring the saber to carry saber if not +already there, carry the saber to the front with arm half extended +until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the blade +vertical, guard to the left, all four fingers grasping the grip, the +thumb extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the +back of the grip against the heel of the hand. Look the officer +saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged the salute or +has passed, bring the saber down with the blade against the hollow of +the right shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the +third and fourth fingers on the back of the grip and the elbow back.</p> + +<p>Always stand or march at attention before and during the salute. The +hat should be on straight, coat completely buttoned up, and hands out +of the pockets.</p> + + +<h3>Section 7. Rules governing saluting.</h3> + +<p><b>912.</b> (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted men +not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, on +every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the +officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first.</p> + +<p>(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted men +the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when all +rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer +leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop +eating and remain seated at attention.</p> + +<p>(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, +faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing, he faces +an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same +place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated. +Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer +unless addressed by him.</p> + +<p>(4) Before addressing an officer an enlisted man makes the prescribed +salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or if unarmed, with the +right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page016" name="page016"></a>(p. 016)</span> <b>913.</b> (1) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in +formation, officers and enlisted men, salute military persons as +follows: With arms in hand, the salute prescribed for that arm +(sentinels on interior guard duty excepted); without arms, the +right-hand salute.</p> + +<p>(2) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men +salute military persons with the right-hand salute.</p> + +<p>(3) Officers and enlisted men will, render the prescribed salutes in a +military manner, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted men +saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted all +entitled to the salute shall return it.</p> + +<p>(4) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign +conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing +a superior officer not mounted.</p> + +<p>(5) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but +shall come to attention if at rest or at ease.</p> + +<p><b>914.</b> (1) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. +In general, it does not exceed 30 paces.</p> + +<p>(2) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body of +troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of +the commander.</p> + +<p><b>915.</b> In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars, +and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes +may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy +civilians present.</p> + +<p><b>925.</b> Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same +compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and +Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of +their own regiment, corps, or arm of service.</p> + +<p><b>918.</b> Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the +foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with +the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper +performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as +prescribed in drill regulations.</p> + +<p><b>919.</b> (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute +officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit by first +bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by +subparagraph (1), paragraph 913. If the person saluted is of a junior +or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of +salutes.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page017" name="page017"></a>(p. 017)</span> (2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their +commanders will exchange salutes, both commands being at attention.</p> + +<p><b>920.</b> Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually +engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or +simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay +no compliments whatever.</p> + +<p><b>921.</b> If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and armed +with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to <b>present +arms</b> or <b>present saber</b> before its commander salutes in the following +cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when <b>to the color</b> or <b>to +the standard</b> is sounded during ceremonies, or when a person is saluted +who is its immediate or higher commander or a general officer, or when +the national or regimental color is saluted.</p> + +<p><b>922.</b> At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall +render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of +salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and +during ceremonies when to the color is played, if no band is present. +If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to attention at +the first note of the National Anthem, <b>to the color</b> or <b>to the +standard</b>, and the salute rendered by the officer or noncommissioned +officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as amended herein.</p> + +<p><b>910.</b> Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when persons +belonging to the military service are present, all officers and +enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing toward +the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the flag). +If in uniform, covered, they shall salute at the first note of the +anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of the +anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the first +note of the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder +and so remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the +headdress may be slightly raised.</p> + +<p>The same rules apply when <b>to the color</b> or <b>to the standard</b> is sounded +as when the National Anthem is played.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page018" name="page018"></a>(p. 018)</span> When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be +played through without repetition of any part not required to be +repeated to make it complete.</p> + +<p>The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing +of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the +national anthem of any other country when played upon official +occasions.</p> + +<p><b>917.</b> Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render +honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by +subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered, +they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder +with the right hand; if uncovered, they will salute with the +right-hand salute.</p> + +<p>The national flag belonging to dismounted organizations is called a +color; to mounted organizations, a standard. An uncased color is one +that is not in its waterproof cover.</p> + +<p>Privates do not salute noncommissioned officers. <b>Prisoners are not +permitted to salute;</b> they merely come to attention if not actually at +work. The playing of the National Anthem as a part of a medley is +prohibited in the military service.</p> + + +<h3>Section 8. Courtesies in conversation.</h3> + +<p>In speaking to an officer, always stand at attention and use the word +"Sir." Examples:</p> + +<p>"Sir, Private Brown, Company B, reports as orderly."</p> + +<p>"Sir, the first sergeant directed me to report to the captain."</p> + +<p>(Question by an officer:) "To what company do you belong?"</p> + +<p>(Answer:) "Company H, sir."</p> + +<p>(Question by an officer:) "Has first call for drill sounded?"</p> + +<p>(Answer:) "No, sir;" or "Yes, sir; it sounded about five minutes ago."</p> + +<p>(Question by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where Major +Smith's tent is?"</p> + +<p>(Answer:) "Yes, sir; I'll take you to it."</p> + +<p>Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples:</p> + +<p>"Does the Lieutenant wish," etc.</p> + +<p>"Did the Captain send for me?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page019" name="page019"></a>(p. 019)</span> In delivering a message from one officer to another, always +use the form similar to the following: "Lieutenant A presents, his +compliments to Captain B and states," etc. This form is not used when +the person sending or receiving the message is an enlisted man.</p> + +<p>In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their titles, +thus: Sergeant B, Private C.</p> + +<p><b>909.</b> In rendering personal honors, when the command <i>present arms</i>, +officers and men in uniform who are not in formation and are in view +and within saluting distance shall salute and shall remain in the +position of salute until the end of the ruffles and flourishes, or, if +none, until <i>order arms</i>. (<i>Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.</i>)</p> + +<p>This extract covers the conduct of officers and soldiers who may be in +the vicinity of troops rendering honors to the President or other +persons entitled to personal salutes.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page020" name="page020"></a>(p. 020)</span> CHAPTER II.<br> + +ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. The rifle.</h3> + +<p>The rifle now used by the Army of the United States is the United +States magazine rifle, model of 1903, caliber .30.</p> + +<p>It is 43.212 inches long and weighs 8.69 pounds.</p> + +<p>The bayonet weighs 1 pound and the blade is 16 inches long.</p> + +<p>The rifle is sighted for ranges up to 2,850 yards.</p> + +<p>The maximum range, when elevated at an angle of 45 degrees, is 4,891 +yards (389 yards less than 3 miles).</p> + +<p>The smooth bore of the rifle is 0.30 inch in diameter. It is then +rifled 0.004 inch deep, making the diameter from the bottom of one +groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308 inch. The rifling +makes one complete turn in each 10 inches of the barrel.</p> + +<p>The accompanying plate shows the names of the principal parts of the +rifle.</p> + +<p>The only parts of a rifle that an enlisted man is permitted to take +apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine mechanism. Learn how to +do this from your squad leader, for you must know how in order to keep +your rifle clean. Never remove the hand guard or the trigger guard, +nor take the sights apart unless you have special permission from a +commissioned officer.</p> + +<p>The cartridge used for the rifle is called the .30-caliber model 1906 +cartridge. There are four types of cartridges.</p> + +<p><b>The ball cartridge</b> consists of the brass case or shell, the primer, +the charge of smokeless powder, and the bullet. The bullet has a sharp +point, is composed of a lead core and a jacket of cupro nickel, and +weighs 150 grains. The bullet of this cartridge, when fired from the +rifle, starts with an initial velocity at the muzzle of 2,700 feet +per second.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page021" name="page021"></a>(p. 021)</span> <b>The blank cartridge</b> contains a paper cup instead of a bullet. +It it dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing blank cartridges at a +represented enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited.</p> + +<p><b>The guard cartridge</b> has a smaller charge of powder than the ball +cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the body of the shell at about +the middle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. It is intended +for use on guard or in riot duty, and gives good results up to 200 +yards. The range of 100 yards requires a sight elevation of 450 yards, +and the range of 200 yards requires an elevation of 650 yards.</p> + +<p><b>The dummy cartridge</b> is tin plated and the shell is provided with six +longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes. The primer +contains no percussion composition. It is intended for drill purposes +to accustom the soldier to the operation of loading the rifle.</p> + +<p>All cartridges are secured five in a clip to enable five cartridges to +be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Sixty ball cartridges in +12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to facilitate issue and +carrying. When full the bandoleer weighs about 3.88 pounds. Bandoleers +are packed 20 in a box, or 1,200 rounds in all. The full box weighs 99 +pounds.</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Care of the rifle.</h3> + +<p>Every part of the rifle must be kept free from rust, dust, and dirt. A +dirty or rusty rifle is a sure sign that the soldier does not realize +the value of his weapon, and that his training is incomplete. The +rifle you are armed with is the most accurate in the world. If it gets +dirty or rusty it will deteriorate in its accuracy and working +efficiency, and no subsequent care will restore it to its original +condition. <b>The most important part of the rifle to keep clean is the +bore.</b> If, after firing, the bore is left dirty over night, it will be +badly rusted in the morning; therefore your rifle must be cleaned not +later than the evening of the day on which it was fired. The fouling +of the blank cartridge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling of +the ball cartridge.</p> + +<p>Never attempt to polish any part that is blued. If rust appears, +remove by rubbing with oil. Never use emery paper, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page022" name="page022"></a>(p. 022)</span> pomade, +or any preparation that cuts or scratches, to clean any part of the +rifle.</p> + +<p>To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed, oil. The use +of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden.</p> + +<p>Always handle your rifle with care. Don't throw it around as though it +were a club. Don't stand it up against anything so that it rests +against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper or a rag in the bore; +it will cause rust to form at that point. It may also cause the gun +barrel to burst if a shot is fired before removing it.</p> + +<p>Guard the sights and muzzle carefully from any blow that might injure +them. The front sight cover should always be on the rifle except when +rifle is being fired. This is especially necessary to protect the +front sight while rifle is being carried in scabbard by a mounted man.</p> + +<p>In coming to the "order arms," lower the piece <b>gently</b> to the ground.</p> + +<p>When there is a cartridge in the chamber the piece is always carried +locked. In this position the safety lock should be kept turned fully +to the right, since if it be turned to the left nearly to the "ready" +position and the trigger be pulled, the rifle will be discharged when +the safety lock is turned to the "ready" position at any time later +on.</p> + +<p>Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the bolt is +drawn fully to the rear. When the bolt is closed, or only partly open, +the cut-off may be turned up or down as desired, but if the bolt is +drawn fully to the rear, the magazine can not be cut off unless the +top cartridge or the follower be pressed down slightly and the bolt +pushed forward so that the cut-off may be turned "off."</p> + +<p>In the case of a misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as it may +be a hangfire. Misfires are often due to the fact that the bolt handle +was not fully pressed down. Sometimes in pulling the trigger the +soldier raises the bolt handle without knowing it.</p> + +<p>Unless otherwise ordered, arms will be unloaded before being taken to +quarters or tents, or as soon as the men using them are relieved from +duty.</p> + +<p><b>Keep the working parts oiled.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page023" name="page023"></a>(p. 023)</span> In every troop there should be at least one copy of the +Manual of the Ordnance Department entitled "Description and Rules for +the Management of the U. S. Magazine Rifle." This manual gives the +name and a cut of every part of the rifle, explains its use, shows how +to take the rifle apart and care for the same, and also gives much +other valuable and interesting information.</p> + + +<h3>Section 3. Cleaning the rifle.</h3> + +<p>"<b>Cleaning the rifle.</b>—(<i>a</i>) The proper care of the bore requires +conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the attainment of +reduced labor of cleaning, prolonged accuracy life of the barrel, and +better results in target practice. Briefly stated, the care of the +bore consists in removing the fouling, resulting from firing, to +obtain a chemically clean surface, and in coating this surface with a +film of oil to prevent rusting. The fouling which results from firing +is of two kinds—one, the products of combustion of the powder; the +other, cupro-nickel scraped off (under the abrading action of +irregularities or grit in the bore). Powder fouling, because of its +acid reaction, is highly corrosive; that is, it will induce rust and +must be removed. Metal fouling of itself is inactive, but may cover +powder fouling and prevent the action of cleaning agents until +removed, and when accumulated in noticeable quantities it reduces the +accuracy of the rifle.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing with hot soda +solution, but this solution has no effect on the metal fouling of +cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore, to remove all metal fouling +before assurance can be had that all powder fouling has been removed +and that the bore may be safely oiled. Normally, after firing a barrel +in good condition the metal fouling is so slight as to be hardly +perceptible. It is merely a smear of infinitesimal thickness, easily +removed by solvents of cupro-nickel. However, due to pitting, the +presence of dust, other abrasives, or to accumulation, metal fouling +may occur in clearly visible flakes or patches of much greater +thickness, much more difficult to remove.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) In cleaning the bore after firing it is well to proceed as +follows: Swab out the bore with soda solution (subparagraph <a href="#subparj"><i>j</i></a>) to +remove powder fouling. A convenient method is to insert the muzzle of +the rifle into the can containing the soda solution <span class="pagenum"><a id="page024" name="page024"></a>(p. 024)</span> and, with +the cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the barrel full a few +times. Remove and dry with a couple of patches. Examine the bore to +see that there are in evidence no patches of metal fouling which, if +present, can be readily detected by the naked eye, then swab out with +the swabbing solution—a dilute metal-fouling solution (subparagraph +<a href="#subparj"><i>j</i></a>). The amount of swabbing required with the swabbing solution can +be determined only by experience, assisted by the color of the +patches. Swabbing should be continued, however, as long as the wiping +patch is discolored by a bluish-green stain. Normally a couple of +minutes' work is sufficient. Dry thoroughly and oil.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows; Wipe the +cleaning rod dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly saturate it with +sperm oil or warmed cosmic, being sure that the cosmic has penetrated +the patch; scrub the bore with the patch, finally drawing the patch +smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing the cleaning rod to +turn with the rifling. The bore will be found now to be smooth and +bright so that any subsequent rust and sweating can be easily detected +by inspection.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) If patches of metal fouling are seen upon visual inspection of +the bore the standard metal fouling solution prepared as hereinafter +prescribed must be used. After scrubbing out with the soda solution, +plug the bore from the breech with a cork at the front end of the +chamber or where the rifling begins. Slip a 2-inch section of rubber +hose over the muzzle down to the sight and fill with the standard +solution to at least one-half inch above the muzzle of the barrel. Let +it stand for 30 minutes, pour out the standard solution, remove hose +and breech plug, and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to +neutralize and remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling. Wipe +the barrel clean, dry, and oil. With few exceptions, one application +is sufficient, but if all fouling is not removed, as determined by +careful visual inspection of the bore and of the wiping patches, +repeat as described above.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution or the +standard solution, as has just been described, the bore should be +clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure of safety a patch +should always be run through the bore on the next day and the bore +and wiping patch examined <span class="pagenum"><a id="page025" name="page025"></a>(p. 025)</span> to insure that cleaning has been +properly accomplished. The bore should then be oiled, as described +above.</p> + +<p>(<i>g</i>) If the swabbing solution or the standard metal-fouling solution +is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as already described, +with the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light oil. At the end +of 24 hours it should again be cleaned, when it will usually be found +to have "sweated"; that is, rust having formed under the smear of +metal fouling where powder fouling was present, the surface is puffed +up. Usually a second cleaning is sufficient, but to insure safety it +should be again examined at the end of a few days, before final +oiling. The swabbing solution should always be used, if available, for +it must be remembered that each puff when the bore "sweats" is an +incipient rust pit.</p> + +<p>(<i>h</i>) A. clean dry surface having been obtained, to prevent rust it is +necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a film of neutral +oil. If the protection required is but temporary and the arm is to be +cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil may be used. This is easily +applied and easily removed, but has not sufficient body to hold its +surface for more than a few days. If rifles are to be prepared for +storage or shipment, a heavier oil, such as cosmic, must be used.</p> + +<p>(<i>i</i>) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be cleaned +with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution as described +above. Care should be taken, insured by careful inspection on +succeeding day or days, that the cleaning is properly done and all +traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore is then ready to be +coated with cosmic. At ordinary temperatures cosmic is not fluid. In +order, therefore, to insure that every part of the surface is coated +with a film of oil the cosmic should be warmed. Apply the cosmic first +with a brush; then, with the breech plugged, fill the barrel to the +muzzle, pour out the surplus, remove the breechblock, and allow to +drain. It is believed that more rifles are ruined by improper +preparation for storage than from any other cause. If, the bore is not +clean when oiled—that is, if powder fouling is present or rust has +started—a half inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop its +action, and the barrel will be ruined. Remember that the surface must +be perfectly cleaned before the heavy oil is applied. If the +instructions as given above <span class="pagenum"><a id="page026" name="page026"></a>(p. 026)</span> are carefully followed, arms may +be stored for years without harm.</p> + +<a id="subparj" name="subparj"></a> +<p>(<i>j</i>) Preparation of solutions:</p> + +<p><i>Soda solution.</i>—This should be a saturated solution of sal soda +(bicarbonate of soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent is +necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions is the +model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit.</p> + +<p>Sal soda, one-fourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets.</p> + +<p>The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water.</p> + +<p><i>Swabbing solution.</i>—Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, one-half +spoonful smoothed off.</p> + +<p>Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or 12 +spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the ammonia. +Keep in tightly corked bottle; pour out only what is necessary at the +time, and keep the bottle corked.</p> + +<p><i>Standard metal fouling solution.</i>—Ammonium persulphate, 1 ounce, or +2 medium heaping spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful.</p> + +<p>Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths pint, or 12 +spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls.</p> + +<p>Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in the water +and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to stand for one hour +before using. It should be kept in a strong bottle, tightly corked. +The solution should not be used more than twice, and used solution +should not be mixed with unused solution, but should be bottled +separately. The solution, when mixed, should be used within 30 days. +Care should be exercised in mixing and using this solution to prevent +injury to the rifle. An experienced noncommissioned officer should mix +the solution and superintend its use.</p> + +<p>Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable action on +steel when not exposed to the air, but If allowed to evaporate on +steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, therefore, be taken that +none spills on the mechanism and that the barrel is washed out +promptly with soda solution. The first application of soda solution +removes the greater portion of the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page027" name="page027"></a>(p. 027)</span> powder fouling and permits +a more effective and economical use of the ammonia solution. These +ammonia solutions are expensive and should be used economically.</p> + +<p>(<i>k</i>) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished steel +surface-rusts, much less easily than one which is roughened; also that +a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than one which is +smooth. Every effort, therefore, should be made to prevent the +formation of pits, which are merely enlarged rust spots, and which not +only affect the accuracy of the arm but increase the labor of +cleaning.</p> + +<p>(<i>l</i>) The chambers of rifles are frequently neglected because they are +not readily inspected. Care should be taken to see that they are +cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber delays greatly +the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes shells to stick.</p> + +<p>(<i>m</i>) A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. Rifles +should always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoiding possible +injury to the rifling at the muzzle, which would affect the shotting +adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches at the muzzle is +perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have little effect on +the accuracy of the rifle. The rifle should be cleaned as soon as the +firing for the day is completed. The fouling is easier to remove then, +and if left longer it will corrode the barrel.</p> + +<p>(<i>n</i>) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for the care +of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention should be +paid to cleaning the chamber of the pistol, using the soda solution. +It has been found that the chamber pits readily if it is not carefully +cleaned, with the result that the operation of the pistol is made less +certain." (<i>Par, 134, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913.</i>)</p> + +<h3>Section 4. Uniforms.</h3> + +<p>Uniforms and clothing issued to enlisted men must not be sold, pawned, +loaned, given away, lost, or damaged through neglect or carelessness. +Any soldier who violates this rule may be tried by a military court +and punished.</p> + +<p>All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men, whether +or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain the property of +the United States and do not become the property <span class="pagenum"><a id="page028" name="page028"></a>(p. 028)</span> of the +soldier either before or after discharge from the service. Under the +law a soldier honorably discharged from the Army of the United States +is authorized to wear his uniform from the place of his discharge to +his home within three months after the date of such discharge. To wear +the uniform after three months from the date of such discharge renders +such person liable to fine or imprisonment, or both.</p> + +<p>The <b>dress uniform</b> dismounted (the blue uniform) consists of the dress +cap, dress coat, dress trousers, and russet-leather shoes. The +straight, standing, military, white linen collar, showing no opening +in front, is always worn with this uniform, with not to exceed +one-half inch showing above the collar of the coat. Turndown, +piccadilly, or roll collars are not authorized.</p> + +<p>When under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt are worn. The +dress uniform mounted is the same as dismounted, except that riding +gloves, leggings, and spurs are worn, and the saddle cloth, showing +regimental number and troop letter, is placed over the saddle blanket.</p> + +<p>The <b>full-dress uniform</b> is the same as the dress uniform, with the +breast cord added.</p> + +<p>The <b>service uniform</b> is either cotton (summer) or woolen (winter) olive +drab.</p> + +<p>For duty in the field it consists of the service hat, with cord sewed +on, service coat or sweater, service breeches, olive-drab flannel +shirt, leggings, russet-leather shoes, spurs, riding gloves, and +identification tag. In cold weather olive-drab woolen gloves may be +prescribed.</p> + +<p>In warm weather the coat, sweater, and riding gloves may be omitted +when authorized by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p>When not in the field, the service cap is worn instead of the campaign +hat. Under arms, dismounted, white gloves and the garrison belt (or +russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn.</p> + +<p>Spurs and riding gloves are worn on all mounted duty or when on +mounted pass.</p> + +<p>Wear the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding officer, whether +you are on duty or off duty.</p> + +<p>Never wear a mixed uniform as, for instance, a part of the service +uniform with the blue uniform.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page029" name="page029"></a>(p. 029)</span> Never wear any part of the uniform with civilian clothes. It +is very unsoldierly, for example, to wear a civilian overcoat over the +uniform or to wear the uniform overcoat over a civilian suit.</p> + +<p>Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair.</p> + +<p>Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as possible.</p> + +<p>Rips and tears should be promptly mended. In taking the field always +wear new clothing as it may be some time before you are again +supplied, and old clothing on field service goes to pieces rapidly.</p> + +<p>Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should be promptly +replaced.</p> + +<p>There is but one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap. Never wear +it on the back or side of the head.</p> + +<p>The service hat should be worn in the regulation shape, peaked, with +four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on. Do not cover it with +pen or pencil marks. The chin cord should always be in order and fit +for long field service.</p> + +<p>Never appear outside your room or tent with your coat or olive-drab +shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chevrons, service +stripes, and campaign medals and badges are a part of the uniform and +must be worn as prescribed.</p> + +<p>When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-drab shirts are +prescribed.</p> + +<p>Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view.</p> + +<p>Never appear in breeches without leggings.</p> + +<p>Leather leggings should be kept clean. Saddle soap should be used to +clean <i>all leather</i>. Should the shoes, leggings, or leather equipment +be soaked by rain or swimming they will not become hard if covered +with a light coat of neat's-foot oil applied just before they dry out. +All new leather should be oiled before being placed in service. +Leather can be preserved for years by the use of saddle soap and +neat's-foot oil, but once it becomes hard and cracked nothing will +make it serviceable. Canvas leggings should be scrubbed when dirty.</p> + +<p>Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean. Leather cleaned with +saddle soap can be polished by rubbing with a flannel cloth.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page030" name="page030"></a>(p. 030)</span> The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and the +collar hooked. When the belt is worn it will be worn outside the +overcoat.</p> + + +<h3>Section 5. The service kit.</h3> + +<p>The service kit is composed of two parts—(<i>a</i>) the field kit, which +includes everything the soldier wears or carries with him in the +field, and (<i>b</i>) the surplus kit.</p> + +<p>The field kit consists of—</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>(1) The clothing worn on the person.</li> +<li>(2) Arms and equipment, consisting of—</li> +<li>(<i>a</i>) Arms and equipments of all enlisted men (except buglers + and members of bands and machine-gun troops):</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 brush and thong.<a id="footnotetag1" name="footnotetag1"></a><a href="#footnote1" title="Go to footnote 1"><span class="smaller">[1]</span></a></li> +<li>1 canteen, cavalry.<a id="footnotetag2" name="footnotetag2"></a><a href="#footnote2" title="Go to footnote 2"><span class="smaller">[2]</span></a></li> +<li>1 canteen strap, cavalry.<a href="#footnote2" title="Go to footnote 2"><span class="smaller">[2]</span></a></li> +<li>90 cartridges, ball, caliber .30</li> +<li>21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.</li> +<li>1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry.</li> +<li>1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair.</li> +<li>1 cup</li> +<li>1 fork.</li> +<li>1 front-sight cover</li> +<li>1 gun sling.</li> +<li>1 knife.</li> +<li>2 magazines, pistol, extra.</li> +<li>1 magazine pocket web, double</li> +<li>1 meat can</li> +<li>1 oiler and thong case.<a href="#footnote1" title="Go to footnote 1"><span class="smaller">[1]</span></a>.</li> +<li>1 pistol</li> +<li>1 pistol holster.</li> +<li>1 pouch for first-aid packet.</li> +<li>1 rifle scabbard.</li> +<li>1 rifle, United States, caliber .30.</li> +<li>1 saber and scabbard, cavalry.</li> +<li>1 saber knot.</li> +<li>1 saber straps, pair.</li> +<li>1 spoon.</li> +<li>1 spurs, pair.</li> +<li>1 spur straps, set.</li> +</ol></li> +<li>(<i>b</i>) Members of bands and buglers:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 canteen, cavalry.<a href="#footnote2" title="Go to footnote 2"><span class="smaller">[2]</span></a></li> +<li>1 canteen strap, cavalry.<a href="#footnote2" title="Go to footnote 2"><span class="smaller">[2]</span></a></li> +<li>21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.</li> +<li>1 cup.</li> +<li>1 fork.</li> +<li>1 knife.</li> +<li>2 magazines, pistol, extra.</li> +<li><span class="pagenum"><a id="page031" name="page031"></a>(p. 031)</span> 1 meat can.</li> +<li>1 pistol belt without saber ring.</li> +<li>1 pistol.</li> +<li>1 pistol holster.</li> +<li>1 pouch for first-aid packet.</li> +<li>1 spoon.</li> +<li>1 spurs, pair.</li> +<li>1 spur straps, set.</li> +</ol></li> +<li>(<i>c</i>) In addition to (<i>b</i>) first sergeant of headquarters troop (drum +major) will have:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 saber and scabbard, cavalry, 2 saber straps.</li> +<li>1 saber knot.</li> +</ol></li> +<li>(<i>d</i>) For members of machine-gun troops, except that buglers attached +to machine-gun troops (only) will have 1 pistol belt without saber +ring in lieu of 1 cartridge belt, 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair, +and 1 magazine pocket, web, double:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 bolo.</li> +<li>1 bolo scabbard.</li> +<li>1 canteen, cavalry.<a id="footnotetag4" name="footnotetag4"></a><a href="#footnote4" title="Go to footnote 4"><span class="smaller">[4]</span></a></li> +<li>1 canteen strap, cavalry.<a href="#footnote4" title="Go to footnote 4"><span class="smaller">[4]</span></a></li> +<li>21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.</li> +<li>1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry.</li> +<li>1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair.</li> +<li>1 cup.</li> +<li>1 fork.</li> +<li>1 knife.</li> +<li>2 magazines, pistol, extra.</li> +<li>1 magazine pocket, web, doubles.</li> +<li>1 meat can.</li> +<li>1 pistol.</li> +<li>1 pistol holster.</li> +<li>1 pouch for first-aid packet.</li> +<li>1 spoon.</li> +<li>1 spurs, pair.</li> +<li>1 spur straps, set.</li> +</ol></li> +<li>(<i>e</i>) Horse equipments for each enlisted man individually mounted on a +horse:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 bridle, cavalry, model of 1909 + or 1912, or curb bridle, model + of 1902.</li> +<li>1 bridle, watering, if curb bridle + model of 1902 is issued.</li> +<li>1 currycomb.</li> +<li>1 halter headstall.</li> +<li>1 halter tie rope.</li> +<li>1 horse brush.</li> +<li>1 lariat.</li> +<li>1 lariat strap.</li> +<li>1 link</li> +<li>1 nose bag, or feed bag (with + grain bag).</li> +<li>1 picket pin.</li> +<li>1 saddle, cavalry, complete.<a id="footnotetag3" name="footnotetag3"></a><a href="#footnote3" title="Go to footnote 3"><span class="smaller">[3]</span></a></li> +<li>1 saddlebags, pair.</li> +<li>1 saddle blanket.</li> +<li>1 surcingle.</li> +</ol> +</ul> + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page032" name="page032"></a>(p. 032)</span> Care of saddlery.<br> + +(Cav. Drill Reg. 1916.)</h3> + +<p><b>975.</b> The saddlery and equipment must always be cleaned after use. This +duty, like the care of the horse, is to be regarded as part of the +mounted duty itself; thus a drill is not over until horse, saddlery, +arms, and equipments have been put again in condition. According to +need, the leather is simply wiped off with a damp sponge or fully +taken apart and well soaped and cleaned. In no case must it be soaked +in water.</p> + +<p>If the soap used does not contain a sufficient amount of free oil the +leather must be oiled to keep it pliable. A mixture of one-half +neat's-foot oil and one-half mutton tallow, well rubbed in, keeps +leather in good condition. Special care is taken to keep the underside +of the skirts of the saddle and the parts which do not come in contact +with the clothing well oiled. The seat and outside of the skirts will +rarely require oil.</p> + +<p>Metal parts are kept clean and free from rust; they may require oiling +if not regularly used.</p> + +<p>The saddle blanket must be kept clean and soft and free from wrinkles. +After use it must be dried and then well shaken (unfolded). It must +never be folded wet and left thus with the saddle. Provision will be +made in the saddle room or stables for hanging it up to dry.</p> + +<p>When necessary the blanket should be thoroughly cleansed by repeated +immersions in tepid soapsuds and hung over a pole or line to dry +without wringing or pressing it.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. The surplus kit.</h3> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>The surplus kit for each man consists of—</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>1 breeches, pair.</li> +<li>1 drawers, pair.</li> +<li>1 shirt, olive drab.</li> +<li>1 shoes, russet-leather, pair.</li> +<li>2 stockings, pair.</li> +<li>1 undershirt.</li> +<li>1 shoe laces, extra, pair.</li> +</ol></li> +</ul> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page033" name="page033"></a>(p. 033)</span> Each surplus kit bag contains 1 jointed cleaning rod and +case.</p> + +<p>Squad leaders are responsible that surplus kit bags are kept in order +and fully packed in the field.<a id="footnotetag5" name="footnotetag5"></a><a href="#footnote5" title="Go to footnote 5"><span class="smaller">[5]</span></a> Men are allowed access to them for +the purpose of making substitutions.</p> + +<p>The surplus kits are packed in surplus kit bags, one for each squad, +one for sergeants, and one for cooks and buglers.</p> + +<p>The kit of each man will be packed as follows:</p> + +<p>Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; +shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, wrapped +tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around the middle by +the extra pair of the shoe laces, each bundle to be tagged with the +company number of the owner. These individual kits will be packed in +the surplus kit bag in two layers of four kits each, the breeches and +olive drab shirts to be neatly folded and packed on the top and sides +of the layers, the jointed cleaning rod and case, provided for each +squad, being attached by the thongs on the inside of the bag.</p> + +<p>When overcoats or sweaters are not prescribed to be worn on the person +they will be collected into bundles of convenient size and secured by +burlap or other suitable material, or will be boxed. They will be +marked ready for shipment to be forwarded when required.<a href="#footnote5" title="Go to footnote 5"><span class="smaller">[5]</span></a></p> + + +<h3>Section 7. Assembling equipment.</h3> + +<p class="title">TO MAKE THE BLANKET ROLL.</p> + +<p>Spread the shelter half, triangular part to the right, buttons +underneath. Fold triangular part across shelter half, making a +rectangle.</p> + +<p>Fold blanket through center, parallel to stripes; fold again through +center perpendicular to stripes. Lay folded blanket on shelter half, +longer side of blanket parallel to and 1 inch from edge of shelter +half opposite straps and equidistant from <span class="pagenum"><a id="page034" name="page034"></a>(p. 034)</span> sides. Place +tent, pole, folded, close to and parallel to near edge of blanket, end +of pole flush with left side of blanket; pins and tent rope to be +similarly placed at right side of blanket, occupying about the same +space as pole. Arrange the clothing and toilet articles on right and +left sides of blanket, leaving center space clear.</p> + +<p>Fold the free portions of the right and left sides of shelter half +over the blanket. Fold the far edge of the shelter half 6 inches +toward the blanket, making a pocket.</p> + +<p>With hands and knees roll the blanket and shelter half toward and into +the pocket. Buckle straps around roll, strap buckles on line with +shelter half buttons.</p> + + +<p class="title">ROLL THE OVERCOAT AND SLICKER.</p> + +<p>Turn the garment inside out, collar extended, and fold once the long +way. Roll tightly from the front edge, making roll the full length of +garment.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO PACK THE McCLELLAN SADDLE.</p> + +<p>Put saddle pockets on saddle; fasten straps to cincha rings. Place +articles pertaining to the man in near pocket, those pertaining to the +horse in off pocket.</p> + +<p>The overcoat, slicker, or both, to be strapped on pommel, collar to +left.</p> + +<p>Blanket roll to be strapped on cantle. Feed bag, if empty, neatly +folded on top of roll, "U. S." up. If grain is carried, the grain bag +is tied inside the feed bag, which is strapped on top of the pommel +roll, above the overcoat or slicker.</p> + +<p>Lariat, in uniform coils of about 10-inch diameter, fastened to near +cantle ring by lariat strap fastened to one ring and passing through +the other; coil secured by two outside straps of saddle pocket flap. +To prevent flapping and injuring adjacent troopers and horses the +picket pin may be inserted through the saddlebag strap ring, point +downward, or it may be placed horizontally under the flap straps of +the near saddlebag, point to the rear.</p> + +<p>Canteen snapped into off cantle ring, canteen strap passing through +handle of cup, except the cup model 1910, which is <span class="pagenum"><a id="page035" name="page035"></a>(p. 035)</span> fitted +over the bottom of the canteen, model 1910, inside the cover.</p> + +<p>Rifle on near side; saber on off side, attached to pommel ring.</p> + +<p>The surcingle is buckled over the saddle. The two extra fitted +horseshoes, one front and one hind, may be wired, one on bottom of +each stirrup, or they may be fastened together with a nail and carried +in off saddle pocket. To prevent rust the horseshoe nails should +always be well oiled and wrapped in canvas or leather. They are +carried in the off saddle pocket.</p> + +<p>The two reserve rations, extra ammunition, and other extra articles +should be so distributed between the two pockets as to balance the +weight on the horse.</p> + +<a id="img002" name="img002"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img002.jpg" width="400" height="559" alt="" title=""> +<p>McCLELLAN SADDLE.<br> +Full pack, near side.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img003" name="img003"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img003.jpg" width="400" height="540" alt="" title=""> +<p>McCLELLAN SADDLE.<br> +Full pack, off side.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img004" name="img004"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img004.jpg" width="400" height="583" alt="" title=""> +<p>EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION.<br> +The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img005" name="img005"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img005.jpg" width="500" height="344" alt="" title=""> +<p>SHELTER TENT AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION.<br> +The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img006" name="img006"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img006.jpg" width="500" height="289" alt="" title=""> +<p>PLATE A.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img007" name="img007"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img007.jpg" width="500" height="306" alt="" title=""> +<p>PLATE B.</p> +</div> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page036" name="page036"></a>(p. 036)</span> CHAPTER III.<br> + +RATIONS AND FORAGE.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. The ration.</h3> + +<p>A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day.</p> + +<p>In the field there are three kinds of rations issued, as follows:</p> + +<p>The <i>garrison ration</i> is intended to be issued in kind whenever +possible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5 pounds.</p> + +<p>The <i>reserve ration</i> is the simplest efficient ration, and constitutes +the reserve carried for field service. It consists of—</p> + +<table style="width: 60%; margin-left: 20%;" border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Reserve ration"> +<colgroup> + <col width="60%"> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="20%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td class="right">Ounces.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2">Bacon</td> +<td class="right1em">12</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2">Hard bread</td> +<td class="right1em">16</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2">Coffee, roasted and ground</td> +<td class="right">1.12</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2">Sugar</td> +<td class="right05em">2.4</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2">Salt</td> +<td class="right">.16</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td class="right">———</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Approximate net weight</td> +<td>pounds</td> +<td class="right15em">2</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>The <i>field ration</i> is the ration prescribed in orders by the commander +of the field forces. It consists of the reserve ration, in whole or in +part, supplemented by articles requisitioned or purchased locally or +shipped from the rear.</p> + +<p>In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the +following rations:</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>(<i>a</i>) On each man: At least two days' reserve rations.</li> +<li>(<i>b</i>) In the ration section of the field train, for each man:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>Two days' field and one day's reserve, and for each + animal two days' grain rations.</li> +</ol></li> +<li><span class="pagenum"><a id="page037" name="page037"></a>(p. 037)</span> (<i>c</i>) In the supply train:</li> +<li class="nomarge"><ol class="none"> +<li>Of an infantry division, two days' field and grain + rations.</li> +<li>Of a cavalry division, one day's field and grain + rations.</li> +</ol></li> +</ul> + +<p>In addition to the foregoing, commanders will require each man on the +march to carry the unconsumed portion of the day's ration issued the +night before for the noonday meal. In the same manner, cavalry and +field artillery carry on their horses a portion of their grain ration +issued the night before for a noonday feed. Reserve rations are +consumed only in case of extreme necessity, when other supplies are +not available. They are not to be consumed or renewed without an +express order from the officer in command of the troops who is +responsible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division +commander or other independent-detachment commander. Every officer +within the limits of his command is held responsible for the +enforcement of this regulation. Reserve rations consumed must be +replaced at the first opportunity.</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Individual cooking.</h3> + +<p>Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier at one +time, and in such cases you should be very careful to so use the +rations that they will last you the entire period. If you stuff +yourself one day, or waste your rations, you will have to starve later +on.</p> + +<p>Generally the cooking for the troop will be done by the troop cook, +but sometimes every soldier will have to prepare his own meals, using +only his field mess kit for the purpose.</p> + +<p>The best fire for individual cooking is a small, clear one, or, better +yet, a few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather a number of +sticks about 1 inch in diameter. These should be dry. Dead limbs +adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked up from the ground. +Split some of these and shave them up into kindling. Dig a trench in +the ground, laid with the wind, about a foot long, 4 inches wide, and +6 inches deep. Start the fire in this trench gradually, piling on the +heavier wood as the fire grows. When the trench is full of burning +wood, allow it a few minutes to burn down to coals and stop blazing +high. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page038" name="page038"></a>(p. 038)</span> Then rest the meat can and cup over the trench and +start cooking. Either may be supported, if necessary, with green +sticks. If you can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one up out +of rocks or with two parallel logs.</p> + +<p>The following recipes have been furnished from the office of the +Quartermaster General, United States Army:</p> + +<p><i>Coffee.</i>—Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bring to a boil. +Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well, adding one spoonful +of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and then set it to the side of +the fire to simmer for about 10 minutes. Then, to clear the coffee, +throw in a spoonful or two of cold water. This coffee is of medium +strength and is within the limit of the ration if made but twice a +day.</p> + +<p><i>Cocoa.</i>—Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add +one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved. Add one +spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes.</p> + +<p><i>Chocolate.</i>—Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, +add a piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory nut, breaking or +cutting it into small pieces and stirring until dissolved. Add one +spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes.</p> + +<p><i>Tea.</i>—Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add +one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it stand or "draw" +for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer the tea will get bitter, +unless separated from the tea leaves.</p> + + +<p class="title">MEATS.</p> + +<p><i>Bacon.</i>—Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which should +generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place in a meat can +with about one-half inch of cold water. Let come to a boil and then +pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, turning the bacon once and +quickly browning it. Remove the bacon to lid of meat can, leaving the +grease for frying potatoes, onions, rice, flapjacks; etc., according +to recipe.</p> + +<p><i>Fresh meat</i> (to fry).—To fry, a small amount of grease (one to two +spoonfuls) Is Necessary. Put grease in the meat can and let come to a +smoking temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half +inch thick, let fry for about one minute <span class="pagenum"><a id="page039" name="page039"></a>(p. 039)</span> before turning, +depending upon whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium, or well +done. Then turn and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste.</p> + +<p>Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc.</p> + +<p><i>Fresh meat</i> (to broil).—Cut in slices about one inch thick, from +half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a stick or +branch of convenient length—say, from two to four feet long—and +weave the point of the stick through the steak several times, so that +it may be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward +side of a small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt +and pepper to taste. Meat with considerable fat is preferred, though +any meat may be broiled in this manner.</p> + +<p><i>Fresh meat</i> (to stew).—Cut into chunks from one-half inch to one +inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover with about +one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour, or until tender. +Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots turnips, or cabbage, cut into +small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and potatoes, +onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about half done. +Amount of vegetables to be added, about the same as meat, depending +upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to all fresh +meat and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with +their abundance, and fixed quantities can not be adhered to. Fresh +fish can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker, +and potatoes and onions and canned corn are the only vegetables +generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon would +greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked in meat can or +cup.</p> + + +<p class="title">VEGETABLES.</p> + +<p><i>Potatoes</i> (fried).—Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large one +(about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about one-fourth inch +thick and scatter well in the meat can in which the grease remains +after frying the bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the +potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to +a boil for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove the cover and dry as +desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon +already prepared <span class="pagenum"><a id="page040" name="page040"></a>(p. 040)</span> may be kept on the cover, which is most +conveniently placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables.</p> + +<p><i>Onions</i> (fried).—Same as potatoes.</p> + +<p><i>Potatoes</i> (boiled).—Peel two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half +pound) or one large one, and cut in coarse chunks of about the same +size—say, 1-½-inch cubes. Place in meat can and three-fourths fill +with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for 15 or 20 +minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp stick. Pour +off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over hot ashes or +light coals.</p> + +<p><i>Potatoes</i> (baked).—Take two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half +pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed of light coals and +cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for 30 or 40 +minutes, when they should be done.</p> + +<p><i>Canned tomatoes.</i>—One 2-pound can is generally sufficient for five +men.</p> + +<p><i>Stew.</i>—Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of tomatoes and +add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and let come to +a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and +one-fourth spoonful of sugar.</p> + +<p><i>Or</i>, having fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the meat can, the +grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set over +a brisk fire and let come to a boil.</p> + +<p><i>Or</i>, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding two +pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, if desired.</p> + +<p><i>Or</i>, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, they are +very palatable.</p> + +<p><i>Rice.</i>—Take about two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, +add 4 heaping spoonfuls of rice, and boil until the grains are soft +enough to be easily mashed between the fingers (about 20 minutes). Add +two pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off the water and empty +rice out on meat can. Bacon grease or sugar may be added.</p> + +<p><i>Corn meal, fine hominy, oatmeal.</i>—Take about one-third of a cupful +of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heaping spoonfuls of the meal or +hominy, and boil about 20 minutes. Then add about two pinches of salt +and stir well.</p> + +<p><i>Dried beans and peas.</i>—Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about two-thirds +of a cupful of water and boil until soft. This generally takes from +three to four hours. Add one pinch of <span class="pagenum"><a id="page041" name="page041"></a>(p. 041)</span> salt. About half an +hour before the beans are done add one slice of bacon.</p> + + +<p class="title">HOT BREADS.</p> + +<p><i>Flapjacks.</i>—Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of +baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before +issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and 3 half cans of baking +powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter that +will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour into the +meat can, which should contain the grease from fried bacon or a +spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals sufficient +to bake, so that in from 5 to 7 minutes the flapjack may be turned by +a quick toss of the pan. Fry from 5 to 7 minutes longer, or until by +examination it is found to be done.</p> + +<p><i>Hoecake.</i>—Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks by +substituting <i>corn meal</i> for <i>flour</i>.</p> + +<p><i>Emergency rations.</i>—Detailed instructions as to the manner of +preparing the emergency ration are found on the label of each can. +Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard bread, or +both, consumed with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable, +and generally extends the period during which it can be consumed with +relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of +hard bread and bacon for use with the emergency ration when it becomes +evident that the latter must be consumed rather than to retain the +emergency ration to the last extremity and force its exclusive use for +a longer period than two or three days.</p> + + +<h3>Section 3. The forage ration.</h3> + +<p>"<i>1077, Army Regulations.</i>—The forage ration for a horse is 14 pounds +of hay and 12 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-<sup>1</sup>/<sub>3</sub> pounds of +straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery horse of the +heavy-draft type, weighing 1,300 pounds or over, 17 pounds of hay and +14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-<sup>1</sup>/<sub>3</sub> pounds of straw (or hay) +for bedding; for a mule, 14 pounds of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn, +or barley, and 3-<sup>1</sup>/<sub>3</sub> pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding. To each +animal 3 pounds of bran may be issued in lieu of that quantity of +grain.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page042" name="page042"></a>(p. 042)</span> "The commanding officer may, in his discretion, vary the +proportions of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, 1-½ +pounds of hay, and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equivalents), and +in the field may substitute other recognized articles of forage +obtained locally, the variation or the substitution not to exceed the +money value of the components of the ration at the contract rates in +effect at the time of change.</p> + +<p>"<i>1078, Army Regulations.</i>—Where grazing is practicable, or when +little work is required of the animals, commanding officers will +reduce the forage ration. When, on the other hand, conditions demand +it, they are authorized to increase the ration, not in excess, +however, of savings made."</p> + +<p>In the field the authorized allowances must often be reduced and +supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as green forage, +beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat and rye should be +crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourth of the allowance). For +unshelled corn, add about one-quarter weight.</p> + +<p>On the march the grain ration is the only forage carried. It consists +of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of grain for each +mule. Recourse must be had to grazing if it is not possible to procure +long forage in the country traversed.</p> + +<p>In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the +following forage:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) For each draft animal: On each vehicle a <i>reserve</i> of one day's +grain ration for its draft animals.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain ration issued +the night before, for a noonday feed.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal, two +days' grain rations.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) In supply train of an Infantry division two days' grain +rations, and of a Cavalry division one day's grain ration.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page043" name="page043"></a>(p. 043)</span> CHAPTER IV.<br> + +PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET.</h2> + + +<h3>PERSONAL HYGIENE.</h3> + +<p>History shows that in almost every war many more men die of disease +than from wounds received in battle. Much of this disease is +preventable and is due either to the ignorance or carelessness of the +person who has the disease or of other persons about him. It is a +terrible truth that one man who violates any of the great rules of +health may be the means of killing many more of his comrades than are +killed by the bullets of the enemy.</p> + +<p><b>It is therefore most important that every soldier should learn how to +take care of his health when in the field and that he should also +insist that his comrades do not violate any of the rules prescribed +for this purpose.</b></p> + +<p>A great many diseases are due to germs, which are either little +animals or little plants so very small that they can only be seen by +aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germs are "catching." +All other diseases are not "catching."</p> + +<p>There are only five ways of catching disease:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some one or +something which has them on it. Thus, one may catch venereal diseases, +smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox, mumps, boils, body +lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhobie itch, and some other diseases. +Wounds are infected in this manner.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Breathing in certain germs which float in the air. In this way +one may catch pneumonia, consumption, influenza, diphtheria, whooping +cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, measles, and certain other +diseases.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page044" name="page044"></a>(p. 044)</span> (<i>c</i>) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating or +drinking. Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and intestinal +worms may be caught in this manner.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) Having certain germs injected into the body by the bites of +insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria, yellow +fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caught in this way.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) Inheriting the germ from one's parents.</p> + +<p>Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently being sick +with any disease. Such persons and persons who are sick with the +diseases are a great source of danger to others about them. Germs +which multiply in such persons are found in their urine and excretions +from the bowels; in discharges from ulcers and abscesses; in the spit +or particles coughed or sneezed into the air; in the perspiration or +scales from the skin; and in the blood sucked up by biting insects.</p> + +<p>Those who have taken care of their health and who have not become +weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are not only less liable +to catch disease, but are more apt to recover when taken sick.</p> + +<p>Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the reasons for +the following rules and how important it is that they should be +carried out by each and every person:</p> + +<p>Stay away from persons having "catching" diseases.</p> + +<p>If you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go to the +surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise.</p> + +<p>Typhoid fever is one of the most dangerous and common camp diseases. +Modern medicine has, however, discovered an effective preventative for +this disease in the typhoid prophylactic, which renders the person +immune from typhoid fever. The treatment consists in injecting into +the arm a preventative serum. The injection is given three times at +10-day intervals.</p> + +<p>Association with lewd women is dangerous. It may result in disabling +you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis) which may be +transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldiers with venereal +diseases should not use basins or toilet articles used by others, as +the germs of these diseases if gotten into the eye very often cause +blindness. Likewise, if they use the same drinking cup used by others +they may give others the disease. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page045" name="page045"></a>(p. 045)</span> They should promptly report +their trouble to the surgeon, that they may receive the best medical +advice and attention.</p> + +<p>Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having intercourse +with an unknown woman, he should report as soon as possible afterwards +to the regimental infirmary for prophylactic treatment, which, if +taken within a few hours after intercourse, will prevent to a large +degree the liability of contracting any disease.</p> + +<p>Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. Water, even when clear, +may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore, when the conditions are +such that the commanding officer orders all drinking water to be +boiled, be careful to live up to this order.</p> + +<p>Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself. In open +latrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds flies and may also +be full of germs.</p> + +<p>Flies carry germs from one place to another. Therefore, see that your +food and mess kit are protected from them.</p> + +<p>All slops and scraps of food scattered about camp soon produce bad +odors and draw flies. Therefore do your part toward keeping the camp +free from disease by carefully depositing such refuse in the pits or +cans used for this purpose.</p> + +<p>Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for this purpose, +never on the ground around camp, because it not only causes bad smells +but urine sometimes contains the germs of "catching" diseases.</p> + +<p>Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors. Therefore in +camps of several days' duration this water should be thrown in covered +pits or in cans used for this purpose.</p> + +<p>As certain mosquitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever, use your +mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal comfort.</p> + +<p>Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twice a day. It +helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayed teeth cause +toothache. They also lead one to swallow food without properly chewing +it, and this leads to stomach troubles of various kinds. Food left +around and between the teeth is bad for the teeth and forms good +breeding places for germs.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page046" name="page046"></a>(p. 046)</span> Keep the skin clean. Through the pores of the skin the body +gets rid of much waste and poisonous matter. Therefore remove this and +keep the pores open by bathing once every day, if possible. If water +is scarce, rub the body over with a wet towel. If no water is at hand, +take a dry rub. Wash carefully the armpits, between the legs, and +under the foreskin, as this will prevent chafing.</p> + +<p>The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury and helps +to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters are formed don't tear off +the skin. Insert a needle under the skin a little distance back from +the blister and push it through to the opposite side. Press out the +liquid through the holes thus formed. Heat the needle red hot first, +with a match or candle, to kill the germs.</p> + +<p>When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the opening covered +with a bandage to keep out germs and dirt; otherwise the sore may +fester. Pus is always caused by germs.</p> + +<p>Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the field +generally means a dirty head and a dirty face and favors skin +diseases, lice, and dandruff.</p> + +<p><b>Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very often is +the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, and +other diseases.</b></p> + +<p>Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising without bad +results, but there is great danger if one rests in wet clothing, as +the body may become chilled.</p> + +<p>Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on damp ground, as this is sure to +chill the body.</p> + +<p>When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp clothes, don't remain +where a breeze can strike you. You are sure to become chilled.</p> + +<p>Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to air in +the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs and vermin don't +like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing suits them very well. +Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks frequently. The danger of blood +poisoning from a wound is greatly increased if the bullet passes +through dirty clothes.</p> + +<p>Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter tent, even +if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little rain may ruin a +whole night's rest.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page047" name="page047"></a>(p. 047)</span> Always prepare your bed before dark. Level off the ground and +scrape out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw or dry grass +if possible. Green grass or branches from trees are better than +nothing. Sleep on your poncho. This keeps the dampness from coming up +from the ground and chilling the body. Every minute spent in making a +good bed means about an hour's good rest later on.</p> + +<p>Avoid the food and drink found for sale in the cheap stands about +camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often prepared in filthy +places by very dirty persons.</p> + +<p>The use of intoxicating liquor is particularly dangerous in the field. +Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks down one's system. +Drinking men are more apt to get sick and less liable to get well than +are their more sober comrades. If alcohol is taken at all, it is best +after the work of the day is over. It should never be taken when the +body is exposed to severe cold, as it diminishes the resistance of the +body. Hot tea or coffee is much preferable under these circumstances.</p> + + +<p class="title">CARE OF THE FEET.</p> + +<p>A soldier can not march with sore feet, and marching is the main part +of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. <i>All soldiers</i> should be +familiar with the proper methods of caring for the feet. Sore feet are +generally due to carelessness, neglect, or ignorance on the part of +the soldier.</p> + +<p>The most important factor in the care of the feet and the marching +ability of the soldier is the shoe. Civilian shoes, particularly +light, patent leather, or low shoes, are sure to cause injury and in +time will ruin a man's foot. Only the marching shoe issued by the +Quartermaster Corps should be worn, and they must be properly fitted +to the individual. It will not suffice to order a marching shoe of the +same size as one's ordinary civilian shoes, for it must be remembered +that a soldier may have to march many miles daily over rough roads and +carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself causes the foot to spread out +to a larger size, and the rough roads give so much exercise to the +muscles of the feet that they swell greatly through the increased +blood supply. (For directions as to measuring the foot for the +marching shoe, see General Order <span class="pagenum"><a id="page048" name="page048"></a>(p. 048)</span> No. 26, War Department, +1912, a copy of which should be on hand in each company.)</p> + +<p>Do not start out on a march wearing new shoes. This is a frequent +cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly broken in before +beginning a march by wearing them for several hours daily for a week +before the march, and they should be adapted to the contours of the +feet by stretching them with shoe stretchers with adjustable knobs to +take the pressure off painful corns and bunions. Such stretchers are +issued by the Quartermaster Corps, and there should be one or more +pair in every company of infantry. Should this be impracticable, then +the following is suggested:</p> + +<p>The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2-½ inches of water for +about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly pliable and moist; +he should then walk for about an hour on a level surface, letting the +shoes dry on his feet, to the irregularities of which the leather is +thus molded in the same way as it was previously molded over the shoe +last. On taking the shoes off a very little neat's-foot oil should be +rubbed into the leather to prevent its hardening and cracking.</p> + +<p>If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable +amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather. +Waterproof leather causes the feet of some men to perspire unduly and +keeps them constantly soft.</p> + +<p>Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn for +marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless specifically ordered by +the surgeon. The socks will be large enough to permit free movement of +the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wrinkling. Darned socks, or +socks with holes in them, will not be worn in marching.</p> + +<p>Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot powder, +which can be obtained at the regimental infirmary, before each day's +march. Clean socks should be worn daily.</p> + +<p>As soon as possible after reaching camp after a day of marching the +feet should be washed with soap and water, and the soldier should put +on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of shoes from his surplus +kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet perspire, wash with warm salt +water or alum water, but do not soak the feet a long time, as this, +although very comforting at <span class="pagenum"><a id="page049" name="page049"></a>(p. 049)</span> the time, tends to keep them +soft. Should blisters appear on the feet, prick and evacuate them by +pricking at the lower edge with a pin which has been passed through +the flame of a match and cover them with zinc oxide plaster applied +hot. This plaster can be obtained on request at the regimental +infirmary. If serious abrasions appear on the feet, or corns, bunions, +and ingrowing nails cause trouble, have your name placed on sick +report and apply to the surgeon for treatment. Cut the toenails square +(fairly close in the middle, but leaving the sides somewhat longer), +as this prevents ingrowing nails.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page050" name="page050"></a>(p. 050)</span> CHAPTER V.<br> + +EXTRACTS FROM CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS.<br> + +<span class="smaller">UNITED STATES ARMY, 1916.</span></h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Definitions.</h3> + +<p><b>Alignment.</b>—The placing of several troopers or units on the same +straight line; also the line on which such adjustment is made.</p> + +<p><b>Assembly.</b>—The grouping <b>in order</b>, and in a close-order formation, of +the elements of a command. The special arrangement and condition that +constitute <b>order</b> for each unit are explained in the corresponding part +of the text. The purpose of the assembly is to bring about a +close-order formation in order.</p> + +<a id="base" name="base"></a> +<p><b>Base.</b>—The element on which a formation or movement is regulated. The +base may be a trooper, two, four, section, platoon, or larger unit. +When the base is a single trooper in ranks, he may also be termed the +<b>guide</b>.</p> + +<p><b>Center.</b>—The middle point or element of a command. If the number of +elements considered be even, the right center element will be meant +when the center element is referred to.</p> + +<a id="column" name="column"></a> +<p><b>Column.</b>—A formation in which the elements of a command are placed one +behind the other. The elements here referred to may be troopers, twos, +fours, sections, platoons, or larger units. When used in these +regulations as a <b>word of command</b>, without qualifying words indicating +the kind of column (as <b>of twos</b>, <b>of platoons</b>, etc.), <b>column</b> signifies <b>a +column of fours</b>. In all other cases the word is to be understood in +its general sense unless the context indicates the contrary.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page051" name="page051"></a>(p. 051)</span> <b>Deployment.</b>—An evolution in which the command extends its +front, as in forming line from column or in passing from close order +to extended order.</p> + +<p><b>Depth.</b>—The space from front to rear of any formation, including the +front and rear elements.</p> + +<p><b>Directing leader.</b>—The leader of a subordinate unit who temporarily +conducts the march when the commander is not leading in person. A +trooper in the rank of a platoon or smaller unit who similarly +conducts the march is termed <b>a directing guide</b>.</p> + +<p><b>Direction of march.</b>—The direction in which the base of the command in +question, whether actually in march or halted, is facing at the +instant considered.</p> + +<p><b>Disposition.</b>—The distribution of the elements of a command, and the +formations and duties assigned to each for the accomplishment of a +common purpose.</p> + +<p><b>Distance.</b>—The space between men or bodies of troops measured in the +direction of depth. Distance is measured—mounted, from the croup of +the horse in front to the head of the horse in rear; dismounted, from +the back of the trooper in front to the breast of the trooper in rear.</p> + +<p><b>Dress.</b>—The act of taking a correct alignment.</p> + +<p><b>Drill.</b>—The exercises and evolutions, taught on the drill ground and +executed in accordance with definitely prescribed methods.</p> + +<p><b>Echelon.</b>—A body of troops is in <i>echelon</i> with reference to another +when it is more advanced or less advanced and unmasks or uncovers the +other body, wholly or in part; units thus placed are called +<i>echelons</i>.</p> + +<p><b>Element.</b>—One of the component subdivisions of a command. As used in +these regulations the term <i>element</i> is a general one and may mean a +single trooper, a set of twos, a four, section, platoon, or larger +unit, according to the command and formation that are being +considered. The expression <b>elements of the column</b> refers to the +several troopers, fours, platoons, or other units that are placed +successively, one behind another, in any column formation.</p> + +<p><b>Evolutions.</b>—Movements by which a command changes its position or +passes from one formation to another.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page052" name="page052"></a>(p. 052)</span> <b>File closers.</b>—Officers or noncommissioned officers placed +out of ranks, whose duty it is to supervise the men in ranks and see +that the orders of the commander are carried out. For convenience, +this term is applied to any man posted as a file closer.</p> + +<p><b>Flank.</b>—The right or left of a command in line or column. In speaking +of the enemy the term right flank or left flank is used to designate +the flank that would be so designated by him.</p> + +<p><b>Flank guard.</b>—An element of a command disposed with a view to +protecting a flank.</p> + +<p><b>Foragers.</b>—Mounted troopers distributed in line in extended order; +also the formation in which the troopers are so distributed.</p> + +<p><b>Formation.</b>—The arrangement of the elements of a command in line, +column, or echelon.</p> + +<p><b>Gait.</b>—One of the special movements of the horse, as the walk, the +trot, or the gallop.</p> + +<p><b>Gait of march.</b>—The gait at which the base of the command in question +is moving at the instant considered.</p> + +<p><b>Horse length.</b>—A term of measurement. For convenience in estimating +space, a horse length is considered as 3 yards; by actual measure it +is about 8 feet.</p> + +<p><b>Interval.</b>—The lateral space between the elements or fractions of a +command. Interval is measured: Mounted, from the left knee of the man +at the right of the open space to the right knee of the man at the +left of the open space; dismounted, interval is measured on similar +principles, but from elbow to elbow.</p> + +<p><b>Line.</b>—A formation in which the different elements are abreast of each +other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a line +of columns.</p> + +<p><b>Maneuvers.</b>—Operations against an outlined or actual force under a +separate commander, who, within the limits of the assumed situation, +is free to adopt any formations and make any movements he chooses.</p> + +<p><b>Order.</b>—An indication of the will of the commander in whatever form +conveyed. An order may be given orally, by signal, or in any manner +that is intelligible to those for whom it is intended. The +expression, <b>in order</b>, has no reference to this <span class="pagenum"><a id="page053" name="page053"></a>(p. 053)</span> definition, +but is used to indicate a special arrangement and condition of the +elements of a command.</p> + +<p><b>Order, close.</b>—This includes formations in which the intervals and +distances between elements are habitually based upon those required +for forming the normal line formation of each unit of the formation.</p> + +<p><b>Order, extended.</b>—The formation in which the troopers, or the +subdivisions, or both, are separated by intervals or distances greater +than in close order.</p> + +<p><b>Pace.</b>—Used with reference to gait, pace signifies the rate of speed +of the gait. Used as a unit of measure, pace signifies a step of 30 +inches.</p> + +<p><b>Patrol.</b>—A group detached from a command and operating with specific +mission, usually related to security or information. The term is +ordinarily applied to groups varying in size from two men to a +platoon. They are frequently designated by special names connected +with their principal mission or their composition; as, <b>reconnoitering +patrols</b>, <b>combat patrols</b>, <b>visiting patrols</b>, <b>officer's patrols</b>.</p> + +<p><b>Ployment.</b>—An evolution in which the command diminishes its front, as +in passing from line to column, or from extended order to close order.</p> + +<p><b>Rally.</b>—The rapid grouping behind the leader of the elements of a +command, without reference to their previous situation or formation.</p> + +<p>The object of the rally is to reestablish cohesion with a view to +immediate action, or to form line in a new direction when the regular +method of forming line would be slow or complicated. It is executed in +the order of arrival of the elements of the command without regard to +their normal order. The formation in which each unit is rallied is +fixed in the drill instructions of that unit.</p> + +<p><b>Rank.</b>—Two or more troopers placed side by side.</p> + +<p><b>Scouts.</b>—Individual troopers detached from their commands and +operating with a definite mission related to security or information.</p> + +<p><b>Skirmishers.</b>—Dismounted troopers in line in extended order; also the +formation in which the troopers are so placed.</p> + +<p><b>Successive formation.</b>—A formation in which the elements take their +places successively.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page054" name="page054"></a>(p. 054)</span> <b>Tactical exercise.</b>—An operation against an outlined or +represented enemy whose movements are restricted with a view to +illustrating some particular tactical principle.</p> + + +<h2>PART I.—INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION.</h2> + +<h3>Section 2. General provisions.</h3> + +<p><b>34.</b><a id="footnotetag6" name="footnotetag6"></a><a href="#footnote6" title="Go to footnote 6"><span class="smaller">[6]</span></a> Thorough training in the school of the trooper is the basis of +efficiency.</p> + +<p><b>35.</b> Short and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, which +exhaust the attention of both instructor and recruit.</p> + +<p><b>36.</b> As the instruction progresses, the recruits will be grouped +according to proficiency, in order that all may advance as rapidly as +their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will be +separated from the others and placed under experienced drillmasters.</p> + +<p><b>37.</b> The individual dismounted instruction of the recruit is habitually +given by experienced noncommissioned officers, especially selected for +that purpose. All such instruction is under the careful personal +supervision of a commissioned officer, and in the corresponding +mounted instruction it is desirable that the actual instructor be a +commissioned officer when this is practicable. All lieutenants will be +required to instruct recruits in person sufficiently to acquire skill +in such work.</p> + +<p>When recruits, upon their arrival at a station, are assigned to their +respective troops for training, the captains prescribe and supervise +the instruction.</p> + +<p><b>38.</b> The instructor will always maintain a military bearing and by a +quiet, firm demeanor, set a proper example to his men. A calm and even +temper is indispensable. Unnecessarily loud commands and prolonged +explanations are to be avoided.</p> + +<p>As the recruits become somewhat proficient in the school of the +trooper, the officer superintending the instruction may call upon them +in turn to drill the squad in his presence and to correct any errors +that may be observed. This will increase <span class="pagenum"><a id="page055" name="page055"></a>(p. 055)</span> their interest, +hasten their instruction, and facilitate judgment upon their fitness +for the duties of noncommissioned officers.</p> + +<p><b>39.</b> A carefully thought out program of instruction, prepared in +advance and based upon the probable time and facilities for +instruction that the case in question may present, is essential to +economy of time and effort and to systematic, thorough instruction.</p> + +<p><b>40.</b> The preliminary individual instruction, dismounted and mounted, +should be carried on during different drill hours of the same days. +This preliminary phase should include, in addition to regular drill, +instruction in: The elements of discipline; the names of the various +parts of the arms and equipment; the proper care of arms, equipment, +and clothing; elementary instructions as to the names of those parts +of the horse that are frequently referred to at drill and stable duty; +grooming; a few simple rules regarding the care of the horse; personal +hygiene; and other related subjects.</p> + +<p><b>41.</b> As soon as the instruction shall have advanced so far as to +include the few necessary preliminary drills, collective instruction +<b>in the school of the squad</b> will be taken up. This instruction may, +like the individual instruction, properly be carried on during +different hours of the same drill days, in both mounted and dismounted +phases. The recruits meanwhile continue their progress in the +individual instruction.</p> + +<p><b>42.</b> The progress in <b>mounted</b> collective instruction must be carefully +regulated in accordance with the recruit's confidence and skill in the +management of his mount, and must progress no faster than the +recruit's horsemanship justifies; but this restriction need not affect +the <b>dismounted</b> collective instruction, and the latter may properly be +carried forward as rapidly as the state of the dismounted individual +instruction will permit. By the time the recruit's instruction in +equitation has progressed so as to prepare him for mounted drills at +the faster gaits, he should have learned the mechanism of all the +movements by executing them at a walk. His course of dismounted +training should meanwhile have included not only the close-order +movements of the squad but the mechanism of extended order, practice +in the use of the saber, a little preparatory range practice with the +rifle and pistol, and work in the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page056" name="page056"></a>(p. 056)</span> nature of minor field +exercises involving dismounted fire action. He should, during the same +period, have learned the mechanism of passing from mounted action to +dismounted action and should have acquired familiarity with all +commands and signals used in the squad. The recruit will thus +ordinarily be ready to enter with reasonable efficiency upon certain +phases of the work in the platoon and troop before his individual +mounted instruction is completed.</p> + +<p><b>43.</b> There are two kinds of commands:</p> + +<p>The <b>preparatory</b> command, such as <b>forward</b>, indicates the movement that +is to be executed.</p> + +<p>The command of <b>execution</b>, such as <b>MARCH</b>, <b>HALT</b>, or <b>ARMS</b>, causes the +execution.</p> + +<p><b>Preparatory</b> commands are distinguished by <b>boldface type</b>, those of +execution by <b>CAPITALS</b>.</p> + +<p>The <b>preparatory</b> command should be given at such an interval of time +before the command of <b>execution</b> as to admit of being properly +understood; the command of <b>execution</b> should be given at the instant +the movement is to commence.</p> + +<p>The preparatory command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising +inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of +execution may be more energetic.</p> + +<p>On foot, the command of execution is firm in tone and brief.</p> + +<p>In mounted movements the preparatory command is usually somewhat +prolonged to insure its being heard, and the command of execution is +always prolonged.</p> + +<p><i>Commands will be given no louder than is necessary.</i></p> + +<p>Laxness or indifference suggested in the manner of giving a command is +certain to result in corresponding carelessness of execution.</p> + +<p><b>44.</b> To revoke a preparatory command, or being at the halt, to begin +anew a movement improperly begun: <b>AS YOU WERE</b>. Any movement ceases and +the former position is resumed.</p> + +<p><b>45.</b> To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the +correction of errors, the commands may be given: 1. <b>In place</b>, 2. <b>HALT</b>. +All halt and stand fast. If executed dismounted, the position of the +rifle is not changed. To resume the movement, the commands are: 1. +<b>Resume</b>; or, 1. <b>Resume, trot</b>; or, 1. <b>Resume, gallop</b>. 2. <b>MARCH</b>. The +movement is then completed as if it had not been interrupted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page057" name="page057"></a>(p. 057)</span> <b>46.</b> Movements that may be executed toward either flank are +explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute +the word "left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation +of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are +given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The +substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses.</p> + +<p><b>47.</b> Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when marching +unless otherwise prescribed.</p> + +<p>Any movement on foot not specially excepted may be executed in double +time.</p> + +<p>If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command <b>double time</b> +precedes the command of execution.</p> + +<p><b>48.</b> As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever +their presence is necessary.</p> + +<p><b>49.</b> Before beginning work, the instructor always assures himself that +those under his charge are neatly dressed and in proper uniform. At +mounted formations he will also require that horses be properly +groomed and that equipments be in good condition and adjusted as +prescribed.</p> + +<p><b>50.</b> The value of recruit drill as an exercise in teaching discipline +must be kept constantly in view by the instructor. No phase of the +instruction is of such great ultimate importance.</p> + +<h3>Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted.</h3> + +<p><b>51.</b> The object of this school is to develop the strength and agility +of the trooper, to give him a military bearing, to fix in him the +habit of sustained attention and instant obedience, to prepare him for +instruction in mounted combat with the saber and pistol, and to train +him in dismounted combat with the rifle.</p> + +<p>In order to make rapid progress in those exercises which form the +basis of instruction of the trooper, it is necessary that the lessons +should, as far as practicable, be given individually.</p> + +<p><b>52.</b> <i>Cautions to instructors.</i>—The instructor explains briefly each +movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the +recruits to take the proper positions unassisted <span class="pagenum"><a id="page058" name="page058"></a>(p. 058)</span> and does not +touch them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are +unable to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the +same movement, although each should be understood before passing to +another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity. +Recruits should be allowed to stand at ease frequently. During these +pauses the instructor will not be idle, but opportunity will be taken +to talk to the men, to encourage them to ask questions, and so to +develop their confidence and common sense.</p> + +<p><b>53.</b> During the period devoted to preliminary instruction, without +arms, the recruit will be prepared for subsequent instruction with +arms by being taught the names of the principal parts of the different +weapons and the proper methods of cleaning, disassembling, assembling, +and operating the latter.</p> + + +<p class="title">Physical Training.</p> + +<p><b>54.</b> The physical training of the soldier must receive due attention. +Its direct results are to increase the soldier's strength, agility, +and endurance, and it has indirect results of far-reaching value in +connection with discipline and morale. It should begin with his first +instruction as a recruit and be continued throughout his entire +enlistment. The methods prescribed in the authorized Manual of +Physical Training will be followed with a view to making the soldier's +development thorough and well balanced, and to prevent the instruction +from becoming unnecessarily tedious and monotonous.</p> + +<p><b>55.</b> In the earlier phases of the recruit instruction, and under +temporary conditions that do not favor the carrying out of a more +comprehensive scheme of training, special attention will be given to +the <b>setting-up exercises</b>. Running, jumping, and swimming are phases of +training of special importance to the soldier.</p> + + +<p class="title">Individual Instruction Without Arms.</p> + +<p><b>56.</b> For this instruction a few recruits, usually not exceeding 3 or 4, +are placed (as a squad) in single rank, facing to the front.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page059" name="page059"></a>(p. 059)</span> <b>57.</b> To teach the recruits how to form in ranks the instructor +will first place them in single rank, arranged according to height, +the tallest man on the right, with intervals of about 4 inches between +men, and will explain that the object of these intervals is to give +freedom of movement in marching and in the use of the rifle in ranks. +He will then direct each man singly to place the palm of the left hand +on the hip, fingers pointing downward, and draw attention to the fact +that the indicated interval of about 4 inches may be verified by each +man so placing himself that his right arm, when hanging naturally at +his side, touches the elbow of the man on his right. When this is +understood, he will cause the recruits to fall out and successively to +place themselves as before, each man verifying his interval by causing +his right arm to touch the left elbow of the man on his right, the +latter's hand being on his hip, as already explained. He will then +explain that at the command <b>FALL IN</b> the men will, beginning with the +right trooper, successively and quickly take their places in rank, +each man placing the left hand at the hip as above and dropping his +hand to his side as soon as the man on his left has the proper +interval.</p> + +<p><b>58.</b> The recruits having had sufficient instruction to understand how +to form by command, the instructor commands: <b>FALL IN</b>.</p> + +<p>The men assemble as prescribed in par. 57, each taking the position of +<b>attention</b> as described below.</p> + +<p>As soon as the recruits have had sufficient preliminary instruction +they will habitually be formed as regularly prescribed for a squad.</p> + + +<p class="title">POSITION OF THE TROOPER, OR ATTENTION (DISMOUNTED).</p> + +<p><b>59.</b> Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation +of the man permits.</p> + +<p>Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°.</p> + +<p>Knees straight without stiffness.</p> + +<p>Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on +hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page060" name="page060"></a>(p. 060)</span> Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the +breeches.</p> + +<p>Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis +of the head and neck is vertical; eyes to the front.</p> + +<p>Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the +feet.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE RESTS.</p> + +<p><b>60.</b> Being at a halt, the commands are: <b>FALL OUT</b>; <b>REST</b>; <b>AT EASE</b>; and 1. +<b>Parade</b>, 2. <b>REST</b>.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>fall out</b>, the men may leave the ranks, but are required +to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former places, +at attention, at the command <b>fall in</b>.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>rest</b>, each man keeps one foot in place, but is not +required to preserve silence or immobility.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>at ease</b>, each man keeps one foot in place and is +required to preserve silence, but not immobility.</p> + +<p>1. <b>Parade</b>, 2. <b>REST</b>. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the +rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without constraint, in +front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left hand uppermost, +left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the right hand; +preserve silence and steadiness of position.</p> + +<p><b>61.</b> Being in march, at the command: 1. <b>Route order</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; or 1. <b>At +ease</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, the men keep their places in ranks, but are not +required to keep the step; at <b>route order</b>, they are not required to +preserve silence. If halted from <b>route order</b>, the men stand at <b>rest</b>; +if halted from <b>at ease</b>, they remain at ease.</p> + +<p>Marching at <b>route order</b> or <b>at ease</b>, rifles are carried at will, the +muzzles elevated.</p> + +<p><b>62.</b> To resume the attention: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>ATTENTION</b>.</p> + +<p>If at a halt, the men take the position of the trooper, dismounted +(par. 59). If marching, the cadenced step in quick time is resumed, +and rifles, if carried, are brought to the right shoulder.</p> + +<p><b>63.</b> To dismiss the squad: <b>DISMISSED</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page061" name="page061"></a>(p. 061)</span> EYES RIGHT OR LEFT.</p> + +<p><b>64.</b> 1. <b>Eyes</b>, 2. <b>RIGHT</b>, 3. <b>FRONT</b>.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>right</b>, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed +on the line of eyes of the man in, or supposed to be in, the same +rank. At the command <b>front</b>, turn the head and eyes to the front.</p> + + +<p class="title">FACINGS.</p> + +<a id="img008" name="img008"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img008.jpg" width="200" height="480" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 1</span>, par. 67.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>65.</b> To the flank: 1. <b>Right</b>, 2. <b>FACE</b>.</p> + +<p>Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning +on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the +left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is +executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.</p> + +<p><b>66.</b> To the rear: 1. <b>About</b>, 2. <b>FACE</b>.</p> + +<p>Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot length to the rear +and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the +position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on +the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the +left.</p> + +<p><b>67.</b> 1. <b>Hand</b>, 2. <b>SALUTE</b>.</p> + +<p>Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress above the right eye, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45°, +hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the person +saluted.</p> + +<p>(<b>TWO</b>), Drop the arm smartly by the side. The salute for officers is +the same (Fig. <a href="#img008">1</a>).</p> + + +<p class="title">STEPS AND MARCHES.</p> + +<p><b>68.</b> All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step, +begin with the left foot.</p> + +<p><b>69.</b> The length of the full step in <b>quick time</b> is 30 inches, measured +from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per +minute.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page062" name="page062"></a>(p. 062)</span> The length of the full step in <b>double time</b> is 36 inches; the +cadence is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.</p> + +<p>The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by +calling <b>one</b>, <b>two</b>, <b>three</b>, <b>four</b>, or <b>left</b>, <b>right</b>, the instant the left +and right foot, respectively, should be planted.</p> + +<p><b>70.</b> All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed +in quick time unless the squad be marching in double time, or double +time be added to the command; in the latter case double time is added +to the preparatory command.</p> + +<p>Example: 1. <b>Forward, double time</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>.</p> + +<p><b>71.</b> It should be explained to the recruits that in collective drills +and exercises one of the troopers, termed the <b>guide</b>, habitually has to +follow a leader or direct himself upon some designated objective, the +other troopers regulating their march so as, in line, to march abreast +of the guide, maintaining their approximate intervals. The necessity, +in this connection, for learning to march steadily in a given +direction without wavering from side to side should further be pointed +out. Each recruit should then be practiced individually in marching +upon a designated objective, selecting for that purpose two points of +direction on the straight line that passes through the trooper and the +objective and keeping constantly in the prolongation of that line. +When the objective is sufficiently distinct it should be taken as one +of the points of direction and another point in line with the trooper +and the objective, and either nearer or more distant than the latter +be selected as a second point to fix the direction of march.</p> + + +<p class="title">QUICK TIME AND DOUBLE TIME.</p> + +<p><b>72.</b> Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>forward</b>, shift the weight of the body to the right leg, +left knee straight.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30 +inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without +shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as +above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page063" name="page063"></a>(p. 063)</span> <b>73.</b> Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march +forward in double time: 1. <b>Forward</b>, <b>double time</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight, of the body to +the right leg. At the command march, raise the forearms, fingers +closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line, take up an easy +run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural +swinging motion to the arms.</p> + +<p>If marching in quick time, at the command <b>MARCH</b>, given as either foot +strikes the ground, take one step in quick time and then step off in +double time.</p> + +<p><b>74.</b> To resume the quick time: 1. <b>Quick time</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, given as either foot strikes the ground, advance +and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick time, +dropping the hands by the sides.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO MARK TIME.</p> + +<p><b>75.</b> Being in march: 1. <b>Mark time</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, given as either foot strikes the ground, advance +and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and continue the +cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches and planting +it on line with the other.</p> + +<p>Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as +described above.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE HALF STEP.</p> + +<p><b>76.</b> 1. <b>Half step</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time.</p> + +<p><b>77. Forward</b>, <b>half step</b>, <b>halt</b>, and <b>mark time</b> may be executed one from +the other in quick or double time.</p> + +<p>To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title">SIDE STEP.</p> + +<p><b>78.</b> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <b>Right (left) step</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page064" name="page064"></a>(p. 064)</span> Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring +the left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of +quick time.</p> + +<p>The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time.</p> + +<p>If at order arms, the side step is executed <b>at trail</b> without other +command.</p> + + +<p class="title">BACK STEP.</p> + +<p><b>79.</b> Being at a halt or mark time: 1. <b>Backward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.</p> + +<p>The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time.</p> + +<p>If at order arms, the back step is executed <b>at trail</b> without other +command.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO HALT.</p> + +<p><b>80.</b> To stop the march in quick or double time: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <i>halt</i>, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant +the other foot as in marching; raise and place the rear foot by the +side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO MARCH BY THE FLANK.</p> + +<p><b>81.</b> Being in march: 1. <b>By the right (left) flank</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching, +and step off in the new direction with the right foot.</p> + +<p>This movement is not executed by <b>signal</b> except in <b>foragers</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO MARCH TO THE REAR.</p> + +<p><b>82.</b> Being in march: 1. <b>To the rear</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, turn to the right-about on the balls +of both feet, and immediately step off with the left foot.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page065" name="page065"></a>(p. 065)</span> If marching in double time, turn to the right-about, taking +four steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the +left foot.</p> + +<p>This movement is not executed by <b>signal</b> except in <b>foragers</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title">CHANGE STEP.</p> + +<p><b>83.</b> Being in march: 1. <b>Change step</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, given as the right, foot, strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, plant the toe of the right foot near +the heel of the left, and step off with the left foot.</p> + +<p>The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command <b>MARCH</b> +being given as the left foot strikes the ground.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO COUNT FOURS.</p> + +<p><b>84.</b> Being in line, at the command, <b>COUNT FOURS</b>, all the troopers in +the rank except the right trooper execute <b>eyes right</b> and, beginning on +the right, count successively <b>1</b>, <b>2</b>, <b>3</b>, <b>4</b>. Each turns his head and eyes +to the front as he counts.</p> + +<p>Fours may be counted at the halt or marching, mounted or dismounted, +in line or in column of twos or troopers. In counting fours in column +of twos or troopers the elements count off successively from front to +rear in the column and from right to left in each two. <b>Eyes right</b> is +not executed when counting fours from column of twos or troopers.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.</p> + +<p><b>85.</b> Being in line at a halt: 1. <b>Take intervals, to the right (left)</b>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, all face to the right and the leading trooper +steps off; the other men step off in succession, each following the +preceding trooper at four paces.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>halt</b>, given when all have their intervals, all halt +and face to the front.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page066" name="page066"></a>(p. 066)</span> <b>86.</b> Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. <b>Assemble to +the right (left)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> The trooper on the right stands fast. The +other troopers face to the right, close by the shortest line and face +to the front.</p> + +<p><b>87.</b> Being in line at a halt and fours having been counted: 1. <b>Take +distance</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>march</b>, No. 1 moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3, +and 4 in the order named, move straight to the front, each stepping +off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command halt is +given when all have their distances.</p> + +<p>If there be more than one No. 1, all the Nos. 1 move forward together, +guiding on the right trooper. The same principle applies to the other +numbers.</p> + +<p><b>88.</b> The normal interval and distance of 4 paces indicated, +respectively, in pars. 34 and 36, may be increased or diminished by +adding to the corresponding preparatory command the indication of the +interval or distance desired; thus: 1. <b>Take interval to the right at 1 +pace</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, etc.; 1. <b>Take distance, at 2 paces</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, etc.</p> + +<p><b>89.</b> Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. <b>Assemble</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to +their proper places in line.</p> + + +<h3>Individual Instruction with Arms.</h3> + +<p class="title">MANUAL OF THE RIFLE.</p> + +<p><b>90.</b> When the recruit has made fair progress in the instruction without +arms, including that required by par. 53, he is taught the manual of +arms. Instruction without arms and that with arms alternate.</p> + +<p><b>91.</b> The following rules govern the carrying of the rifle:</p> + +<p><b>First.</b> The rifle is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber +or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or +supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with +the <b>safety lock</b> turned to the "safe." At all other times it is carried +unlocked, with the trigger pulled.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page067" name="page067"></a>(p. 067)</span> <b>Second.</b> Whenever troops are formed under arms, rifles are +immediately inspected at the commands: 1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; 3. +<b>Order (right shoulder, port)</b>, 4. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>A. similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.</p> + +<p>If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed +and placed in the belt.</p> + +<p><b>Third.</b> The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are +actually used.</p> + +<p><b>Fourth. Fall in</b> is executed with the rifle at the order arms. <b>Fall +out</b>, <b>rest</b>, and <b>at ease</b> are executed as without arms. On resuming +<b>attention</b> the position of order arms is taken.</p> + +<p><b>Fifth.</b> If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the rifle is +brought to the right shoulder at the command <b>march</b>, the three motions +corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be executed at +<b>the trail</b> by prefacing the preparatory command with the words <b>at +trail</b>, as, 1. <b>At trail</b>, <b>forward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; the trail is taken at the +command <b>march</b>.</p> + +<p>When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval, +and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the rifle to the +trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.</p> + +<p><b>Sixth.</b> The rifle is brought to the order on halting. The execution of +the order begins when the halt is completed.</p> + +<p><b>Seventh.</b> A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without +arms.</p> + +<a id="img009" name="img009"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img009.jpg" width="150" height="382" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 2</span>, par. 92.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>92.</b> The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms:</p> + +<p><b>First.</b> In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of +gravity) the thumb clasps the rifle; the sling is included in the +grasp of the hand. (Figs. <a href="#img013">6</a>, <a href="#img019">12</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>Second.</b> In all positions of the rifle "diagonally across the body" the +position of the rifle, left arm, and hand are the same as in port +arms. (Fig. <a href="#img013">6</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>Third.</b> In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the +motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the rifle about 3 +inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and +near the right, steadying the rifle, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page068" name="page068"></a>(p. 068)</span> fingers extended and +joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers +of the right hand grasping the rifle. To complete the order, lower the +rifle gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly +by the side, and take the position of order arms. (Fig. <a href="#img009">2</a>.)</p> + +<p>Allowing the rifle to drop through the right hand to the ground, or +other similar abuse of the arm to produce effect in executing the +manual, is prohibited.</p> + +<p><b>Fourth.</b> The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits +are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the +motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become +accustomed to handling their rifles.</p> + +<p><b>Fifth.</b> The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are for the +purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail; +in this case the command of <b>execution</b> determines the prompt execution +of the first motion, and the commands, <b>two</b>, <b>three</b>, <b>four</b>, that of the +other motions.</p> + +<p>To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: <b>By +the numbers</b>; all movement divided into motions are then executed as +above explained until he cautions: <b>Without the numbers</b>; or commands +movements other than those in the manual of arms.</p> + +<p><b>Sixth.</b> Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the +manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the +previous position of the rifle.</p> + +<p>Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be +carried in any manner directed.</p> + +<a id="img010" name="img010"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img010.jpg" width="130" height="398" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 3</span>, par. 93.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img011" name="img011"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img011.jpg" width="140" height="376" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 4</span>, par. 93.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>93. Position of order arms, standing</b>: The butt rests evenly on the +ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and +touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand +holding the rifle between the thumb and fingers.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page069" name="page069"></a>(p. 069)</span> <b>94. Being at order arms</b>: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>With the right hand carry the rifle in front of the center of the +body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at +the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (<b>TWO</b>) +Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (Fig. <a href="#img012">5</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>95. Being at order arms</b>: 1. <b>Port</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the +small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up, +sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck +with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting +against the body; the rifle in a vertical plane parallel to the front. +(Fig. <a href="#img013">6</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>96. Being at present arms</b>: 1. <b>Port</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<a id="img012" name="img012"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img012.jpg" width="140" height="398" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 5</span>, par. 94.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img013" name="img013"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img013.jpg" width="150" height="384" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 6</span>, par. 95.</p> +</div> + +<p>Carry the rifle diagonally across the body and take the position of +port arms.</p> + +<p><b>97. Being at port arms</b>: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Carry the rifle to a vertical position in front of the center of the +body and take the position of present arms.</p> + +<p><b>98. Being at present or port arms</b>: 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the rifle to the right +with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the +lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last +position in coming to the order. (<b>TWO</b>) Complete the order.</p> + +<p><b>99. Being at order arms</b>: 1. <b>Right shoulder</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel +between the first two fingers. (<b>TWO</b>) Without changing the grasp of +the right hand, place the rifle <span class="pagenum"><a id="page070" name="page070"></a>(p. 070)</span> on the right shoulder, barrel +up and inclined at an angle of about 45° from the horizontal, trigger +guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the +rifle in a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left +hand, thumb, and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the +stock, tip of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist +straight and elbow down. (<b>THREE</b>) Drop the left hand by the side. (Fig. +<a href="#img014">7</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img014" name="img014"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img014.jpg" width="150" height="368" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 7</span>, par. 99.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>100. Being at right shoulder arms</b>: 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>) +Execute order arms as described from port arms.</p> + +<p><b>101. Being at port arms</b>: 1. <b>Right shoulder</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Change the right hand to the butt. (<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>) As in right shoulder +arms from <b>order arms</b>.</p> + +<p><b>102. Being at right shoulder arms</b>: 1. <b>Port</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (<b>TWO</b>) Change the +right hand to the small of the stock.</p> + +<p><b>103. Being at right shoulder arms</b>: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Execute port arms. (<b>THREE</b>) Execute present arms.</p> + +<p><b>104. Being at present arms</b>: 1. <b>Right shoulder</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Execute port arms. (<b>TWO</b>), (<b>THREE</b>), (<b>FOUR</b>). Execute right shoulder arms +as from port arms.</p> + +<p><b>105. Being at port arms</b>: 1. <b>Left shoulder</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Carry the rifle with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder, +barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same +time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second +fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (<b>TWO</b>) Drop the right +hand by the side.</p> + +<p><b>Left shoulder arms</b> may be ordered directly from the order, right +shoulder, or present, or the reverse. At the command <b>Arms</b> execute <b>port +arms</b> and continue in cadence to the position ordered.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page071" name="page071"></a>(p. 071)</span> <b>106. Being at left shoulder arms</b>: 1. <b>Port</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Grasp the rifle with the right hand at the small of the stock. (<b>TWO</b>) +Carry the rifle to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the +left and take the position of port arms.</p> + +<p><b>107. Being at order arms</b>: 1. <b>Parade</b>, 2. <b>REST.</b></p> + +<p>Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly +bent; carry the muzzle In front of the center of the body, barrel to +the left; grasp the rifle with the left hand just below the stacking +swivel and with the right hand below and against the left. (Fig. <a href="#img015">8</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>Being at parade rest</b>: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>ATTENTION.</b></p> + +<p>Resume the order, the left hand quitting the rifle opposite the right +hip.</p> + +<a id="img015" name="img015"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img015.jpg" width="130" height="320" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 8</span>, par. 107.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>108. Being at order arms.</b> 1. <b>Trail</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Raise the rifle, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle +forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30° with the +vertical. (Fig. <a href="#img016">9</a>.)</p> + +<p>When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the +rifle may be grasped at the balance and muzzle lowered until the rifle +is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.</p> + +<a id="img016" name="img016"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img016.jpg" width="130" height="336" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 9</span>, par. 108.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>109. Being at trail arms</b>: 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>Lower the rifle with the right hand and resume the order.</p> + + +<p class="title">RIFLE SALUTE.</p> + +<p><b>110. Being at right shoulder arms</b>: 1. <b>Rifle</b>, 2. <b>SALUTE.</b></p> + +<a id="img018" name="img018"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img018.jpg" width="130" height="332" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 11</span>, par. 111.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img017" name="img017"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img017.jpg" width="130" height="325" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 10</span>, par. 110.</p> +</div> + +<p>Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm +horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers <span class="pagenum"><a id="page072" name="page072"></a>(p. 072)</span> +extended and joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look +toward the person saluted. (<b>TWO</b>) Drop left hand by the side; turn head +and eyes to the front. (Fig. <a href="#img017">10</a>.)</p> + +<p>With the rifle on the left shoulder, the salute is rendered in a +corresponding manner with the right hand.</p> + +<p><b>111. Being at order or trail arms</b>: 1. <b>Rifle</b>, 2. <b>SALUTE.</b></p> + +<p>Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against the rifle +near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (<b>TWO</b>) Drop the left +hand by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front. (Fig. <a href="#img018">11</a>.)</p> + + +<p class="title">THE INSPECTION.</p> + +<p><b>112. Being at order arms</b>: 1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>At the second command, take the position of port arms. (<b>TWO</b>) Seize the +bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn the +handle up, draw the bolt back and glance at the chamber. Having found +the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes to +the front. (Fig. <a href="#img019">12</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img019" name="img019"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img019.jpg" width="130" height="332" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 12</span>, par. 112.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>113. Being at inspection arms</b>: 1. <b>Order (right shoulder, port)</b>, 2. +<b>ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms +complete the movement ordered.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO DISMISS.</p> + +<p><b>114. Being at halt</b>: 1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <b>Port</b>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>, 5. +<b>DISMISSED.</b></p> + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page073" name="page073"></a>(p. 073)</span> TO STACK AND TAKE ARMS.</p> + +<p><b>115.</b> Three rifles only are used to make a stack; rifles not so used +are, in this connection, termed loose rifles.</p> + +<p><b>Being in line at a halt</b>: <b>STACK ARMS.</b></p> + +<p><b>At the command stack</b>, No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2, No. 2 raises +his rifle with the right hand, grasps it with the left at the upper +band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle +inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval +on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel; +No. 3 then passes his rifle, barrel to the rear, to No. 2, who grasps +it between the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 +feet in advance of that of his own rifle and opposite the right of the +interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and +forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of +his own rifle; No. 1 raises his rifle with the right hand, carries it +well forward, barrel to the front, the left hand guiding the stacking +swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel of his own rifle with the +free hook of that of No. 3; he then turns the barrel outward into the +angle formed by the other two rifles and lowers the butt to the ground +to the right of and against the toe of his right shoe. No. 2 lays +loose rifles on the stack; No. 3 resumes his place in line. When each +man has finished handling rifles, he takes the position of attention. +The instructor may then rest or dismiss the squad, leaving the arms +stacked.</p> + +<p>On re-forming, the men take their places in rear of the stacks.</p> + +<p><b>116. Being in line, behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS.</b></p> + +<p>No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2; No. 2 returns the loose rifles, +then grasps his own rifle with the left hand, the rifle of No. 3 with +his right hand, grasping both between the bands; No. 1 grasps his +rifle in the same way with the right hand. No. 1 disengages his rifle +by raising the butt from the ground and then turning the rifle to the +right, detaches it from the stack; No. 2 disengages and detaches his +rifle by turning it to the left, and then passes the rifle of No. 3 to +him; No. 3 resumes his place in line; all resume the order.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page074" name="page074"></a>(p. 074)</span> KNEELING AND LYING DOWN.</p> + +<p><b>117.</b> If standing: <b>KNEEL</b>.</p> + +<p>Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left +rear of the left heel; kneel on the right knee, sitting as nearly as +possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; rifle +remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the +lower band. This is the position of <b>order arms</b>, kneeling. (Fig. <a href="#img020">13</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img020" name="img020"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img020.jpg" width="150" height="211" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 13</span>, par. 117.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img021" name="img021"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img021.jpg" width="250" height="77" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 14</span>, par. 118.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>118.</b> If standing or kneeling: <b>LIE DOWN</b>.</p> + +<p>Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot +and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35° to the right; +rifle horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the +front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand +grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the +position of <b>order arms</b>, lying down. (Fig. <a href="#img021">14</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>119.</b> If kneeling or lying down: <b>RISE</b>.</p> + +<p>If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the +left heel.</p> + +<p>If lying down, raise the body on both knees; stand up, faced to the +front, on the ground marked by the knees.</p> + +<p><b>120.</b> If lying down: <b>KNEEL</b>.</p> + +<p>Raise the body on both knees, take the position of kneel. When +deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken instead of +the position kneeling.</p> + + +<h3>II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.</h3> + +<p><b>23.</b> The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the +same as already given for movements without the rifle.</p> + +<p><b>24.</b> The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands:</p> + +<a id="img022" name="img022"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img022.jpg" width="250" height="330" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 15</span>, par. 24.</p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page075" name="page075"></a>(p. 075)</span> 1. <b>Bayonet exercise</b>, 2. <b>GUARD</b>.</p> + +<p>At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the +game time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with +the left hand just below the lower hand, fingers between the stock and +gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping +the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip, +elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.</p> + +<p><b>25.</b> 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>.</p> + +<p>Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of +order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention.</p> + +<p><b>26.</b> During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be +executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they +may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held.</p> + + +<p class="title">ATTACKS.</p> + +<p><b>27.</b> 1. <b>THRUST</b>.</p> + +<a id="img023" name="img023"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img023.jpg" width="300" height="244" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 16</span>, par. 27.</p> +</div> + +<p>Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm, +turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at +the point to be attacked, but covering the right forearm. At the same +time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the +body forward and on the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page076" name="page076"></a>(p. 076)</span> left leg, the ball of the right foot +always on the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.</p> + +<p>The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm, +the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the +attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach, +chest, head, neck, and limbs.</p> + +<p><b>28. 1. LUNGE.</b></p> + +<a id="img024" name="img024"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img024.jpg" width="220" height="311" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 17</span>, par. 29.</p> +</div> + +<p>Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot +is carried forward about twice its length. The left <span class="pagenum"><a id="page077" name="page077"></a>(p. 077)</span> heel must +always be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately +without command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot +if for any reason it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. +In the latter case the preparatory command forward will be given. Each +method should be practiced.</p> + +<p><b>29.</b> 1. <b>Butt</b>, 2. <b>STRIKE.</b></p> + +<p>Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle +against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about +the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the +rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.</p> + +<p>The points of attack in their order of importance are head, neck, +stomach, and crotch.</p> + +<a id="img025" name="img025"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img025.jpg" width="400" height="272" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 18</span>, par. 28.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>30.</b> 1. <b>Cut</b>, 2. <b>DOWN.</b></p> + +<p>Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of +attack. Guard is resumed without command.</p> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page078" name="page078"></a>(p. 078)</span> + +<a id="img026" name="img026"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img026.jpg" width="100" height="481" alt="" title=""> +<p>Par. 19.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img027" name="img027"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img027.jpg" width="134" height="480" alt="" title=""> +<p>Par. 20.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>31.</b> 1. <b>Cut</b>, 2. <b>RIGHT (LEFT).</b></p> + +<p>With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left), +directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without +command.</p> + +<p>The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an +enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false, +or back, edge is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in +continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries.</p> + +<p><b>32.</b> To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will +change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for +example: 1. <b>To the right rear</b>, 2. <b>Cut</b>, 3. <b>DOWN</b>; 1. <b>To the right</b>, 2. +<b>LUNGE</b>; 1. <b>To the left</b>, 2. <b>THRUST</b>, etc.</p> + +<p>Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the +body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best +accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page079" name="page079"></a>(p. 079)</span> These movements constitute a change of front in which the +position of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.</p> + +<p><b>33.</b> Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting and +lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings or +other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably +suspended at desired heights.</p> + +<p><b>34.</b> The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by +endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by +directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.</p> + +<p><b>35.</b> The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance +offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will +be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.</p> + +<p><b>36.</b> Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the +execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the +bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can +be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely +together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is +preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc., +are also suitable.</p> + +<p class="title">DEFENSES.</p> + +<p><b>37.</b> In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard is +resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become +proficient the instructor will cause them to resume the position of +guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.</p> + +<p><b>38.</b> 1. <b>Parry</b>, 2. <b>RIGHT.</b></p> + +<p>Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply +to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6 +inches to the right.</p> + +<p><b>39.</b> 1. <b>Parry</b>, 2. <b>LEFT.</b></p> + +<p>Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to +cover the point attacked.</p> + +<div class="floatleft"> +<a id="img028" name="img028"></a> +<img src="images/img028.jpg" width="350" height="516" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 21</span>, par. 40.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>40.</b> 1. <b>Parry</b>, 2. <b>HIGH.</b></p> + +<p>Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of +vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page080" name="page080"></a>(p. 080)</span> When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may +be supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This +position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations, +such as men mounted or on top of parapets.</p> + +<p><b>41.</b> 1. <b>Low parry</b>, 2. <b>RIGHT (LEFT).</b> Carry the point of the bayonet down +until it is at the height of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet +sufficiently to the right (left), to keep the opponent's attacks clear +of the point threatened.</p> + +<p>These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist leaves the +head and body exposed.</p> + +<a id="img029" name="img029"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img029.jpg" width="212" height="450" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 22</span>, par. 41.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img030" name="img030"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img030.jpg" width="261" height="450" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 23</span>, par. 41.</p> +</div> + +<p class="nofloat"><b>42.</b> Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short +motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far +as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against butt +strike are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point +attacked.</p> + +<p><b>43.</b> To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the +soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most +convenient manner; for example: 1. <b>To the left rear</b>, 2. <b>Parry</b>, 3. +<b>HIGH</b>; 1. <b>To the right</b>, 2. <b>Parry</b>, 3. <b>RIGHT</b>, etc.</p> + +<p>These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of +guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.</p> + +<p>In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is +danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a +vertical position.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page081" name="page081"></a>(p. 081)</span> III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.</h3> + +<p><b>44.</b> 1. <b>Club rifle</b>, 2. <b>SWING.</b></p> + +<p>Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn +the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and +muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at +the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the +opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and +knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet, +shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity. +<b>SWING.</b> Tighten <span class="pagenum"><a id="page082" name="page082"></a>(p. 082)</span> the grasp Of the hands and swing the rifle to +the front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent, and +immediately return to the position of club rifle by completing the +swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command, +<b>SWING</b>.</p> + +<p>The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any +guard or parry that may be interposed.</p> + +<p>Being at club rifle, order arms is resumed by command.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page083" name="page083"></a>(p. 083)</span> The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is +prohibited.</p> + +<a id="img031" name="img031"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img031.jpg" width="242" height="400" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 24</span>, par. 44.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img032" name="img032"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img032.jpg" width="257" height="450" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 25</span>, par. 44.</p> +</div> + +<p class="nofloat"><b>45.</b> The position of <b>club rifle</b> may be taken from any position of the +rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in +personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of +the bayonet.</p> + + +<h3>IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.</h3> + +<p><b>46.</b> The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous +attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained, by the single +movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the +reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an +attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of +the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied +by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to +the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses.</p> + +<p><b>47.</b> Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. The +instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are to +be combined as <b>two movements</b> or <b>three movements</b>. The execution is, +determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard is +taken upon the completion of the last movement only.</p> + +<p class="center">EXAMPLES.</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li><b>Front pass and LUNGE.</b></li> +<li><b>Right step and THRUST.</b></li> +<li><b>Left step and low parry RIGHT.</b></li> +<li><b>Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.</b></li> +<li><b>Lunge and cut RIGHT.</b></li> +<li><b>Parry right and parry HIGH.</b></li> +<li><b>Butt strike and cut DOWN.</b></li> +<li><b>Thrust and parry HIGH.</b></li> +<li><b>Parry high and LUNGE.</b></li> +<li><b>Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.</b></li> +<li><b>Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.</b></li> +<li><b>To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.</b></li> +<li><b>To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.</b></li> +</ul> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page084" name="page084"></a>(p. 084)</span> <b>48.</b> Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach +will be made against the dummies both in quick time and double time.</p> + + +<h3>V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.</h3> + +<p><b>49.</b> The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as far +as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exercises.</p> + +<p><b>50.</b> The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme +importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack +fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the +opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent +on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take +the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the +offensive and take immediate advantage of it.</p> + +<p><b>51.</b> Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. Time +for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single +hasty glance.</p> + +<p><b>52.</b> In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be +plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point +of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night +attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body.</p> + +<p><b>53.</b> Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The +point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in +the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to +the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for +attack or defense.</p> + +<p><b>54.</b> Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand. +His position of guard will not differ materially from that described +in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be +at a great disadvantage.</p> + +<p><b>55.</b> The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly +useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can +strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle.</p> + +<p><b>56.</b> Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the +muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's <span class="pagenum"><a id="page085" name="page085"></a>(p. 085)</span> +energies will be directed toward getting past the bayonet Attack him +with short, stabbing thrusts and keep him beyond striking distance of +his weapon.</p> + +<p><b>57.</b> The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and +lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and +advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp +parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed +to a counter attack, which should follow promptly.</p> + +<p><b>58.</b> Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage by +grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from behind.</p> + +<p><b>59.</b> In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must be +made to get on his near, or left, side, because here his reach is much +shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such +an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman.</p> + +<p><b>60.</b> In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best +observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach +generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within +attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle +of his body.</p> + + +<h3>VI. FENCING EXERCISES.</h3> + +<p><b>61.</b> Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts, +parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the +opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.</p> + +<p><b>62.</b> The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before +the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such +condition as will prevent accidents.</p> + +<p><b>63.</b> The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order, +facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a +distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as +number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense.</p> + +<p><b>64.</b> The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor +commands: <b>SALUTE.</b></p> + +<p>Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to +the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and <span class="pagenum"><a id="page086" name="page086"></a>(p. 086)</span> fingers +extended and joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the +bayonet. (Two.) Drop the arm smartly by the side.</p> + +<p>This salute is the fencing salute.</p> + +<p>All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will +begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.</p> + +<p><b>65.</b> After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor +commands: 1. <b>Fencing exercise</b>, 2. <b>GUARD.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>guard</b> each man comes to the position of <b>guard</b>, +heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing +lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the +opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the <b>engage</b> or <b>engage +right</b>.</p> + +<p><b>66.</b> Being at the engage right: <b>ENGAGE LEFT.</b></p> + +<p>The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each +man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding +portion of the opponent's bayonet.</p> + +<p><b>67.</b> Being at engage left: <b>ENGAGE RIGHT.</b></p> + +<p>The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +left and engages.</p> + +<p><b>68.</b> Being engaged: <b>ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT</b>.</p> + +<p>The attack <b>engages left</b> and then immediately <b>engages right</b>.</p> + +<p><b>69.</b> Being engaged left: <b>ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT</b>.</p> + +<p>The attack <b>engages right</b> and then immediately <b>engages left</b>.</p> + +<p><b>70.</b> 1. <b>Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)</b>; 2. <b>Number two, COUNTER.</b></p> + +<p>Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly +drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original +position.</p> + +<p><b>71.</b> In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage a +certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the +play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This +is necessary to prevent the opponent <span class="pagenum"><a id="page087" name="page087"></a>(p. 087)</span> from divining the +intended attack. It also prevents his using the point of contact as a +pivot for his assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the +movement is controlled by the left hand, the right remaining +stationary.</p> + +<p><b>72.</b> After some exercise in engage, engage left, and counter, exercises +will be given in the assaults.</p> + + +<p class="title">ASSAULTS.</p> + +<p><b>73.</b> The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, as +head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the +knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are +first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at +the command assault. Number one executes the attack, and number two +parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one +parries.</p> + +<p><b>74.</b> For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into <b>simple +attacks</b>, <b>counter attacks</b>, <b>attacks on the rifle</b>, and <b>feints</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title">SIMPLE ATTACKS.</p> + +<p><b>75.</b> Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There +are three simple attacks—the <b>straight</b>, the <b>disengagement</b>, and the +<b>counter disengagement</b>. They are not preceded by a feint.</p> + +<p><b>76.</b> In the <b>straight</b> the bayonet is directed straight at an opening +from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may or +may not be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low, +contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the +attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in +the engage may be continued in the attack.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number one, at neck</b> (head, +chest, right leg, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right</b>; 3. +<b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>77.</b> In the <b>disengagement</b> contact with the opponent's rifle is +abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over his +bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This attack +is delivered by one continuous spiral <span class="pagenum"><a id="page088" name="page088"></a>(p. 088)</span> movement of the bayonet +from the moment contact is abandoned.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number one, at stomach</b> (left +chest, left leg, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry left</b> (etc.); 3. +<b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>78.</b> In the <b>counter disengagement</b> a swift attack is made into the +opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the +engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral +movement of the bayonet into the opening.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage right</b>, 1. <b>Number two, engage left</b>; 2. +<b>Number one, at chest, thrust</b>; 3. <b>Number two, parry left</b>; 4. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p>Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the +opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry.</p> + +<p><b>79.</b> A <b>counter attack</b> or <b>return</b> is one made instantly after or in +continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible. +This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter +parry. The counter attack should also be made at or just before the +full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made a +simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the +opponent's body.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number two, at chest, lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number +one, parry right</b>, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 3. +<b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + + +<p class="title">ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE.</p> + +<p><b>80.</b> These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing +an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the <b>press</b>, the +<b>beat</b>, and the <b>twist</b>.</p> + +<p><b>81.</b> In the <b>press</b> the attack quickly presses against the opponent's +bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack +is delivered.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, press</b>, and at chest, +<b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>82.</b> The attack by <b>disengagement</b> is particularly effective following +the <b>press</b>.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, press</b>, and at stomach, +<b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, low parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page089" name="page089"></a>(p. 089)</span> <b>83.</b> The <b>beat</b> is an attack in which a sharp blow, is struck +against the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose +an opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when +there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, beat</b>, and at stomach +(chest, etc.), <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>84.</b> In the <b>twist</b> the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or +bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a +straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength +on the part of the attack.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the engage, 1. <b>Number one, twist</b>, and at stomach, +<b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, low parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + + +<p class="title">FEINTS.</p> + +<p><b>85.</b> Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are +made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the +desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according +to the number of such movements made by the attack.</p> + +<p><b>86.</b> In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force +as possible is put into a feint.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, feint head thrust</b>; at +stomach, <b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry right and low parry right</b>; 3. +<b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p>Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes +both parries.</p> + +<p><b>87.</b> In double feints first one part of the body and then another is +threatened and a third attacked.</p> + +<p>Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, feint straight thrust</b> at +chest; <b>disengagement</b> at chest; at stomach, <b>lunge</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry +right, parry left</b>, and <b>low parry left</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>88.</b> An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the +<b>press</b> or <b>beat</b>.</p> + +<p><b>89.</b> In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When +the defense is able to judge or divine the character <span class="pagenum"><a id="page090" name="page090"></a>(p. 090)</span> of the +attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a +counter feint.</p> + +<p><b>90.</b> A <b>counter feint</b> is a feint following the opponent's feint or +following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined +movements.</p> + + +<p class="title">COMBINED MOVEMENTS.</p> + +<p><b>91.</b> When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various foot +movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor +combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession, +increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more +skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.</p> + +<p>1. Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, by disengagement</b> at +chest, <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry left, right step</b> (left foot +first), and <b>lunge</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p>2. Example: Being at <b>engage left</b>, 1. <b>Number one, press and lunge</b>; 2. +<b>Number two, parry right, left step</b>, and <b>thrust</b>; 3. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p>3. Example: Being at the <b>engage</b>, 1. <b>Number one, by disengagement</b> at +chest, <b>thrust</b>; 2. <b>Number two, parry left, front pass</b>, and at head <b>butt +strike</b>; 3. <b>Number one, right step</b>; 4. <b>ASSAULT.</b></p> + +<p><b>92.</b> Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as <b>cross counters</b>, +and example No. 3 of movements known as <b>close counters</b>.</p> + +<p><b>93.</b> A <b>chancery</b> is an attack by means of which the opponent is +disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which +disables his weapon.</p> + +<p><b>94.</b> When the different combinations are executed with sufficient skill +the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized and +executed at the command <b>assault</b>. The accuracy and celerity of the +movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to +the correction of faulty execution.</p> + +<p><b>95.</b> It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to +leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of +instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the +object of the drill.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page091" name="page091"></a>(p. 091)</span> VII. FENCING AT WILL.</h3> + +<p><b>96.</b> As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to +the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men, +each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself. +Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random +attacks and defenses.</p> + +<p><b>97.</b> The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a time. +Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn different +methods of attack and defense from each other.</p> + +<p><b>98.</b> The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a +view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards +everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the +movements, and quick perception of the adversary's intentions.</p> + +<p><b>99.</b> Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodging +to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be +continually encouraged.</p> + +<p><b>100.</b> In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents facing +each other at the position of order arms, <b>salute</b>. They then +immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles +engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his +opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided +before the salute.</p> + +<p><b>101.</b> The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing salute +having been rendered, the instructor commands, 1. <b>At will</b>, 2. <b>ASSAULT</b>, +after which either party has the right to attack. To interrupt the +contest the instructor will command, <b>HALT</b>, at which the combatants +will immediately come to the order. To terminate the contest, the +instructor will command, 1. <b>Halt</b>, 2. <b>SALUTE</b>, at which the combatants +will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove their masks.</p> + +<p><b>102.</b> When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one +opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at +charge bayonet, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver an +attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor +commands, <b>HALT</b>, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in +assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double +time from <span class="pagenum"><a id="page092" name="page092"></a>(p. 092)</span> a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from +a distance not exceeding 30 yards.</p> + +<p><b>103.</b> The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide +doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest +indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment +on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies, and +explain how they may be avoided in the future.</p> + +<p><b>104.</b> As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield the +rifle left handed—that is, on the left side of the body, left hand at +the small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to +advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.</p> + +<a id="img033" name="img033"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img033.jpg" width="453" height="450" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 26</span>, par. 104.</p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page093" name="page093"></a>(p. 093)</span> <b>105.</b> After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given +in fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When +practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character.</p> + +<p>In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of +umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at +once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the +numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required +in group fencing.</p> + + +<p class="title">RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL.</p> + +<p><b>106.</b> 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit +counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient +force to disable.</p> + +<p>2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."</p> + +<p>3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A +position of engage is taken.</p> + +<p>4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only +when the first hit was not called.</p> + +<p>5. When it is necessary to stop the contest—for example, because of +breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection—take the +position of the order.</p> + +<p>6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will +not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend +himself.</p> + +<p>7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.</p> + +<p>8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.</p> + + +<p class="title">SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL.</p> + +<p><b>107.</b> When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's position +and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if +possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out +and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack is +to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then +make the real attack.</p> + +<p><b>108.</b> Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are +difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach <span class="pagenum"><a id="page094" name="page094"></a>(p. 094)</span> +and more exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, +as there is no previous warning of its delivery, although it should +always be expected. Returns are made, without lunging if the adversary +can be reached by thrusts or cuts.</p> + +<p><b>109.</b> Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without +knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and +leads to instinctive returns—that is, habitual returns with certain +attacks from certain parries—a fault which the skilled opponent will +soon discover.</p> + +<p><b>110.</b> Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging.</p> + +<p><b>111.</b> The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many +forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible. +Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted.</p> + + +<p class="title">HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS.</p> + +<p><b>112.</b> The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of +his weapon, not only to show the various movements but also to lead in +the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and +arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as +instructors by fencing with each other.</p> + +<p><b>113.</b> The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his +degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor +is demonstrating the combinations, feints returns, and parries the +rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil, +and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil +exposes himself too much in the feints and parries, the instructor +will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be +too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious +and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to +teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill.</p> + +<p><b>114.</b> Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and +fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of +such opportunities.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page095" name="page095"></a>(p. 095)</span> SUGGESTIONS.</p> + +<p>Instruction in bayonet exercise and bayonet fencing should be +conducted with a view to teaching the aggressive use of the bayonet. +Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the bayonet that they +believe that with it they are superior to their opponents it will be +difficult or impossible to develop that morale which is necessary for +a successful assault. Men should be impressed with the importance of +acting always on the offensive in bayonet combat, of pushing their +attack with all their might. Troops which are successful in their +first few bayonet encounters will seldom thereafter be called upon to +use the bayonet—their opponents will not await the assault.</p> + + +<p class="title">LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.</p> + +<p><b>121.</b> The commands for loading and firing are the same whether +standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at +a halt.</p> + +<p>The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.</p> + +<p>Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only.</p> + +<p><b>122.</b> Rifles having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without command +until the command <b>unload</b> or <b>inspection arms</b>, fresh clips being +inserted when the magazine is exhausted.</p> + +<p><b>123.</b> The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be +done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated +before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the +target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such cases the battle +sight is used if no sight setting is announced. The troopers must be +practiced repeatedly in locating targets, making the appropriate sight +settings, and simulating fire on the target indicated.</p> + +<p><b>124.</b> The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight +setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be +repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.</p> + +<p>Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or +target designated and at the sight setting announced until a change +is ordered.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page096" name="page096"></a>(p. 096)</span> <b>125.</b> If the men are not already in the position of load, that +position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the +announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command +for firing.</p> + +<p><b>126.</b> When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing +is discretionary with each man.</p> + +<p><b>127.</b> The correct estimation of distances is of great importance in +connection with all rifle firing except that at short ranges. +Instruction of the recruit in this phase of training must not be +delayed until range firing is taken up, but should be begun in the +early instruction and carried forward progressively, thus gradually +developing the faculties involved. In the same way the occasional +firing of a few shots, first with blank cartridges and later with ball +cartridges at short range and under conditions permitting very careful +detailed supervision of each man's position, will be found of +exceptional value as a preliminary exercise to the course of range +firing prescribed for recruits. Detailed directions for conducting the +instruction of the recruit in estimating distances and in rifle firing +are prescribed in the <b>Small Arms Firing Manual</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO LOAD.</p> + +<p><b>128.</b> Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. <b>With dummy (blank or +ball) cartridges</b>, 2. <b>LOAD.</b></p> + +<a id="img034" name="img034"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img034.jpg" width="150" height="123" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 27</span>, par. 128.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img035" name="img035"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img035.jpg" width="150" height="249" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 28</span>, par. 128.</p> +</div> + +<p>At the command load each trooper faces half right and carries the +right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure +the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body, raises or lowers the +rifle and drops it into the left hand at the balance, left thumb +extended along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, and +turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt +back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, +places the thumb on the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page097" name="page097"></a>(p. 097)</span> powder space of the top cartridge, +the fingers extending around the rifle and tips resting on the +magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by +pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip thrusts the +bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the +"safe"; and carries the hand to the small of the stock.</p> + +<p>A skirmish line may load while moving, the rifles being held as nearly +as practicable in the position of load.</p> + +<p>If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the +elbows are supported by the knees; if lying down, the left hand +steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt +resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.</p> + +<p>For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down) +are designated as that of load. (Figs. <a href="#img022">15</a>, <a href="#img023">16</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>129.</b> For instruction in loading: 1. <b>Simulate</b>, 2. <b>LOAD.</b></p> + +<p>Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains "off" and +the handling of cartridges is simulated.</p> + +<p>The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; after a +few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges may +be used.</p> + +<p><b>130.</b> The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine +"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or +"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the +proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to +be regarded as exceptional.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO UNLOAD.</p> + +<p><b>131. UNLOAD.</b></p> + +<p>Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt +alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. +After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first +thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding +it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and +back to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the bolt home; +the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and +returned to the belt, and the rifle is brought to the order.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page098" name="page098"></a>(p. 098)</span> TO SET THE SIGHT.</p> + +<p><b>132. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, ETC.), or BATTLE SIGHT.</b></p> + +<p>The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains +and verifies sight settings.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO FIRE BY VOLLEY.</p> + +<p><b>133.</b> 1. <b>READY</b>, 2. <b>AIM</b>, 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>FIRE.</b></p> + +<a id="img036" name="img036"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img036.jpg" width="150" height="204" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 29</span>, par. 133.</p> +</div> + +<p>At the command ready, turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the +command aim, raise the rifle with both hands and support the butt +firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping +the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the rifle, right +elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a +little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right +eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the +object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against +the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight +is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.</p> + +<p>In aiming kneeling the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of +elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting the elbows are supported +by the knees.</p> + +<p>In aiming lying down raise the rifle with both hands, rest on both +elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.</p> + +<p class="nofloat"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page099" name="page099"></a>(p. 099)</span> At the command <b>fire</b>, press the finger against the trigger; +fire without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the +rifle; lower the rifle to the position of load and load. (Figs. <a href="#img024">17</a>, +<a href="#img025">18</a>, <a href="#img026">19</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img037" name="img037"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img037.jpg" width="200" height="179" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 30</span>, par. 133.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img038" name="img038"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img038.jpg" width="200" height="53" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 31</span>, par. 133.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>134.</b> To continue the firing: 1. <b>AIM</b>, 2. <b>Squad</b>, 3. <b>FIRE.</b></p> + +<p>Each command is executed as previously explained. Load (from magazine) +is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right +hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready."</p> + + +<p class="title nofloat">TO FIRE AT WILL.</p> + +<p><b>135. FIRE AT WILL.</b></p> + +<p>Each man, independently of the other, comes to the <b>ready</b>, aims +carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, fires, +loads, and continues the firing until ordered to <b>suspend</b> or <b>cease +firing</b>.</p> + +<p><b>136.</b> To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the +Instructor shouts: <b>FASTER (SLOWER)</b>.</p> + +<p>Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at +effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum +of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate +the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to battle +conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO FIRE BY CLIP.</p> + +<p><b>137. CLIP FIRE.</b></p> + +<p>Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that each man, +after having exhausted the cartridges then in the rifle, <i>suspends +firing</i>.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO SUSPEND FIRING.</p> + +<p><b>138.</b> The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle and repeats +same, if necessary, or commands: <b>SUSPEND FIRING</b>.</p> + +<p>Firing stops; rifles are held, loaded, and locked in a position of +readiness for instant resumption of firing, sights unchanged. The men +continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at which +the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page100" name="page100"></a>(p. 100)</span> This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to cease +firing.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO CEASE FIRING.</p> + +<p><b>139. CEASE FIRING.</b></p> + +<p>Firing stops; rifles not already there are brought to the position of +load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge +is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights +are laid down, and the rifle is brought to the order.</p> + +<p><b>Cease firing</b> is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position or to steady the men.</p> + +<p><b>140.</b> Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time +after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has +actually commenced or not.</p> + + +<p class="title">TARGET DESIGNATION.</p> + +<p><b>141.</b> In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they +should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming +point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a +designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone +position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked +eye and with field glasses.</p> + +<p>Owing to the invariable custom of attempting to conceal fire trenches, +it is necessary to have some ready method of indicating the exact +location of an indistinct pit or trench occupied or supposed to be +occupied by an enemy in order that effective fire may be opened. The +so-called clock system furnishes one of the simplest devices for so +doing. Two methods of applying this system are indicated below.</p> + +<p><b>First method</b>: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be +horizontal, its center at the <i>firing point</i> and the center-XII line +of the dial perpendicular to the front of the firing line.</p> + +<p>To designate a target the commander announces, for example: <b>Target at +11 o'clock, range 800 yards, a trench.</b> Each man looks along the +center-11 o'clock line of his imaginary dial, estimates the distance +(800 yards) along that line, and thereby locates the trench.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page101" name="page101"></a>(p. 101)</span> In this method it is necessary that the target be visible to +the naked eye and that each man be able to estimate distances with +fair accuracy.</p> + +<p><b>Second method</b>: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be +vertical, its center being at a prominent, distant point selected by +the commander and called the <b>reference point</b>.</p> + +<p>To designate a target the commander announces, for example: <b>Reference +point, that clump of trees on hill crest.</b> When the men have located +the reference point he announces: <b>Target at 4 o'clock, 2 finger +widths, range 1,000 yards, a gun pit.</b> By a finger width is meant the +distance on the face of the assumed vertical clock (actually on the +landscape) intercepted by the breadth of a man's finger held +perpendicularly to his hand and arm, the latter being fully extended +in the direction of the reference point.</p> + +<p>Each man looks along the center-4 o'clock line of the imaginary +(vertical) dial, measures, on this line, a point distant 2 +finger-widths from the reference point (the center of the dial), and +thus locates the gun pit.</p> + +<p>A combination of the two methods may be necessary when, in using the +second method, the reference point is not readily identified. Thus, in +the case mentioned, it may, for example, be necessary to say: +<b>Reference point at 1 o'clock, clump of trees on hill crest.</b></p> + +<p>In both methods the sequence of commands laid down should be observed.</p> + +<p>Various devices for pointing out indistinct targets may be improvised +and used.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE USE OF COVER.</p> + +<p><b>142.</b> The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual +use of cover.</p> + +<p>It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural +cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy; +if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as +practicable, taking advantage of any available cover while setting +the sights, firing, or advancing.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page102" name="page102"></a>(p. 102)</span> To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time +concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in +simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching +positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from +depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to +fire around the right side of his concealment whenever practicable, +or, when this is not practicable, to rise enough to fire over the top +of his concealment.</p> + +<p>When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with +reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper +position for firing.</p> + +<p><b>143.</b> The disadvantage of remaining too long in one place, however good +the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance +from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his +concealment.</p> + +<p>It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an +enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from +a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and +throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing +from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle +grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right +leg.</p> + +<p>He should be taught that when fired on while acting independently, he +should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his +enemy; also that in the sun he is visible to a much greater degree +than when in the shade.</p> + +<p>The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued in +combat exercises of the squad and platoon, but he must then be taught +that the proper advance of the platoon or troop and the effectiveness +of its fire is of greater importance than the question of cover for +individuals <i>should the two considerations conflict</i>. He should also +be taught that he may not move about or shift his position in the +firing line except to get a better view of the target.</p> + + +<p class="title">OBSERVATION.</p> + +<p><b>144.</b> In order to develop the faculty of rapid and accurate +observation, which is of great importance in campaign, the recruit +should be trained in taking notice of his surroundings, at first from +selected positions and later at the various gaits.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page103" name="page103"></a>(p. 103)</span> He should be practiced under various conditions of weather in +recognizing colors and forms; in pointing out and naming military +features of the ground; in observing the effect of the direction of +light on distinctness of objects; in recognizing at gradually +increasing distances the animate and inanimate objects ordinarily met +with in the field; in counting distant objects; and in estimating the +size of groups, such as herds of animals and bodies of troops.</p> + + +<p class="title">MANUAL OF THE PISTOL.</p> + +<p><b>145.</b> Instruction under this head is first given on foot, the recruit +having previously been made familiar with the mechanism of the pistol, +the names of the principal parts, and the method of cleaning, +assembling, and operating it.</p> + +<p>When a lanyard is used the snaps are attached to the butt of the +pistol and the magazine, the lanyard is passed over the head, and the +sliding loop drawn snug against the right armpit. The lanyard should +then be of just such length that the arm can be extended without +constraint.</p> + +<p>For dismounted instruction with the pistol the troopers may be formed +with or without intervals.</p> + +<p>During <i>instruction</i> in the manual of the pistol given when dismounted +<i>with intervals</i> each trooper terminates the first execution of <b>raise +pistol</b> by carrying his right foot 24 inches to the right and placing +his left hand in the position of his bridle hand. This position is +then retained until <b>return pistol</b> is executed, when the position of +<b>attention</b> is resumed.</p> + +<p>At <i>all other times</i> when movements in the manual of the pistol are +executed dismounted the left hand is raised to the position of the +bridle hand whenever used to manipulate the mechanism and is then +dropped again to the side.</p> + +<p><b>146.</b> Except in the act of firing, the automatic pistol, when actually +on the person, whether loaded or unloaded, will be carried cocked and +locked. At all other times the hammer will be lowered <i>fully down</i>.</p> + +<a id="img039" name="img039"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img039.jpg" width="150" height="241" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 32</span>, par. 147.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>147.</b> The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. <b>Raise</b>, 2. +<b>PISTOL.</b></p> + +<p>Raise: Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp +the stock, back of the hand outward.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page104" name="page104"></a>(p. 104)</span> <b>PISTOL</b>: Draw the pistol from the holster; reverse it, muzzle +up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three fingers, +forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and inclined to the +front at an angle of 30°, hand as high as the neck and 6 inches in +front of the point of the right shoulder. This is the position of +raise pistol. (Fig. <a href="#img039">32</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>148.</b> Being at <b>raise pistol</b>, to inspect pistol: 1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. +<b>PISTOL.</b></p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) <b>When a magazine is in the pistol</b>: Push down the safety lock and +lower the right hand to within easy reach of the left, pistol pointed +upward and to the right front at an angle of about 30°; grasp the +corrugations of the slide with the left thumb and forefinger, thumb to +the right; thrust upward with the right hand, thus drawing back the +slide until the slide stop is engaged (fig. <a href="#img042">35</a>); resume <b>raise pistol</b> +(fig. <a href="#img040">33</a>).</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>When no magazine is in the pistol</b>: Push down the safety lock and +lower the pistol to the left hand, rotating the pistol so that the +sights move to the left, barrel pointing downward and to the left +front, stock pointing upward and to the right front; with the left +thumb and forefinger grasp the corrugations of the slide, back of the +left hand down (fig. <a href="#img041">34</a>); change the grasp of the right hand slightly +until the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page105" name="page105"></a>(p. 105)</span> thumb presses against the rounded surface of the +slide stop; thrust downward and to the left front with the right hand, +thus drawing back the slide, and at the same time press the slide stop +with the right thumb against the slide until it engages; resume raise +pistol.</p> + +<a id="img040" name="img040"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img040.jpg" width="196" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 33</span>, par. 148a (<i>a</i>).</p> +</div> + +<a id="img041" name="img041"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img041.jpg" width="215" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 34</span>, par. 148b (<i>b</i>).</p> +</div> + +<p class="nofloat"><b>Inspection pistol</b> is never executed with a loaded pistol or with a +loaded magazine in the pistol.</p> + +<p><b>149.</b> 1. <b>Return</b>, 2. <b>PISTOL.</b></p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Being at <b>raise pistol</b>; lock the pistol, if not locked; lower the +pistol to the holster, reversing it, muzzle down, back of the hand to +the right; raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb; insert +the pistol in the holster and thrust it home; button the flap of the +holster with the right hand.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Being at <b>inspection pistol</b>; (with a magazine in the pistol) +lower the pistol to the left hand and grasp the slide as prescribed +for inspection pistol without magazine (par. 148b, fig. <a href="#img029">22</a>); thrust +downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus relieving the +pressure on the slide stop, and at the same time disengage the slide +stop with the right thumb; release the slide; reverse and lock the +pistol; place it in holster as prescribed in (<i>a</i>). If there is no +magazine in the pistol, lower it to the bridle hand as in <b>load</b> (par. +151); draw back the slide and release it; lock the pistol and place it +In the holster.</p> + +<p>When the last shot is fired the slide stop engages automatically. +<b>Return pistol</b> is then executed as from inspection pistol (<i>b</i>).</p> + +<p><b>150.</b> Being at raise pistol, to insert a magazine in the pistol: 1. +<b>Insert</b>, 2. <b>MAGAZINE</b>, or 2. <b>LOADED MAGAZINE.</b></p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) When a magazine is in the pistol: Lower the pistol into the left +hand, rotating it so that the sights move to the left; grasp the slide +with the left hand, back of the hand down, barrel pointing downward to +the left front, stock pointing upward to the right front; release the +magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand; withdraw the +magazine with the right hand; insert the designated magazine and +resume <b>raise pistol</b>. If there be no empty space in the magazine pocket +when the magazine is withdrawn from the pistol, the magazine may be +held between the left thumb and the stock of the pistol until the +magazine has been taken from <span class="pagenum"><a id="page106" name="page106"></a>(p. 106)</span> the pocket and inserted; the +magazine withdrawn from the pistol is then inserted in the magazine +pocket.</p> + +<p>Whenever the magazine catch is released, the right hand should be so +placed as to limit the motion of the magazine and prevent its falling +out.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>When no magazine is in the pistol</b>: Lower the pistol into the +left hand and grasp it as before; insert the designated magazine and +resume <b>raise pistol</b>.</p> + +<p>A loaded magazine will never be inserted without specific command.</p> + +<a id="img042" name="img042"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img042.jpg" width="157" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 35</span>, par. 151.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>151.</b> Being at <b>raise pistol</b> with a loaded magazine in the pistol, to +load: <b>LOAD</b>: Push down the safety lock and lower the pistol to the +bridle hand as prescribed for inspection pistol when a magazine is in +the pistol (par. 148a (<i>a</i>)); operate the slider, engage the safety +lock with the right thumb, and raise pistol. (Fig. <a href="#img042">35</a>.)</p> + +<p>To simulate loading for instruction, first withdraw the empty +magazine.</p> + +<p>The command load may be given in connection with the insertion of the +magazine, for example: 1. <b>Insert</b>, 2. <b>LOADED MAGAZINE</b>; 3. <b>LOAD.</b></p> + +<p>After inserting magazine, reverse the pistol and load as above +prescribed.</p> + +<p><b>152.</b> Being in any position, to eject the cartridge from the receiver: +<b>UNLOAD</b>.</p> + +<p>Pass the pistol into the left hand as in <b>insert magazine</b>; release the +magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand, slightly +disengaging the magazine; push down the safety lock with the right +thumb; operate the slide to eject the cartridge; engage the magazine; +raise and lock the pistol.</p> + +<p><b>153.</b> Being in any position, to withdraw the magazine from the pistol: +<b>WITHDRAW MAGAZINE</b>.</p> + +<p>Handle the pistol as in <b>insert magazine</b>; release the magazine catch; +withdraw the magazine and execute raise pistol.</p> + +<p>Recruits are taught the motions of loading and firing without +cartridges, and preferably without a magazine in the pistol to avoid +wear on the magazine lips. Loading and pointing practice should be +had at all gaits.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page107" name="page107"></a>(p. 107)</span> <b>154.</b> The hammer is always lowered preparatory to placing the +pistol in the arm rack or other place of deposit.</p> + +<p><b>155.</b> Being at raise pistol, to lower the hammer:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) <b>Using both hands</b>: Push down the safety lock; assume the position +of load; seat the right thumb firmly on the hammer and hold it there; +raise the left hand, to the right and press the grip safety with the +left thumb; insert the forefinger inside the trigger guard; press the +trigger and carefully let the hammer down with the right thumb. Resume +<b>raise pistol</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>Using but one hand</b>: Raise the right hand until the muzzle of the +pistol is well above the head; disengage the safety lock; seat the +ball of the right thumb firmly on the hammer; bear down the grip +safety by pressure on the hammer; press the trigger and carefully let +down the hammer with the right thumb.</p> + +<p><b>156. To charge the magazine</b>: Hold the magazine in the left hand, open +end up, rounded side to the right. Take the cartridge in the right +hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing to the right; place the +rim on the end of the magazine follower; force down the magazine +spring and slip the cartridge to the left of the magazine. The next +cartridge is similarly slipped in by placing it on the cartridge just +inserted and forcing down the spring.</p> + +<p>The magazine may be charged with any number of cartridges from one to +seven.</p> + +<p>Before dismissing the squad, pistols will be inspected, and if found +loaded, will be unloaded and magazines withdrawn to prevent loaded or +partially loaded magazines being left in the pistol. Except at target +practice, on guard duty, or active service, the pistol is habitually +carried unloaded with empty magazine.</p> + + +<p class="title">EMPLOYMENT OF THE PISTOL.</p> + +<p><b>157.</b> The pistol is primarily a weapon for use at very close range. Its +characteristic employment by cavalry is in mounted firing from a horse +moving at a rapid gait. Under such conditions its effectiveness is +almost negligible at ranges over 25 yards against individuals or over +50 yards against a line in <span class="pagenum"><a id="page108" name="page108"></a>(p. 108)</span> close order except in the hands of +exceptionally skilled shots, and the effectiveness rapidly decreases +at ranges over 5 to 10 yards. These limitations on the use of the +pistol are due not to its short range as a weapon but to the +difficulties of directing it accurately under the conditions of use. +While the pistol is a weapon employing fire action, its tactical +employment is more nearly analogous to that of either the saber or +bayonet than to that of the rifle.</p> + +<p><b>158.</b> From the preceding paragraph it results that there is no need, in +connection with the employment of the pistol as a weapon of mounted +combat, for commands that purport to designate a target or to indicate +range or other details for the direction of fire. The only commands +ordinarily needed are those required for instruction purposes. (See +Small-Arms Firing Manual.)</p> + +<p><b>159.</b> The effectiveness of the individual trooper in mounted pistol +combat depends upon:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Thorough familiarity with the weapon and facility in +manipulating its mechanism under all conditions. This is acquired by +training in the <b>Manual of the Pistol</b>. Constant practice is necessary +in rapidly drawing the pistol from its holster, loading it, +withdrawing magazine, and inserting magazine, at first at a halt, +later in motion, and finally at rapid gaits.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Skill in firing the pistol. This is acquired by actual practice +in the preliminary exercises and range firing as prescribed in the +<b>Small-Arms Firing Manual</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) Control of the horse. This is acquired in the <b>School of the +Trooper</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) The thorough inculcation in the trooper of the habit of +<i>withholding his fire until within close range</i>. This can well be +accomplished in individual training by exercises in firing or +simulating fire at one or more silhouette targets. The trooper +approaches at a gait graduated in accordance with his state of +training and is required to withhold his fire until he passes a +certain line.</p> + +<p><b>160.</b> The other elements that enter into effective use of the pistol as +a mounted weapon relate to the formations and tactics employed rather +than to individual training. They pertain, therefore, to collective +rather than individual instruction.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page109" name="page109"></a>(p. 109)</span> <b>161.</b> If any command be required in connection with the +characteristic use of the pistol in mounted combat, it consists simply +of an indication of the moment at which fire may begin. For this +purpose the command <b>COMMENCE FIRING</b> may be employed in any case for +which a command may be desirable.</p> + +<p class="title">MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED.</p> + +<p><b>162.</b> For this instruction, dismounted, the saber in the scabbard is +carried in the left hand.</p> + +<p>In the position of attention the saber will be held upright by the +side, guard to the front, the shoe of the scabbard resting on the +ground close to the left foot and just in front of the heel. The left +arm will be extended, the fingers and thumb grasping the scabbard, +back of the hand outward.</p> + +<p>In the necessary movements on foot with the saber in hand the saber is +carried with the hilt to the front and higher than the shoe of the +scabbard.</p> + +<p>Officers, dismounted, may carry the saber in the hollow of the left +arm, elbow bent, forearm horizontal, guard of the saber to the front, +blade vertical. An officer or noncommissioned officer habitually draws +saber before giving any commands involving the use of that weapon by +those under him. Officers and noncommissioned officers out of ranks +draw saber only on occasions when the men draw saber unless otherwise +prescribed. The saber may be drawn for signaling.</p> + +<p><b>163.</b> The saber is intended for mounted combat. The instructor will +impress upon the recruit from the first that the use of the saber in +war is ordinarily limited to occasions of mounted combat, and that +instruction on foot in its use is merely preliminary to the mounted +training which the recruit will receive later.</p> + +<p><b>164.</b> For dismounted instruction, if the squad is in ranks the +instructor causes intervals or distances (pars. 85-88) to be taken +before drawing saber.</p> + +<p><b>165.</b> 1. <b>Draw</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p>At the command <b>draw</b>, grasp the scabbard with the left hand about 4 +inches from the mouth, place the left hand against the thigh, and +carry the hilt to the front; turn the head slightly to the left +without deranging the position and glance at the saber knot; engage +the right wrist in the saber <span class="pagenum"><a id="page110" name="page110"></a>(p. 110)</span> knot and give it two turns +inward to secure it; grasp the hilt with the right hand and draw the +saber about 6 inches from the scabbard and look to the front.</p> + +<p>At the command saber, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to the +front and upward to its full length, saber in prolongation of the arm. +Make a short pause with the saber raised, then bring it down with the +blade against the hollow of the right shoulder, guard to the front, +right hand at the hip, the third and fourth fingers on the back of the +grip and the elbow back.</p> + +<p>The left hand holds the scabbard as at attention.</p> + +<p>This is the position of <b>carry saber dismounted</b>.</p> + +<p><b>166.</b> 1. <b>Return</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p>At the command return, grasp the scabbard as in draw saber and carry +the opening to the front. Carry the saber to the front with arm half +extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the +blade vertical, guard to the left, the thumb extended along the side +of the grip, the little finger joined with the others.</p> + +<p>At the command saber, move the wrist to opposite the left shoulder, +lower the blade and pass it across and along the left arm, point to +the rear. Turn the head to the left, fixing the eyes upon the opening +of the scabbard: raise the right hand and insert the blade in the +scabbard and push it home. Disengage the wrist from the saber knot and +resume the position of attention.</p> + +<p><b>167.</b> Being at <b>carry saber</b>: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2, <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p>Without changing the position of the left hand, execute at the command +saber what is prescribed in par. 166 at the command <b>return</b>, except +that the grip is held in the full grasp. The saber is said to be held +in the full grasp when all four fingers grasp the grip, the thumb +extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the back +of the grip against the heel of the hand.</p> + +<p>Officers at the command: 1. <b>Present</b>, execute <b>present saber</b> as +described above; at the command: 2. <b>SABER</b>, they lower the saber until +the point is 12 inches from the ground and directed to the front, +guard to the left, right arm straight, hand beside the thigh. <b>Mounted, +the point Is lowered to the level of the stirrup.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page111" name="page111"></a>(p. 111)</span> <b>168.</b> Being at <b>carry saber</b>: 1. <b>Port</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p>Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right, bring the left hand +to the position of the bridle hand and raise the saber to a vertical +position, guard to the front, grip held in the full grasp, right hand +about 12 inches in front of the shoulder.</p> + +<p>To resume the carry: 1. <b>Carry</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p><b>169.</b> Being at <b>carry saber</b>, or in any position: <b>GUARD</b>.</p> + +<p>Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right and bend knees to +simulate the position mounted. Incline the body to the front from the +waist (not the hips). Let the blade fall to the front to a position +nearly horizontal, elbow well away from the body, forearm and saber +forming one straight line, guard to the right, point at the height of +the adversary's breast, the left hand in the position of the bridle +hand. (Fig. <a href="#img031">24</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img043" name="img043"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img043.jpg" width="500" height="246" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 36</span>, par. 169.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>170.</b> Being at <b>carry saber</b>: 1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b>.</p> + +<p>Carry the right hand upward, arm half extended until the thumb is at +the height of the chin, grip held in the full grasp, blade vertical, +guard to the left. Make a slight pause, then loosen the grasp on the +grip and turn the saber with the guard to the right. Again make a +slight pause, then resume the first position and return to the carry.</p> + +<p><b>171.</b> Saber exercise is conducted, and instruction given, as prescribed +in the <b>Saber exercise</b>. For <b>Manual of the Saber Mounted</b>, <i>see</i> par. +245.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page112" name="page112"></a>(p. 112)</span> Section 4. School of the Trooper, Mounted.</h3> + +<p class="title">General Provisions.</p> + +<p><b>172.</b> <i>Object.</i>—The primary object of this school is to train the +trooper in horsemanship and in the ready use of his weapons while +mounted.</p> + +<p><b>173.</b> <i>The instructor.</i>—It is essential that the instructor (par. 37) +be a skilled and experienced horseman, properly mounted. He should +always supplement the original explanation of a movement by executing +it himself, so that the recruits may actually see the result that is +desired and the means by which it is effected.</p> + +<p><b>174.</b> <i>Cautions to instructors.</i>—The instructor must first develop the +confidence of the recruit, give him a proper seat, and make him supple +on the horse. Progress should be suited to his capacity and exempt him +as far as practicable from falls or other accidents. Instruction in +the use of the aids and in the means employed to train the horse to +obey them will follow.</p> + +<p>When the recruit has acquired confidence in his ability to ride and +control his horse he will be instructed in the use of arms mounted.</p> + +<p>Instruction is given individually; every new movement is made the +object of a particular lesson given to each trooper in turn.</p> + +<p>During the exercise the instructor avoids general remarks and (in so +far as possible) unfamiliar terms; in the correction of faults he +addresses by name those committing them.</p> + +<p>He passes frequently from one trooper to another repeating advice and +endeavoring to impress upon the troopers the principles embodied in +the regulations. In doing this he need not use the language of the +text.</p> + +<p>The instructor may be on foot or mounted. For the first lessons it is +advantageous to remain on foot so as better to explain movements and +correct faults.</p> + +<p>Steady, well-trained horses are selected for the first lessons. The +troopers exchange horses from time to time during the lesson on +indication from the instructor.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page113" name="page113"></a>(p. 113)</span> There should be frequent rests, especially with recruits. +During these rests advantage may be taken of the opportunity to +question the troopers respecting the instruction they have received.</p> + +<p>In all exercises the instructor varies the gait so as not to weary the +troopers or the horses. The instruction is conducted without hurry. +The daily work begins and ends at the walk.</p> + +<p><b>175.</b> <i>The standard required of troopers.</i>—To be a good military +horseman each trooper should—</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Have a strong seat.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Be able to apply correctly the aids by which a horse is +controlled.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) Be capable of covering long distances on horseback with the +least possible fatigue to his horse and to himself.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) Be able to use his horse to the utmost advantage in a mounted +fight.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) Be capable of riding across country.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) Under proper directions, be able to train an unbroken horse in +garrison and in the field, understand how to detect and treat the +minor ailments to which the horse is liable, and be a good groom.</p> + +<p>All officers, in addition to being good military horsemen and +instructors in riding, must be able to train remounts and to direct +their training.</p> + +<p><b>177.</b> <i>General provisions.</i>—For the preparatory exercises the horses +are saddled and equipped with the snaffle bit only, saddles stripped. +Spurs are not worn.</p> + +<p>These exercises are conducted at first in a riding hall or on an +inclosed course out of doors.</p> + +<p>References to the riding hall are to be understood as ordinarily +applying equally to any out-of-doors inclosure or to the space +included in any course marked off for instruction in equitation (pars. +269, 296).</p> + +<p>At first, the troopers, dismounted, lead their horses to the riding +hall and return them to the stable in the same manner. When they have +received sufficient instruction they go and return mounted.</p> + +<p>As soon as the instruction has advanced sufficiently to permit the +use of such commands and methods, the instructor will <span class="pagenum"><a id="page114" name="page114"></a>(p. 114)</span> confine +himself to the commands and means prescribed in the School of the +Trooper.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO FOLD THE SADDLE BLANKET.</p> + +<p><b>178.</b> The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded into six +thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by the two corners, the long +way up and down; double it lengthwise (so the fold will come between +the "U" and "S"), the folded corner (middle of blanket) in the left +hand; take the folded corner between the thumb and forefinger of the +right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the +folded edge two-thirds its length and seize it with the thumb and +second finger; raise the hands to the height of the shoulders, the +blanket between them extended; bring the hands together, the double +fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into +the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip the second +finger of the right hand between the folds and seize the double folded +corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in and seize it with the +thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second finger of the right +hand stretching and evening the folds; after evening the folds grasp +the corners and shake the blanket well in order to smooth the folds; +raise the blanket and place it between the chin and breast; slip the +hands down half way, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers +and thumb of each hand inside, seize the blanket with the thumbs and +first two fingers and let the part under the chin fall forward; hold +the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges, seize the middle +points between the thumbs and forefingers, and flirt the outside part +over the right arm; the blanket is thus held before placing it on the +horse.</p> + +<p>While retaining the general method of folding the blanket as above +indicated, troop commanders will require the blanket to be refolded +frequently with a view to equalizing the wear on the different +sections of the blanket.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO PUT ON THE BLANKET AND SURCINGLE.</p> + +<p><b>179.</b> The instructor commands: <b>BLANKET</b>.</p> + +<p>Approach the horse on the near (left) side, with the blanket folded +and held as just described; place it well forward on <span class="pagenum"><a id="page115" name="page115"></a>(p. 115)</span> his back +by tossing the part of the blanket over the right arm to the off +(right) side of the horse, still keeping hold of the middle points; +slide the blanket once or twice from front to rear to smooth the hair. +Being careful to raise the blanket in bringing it forward, place the +blanket with the forefinger of the left hand on the withers and the +forefinger of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; it +should then be well forward with the edges on the left side; remove +the locks of mane that may be under it, pass the buckle end of the +surcingle over the middle of the blanket and buckle it on the near +side a little below the edge of the blanket.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE WATERING BRIDLE.</p> + +<p><b>180.</b> The instructor commands: <b>BRIDLE</b>.</p> + +<p>Take the reins in the right hand, the bit in the left; approach the +horse on the near side, slip the reins over the horse's head and let +them rest on his neck; reach under and engage the snap in the right +halter ring; insert the left thumb in the side of the horse's mouth +above the tush and press open the lower jaw; insert the bit and engage +the snap in the left halter ring. The bit should hang so as to touch, +but not draw up, the corners of the mouth. At the command <b>unbridle</b>, +pass the reins over the horse's head and disengage the snaps.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO SADDLE.</p> + +<p><b>181.</b> (<i>a</i>) (McClellan saddle.) For instruction the saddle may be +placed four yards in rear or front of the horse. The stirrups are +crossed over the seat, the right one uppermost; then the cincha and +cincha strap are crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The +blanket having been placed as previously explained, the instructor +commands: <b>SADDLE</b>.</p> + +<p>Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the cantle with +the right, approach the horse on the near side from the direction of +the croup and <i>place the center of the saddle on the middle of the +horse's back</i>, the end of the side bar about three-finger widths +behind the point of the shoulder blade; let down the cincha strap and +cincha, pass to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps, and see +that the blanket <span class="pagenum"><a id="page116" name="page116"></a>(p. 116)</span> is smooth; return to the near side, raise +the blanket slightly under the pommel arch so that the withers may not +be compressed; take the cincha strap in the right hand, reach under +the horse and seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end +of the strap through the ring from underneath (from inside to +outside), then up and through the upper ring from the outside, if +necessary, make another fold in the same manner.</p> + +<p>The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end through the upper ring +to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the fingers of the +right between the outside folds of the strap, pull from the horse with +the right hand and take up the slack with the left; cross the strap +over the folds, pass the end of it with the right hand underneath and +through the upper ring back of the folds, then down and under the loop +that crosses the folds and draw it tightly; weave the ends of the +strap into the strands of the cincha.</p> + +<p>Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: Pass, the +end through the upper ring to the rear; seize it with the right hand; +place the fingers of the left hand between the outer folds of the +strap; pull from the horse with the left hand and take up the slack +with the right; pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it +through the upper ring until a loop is formed; double the loose end of +the strap and push it through the loop and draw the loop taut. The +free end should be long enough to be seized conveniently with the +hand.</p> + +<p>Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup and then +the left.</p> + +<p>The surcingle is then buckled over the saddle, and should be a little +looser than the cincha.</p> + +<p>The cincha when first tied should admit a finger between it and the +belly. After exercising for a while the cincha will be found too loose +and should be tightened.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Troops equipped with this model +will saddle as prescribed for the McClellan saddle with the following +modifications;</p> + +<p>Place the saddle on the blanket so that the front edge of the side bar +approaches the shoulder blade without pressing upon it. After the +saddle has been so placed, let down; the girth; pass to the off side, +adjust the girth and saddle skirt, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page117" name="page117"></a>(p. 117)</span> and see that the blanket +is smooth, return to the near side and push the blanket well up into +the pommel arch; reach under the horse, seize the girth with the left +hand and bring up its free end to the near side of the saddle; with +the right hand raise the saddle skirt and buckle the girth straps to +the corresponding buckles of the girth, beginning with the forward +strap, lower the saddle skirt and let down the stirrups, beginning +with the right stirrup. The girth should ordinarily be about 4 inches +in rear of the point of the elbow.</p> + +<p><b>182.</b> To approximate the length of the stirrup straps before mounting, +they are adjusted so that the length of the stirrup strap, including +the stirrup, is about 1 inch less than the length of the arm, fingers +extended.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO UNSADDLE.</p> + +<p><b>183.</b> The instructor commands: <b>UNSADDLE</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) (McClellan saddle.) Stand on the near side of the horse; +unbuckle and remove the surcingle; cross the left stirrup over the +saddle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass to the +off side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha; pass to the near +side, cross the cincha strap over the saddle; grasp the pommel with +the left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the saddle over +the croup and place it in front or rear of the horse as may be +directed, pommel to the front; grasp the blanket at the withers with +the left hand and at the loin with the right, remove it in the +direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and +place it on the saddle, folded edge on the pommel.</p> + +<p>If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken off the +horse.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Stand on the near side of the +horse; cross the left stirrup over the saddle; raise the saddle skirt +with the left hand, and with the right unbuckle the girth straps, +beginning with the rear strap; let down the girth; pass to the off +side; cross the right stirrup and then the girth over the saddle; pass +to the near side, grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with +the right, and remove and dispose of the saddle as prescribed in +(<i>a</i>).</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page118" name="page118"></a>(p. 118)</span> The service saddle, model 1912, should be hung on a bracket, +sufficiently wide for the saddle to rest on its side bars. If a +narrower support is used, the saddle will rest on the low point; in +the leather seat and become misshapen.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE BIT AND BRIDOON BRIDLE (MODEL 1909).</p> + +<p><b>184.</b> Before bridling the curb chain is unhooked on the near side The +instructor commands: <b>BRIDLE</b>.</p> + +<p>Take the reins in the right, the crownpiece in the left hand; approach +the horse on the near side, passing the right hand along his neck; +slip both reins over his head and let them rest on his neck; take the +crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of the curb bit +in the left hand, the forefinger against the mouthpiece, the snaffle +bit above and resting on the mouthpiece of the curb bit; bring the +crownpiece in front of and slightly below its proper position; insert +the thumb into the side of the mouth above the tush; press open the +lower jaw and insert the bits by raising the crownpiece; with the left +hand draw the ears gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the +left ear; arrange the forelock, secure the throatlatch, and hook up +the curb chain on the near side below the snaffle bit.</p> + +<p>The bridle is adjusted as prescribed in par. 302.</p> + +<p>The throatlatch should admit four fingers between it and the throat.</p> + +<p><b>185.</b> At the discretion of the instructor, the halter may be taken off +before bridling, the reins being first passed over the neck; the +hitching strap, if not left at the manger or picket line, is tied +around the horse's neck; if the horse be saddled, in the near pommel +ring.</p> + +<p><b>186.</b> The instructor commands: <b>UNBRIDLE</b>.</p> + +<p>Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over the horse's +head, placing them on the bend of the left arm; unhook the curb chain +on the near side; unbuckle the throatlatch, grasp the crownpiece with +the right hand and, assisting with the left hand, gently disengage the +ears; gently disengage the bits from the horse's mouth with the left +hand by lowering the crownpiece; place the crownpiece in the palm of +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page119" name="page119"></a>(p. 119)</span> the left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass them +together over the crownpiece, make two or three turns around; the +bridle, then pass the bight between the brow band and crownpiece and +draw it snug.</p> + +<p>The bridle is hung up by the reins or placed across the saddle on the +blanket.</p> + +<p>If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the bridle back so +that the crownpiece will rest on the neck behind the poll until the +halter is replaced.</p> + +<p><b>187. Stand to horse</b>: At this command each trooper places himself, +facing to the front, on the near side of the horse, opposite his head, +and takes the position of <i>attention</i>, except that the right hand, +nails down, grasps the reins, the forefinger separating them, about 6 +inches from the bit. The bights of the reins rest on the neck near the +pommel of the saddle.</p> + +<p><b>188. To lead out</b>: The troopers being at <b>stand to horse</b>, to leave the +stable or picket line, the instructor commands: <b>LEAD OUT</b>.</p> + +<p>Each trooper, holding his right hand well up and firm, leads his +horse, without looking at him, to the place designated by the +instructor.</p> + +<p><b>189.</b> Upon entering the riding hall or inclosure the instructor +disposes the troopers upon a line at intervals of 3 yards, the +troopers at <b>stand to horse</b>, the horses correctly disposed and +perpendicular to the line of troopers.</p> + +<p>A horse is correctly disposed when he stands squarely on all four +feet, having his head, neck, and body in line.</p> + +<p><b>190. Stirrups</b>: The stirrups are properly adjusted when, the trooper +being properly seated with the feet removed from the stirrups and the +legs falling naturally, the tread of the stirrups is about 1 inch +above the top of the heel of the shoe.</p> + +<p>The stirrups should bear only the weight of the lower leg; about +one-third of the foot should be inserted in the stirrup, so that the +ball of the foot rests on the tread, the heel lower than the toe.</p> + +<p>The flat of the stirrup strap should rest against the leg of the +mounted trooper. To accomplish this the trooper's toe should be so +inserted in the stirrup as to place the front branch of the latter on +the outside. By the front branch of the stirrup is meant the forward +branch as the stirrup hangs before the trooper mounts.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page120" name="page120"></a>(p. 120)</span> Placing too much weight on the stirrup disturbs the seat and +contracts the leg, hindering it's freedom of action.</p> + +<p>If the toe is not inserted far enough the trooper risks losing his +stirrup; if inserted too far suppleness is diminished.</p> + +<p>The heel is carried naturally lower than the toe if the ankle joint is +not rigid.</p> + +<p>For the extended gallop, in the charge, for the use of weapons, and +for leaping obstacles the foot is inserted fully in the stirrup.</p> + +<p><b>191. To mount</b>: Being at <b>stand to horse</b>, <b>MOUNT</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Face to the right, drop the right rein, grasp the left rein in +the right hand, take two steps to the right, sliding the hand along +the left rein, make a half face to the left When opposite the girth; +with the aid of the left hand take both reins in the right, forefinger +between the reins, the right hand on the pommel, the reins coming into +the hand on the side of the forefinger, and held so as to feel lightly +the horse's mouth, the bight falling on the off side. Place the left +foot in the stirrup, assisted by the left hand if necessary, and bring +the left knee against the saddle; grasp a lock of the mane with the +left hand, lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Spring from the right foot, keeping the hands firmly in place, +the left knee bent and pressed against the saddle, bring the right +foot by the side of the left, body inclining slightly forward; pass +the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, sit down +lightly-in the saddle; let go of the mane; insert the right foot in +the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary; take a rein in +each hand, the rein coming into the hand under the little finger and +passing out over the second joint of the forefinger, the thumbs closed +on the reins, the bight of the reins falling to the right.</p> + +<p>The reins should be so held that the trooper feels lightly the horse's +mouth, the fingers closed until the nails lightly touch the palms of +the hands; the reins well up in the crotch of the fingers; the backs +of the hands vertical and in prolongation of the forearm; the wrists +flexible; the elbows near the body and low, so that the forearms will +be in prolongation of the reins; the hands about 9 inches apart.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page121" name="page121"></a>(p. 121)</span> The instructor takes care that the recruit in adjusting the +reins provokes no movement of the horse and deranges in no manner the +position of the horse's head.</p> + +<p>The instructor cautions the trooper to avoid touching the horse with +the left toe in mounting; this fault begets nearly all the resistance +of horses to standing quietly while being mounted.</p> + +<p>The modifications incident to mounting and dismounting a horse +equipped with the double snaffle or bit and bridoon are indicated in +pars. 271, 303, and 307. The troopers are also trained to mount on the +right side.</p> + +<p><b>192. To dismount</b>: Being halted, <b>DISMOUNT</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Seize the reins with the right hand in front of and near the +left, forefinger between the reins, the reins entering the hand from +the side of the forefinger; drop the reins with the left hand; place +the right hand on the pommel; grasp a lock of the mane with the left +hand, the lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger; take the +right foot out of the stirrup.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg, knee bent, over +the croup without touching the horse, and bring the right foot by the +side of the left, the left knee against the saddle, the upper part of +the body inclined slightly forward; descend lightly to the ground and +take the position of <b>stand to horse</b>.</p> + +<p>The troopers are also trained to dismount on the right side.</p> + +<p><b>193.</b> Commanding officers may authorize the following alternative +method of mounting and dismounting by officers and enlisted men on all +occasions except those when it is required that mounting and +dismounting be executed in unison at the corresponding command (par. +354). Instruction, in the methods authorized in this paragraph is +optional.</p> + +<p>Being at <b>stand</b> to horse, at the command <b>MOUNT</b>, face to the right, drop +the right rein, take a step to the right to be opposite the shoulder +of the horse; at the same time seize the bights of the reins in the +right hand and pull them taut enough to give a gentle, even bearing on +the horse's mouth; grasp the reins with the left hand, with the little +finger between them, and the bight coming out between the thumb and +forefinger, which also hold a lock of the mane. Place the left foot +in the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page122" name="page122"></a>(p. 122)</span> stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary, and +bring the left knee against the saddle.</p> + +<p>Place the right hand upon the cantle, rise by an effort of the right +leg, aided by the arms, the left knee bent and pressed against the +saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward to keep +the saddle from turning; bring the right foot by the side of the left; +change the right hand to the pommel, pass the right leg, knee bent, +over the croup without touching it, and sit down lightly in the +saddle. Put the right foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand +if necessary.</p> + +<p>At the command <b>DISMOUNT</b>, pass the right rein into the left hand and +grasp with this hand a lock of the mane, place the right hand on the +pommel, and remove the right foot from the stirrup; pass the right +leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching the horse and bring +the right foot by the side of the left, the left knee against the +saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward, right +hand on the cantle. Descend lightly to the ground and take the +position of stand to horse.</p> + +<p><b>194. To take the reins in one hand and to separate them</b>: At the +command <b>IN LEFT HAND TAKE REINS</b>, place the left hand opposite the +middle of the body, pass the right rein into the left hand, separating +it from the left rein by the little finger; let the right hand fall by +the side.</p> + +<p><b>195.</b> At the command <b>IN BOTH HANDS TAKE REINS</b>, grasp the right rein +with the right hand and replace the hands 9 inches apart.</p> + +<p>The reins are taken in the right hand and again separated in a similar +manner.</p> + +<p><b>196.</b> To adjust the reins the trooper brings the wrists together and +grasps with one hand, above and near the opposite thumb, the rein that +he desires to shorten.</p> + +<p><b>197.</b> The instructor causes the reins to be dropped and retaken by the +commands <b>DROP REINS</b> and <b>REINS</b>.</p> + +<p>At the first command, the trooper drops the reins behind the pommel +and lets the hands fall by the side.</p> + +<p>The reins are dropped as an exceptional measure, and always with +precaution against accident.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page123" name="page123"></a>(p. 123)</span> <b>198. Position of the trooper, or attention (mounted)</b>: The +position described below should be considered a standard toward which +all troopers should gradually approximate.</p> + +<p>The buttocks bearing equally upon and well forward in the middle of +the saddle.</p> + +<p>The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, clasping +the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight and that of +the lower legs.</p> + +<p>The knees bent and flexible.</p> + +<p>The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the horse +without pressure, the toes dropping naturally when the trooper is +without stirrups.</p> + +<p>The back supple and never hollowed.</p> + +<p>The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect.</p> + +<p>The shoulders thrown back evenly.</p> + +<p>The arms free, the elbows falling naturally.</p> + +<p>The head erect and turned to the front, but without stiffness.</p> + +<p>Eyes alert, well up, and directed to the trooper's front.</p> + +<p>The reins held as heretofore prescribed.</p> + +<p>This position may be modified by the instructor to suit varying +conditions and unusual conformations. When not at attention, the head +and eyes are directed so as best to favor alertness and observation. +In other respects the position should be practically unchanged.</p> + +<p><b>199.</b> The body and lower legs are movable and should be under the +control of the trooper, either acting intermittently as aids for +guiding the horse or as a means of binding the rider to the horse +while following his movements.</p> + +<p>The thighs, on the other hand, should remain fixed immovably to the +saddle, except while posting at the trot. This fixity should be +obtained not by the pressure of the knees but by the clinging of the +buttocks, which is secured by the suppleness of the loins and the +relaxation of the thighs. It is acquired very rapidly by daily +"<i>rotation of the thighs</i>," which gradually presses the large thigh +muscles to the rear and permits the femur to rest solidly against the +saddle.</p> + +<p>The trooper should sit with his buttocks well under the upper part of +his body and especially avoid bowing the back by thrusting the +buttocks to the rear and the lower part of the spine to the front. +Sitting well forward in the middle <span class="pagenum"><a id="page124" name="page124"></a>(p. 124)</span> of the saddle will tend to +assist the trooper in avoiding the defect just referred to. If the +buttocks are thrust back too much the trooper can not conform to the +movements of the horse and carries forward the upper part of his body.</p> + +<p>If the thigh is too nearly horizontal, the trooper is doubled, up and +his power of action diminished; if the thigh is too nearly vertical, +the trooper is on the crotch and lacks ease.</p> + +<p>To sum up: The trooper should take a relaxed sitting position, +squarely on his buttocks, with the thighs inclined downward.</p> + +<p>The various defects of position are overcome by suitable suppling +exercises (pars. 209-220).</p> + +<p><b>200.</b> <i>The aids.</i>—The legs, the reins, and the weight are the means of +controlling the horse in riding. They are called the aids.</p> + +<p><b>201. The legs</b>: The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to increase +his pace or gait, and to engage the hind quarters or move them +laterally. The legs act by the pressure of the calves. If pressure +alone is insufficient the trooper increases the action by blows with +his calves.</p> + +<p>It is essential to obtain from the horse perfect obedience to the +action of the legs. He should respond to the simultaneous and equal +action of both legs by engaging his hindquarters and moving forward; +to the predominant action of one leg by moving his haunches to the +opposite side.</p> + +<p><b>202. The reins</b>: The reins serve to prepare the horse to move, to +decrease or increase his pace, to change the gait, or to change +direction.</p> + +<p><b>Contact</b> is a light bearing of the mouth of the horse on the hand of +the rider. It should be constantly maintained.</p> + +<p>The reins are held in the full hand, the thumb pressing them lightly +upon the second joint of the forefinger. By means of closing and +relaxing the fingers and flexing the wrist, arm, and shoulder, the +trooper, while maintaining contact and keeping the reins taut, follows +easily the movements of the head of the horse without anticipating or +interfering with these movements. The hand is then said to be passive. +It is kept so as long as the trooper is not required to change the +pace, gait, or direction.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page125" name="page125"></a>(p. 125)</span> <b>203. The direct rein</b>: When the trooper, with the hands +separated and the reins adjusted, closes his fingers upon the reins +without raising the hands he exercises an action from front to rear, +called the effect of the direct reins. This effect, when on one rein +only, is called that of the <b>right (or left) direct rein</b>.</p> + +<p><b>204. The leading rein</b>: When the trooper carries the right hand to the +right and forward in a manner to preserve contact but not to increase +pressure on the bit the effect is called that of the <b>right leading +rein</b>.</p> + +<p>The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation +of the forearm, the elbow remaining near the body.</p> + +<p>The horse's head and neck are drawn to the right, the shoulders +follow, and he turns to the right.</p> + +<p><b>205. The bearing rein</b>: When the trooper carries the right hand +forward, upward, and to the left in a manner to preserve contact, but +not to increase pressure on the bit, the effect is said to be that of +the <b>right bearing rein</b>.</p> + +<p>The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation +of the forearm.</p> + +<p>The horse's head is <b>turned slightly to the right</b>, but the effect is to +the left; the neck bends and is convex to the left and is followed by +the shoulders. The horse turns to the left.</p> + +<p>The action of the bearing rein is much more powerful than that of the +leading rein, and is used to the exclusion of the latter to turn the +horse when riding with the reins in one hand.</p> + +<p><b>206. The indirect rein of opposition</b>: When the trooper carries the +right hand to the left in a manner to press the shoulders to the left +and to produce a diagonal traction on the rein in the direction of the +left shoulder or haunch the effect is called that of the <b>right +indirect rein of opposition</b>.</p> + +<p>Its effect may be produced <b>in front of the withers</b> if the hand be +slightly raised; <b>in rear pf the withers</b> if the hand be slightly +lowered. It is frequently used by the trooper when riding with one +hand (as he must do in order to use his weapons), and its effect +should be studied and practiced from, the beginning.</p> + +<p><b>207.</b> Manner of applying the aids: The action of the reins and legs +and weight should not be continuous. The trooper <span class="pagenum"><a id="page126" name="page126"></a>(p. 126)</span> alternately +closes and relaxes the fingers, the hands preserving contact in the +intervals between the actions. In the same manner he uses the legs, +neither gripping nor releasing altogether, but preserving light +contact in the intervals between the blows with the calves. The weight +likewise is used in a similar manner, being quickly applied to the +front, to the rear, or to a side, alternating with returns to the +normal position.</p> + +<p>If an action of the aids is prolonged the horse has opportunity to +establish the corresponding resistance, but if produced by <b>repeated +applications</b> the effect is very marked.</p> + +<p>All action of the aids should diminish in intensity when obedience +begins and cease entirely as soon as the desired result is secured.</p> + +<p>Troopers must be thoroughly trained in riding with the reins in one +hand.</p> + +<p><b>208.</b> The instructor, in teaching troopers to avail themselves of their +legs and reins, is governed by the preceding considerations, and from +the first watches vigilantly the action of the aids.</p> + +<p>The hand should always be kept low. The most thoughtful care should be +exercised in the combined application of the aids, so that they may +not be opposed to each other in their action; that is, one favoring +the intended movement, the other opposing it.</p> + +<p>The instructor impresses upon the troopers that their hands must be +kept still; that is, free from bobbing up and down, and pulling, and +from giving and taking when there is no reason therefor.</p> + +<p>Likewise their legs should remain in light contact with the horse's +sides and the heels not be used to kick the horse constantly in a +nervous manner.</p> + +<p>Moreover, that the effects of the aids may be perfectly clear, and +that there may be no contradiction between them, <b>there should never be +simultaneous action of the direct reins demanding slowing up or +halting and of the legs provoking a forward movement</b>. This condition +is essential for preserving the composure indispensable to the horses +of the troop.</p> + +<p><b>242. Posting</b>: Posting is habitually employed when the troopers have +stirrups and understand their use.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page127" name="page127"></a>(p. 127)</span> It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the +trooper inclines the upper part of his body forward, then supporting +himself on the stirrups while maintaining the clinging of his knees he +rises under the impulsion of the horse, maintains his position +detached from the saddle while the succeeding impulse is produced, +again sits down in the saddle, and continues in this way, avoiding +alternate impulses.</p> + +<p>At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to the +trooper by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp a lock +of the mane with either hand, thus determining the forward inclination +of the body.</p> + +<p>Its proper execution requires that the seat be raised moderately, that +contact with the saddle be resumed gently and without shock, that the +full support of the stirrup be obtained while keeping the lower leg +steady, that the ankle joint be supple, and that the heel be kept +lower than the toe.</p> + +<p><b>243. Care of horses and saddlery</b>: The recruits will be given talks and +practical illustrations in every phase of the care of horses and the +care of saddlery. This in addition to their daily attention to those +subjects as a matter of routine.</p> + +<p><b>244.</b> <i>The use of arms, mounted.</i>—During the period in which the +instruction in the school of the trooper is held, there must be +thorough instruction in the use of arms mounted. After the first few +drills there should be daily instruction in some phase of this +important part of the trooper's training. Progress in the more +advanced steps of this instruction must necessarily depend upon the +trooper's progress in horsemanship; but by making the dismounted +instruction thorough and keeping it well in advance of the +corresponding parts of the mounted program, many difficulties will be +obviated and much time saved. Success with the pistol and saber will +be dependent upon that familiarity with their use that can be gained +only by daily practice extending over a considerable period. The +dismounted instruction already prescribed in connection with the use +of the weapons must be supplemented by thorough mounted work at all +gaits, when passing obstacles, etc. The trooper must learn to control +his horse thoroughly with one hand while carrying and using his weapon +in the other; he must learn to handle his weapon mounted with a +minimum of danger to himself, his comrades, or his horse. The +principal <span class="pagenum"><a id="page128" name="page128"></a>(p. 128)</span> drill on at least one day of each week during the +entire period devoted to the school of the trooper should ordinarily +be devoted, to the above instruction, thus supplementing and testing +the results accomplished in the shorter daily drills. At this weekly +drill the troopers should habitually appear fully armed and equipped, +the saddles being packed as for field service.</p> + +<p>The employment of the saber mounted is taught as prescribed in the +<b>Saber Exercise</b>; the use of the pistol in firing mounted, as prescribed +in the <b>Small-Arms Firing Manual</b>.</p> + +<p><b>245. Manual of the Saber, Mounted</b>: The saber suspended from the <i>left</i> +side of the saddle—</p> + +<p>1. <b>Draw</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b> Pass the right hand over the reins and execute with +it rapidly what is prescribed for drawing the saber on foot; place the +pommel near the hip and resting on top of the thigh, flat of the blade +against the point of the shoulder. This is the position of <b>carry +saber, mounted</b>.</p> + +<p><b>246.</b> The saber suspended from the <i>right</i> side of the saddle—</p> + +<p>1. <b>Draw.</b> Turn the head to the right without deranging the position of +the body and glance toward the hilt; engage the right wrist in the +saber knot; pull the hilt forward; seize the grip in the full hand, +nails to the right; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and +look to the front.</p> + +<p>2. <b>SABER.</b> Draw the saber as prescribed on foot and take the position +of carry saber.</p> + +<p><b>247.</b> The troopers are also exercised in drawing the saber as quickly +as possible at the single command: <b>DRAW SABER</b>.</p> + +<p><b>248.</b> To <b>return saber</b>: The scabbard suspended from the <i>left</i> side of +the saddle—</p> + +<p>1. <b>Return.</b> Execute as prescribed on foot.</p> + +<p>2. <b>SABER.</b> Execute as prescribed on foot, supporting the back of the +blade against the left forearm until the point is engaged in the +scabbard.</p> + +<p>This command is given only at a halt or when marching at a walk.</p> + +<p><b>249.</b> The scabbard suspended on the right—</p> + +<p>1. <b>Return.</b> Execute as prescribed on foot.</p> + +<p>2. <b>SABER.</b> Carry the wrist opposite the right shoulder; lower the blade +to the right of the horse's neck; let the grip turn in the hand so +that the hand grasps the guard at the pommel, back of the hand up; +turn the head to the right and <span class="pagenum"><a id="page129" name="page129"></a>(p. 129)</span> fix the eyes on the opening of +the scabbard; raise the hand; insert the blade and push it home; +disengage the wrist from the saber knot; and turn the head to the +front.</p> + +<p>When the saber is carried on the right the return saber is executed, +so far as possible, at the halt.</p> + +<p><b>250. Inspection saber</b> and <b>present saber</b> are executed as when +dismounted.</p> + +<p><b>251.</b> <i>Guard.</i>—Thrust the feet home in the stirrups and crouch +slightly in the saddle, bending forward from the waist. Otherwise as +explained dismounted.</p> + +<p><b>In the charge</b> in close order the trooper (in single rank) assumes the +position indicated in par. 297, the body almost in a horizontal line +over the horse's neck, the arm fully extended to the front, the saber, +in the full grasp, in prolongation of the arm, guard up, finger nails +to the right, point at the height of the eye. When difficult ground is +encountered the trooper takes the position of <b>guard</b> while passing it.</p> + +<p>If charging in double rank, the front-rank troopers conform to the +positions indicated for single rank. Those troopers who are in the +rear rank or who are directly in rear of others, take the position of +<b>port saber</b>.</p> + +<p>In the mêlée the troopers take the position of guard toward the +nearest enemy, crouching slightly in the saddle and alive to all +possible attacks.</p> + +<p class="title">Manual of the Pistol, Mounted.</p> + +<p><b>252.</b> The modifications of the dismounted manual, incident to, the +employment of the pistol mounted are explained in the corresponding +paragraphs of the <b>Manual of the Pistol, Dismounted</b> (pars. 145-156).</p> + +<p class="title">THE RIFLE.</p> + +<p>(<b>For troops armed with the Cavalry Equipment, Model of 1912.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>253.</b> Before standing to horse the trooper attaches his rifle to his +belt by passing the muzzle up through the belt ring and engaging the +snap hook of the belt ring into the trigger guard.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page130" name="page130"></a>(p. 130)</span> Being at stand to horse, upon any preparatory command, except +for mounting or securing horses unsling the rifle from the belt ring +and take the position of order arms, removing the snaffle reins from +the horse's neck and passing the right arm through them if necessary.</p> + +<p>If a command to secure horses is given, link or couple first and then +unsling the rifle.</p> + +<p>To mount, proceed as without the rifle. When seated in the saddle, +grasp the rifle at the bolt with the left hand, barrel to the front, +place the butt of the rifle in the bucket, steadying the latter with +the left foot if necessary and take the position of the trooper +mounted.</p> + +<p>To dismount: At the preparatory command, seize the rifle at the bolt +with the left hand, give it a quick, forcible pull, lifting the butt +from the bucket, and let the rifle hang from the belt.</p> + +<p>(<b>For troops armed with equipment corresponding to the McClellan +saddle.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>254.</b> At <b>stand to horse</b>, the rifle is held on the left side of the +trooper in a position corresponding to <b>order arms</b> (par. 93), as +modified by substituting the word <b>left</b> for <b>right</b> wherever the latter +occurs.</p> + +<p>In leading out, and on all occasions when the trooper leads his horse +for short distances, the rifle is carried at the <b>left trail</b> (par. 108) +unless otherwise prescribed.</p> + +<p><b>255.</b> In mounting, the rifle is inserted in the scabbard after the +trooper steps back opposite the girth and before he takes the reins in +his right hand (par. 191).</p> + +<p>On dismounting, each trooper, after placing the bights of the reins on +the horse's neck, and before stepping forward to take the position of +stand to horse (par. 192), takes the rifle from the scabbard and +assumes the left trail. A modification of this provision applies when +the trooper dismounts for inspection. The rifle is never carried on +the saddle when the trooper is dismounted, except as specially +authorized at inspections, with the equipment corresponding to the +McClellan saddle (par. 262).</p> + +<p><b>256.</b> <i>Inspection of arms and equipment, mounted.</i>—It is assumed that +the troopers before being formally inspected mounted and under arms, +will have advanced in elementary <span class="pagenum"><a id="page131" name="page131"></a>(p. 131)</span> collective instruction to a +point when they can be formed and aligned: as a mounted squad (par. +350). Should this not be the case, the instructor will place the +troopers in line with intervals in advance of the inspection. +References to the guide and to alignment will then be disregarded and +the command <b>front</b> will be omitted.</p> + +<p>The inspection is described below upon the assumption that all arms +are inspected. The inspection of pistols is explained for both the +mounted and dismounted execution. The necessary modification in case +the inspection of any weapon be omitted is indicated in par. 266.</p> + +<p><b>257.</b> When arms are inspected mounted they are always inspected in the +order: Saber, pistol. When inspected dismounted they are always +inspected in the order: Rifle, pistol. Sabers are not inspected +dismounted, nor are rifles inspected mounted. Pistols may be inspected +either mounted or dismounted.</p> + +<p><b>258.</b> The troopers being mounted and fully armed and in line: 1. +<b>Prepare for inspection</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>FRONT.</b></p> + +<p>At the second command all align themselves on the guide: The +inspector, having verified the alignment, takes position 3 yards to +the right and front of the right trooper, facing to the left, and +commands: <b>FRONT</b>, followed by: 1. <b>Draw</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b> (par. 165).</p> + +<p><b>259.</b> If it is not intended to inspect the pistols mounted, the +inspector cautions <b>PISTOLS WILL NOT BE INSPECTED MOUNTED</b>, and +approaches the right of the rank.</p> + +<p><b>260.</b> As the inspector approaches, the first two troopers execute the +first motion of inspection saber (par. 170), the first trooper, as the +inspector comes in front of him, executes the second and third motions +of inspection saber; the second trooper, as the inspector comes in +front of him, executes the second and third motions of inspection +saber, the first trooper at this instant resuming the carry and the +third trooper executing the first motion of inspection saber. The +first trooper then returns saber. As the inspector comes in front of +the other troopers the movements are executed successively as just +explained.</p> + +<p><b>261.</b> The inspector, having completed the inspection of sabers, passes +in rear from the left to the right of the rank. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page132" name="page132"></a>(p. 132)</span> As he +approaches the right of the rank the first two troopers (<b>in the +absence of indication to the contrary</b>) (par. 259) execute <b>inspection +pistol</b> (par. 148). Each of the other troopers, in order from right to +left, successively executes <b>inspection pistol</b> in time to complete the +execution just before the inspector arrives in front of him. Each +trooper executes <b>return pistol</b> as the inspector passes to the trooper +next on his left.</p> + +<p><b>262.</b> To inspect the rifles, to inspect the pistols dismounted, or to +inspect the dress and equipment of the squad more minutely, the +inspector dismounts the squad without forming rank.</p> + +<p>Troopers when dismounted following the command <b>prepare for inspection</b> +take a special position; and a special exception is made in this case +to the rule requiring the rifle (if not slung) to be taken from the +scabbard upon dismounting (par. 255). Upon dismounting while at +<b>prepare for inspection</b> each trooper takes the snaffle reins off the +horse's neck, passes the right arm through the reins (the bight of the +reins resting on the shoulder) and takes a position similar to <b>stand +to horse</b>. The rifle is not unslung (or removed from the scabbard) +unless it has been specially designated for inspection; it is then +reslung or returned to the scabbard as soon as its inspection is +completed.</p> + +<p>A trooper dismounted at <b>prepare for inspection</b>, if his right hand be +free, grasps the reins as in <b>stand to horse</b>. The snaffle reins once +taken from the neck as above are not replaced until the first command +for mounting.</p> + +<p>The above position is habitually terminated by the first command for +mounting or by <b>stand to horse</b>.</p> + +<p><b>263.</b> If the inspector wishes to inspect the arms after dismounting, he +cautions, <i>immediately following the commands for dismounting</i>: <b>RIFLES +AND PISTOLS</b> (<i>or</i> <b>RIFLES</b>, <i>or</i> <b>PISTOLS</b>) <b>WILL BE INSPECTED.</b></p> + +<p>Each trooper at once unslings his rifle (or takes it from the +scabbard) and resumes his position similar to <b>stand to horse</b>, his +rifle at the <b>order</b>, the reins as described in par. 262.</p> + +<p><b>264.</b> As the inspector approaches the right of the rank the trooper on +the right executes <b>inspection arms</b> (par. 112).</p> + +<p>The inspector takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just +above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The <span class="pagenum"><a id="page133" name="page133"></a>(p. 133)</span> +inspector inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same +position as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it +with the left hand at the balance, executes <b>port arms</b>, and slings the +rifle or places it in the scabbard, according to his equipment.</p> + +<p>As the inspector returns the piece the next man executes <b>inspection +arms</b>, and so on through the troop.</p> + +<p>Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man proceeds as +above as soon as the captain passes to the next man.</p> + +<p><b>265.</b> As the inspector approaches the right of the rank of odd numbers, +after completing the inspection of the rifles of the even numbers, the +first two troopers of the rank execute <b>inspection pistol</b>.</p> + +<p>To inspect the pistol closely the inspector grasps it with his left +hand above the trooper's hand, makes such examination as is desired, +and hands the pistol back to the trooper in the same position as that +in which the inspector took the weapon. The trooper takes the pistol +with the right hand as in <b>inspection pistol</b> and executes <b>return +pistol</b>. Should the pistols be inspected without handling, each man +executes <b>return pistol</b> as the inspector passes to the next trooper.</p> + +<p><b>266.</b> If no indication be given for the inspection of rifles they +<i>remain slung or in the scabbard</i>, according to the equipment carried. +If only rifles are ordered inspected, pistols are not presented for +inspection and rifles are slung or returned to the scabbard as soon as +inspected.</p> + +<p>If only pistols are ordered inspected, they are presented by the two +troopers on the right when the inspector approaches the rank the first +time after dismounting.</p> + +<p><b>267.</b> During the inspection of arms the inspector, observes the +appearance of the men, horses, equipment, and clothing.</p> + +<p>After the inspection of arms is completed he makes such further +inspection of equipment, clothing, etc., as he may consider desirable. +During this part of the inspection the troopers may be permitted to +stand <b>at ease</b>.</p> + +<p><b>268.</b> If an inspection of arms of a detailed character be made in +connection with a <i>dismounted</i> formation it is conducted by the above +commands and in accordance with the above methods in so far as +applicable. Rifles are presented <span class="pagenum"><a id="page134" name="page134"></a>(p. 134)</span> for inspection as described +without special indication when the inspector approaches the rank +after commanding <b>FRONT</b> (par. 258). Except when rifles are slung as +provided in the next sentence, each trooper executes <b>order arms</b> as +soon as his rifle is returned to him. Should the troopers be armed +with both rifle and pistol, each trooper slings his rifle as soon as +inspected if the equipment in use so permits; otherwise the rifles are +stacked (par. 115) by command after being inspected. The pistols are +then inspected, after which <b>take arms</b> (par. 116) is executed before +the troopers are dismissed.</p> + + + + +<h2>PART II—ELEMENTARY COLLECTIVE INSTRUCTION.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 5. Elementary collective instruction.</h3> + +<p class="title">GENERAL PROVISIONS.</p> + +<p><b>321.</b> The elementary collective instruction of the trooper includes the +instruction in the <b>School of the Squad</b> and in the mechanism of the +movements prescribed in the <b>School of the Platoon</b>. This latter +instruction is given as prescribed in par. 444.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. Basic principles of the drill.</h3> + +<p><b>322.</b> The following provisions apply generally to the <b>School of the +Squad and to all subsequent drill</b>. Previous provisions of a similar +general character are to be found in pars. 43-49.</p> + +<p><b>323. Leading</b>: A commander leading his unit marches in the direction +and at the gait desired. He is followed at a specified distance by the +base (Def.), which conforms to his gait and direction. The commander +thus controls the movements of the base, and may at any time by his +indication conveyed in the most convenient way (as by his own +movements, his commands, or signals) cause the base to change its +direction or to increase or decrease the pace or gait or to halt, +according to the object in view. Elements of the same kind as the base +regulate upon the latter conforming to its gait and direction.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page135" name="page135"></a>(p. 135)</span> <b>324. Directing leader</b>, <b>directing guide</b>: A commander who +desires to become temporarily free in his movements may leave his +position as leader, first indicating: <b>DISREGARD</b> (<i>see</i> Signals) for +the information of the leader of the base unit, who then becomes the +<b>directing leader</b> (Def.). The latter then ceases to follow in the trace +of the commander and temporarily conducts the march. In the absence of +other indication from the leader he maintains the existing direction +and gait.</p> + +<p><b>When necessary</b> the conduct of the march of a group (e.g., a platoon) +having no subordinate leader may similarly be intrusted to the guide. +The latter then becomes the <b>directing guide</b> (Def.).</p> + +<p><b>325.</b> Whenever a change of formation involves a break in the continuity +of the leading the leader habitually moves at once to his new +position, so as to resume leadership with the least practicable delay. +He usually starts at the command of execution for the movement. Should +he start for his new position before the command of execution he first +cautions or Signals: <b>DISREGARD</b> for the information of the base.</p> + +<p><b>326. Change of directing unit (base)</b>: Whenever a change of formation +results in a change of the base, the base of the formation from which +the movement is executed continues, in the absence of specific +indication to the contrary, to be the base until the new base is +indicated.</p> + +<p>In movements from line by which column is formed directly to a flank, +the element of the column on the flank toward which the column is +formed is the base upon which other similar elements regulate during +the formation of the column as well as after the column is formed.</p> + +<p><b>327. Changes of direction</b>: Any movement may be executed either from +the halt or when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If executed +from the halt the command <b>forward</b> need not be prefixed to any other +preparatory command that indicates a direction of march; thus, being +at a halt, 1. <b>Column right</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; but, 1. <b>Forward trot</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><b>328.</b> To insure certainty of prompt execution, commands (and signals) +must be so given that their meaning is unmistakable. The preparatory +command must be given at such an interval of time before the command +of execution as will admit of the former being properly understood, +and should <span class="pagenum"><a id="page136" name="page136"></a>(p. 136)</span> be followed by a distinct pause that properly +varies in length with the size of the body of troops that is to +execute the movement. The command of execution should be given the +instant the movement is to begin.</p> + +<p><b>329.</b> All changes of direction are simply applications of the principle +of leading as explained in pars. 323 and 367.</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) The <b>turn</b> (par. 386) and <b>half turn</b> (par. 388) are <i>special</i> cases +of the change of direction <b>in line</b> in that they involve a change of +direction of <i>90°</i> and <i>45°</i>, respectively; <i>as executed by the +platoon and squad</i>, they differ further from the general case of the +change of direction in that the leader follows a <i>specially prescribed +arc</i> during the turn (par. 387); in the troop and larger units, the +leader in each case regulates the arc upon which he moves during the +turn in accordance with the length of the front and the requirements +of the special case.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) For a change of direction in any column formation, the elements +of the column successively change direction <i>on the same ground</i>, the +change in each successive element being made in accordance with the +principles that regulate the change of direction in line (<i>a</i>). In +each successive element the leader (if any) and the guide move over +the <i>same path that is followed by the leader at the head of the +column</i>.</p> + +<p><b>330.</b> The principles and methods laid down in the <b>School of the Trooper</b> +(dismounted and mounted) are, except as may otherwise be indicated, or +where clearly applicable only to individual instruction, to be +followed in corresponding instruction in the <b>School of the Squad</b> and +in all subsequent training. The same commands apply unless otherwise +stated.</p> + +<p>Certain modifications in the execution of some of the movements, +incident to their use in collective instruction, are noted in +appropriate places in the <b>School of the Squad</b>.</p> + +<p><b>331. Column of twos and of troopers</b>: Movements, involving the use of +column of twos or troopers, although simple in principle, are not +adapted to execution as movements of precision, and the details of +their execution will be regulated accordingly (pars. 393-400). +Familiarity with the practical use of these formations must be +insisted upon, but they will be taken in the simplest manner +consistent with efficiency in their use.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page137" name="page137"></a>(p. 137)</span> <b>382.</b> To avoid repetition the detailed descriptions and +explanations of collective movements are, as a rule, based only upon +the execution of the mounted movements.</p> + +<p><b>383.</b> <i>Gaits for mounted movements.</i>—All mounted movements not +specially excepted may be executed at the trot or gallop (par. 239).</p> + +<p>For the execution of a movement at the <b>trot or gallop</b> the command <b>trot</b> +or <b>gallop</b> precedes the command <b>march</b> unless marching at the gait +desired or unless it be otherwise prescribed. When the indication for +the <b>trot</b> or <b>gallop</b> is included in the command for the movement it +precedes the command <b>march</b>; thus, 1. <b>Forward, trot</b>; 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><b>334.</b> When the troopers of any element (Def.) move at different gaits, +if the gait of such <b>element</b> be referred to, the gait of its <b>base</b> is to +be understood.</p> + +<p><b>335.</b> A gait is said to be <b>correspondingly faster or correspondingly +slower</b> than another gait when there is a difference of one degree +between the two (par. 239).</p> + +<p><b>336.</b> In the rules included in pars. 333 to 337 the expression "other +elements" (Def.) means in each case elements of the <i>same kind as the +base</i>.</p> + +<p><b>337.</b> (<i>a</i>) In movements from the halt the base moves at the walk +unless another gait be stated in the command or indicated by the +leader's movements.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>In forming line to the front from column</b> the other elements +(par. 336) take, without command, a correspondingly faster gait than +the base. <b>If gallop</b> be <i>commanded</i> at any time, it applies only to the +other elements (<i>f</i>). The base (leading element) habitually preserves +the gait of march (<i>a</i>). The leader controls the movements of the base +according to the object in view. He may diminish its pace or gait or +halt it to hasten the formation. A command to decrease the gait or to +halt, given during the execution of the movement, applies only to +those elements that have already completed the movement. The leader +habitually so controls the base that elements in rear need not move +faster than a maneuver gallop in order to execute the movement.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) <b>Column to the front is formed from line</b> on the base at the gait +of march (<i>a</i>) or at the gait ordered (<i>e</i>). The other elements (par. +336) take or maintain a correspondingly <span class="pagenum"><a id="page138" name="page138"></a>(p. 138)</span> slower gait (or, if +halted, remain so) until they can move at the gait of the base to take +their places in the column. If an increased gait be <i>commanded</i> at any +time, it is taken at first only by the leader and base or by the +leader and those elements that have already moved to enter the column +(<i>f</i>)</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) In cases not covered by (<i>b</i>) or (<i>c</i>), if the base and other +elements have equal distances to go they move at the gait of march or +at that indicated in the command (e.g., 1. <b>Platoons right turn, trot</b>; +2. <b>MARCH</b>).</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) In cases not covered by (<i>b</i>), (<i>c</i>), or (<i>d</i>) (e.g., assemble +from <b>foragers</b>, par. 414), or by some special provision in the +description of the corresponding movement (e.g., <b>echelon</b>, par. 702) +the base maintains the gait of march (<i>a</i>) or takes that of the +leader; the other elements move at a correspondingly faster or slower +gait as may be necessary for the execution of the movement and on +arriving at their places take the gait of the base (par. 338). If a +special gait be commanded, it is taken by the base or by the other +elements, in accordance with the principle stated in (<i>f</i>).</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) When the commander indicates a special gait, whether in the +preparatory command or during the execution of the movement, the +effect is always to, <i>hasten the completion of the movement</i>. This +principle will assist in applying the rules in (<i>b</i>), (<i>c</i>), and +(<i>e</i>).</p> + +<p>(<i>g</i>) Changes of gait made by elements, without command, in accordance +with the above rules, are, except as specially indicated in the +commands, changes of one degree.</p> + +<p><b>338.</b> Any exceptions to the above rules are noted where they occur.</p> + +<p><b>339.</b> <i>Gaits for movements on foot.</i>—(<i>a</i>) The general principles of +gaits for mounted movements apply to movements on foot with the +modifications noted in (<i>b</i>) to (<i>g</i>), below, and such others as are +to be readily inferred from the application of the principles of the +<b>School of the Trooper, Dismounted</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) No element moves in <b>double time</b> unless the movement be executed +when marching in <b>double time</b> or <b>double time</b> be commanded (par. 47) or +otherwise indicated by the leader. No trooper increases the length of +the step or the cadence unless specially so prescribed.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page139" name="page139"></a>(p. 139)</span> (<i>c</i>) The leader so controls the movements of the base as to +facilitate the execution of the movement in accordance with (<i>b</i>), +above. This will involve halting the base whenever certain movements +(e.g., those from column into line) are executed in <b>quick time</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) If <b>double time</b> be included in the preparatory command for a +movement, the indication is obeyed in accordance with the principles +of par. 337.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) In movements from line into column, and in other similar +movements, if executed at <b>attention</b>, the troopers while waiting to +take their places in the column do not <b>halt</b> unless halt be commanded +by a platoon (or troop) commander. They <b>mark time</b> instead if necessary +for the execution of the movement.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) In applying the rules for mounted movements to movements on foot +<b>quick time</b> will be understood where <b>walk</b> is referred to and <b>double +time</b> where any faster gait is referred to.</p> + +<p>(<i>g</i>) Any exceptions to the above rules are stated where they occur.</p> + + +<h3>Section 7. The School of the Squad.</h3> + +<p><b>340.</b> As soon as the troopers are sufficiently advanced in their +instruction in the <b>School of the Trooper</b> they will be grouped into +temporary squads for elementary collective instruction. This +instruction will be conducted in accordance with the general +principles indicated in par. 42; progress therein should be so +regulated that no collective movement will be taken up until the +trooper, by previous individual instruction, has been properly +prepared for its execution.</p> + +<p><b>341.</b> Instruction in the <b>School of the Squad</b> is intended primarily to +teach recruits the elementary movements upon which the entire drill is +based. It may be recurred to whenever necessary in cases where +troopers evidence the need of further elementary work.</p> + +<p><b>342.</b> For elementary collective instruction groups of not to exceed six +or eight men can be used to best advantage. The actual instruction of +each group should be conducted by a noncommissioned officer, but the +instruction must be closely supervised by a commissioned officer +(par. 37).</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page140" name="page140"></a>(p. 140)</span> <b>343.</b> The system of drill contained in these regulations is +based largely upon the actual leading of units by their respective +chiefs or commanders. During the elementary instruction of recruits, +both mounted and dismounted, leading will be emphasized as indicated +in par. 344. Thereafter the application of leading will conform to +pars. 448 to 456.</p> + +<p><b>344.</b> The first collective instruction will, therefore, be in +conforming to the march of a leader, thus confirming and extending the +instruction given in the <b>School of the Trooper</b> (pars. 295, 298); <i>and +reasonable proficiency in this instruction must be secured before any +attempt is made to utilize either commands or signals in the execution +of collective movements</i>, except, as prescribed in par. 363.</p> + +<p><b>345.</b> It is difficult for a leader to lead the squad properly and at +the same time to supervise the march and correct the errors of +individual troopers. For this reason it is desirable, especially in +the earlier collective drills, that the instructor have as an +assistant another noncommissioned officer or a well-instructed +trooper. The instructor then leads the squad and requires his +assistant (who takes the positions best adapted for the purpose in +view) to supervise closely the movements of the troopers and to +correct errors by means of cautions <i>addressed quietly by name to the +individual man or men concerned</i>. Later the instructor similarly +supervises the execution of the march while requiring his assistant to +lead the squad. As the troopers advance in the instruction the +instructor should give each of them such practice in leading the squad +as the progress of the individual trooper concerned may appear to +justify.</p> + +<p><b>346.</b> When instruction in leading (par. 367) has advanced to the point +where the guide can preserve his proper distance from the leader and +conform promptly and smoothly to the latter's movements, the other +troopers meantime preserving their interval and alignment without +undue constraint or unnecessarily abrupt changes of gait or pace, the +instruction is extended progressively to include, in accordance with +the methods prescribed in par. 347, the execution of the movements +prescribed for the squad.</p> + +<p><b>347.</b> Throughout the instruction prescribed by par. 346 the squad will +continue as before to be <i>led</i>. In teaching each <span class="pagenum"><a id="page141" name="page141"></a>(p. 141)</span> new movement +the example and movements of the instructor as leader will be +supplemented at first by oral commands only, then by oral commands +accompanied by the corresponding arm signals for those movements for +which such signals are provided (<i>see</i> Signals, pars. 988-996), then +by signals alone. <i>The commands and signals will be given by the +actual leader.</i> When the instructor is not actually leading (par. 345) +he may either indicate to the leader the movements to be executed or +else leave to him the selection of such movements.</p> + +<p><b>348.</b> After the oral commands and arm signals are thoroughly understood +the instructor will practice the squad in passing from one formation +to another, using oral commands for some movements, signals for some, +and causing some (e.g., changes of direction) to be executed by +conforming to the movements of the leader without the additional +indication of either oral commands or signals.</p> + +<p><b>349.</b> The troopers must be accustomed to conforming, <i>without the +assistance of any command or signal given to the squad as a whole</i>, to +simple movements (e.g., movements <b>front into line</b>) initiated at the +head of a column formation by a command so given as to be heard by +only the leading troopers.</p> + +<p>With reasonable practice the more essential changes of formation that +are executed toward the direction of march can readily be taken by the +squad by conforming, without other indication, to the movements of the +troopers nearest the leader. As many movements in service must be +executed under conditions of noise, dust, etc., that will render it +difficult for the commands or signals of the leader to be understood +except by those near him, <i>practice, in conforming promptly and +intelligently to the movements of the elements nearest the leader is +important and must be given careful attention</i>.</p> + +<p>The object ultimately to be sought in the instruction is the quiet, +rapid, and effective handling of the squad with a <i>minimum of either +oral commands or signals</i>. The squad is required to pass rapidly from +one formation to another, a new movement being occasionally initiated +before the execution of the one preceding it has been completed.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page142" name="page142"></a>(p. 142)</span> TO FORM THE SQUAD, MOUNTED.</p> + +<p><b>350.</b> To form the squad <b>in line</b> (par. 368-<i>a</i>), the leader (instructor) +designates a trooper to act as the base of the formation, indicates to +such trooper the point where the right of the squad is to rest and the +direction in which the line is to face, takes position at a convenient +distance in front of and facing the point where the center of the +squad is to rest, and commands: <b>LEAD INTO LINE</b>. The base trooper <b>leads +out</b> (par. 188) and takes position as indicated; the other troopers +lead out so as to approach the line <i>successively directly from the +rear</i> and in single rank form on the line established by the base +trooper, in order from right to left. The troopers form at stand to +horse (par. 187) with intervals of 18 inches between horses.</p> + +<p>The line having thus formed, the leader calls the roll and commands, +<b>COUNT FOURS</b> (par. 84).</p> + +<p>Where there is an incomplete four the troopers in it are cautioned as +to the numbers finally assigned them (par. 368b-<i>b</i>).</p> + +<p>When but a single trooper is available for an incomplete four the four +is habitually broken up and a trooper is placed as an extra file +closer. This rule may, however, be modified in connection with the +instruction of recruits.</p> + +<p>The squad having counted fours, the leader causes the squad to mount +(par. 358).</p> + +<p><b>351. The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers</b> (par. +368-<i>b</i>, <i>c</i>, <i>d</i>) is similarly executed. The leader commands: <b>LEAD +INTO COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)</b>. The trooper upon +whom the formation is based (par. 350) becomes No. 1 of the leading +four. The elements of the column form, in order from front to rear, +with distances of 4 feet between successive, fours, twos, or troopers. +In column of fours or twos each four or two forms on its right trooper +as in line.</p> + +<p>When the formation is in column of <i>fours</i> the command <b>COUNT FOURS</b> is +omitted. The leader cautions: <b>NOTE YOUR NUMBERS</b>.</p> + +<p><b>352. The squad may also form in similar manner after the troopers +mount.</b> In this case the leader causes the troopers to mount +individually after saddling and commands: <b>RIDE INTO <span class="pagenum"><a id="page143" name="page143"></a>(p. 143)</span> LINE +(COLUMN, COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS).</b> The interval between the +mounted troopers is 6 inches from knee to knee.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO FORM THE SQUAD, DISMOUNTED.</p> + +<p><b>353.</b> For the dismounted formation of the squad, <b>in line</b>, when not +armed with the rifle, the leader designates the trooper to act as the +base, indicates the latter's position, and takes his own position as +described in par. 350, above. He then commands: <b>FALL IN</b>. The troopers +form as in pars. 57 and 58. The leader then calls the roll and causes +the squad to count fours.</p> + +<p>If armed with the rifle, the troopers fall in with rifles at the +<i>order</i>. As soon as the line or column is formed the leader commands: +1. <b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <b>Right shoulder</b>, 4. <b>ARMS</b> (par. 91-<i>2d</i>), and +calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers <b>here</b> and +executes <b>order arms</b>.</p> + +<p>The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers is conducted in +accordance with the modifications indicated. The commands of the +leader are: <b>FALL IN, IN COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)</b>. +The distance between successive fours is 92 inches; between successive +twos, 40 inches; between successive troopers, 14 inches.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT.</p> + +<p><b>354.</b> The squad being <b>in line</b>, at stand to horse, the habitual commands +for mounting are: 1. <b>Prepare to mount</b>, 2. <b>MOUNT</b>; 3. <b>Form</b>, 4. <b>RANK.</b> At +the first command the odd numbers lead out 4 yards directly to the +front, and all execute the movements and take the final positions +prescribed in par. 191a-<i>a</i>. At the second command all the troopers +complete, simultaneously, the movements of mounting as prescribed in +par. 191b-<i>b</i>. At the fourth command the even numbers move up into +their intervals in the line. If the squad has dismounted from line and +has formed rank (par. 356), the odd numbers stand fast at the command +<b>Prepare to mount</b> and all mount in place.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page144" name="page144"></a>(p. 144)</span> If the squad be mounted in column of fours; the third and +fourth commands are omitted. At the first command the troopers of each +four open out fanwise, Nos. 1 and 2 to the right, Nos. 3 and 4 to the +left. Nos. 1 and 4 open out a little more than Nos. 2 and 3, all +opening only enough to permit the troopers to mount without +interfering with each other. The troopers habitually straighten their +horses in the column as soon as they have mounted, but this +requirement may be relaxed whenever mounting in unison is not required +(par. 358). The squad in <b>column of twos</b> is mounted by commands and +methods conforming to those used for mounting from column of fours.</p> + +<p><b>355.</b> The preparatory oral command for mounting may be omitted. The +squad then executes at the command <b>MOUNT</b> all the movements prescribed +in par. 354 for the commands, 1. <b>Prepare to mount</b>, 2. <b>MOUNT.</b> The +troopers mount promptly, but not <b>in unison</b>.</p> + +<p>The preparatory <i>signal</i> for mounting, when followed <i>immediately</i> by +the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the oral +command <b>MOUNT</b>, and will be executed accordingly.</p> + +<p><b>356.</b> The squad being in line, the habitual commands for dismounting +are: 1. <b>Prepare to dismount</b>, 2. <b>DISMOUNT</b>; 3. <b>Form</b>, 4. <b>RANK.</b> At the +first command the odd numbers ride 4 yards directly to the front, +regulating on the right, and all the troopers execute the movements +and take the final position prescribed in par. 192a-<i>a</i>. At the second +command the troopers execute, simultaneously, the movements prescribed +in par. 192b-<i>b</i>. At the fourth command the even numbers lead into +their intervals in the rank. The third and fourth commands are given +only in case it is desired to form rank. The squad may be dismounted +and, without forming rank, execute <b>rest</b> or <b>at ease</b> (par. 359), or be +inspected, mounted, or dismissed. The modifications indicated for +dismounting in column of fours and column of twos correspond to those +prescribed in par. 354 for mounting from the corresponding formation, +except that the horses are not habitually straightened in the column +after dismounting unless the dismounted squad moves forward (the +troopers leading their horses).</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page145" name="page145"></a>(p. 145)</span> <b>357.</b> The preparatory oral command for dismounting, may be +omitted. The squad then executes at the command <b>DISMOUNT</b> all the +movements prescribed in par. 356 for the commands: 1. <b>Prepare to +dismount</b>, 2. <b>DISMOUNT.</b> The troopers dismount promptly but not in +unison.</p> + +<p>The preparatory <i>signal</i> for dismounting, when followed <i>immediately</i> +by the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the +oral command <b>DISMOUNT</b>, and will be executed accordingly.</p> + +<p><b>358.</b> Until the individual instruction of recruits has advanced to a +point where they have acquired reasonable proficiency in mounting and +dismounting, these movements will be executed at collective as well as +at individual instruction by the commands and methods indicated in +pars. 355 and 357. After such proficiency has been acquired, mounting +and dismounting at close-order drills, at ceremonies, and at all +occasions of a ceremonial nature will habitually be executed in unison +by the commands and methods prescribed in pars. 354 and 356, +respectively. The commands and methods prescribed in pars. 355 and +357, respectively, may, in the discretion of the commander, continue +to be employed on all other duty.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE RESTS AND ROUTE ORDER.</p> + +<p><b>359.</b> The mounted squad executes the <b>rests</b> and <b>route order</b> as +prescribed in par. 221. After dismounting from line, <b>rest</b> or <b>at ease</b> +may be given either before or after forming rank.</p> + +<p>The dismounted squad executes the <b>rests</b> and <b>route order</b> as prescribed +in pars. 60 and 61.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO DISMISS THE SQUAD.</p> + +<p><b>360.</b> The squad, in <b>column of troopers</b>, is dismissed as prescribed for +that formation in par. 222. The squad in <b>column of fours</b> is dismissed +at the same command. The trooper on the right of the leading four +leads out as indicated in par. 222 and is followed, in turn, by the +other troopers of that four, then by the troopers of the next four, +and so on successively to the rear of the column. In each four the +troopers lead out <span class="pagenum"><a id="page146" name="page146"></a>(p. 146)</span> in order from right to left. The dismissal +from <b>column of twos</b> is similarly executed. The squad being <b>in line</b> is +dismissed by the commands and methods prescribed in par. 222 for a +line with intervals, except that the troopers, in order to have their +proper distance, move out successively from right to left instead of +simultaneously. At the commands: 1. <b>By the right and left</b>, 2. <b>FALL +OUT</b>, the movement is executed in a similar manner from both flanks of +the line. After having dismounted from line the squad may be dismissed +without forming rank.</p> + +<p>Dismounted, without horses and not under arms, the command is +<b>DISMISSED</b>.</p> + +<p>Dismounted, without horses but armed with the rifle, the squad is +dismissed as in par. 114.</p> + + +<p class="title">ALIGNMENTS.</p> + +<p><b>361.</b> At the preliminary instruction (conducted without formal command) +the instructor has two troopers on the right of the rank move forward +a convenient distance and halt. He then aligns these two troopers +carefully, with the proper interval as <b>in line</b> (par. 368a-<i>a</i>), and +causes the other troopers to note the details of the alignment. The +other troopers are then required to move up one at a time and align +themselves, with the correct interval, on the line thus established. +The troopers move forward, in order from right to left, at successive +repetitions by the instructor of the caution <b>NEXT</b>. Each trooper, when +on or near the line, executes <b>eyes right</b> (par. 64), aligns himself +accurately on the line established by the trooper or troopers on his +right, and looks to the front as soon as he thinks himself correctly +aligned. The instructor explains and corrects any errors. Similar +instruction is given the troopers in aligning themselves to the left. +As soon as reasonable proficiency is attained but a single trooper is +moved forward, and the alignment is made in the same manner upon the +single trooper established as the base.</p> + +<p>The instruction is similarly given with the center trooper moved to +the front as a base. Two troopers, one on the right, the other on the +left of the base, then move forward at each repetition of the caution +<b>NEXT</b>.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page147" name="page147"></a>(p. 147)</span> The instructor observes in the mounted instruction: That +each trooper moves his horse promptly and halts with his horse +correctly disposed; that he sits squarely on his horse without +advancing either shoulder or leaning his body to the front or rear; +that he dresses promptly as he arrives on the line; and that he makes +proper use of the aids (pars. 200 to 208).</p> + +<p>In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established parallel +to the front of the section; afterwards in oblique directions.</p> + +<p><b>362.</b> When the troopers have acquired reasonable proficiency in +aligning themselves, as above, the alignment is executed at the +command <b>DRESS</b>, given by the instructor from his position as leader. +The trooper designated as the guide (par. 371) is always the base +trooper of the alignment and places himself accurately 3 yards in rear +of the leader. All the other troopers align themselves promptly on the +base trooper, continuing to look toward him until the command, <b>FRONT</b>. +At this last command, given when the alignment is completed, all turn +the head and eyes quickly to the front and take the position of +<b>attention</b> (pars. 59, 198). Movements in the rank then cease. The +instructor then habitually faces the squad or goes to either flank to +verify the accuracy of the dressing, first cautioning the guide to +remain in place.</p> + +<p><b>363.</b> The troopers and their mounts must be so trained as to enable +alignment and interval to be kept with sufficient accuracy to maintain +cohesion in the mounted charge and to, present a creditable appearance +at ceremonies and at other occasions of a formal or ceremonial +character. A disproportionate amount of time and energy will not be +devoted to this detail.</p> + +<p><b>364.</b> The use of dressing <i>by command</i> is ordinarily confined to +elementary instruction (as preparation for the march in line) and to +formations of a distinctly ceremonial character. At all other times +the troopers are required habitually to align themselves on the base +trooper without special command and to look to the front as soon as +aligned.</p> + +<p>Formal dressing is employed only when the squad is at a halt.</p> + +<p><b>365.</b> The caution: <b>DRESS</b>, may, if necessary, be given to the squad +when marching (par. 367); but it will not be employed <span class="pagenum"><a id="page148" name="page148"></a>(p. 148)</span> when it +is practicable to use instead cautions addressed by name to the +individual trooper or troopers who are at fault.</p> + +<p><b>366.</b> Alignments, dismounted, are executed by the same general methods +as when mounted. At the command: <b>DRESS</b>, the hand is placed upon the +hip to verify the interval (par. 57). Each trooper in dressing so +places himself that his right arm rests lightly against the arm of the +man on his right and that his eyes and shoulders are in line with +those of the man on his right. The left hand is dropped to the side at +the command <b>FRONT</b>.</p> + +<p class="title">LEADING THE SQUAD.</p> + +<p class="center">(<i>See also</i> pars. 322-332.)</p> + +<p><b>367.</b> The squad being in line at a halt, the instructor directs the +guide (par. 371) to maintain a position at a distance of 3 yards +(about one horse length) in rear of him and to follow accurately in +his path, whether such path be a straight line or a curve. He explains +to the other troopers that in marching they are so to regulate on the +guide as to preserve as nearly as practicable their alignment and +interval in the rank, individually increasing and decreasing the gait +or pace (Def.) as may be necessary to do this. All are cautioned that +they must learn to keep their proper positions in the rank without +unnecessary rigidity without making sudden changes in gait or pace and +without keeping their eyes constantly fixed on the guide. They are +instructed that while riding with the head and eyes habitually +directed as in par. 198 they will keep an alert lookout over the +ground in front, cast frequent glances toward the leader so as to +observe the latter's movements, and glance occasionally toward the +guide to assure that the alignment is being correctly maintained. +Having given these instructions, the leader places himself, facing to +the front, 3 yards in front of the guide, commands: <b>FOLLOW ME</b>, and +moves forward. The leader must be, careful to march steadily, so +regulating his direction and gait at first as to enable the guide to +conform without difficulty.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page149" name="page149"></a>(p. 149)</span> Each trooper keeps his horse straight in the rank, +maintaining his alignment with the guide and his proper interval (par. +368a-<i>a</i>) from the man next him on the side of the guide. The troopers +yield to pressure from the side of the guide and resist pressure from +the opposite direction. All adjustments are made gradually without +crowding or confusion.</p> + +<p>In the beginning the leader moves at a walk and makes only slight +changes of direction. As the instructor completes each change of +direction he indicates the <i>new</i> direction of march by <span class="pagenum"><a id="page150" name="page150"></a>(p. 150)</span> +extending his arm as in signal <b>forward</b> (par. 990), dropping the hand +to the side when the guide's horse is <i>straightened in the new +direction</i>. When the troopers have become sufficiently practiced in +adjusting themselves to the movements of the instructor, the latter +makes the changes of direction more marked, and moves, during such +changes, on the arcs of smaller circles. Finally, he requires the +squad to apply the principles of leading in the manner indicated in +pars. 346-349. As each movement is taken up the principles of leading +that apply are explained in detail, so that all may understand clearly +the identity and position of the base. The base trooper (guide) must +clearly understand his duties. (Fig. <a href="#img038">31</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img044" name="img044"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img044.jpg" width="480" height="500" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 37</span>, par. 367.</p> +</div> + + +<p class="title">SQUAD FORMATIONS.</p> + +<p>The formations of the squad for drill, march, or combat are as +follows:</p> + + +<p class="title">CLOSE ORDER.</p> + +<p><b>368.</b> (<i>a</i>) <b>Line</b>: The troopers are abreast of each other with intervals +(Def.) of 6 inches (mounted) or 4 inches (dismounted) between +troopers.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>Column of fours</b>: The troopers of each four are arranged as <b>in +line</b>. The fours follow successively one behind another with distances +(Def.) between Successive fours of 4 feet, mounted, or 92 inches, +dismounted. When a four includes less than four troopers it is an +<b>incomplete four</b>. Places in an incomplete four are habitually filled in +the following order: No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 1 (par. 374).</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) <b>Column of twos</b>: The troopers of each two are arranged as <b>in +line</b>, the twos following successively, one behind another, with +distances between successive twos of 4 feet, mounted, or 40 inches, +dismounted. If any two have but a single trooper the latter takes the +position corresponding to the right trooper of the incomplete two +(par. 374).</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) <b>Column of troopers</b>: The troopers of each four follow +successively, one behind another, with distances between consecutive +troopers of 4 feet when mounted, or 14 inches when dismounted.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page151" name="page151"></a>(p. 151)</span> EXTENDED ORDER.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) <b>Foragers</b>: The troopers are abreast of each other, with intervals +of 3 yards between troopers, unless some other interval be specially +designated.</p> + +<p>The dismounted formation corresponding to <b>foragers</b> is <b>skirmishers</b>. The +interval between troopers in line of skirmishers is one-half pace +unless some other interval be designated.</p> + +<p><i>In the employment of a squad or other small detachment the +designation of a greater interval than one-half pace is habitual +rather than exceptional (par. 408).</i></p> + +<p>In a line of skirmishers at one-half pace interval each man may be +considered as occupying, including his interval, about 1 yard of +front.</p> + +<p>The squad may also be extended in depth as prescribed in par. 413.</p> + + +<p class="title">Order in the Squad.</p> + +<p><b>369.</b> When it is said that a unit is <b>in order</b> in any formation it is +meant that the arrangement and condition of the component elements is +such that the unit is ready to execute, in the accustomed manner, any +movement that is intended to be executed from the formation in +question. The conditions essential to <b>order</b> in each formation of the +squad are stated in paragraph 370. The squad, <b>in line</b>, for example, +would not be <b>in order</b> if the troopers did not know their numbers, for +it could then execute no movement based upon the division into fours, +twos, or troopers.</p> + +<p><b>370.</b> The squad <b>in line</b>, <b>column of fours</b>, or <b>foragers</b> is <b>in order</b> when +the troopers of each four are arranged, from right to left in the +four, in the order of their respective numbers, and each knows his +number.</p> + +<p>The squad <b>in column of twos</b> is <b>in order</b> when the twos of each four are +next to each other in the column, odd numbers on the right, and each +trooper knows his number.</p> + +<p>When the two composed of 1 and 2 is in front, the column is said to be +<b>right in front</b>; when the two composed of 3 and 4 is in front, the +column is said to be <b>left in front</b>.</p> + +<p>The squad <b>in column of troopers</b> is <b>in order</b> when the troopers of each +four are next to one another in the column, are arranged <span class="pagenum"><a id="page152" name="page152"></a>(p. 152)</span> from +front to rear in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, or 4, 3, 2, 1, and each trooper +knows his number. When the order is 1, 2, 3, 4, the column is said to +be <b>right in front</b>; when the order is 4, 3, 2, 1, <b>left in front</b>.</p> + +<p>It is not necessary to order in the squad, in any of the above +formations, that a particular trooper or troopers be in any designated +four, nor that the fours have any special relative order from right to +left or front to rear.</p> + + +<p class="title">Guide of the Squad.</p> + +<p class="center">(<i>see also</i> Def. <a href="#base"><b>Base</b></a>, and par. 326.)</p> + +<p><b>371.</b> At the original formation of the squad <b>in line</b>, the leader +designates a trooper by name as <b>guide</b> of the squad. The guide of the +squad <b>in line</b> and <b>foragers</b> is habitually a trooper at or near the +center of the squad; any trooper may, however, be designated as guide.</p> + +<p><b>372.</b> A trooper having once been designated as guide of the squad in +line continues to act as such, <b>in line</b> or <b>foragers</b>, until another +trooper be specifically designated as guide. With a view, however, to +avoiding possible doubt as to the identity of the guide, the leader at +each change of formation that terminates in line or foragers +habitually indicates the guide of the new formation.</p> + +<p><b>373.</b> To designate the guide the leader cautions: (So-and-so) <b>THE +GUIDE</b>, and habitually places himself 3 yards in front of the trooper +named if not already in that position. A trooper designated as guide +will, at the time of the designation, raise his hand or weapon to a +position vertically above his head, hold the position for a moment, +and then lower his arm to his side without further command. The leader +or his assistant may at any time cause the guide thus to indicate his +identity to the other troopers by cautioning: <b>GUIDE</b>. The leader may +change the guide of the squad in line at any time by indicating +<b>disregard</b> (par. 990), placing himself in front of another trooper and +designating the latter as guide in the manner prescribed above.</p> + +<p><b>374.</b> The base of the squad in each of the column formations is the +leading element (four, two, or trooper, respectively).</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page153" name="page153"></a>(p. 153)</span> The guide of the leading (base) element is also the guide of +the squad. In each four No. 2 is the guide; in each two the right +trooper (No. 1 or No. 3). In an incomplete four or two the position of +the guide is always filled. The guide of each element in rear of the +base follows in the trace of the guide of the base (leading) element +at the prescribed distance.</p> + +<p><b>375.</b> Whenever in the execution of any movement a four or two moves to +its new position by an oblique (or movement approximating an oblique) +the trooper on the side toward which the oblique is made acts as guide +of the element during the oblique. At all other times the guide in a +four or two is as indicated in par. 374 unless specially otherwise +stated.</p> + +<p><b>376.</b> The guide of the squad habitually follows the leader at 3 yards +distance, but the leader may designate a greater distance, in which +case the guide marches accordingly.</p> + +<p><b>377.</b> When a guide temporarily is <b>directing guide</b> (par. 324), it is +necessary that he continue accurately in the direction of march or in +the direction indicated for him by the leader. This is an application +of the marching upon fixed points prescribed in the <b>School of the +Trooper</b> (par. 232).</p> + + +<p class="title">Movements Executed by the Squad.</p> + +<p><b>378.</b> Any formation (close or extended order) prescribed for the squad +may be taken directly from any other <i>close-order</i> formation. Being in +extended order the squad, to pass directly to close order, must +execute the assembly or rally.</p> + +<p><b>379.</b> Subject to such modifications as are indicated under the +respective paragraphs describing the movements, the <b>dismounted squad</b> +executes, at the same commands as prescribed for the mounted squad, +such movements as are not obviously inapplicable to dismounted duty. +The execution of the dismounted movements will, where differences in +the mounted and dismounted methods necessarily exist, be in accord +with the principles explained in the <b>School of the Trooper, +Dismounted</b>, corresponding changes in the details of execution being +made.</p> + +<p><b>380.</b> The general principles regulating gait and pace for both mounted +and dismounted movements are stated in pars. 333-339. Modifications of +those principles, if any, are stated under the corresponding +paragraphs in the <b>School of the Squad</b>.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page154" name="page154"></a>(p. 154)</span> Commands and Corresponding Arm Signals.</p> + +<p><b>381.</b> Following is a list of the principal commands employed in the +<b>School of the Squad</b>, together with the corresponding arm signals, if +any. The list includes only a few of the commands also found in the +<b>School of the Trooper</b> (mounted or dismounted.) The commands are +arranged alphabetically for convenient reference. The description of +the signals will be found in par. 990.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="3" summary="Arm signals."> +<colgroup> + <col width="45%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="45%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="center"><span class="smcap">Commands.</span></td> +<td class="center"><span class="smcap">Pars.</span></td> +<td class="center"><span class="smcap">Arm signals.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="3"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Assemble, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">414</td> +<td><b>Assemble.</b><a id="footnotetag7" name="footnotetag7"></a><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Backward, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">384</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">411</td> +<td><b>March to the flank.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>CIRCLE HORSES</b></td> +<td class="center">428</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Column, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">399</td> +<td><b>Column.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Column half right (left), 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">396</td> +<td>Change direction.<a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (<i>See</i> par. 386.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">399</td> +<td><b>Column—twos.</b><a id="footnotetag8" name="footnotetag8"></a><a href="#footnote8" title="Go to footnote 8"><span class="smaller">[8]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">396</td> +<td><b>Change direction.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (<i>See</i> par. 386.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>COUPLE HEAD AND TAIL</b></td> +<td class="center">427</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>DISMOUNT</b></td> +<td class="center">357</td> +<td><b>Prepare to dismount.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a><br> +(Given as explained in par. 357.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Foragers, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">408<br>410</td> +<td><b>Foragers.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Forward, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">382<br>412</td> +<td><b>Forward.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">391<br>400</td> +<td><b>March to the flank.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page155" name="page155"></a>(p. 155)</span> <b>1. Fours right (left) about, 2. MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">401<br>402</td> +<td><b>To the rear<a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (left about only).</b></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Fours right (left), column left (right); 2 MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">403c-<i>c</i></td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Fours (twos or troopers) at so many yards distance, 2. MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">413</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Gallop, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">382</td> +<td>From the trot only: <b>Increase the gait.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a><a id="footnotetag9" name="footnotetag9"></a><a href="#footnote9" title="Go to footnote 9"><span class="smaller">[9]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>HORSES BACK</b></td> +<td class="center">432</td> +<td>None</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>INCLINE TO THE RIGHT</b></td> +<td class="center">390<br>396</td> +<td>None</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Nos. 1, 2, and 4; 2. FORM ON FOOT</b></td> +<td class="center">436</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>MOUNT</b></td> +<td class="center">355</td> +<td><b>Prepare to mount.</b> (Given as explained in par. 355.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT</b></td> +<td class="center">356<br>358</td> +<td><b>Prepare to dismount.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT</b></td> +<td class="center">354<br>358</td> +<td><b>Prepare to mount.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>RALLY</b></td> +<td class="center">416</td> +<td><b>Rally</b> (no preparatory signal).<br> +Oral command habitually accompanies signal.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) by fours, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">403a-<i>a</i></td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) by troopers, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">393b-<i>b</i><br>403b-<i>b</i></td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">393a-<i>a</i><br>403b-<i>b</i></td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) forward, fours right (left); 2. MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">403d-<i>d</i></td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page156" name="page156"></a>(p. 156)</span> <b>1. Right (left) half turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Forward, 4. MARCH</b>; +or 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></td> +<td class="center">388</td> +<td><b>Change direction.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> The signal of execution for the +change of direction is followed by <b>forward or halt</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (par. 386).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) front into foragers</b> (or <b>skirmishers</b>), <b>2. MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">409</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">397</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Right (left) turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Forward 4. MARCH; or 3. Squad, 4. HALT</b></td> +<td class="center">386</td> +<td>Change direction.<a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> The signal of execution for the +change of direction is followed by <b>forward</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> or +<b>halt</b>.<a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">408<br>410</td> +<td><b>Skirmishers.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Squad, 2. HALT</b></td> +<td class="center">383</td> +<td><b>Halt.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>TO FIGHT ON FOOT.</b> When given orally the indication <b>ACTION RIGHT</b> +(<b>LEFT, FRONT</b>) is habitually added to the above command. <b>FIRE AT WILL</b> +may also immediately follow the above command (par. 430).</td> +<td class="center">430</td> +<td><b>To fight on foot.</b> (No preparatory signal.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. To the rear, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">412</td> +<td><b>To the rear.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Troopers right (left) about, 2. MARCH.</b> (Given only from column of troopers.)</td> +<td class="center">402</td> +<td>To the rear<a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (left about only).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Troopers right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH.</b></td> +<td class="center">385</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page157" name="page157"></a>(p. 157)</span> <b>1. Trot, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">239</td> +<td>From the <b>walk</b>: <b>Increase the gait.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a><a href="#footnote9" title="Go to footnote 9"><span class="smaller">[9]</span></a><br> +From the <b>gallop</b>: <b>Decrease the gait.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a><a href="#footnote9" title="Go to footnote 9"><span class="smaller">[9]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Twos right (left), 2. MARCH.</b> (Given only from column of twos and as an +exceptional movement.)</td> +<td class="center">400</td> +<td><b>March to the flank.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Twos right (left) about, 2. MARCH.</b> (Given only from column of twos.)</td> +<td class="center">402</td> +<td>To the <b>rear</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a> (left about only).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><b>1. Walk, 2. MARCH</b></td> +<td class="center">239</td> +<td>From the trot only: <b>Decrease the gait.</b><a href="#footnote7" title="Go to footnote 7"><span class="smaller">[7]</span></a><a href="#footnote9" title="Go to footnote 9"><span class="smaller">[9]</span></a></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class="title">Detailed Description of Movements, Close Order.</p> + +<p><b>382. Being in line at a halt, to march to the front:</b> 1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The leader moves forward, followed at a distance of 3 yards by the +guide (par. 371). The other troopers conform to the march of the guide +as explained in par. 367.</p> + +<p><b>Being at a halt, to move forward at a trot or gallop</b>, the commands are +(par. 333): 1. <b>Forward, trot</b>, or 1. <b>Forward, gallop</b>; 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Increases of gait are habitually made progressively (par. 239).</p> + +<p>The march of the squad in line, dismounted, is conducted in accordance +with the provisions of pars. 68-74.</p> + +<p><b>383. Marching in line, to halt</b>: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>All halt at the second command.</p> + +<p>The troopers, if not already aligned, align themselves without command +on the guide as they halt (par. 364). Movement in the rank then +ceases.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page158" name="page158"></a>(p. 158)</span> If marching at the trot or gallop, the gait is ordinarily +decreased progressively, the halt being executed from the walk (par. +239).</p> + +<p><b>384. Being in line at a halt, to march backward</b>: 1. <b>Backward</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>All the troopers rein back (par. 280), regulating on the guide, who +maintains his distance from the leader. The execution of the march +backward as a <i>collective movement</i> is habitually limited to cases +where the movement may be necessary; it is then executed for short +distances only. It is not executed at an increased gait.</p> + +<p><b>385. Being in line, to oblique and resume the original direction</b>: 1. +<b>Troopers right (left) oblique</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Executed by each trooper as in par. 230. During the oblique march the +right knee of each trooper should be just in rear of the left knee of +the trooper on his fight; the trooper on the flank toward which the +oblique is made acts temporarily without special indication as +directing guide (Def.) of the squad. The line during the oblique +march should be <span class="pagenum"><a id="page159" name="page159"></a>(p. 159)</span> parallel to its original direction. The +leader does not take position in front of the flank trooper during the +oblique.</p> + +<p>Halting the mounted squad while at the oblique should be avoided. If +the squad has to be halted thus, the troopers upon halting turn their +horses to the original front in so far as practicable.</p> + +<p>To resume the original direction by similar means, the commands are: +1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>In executing the oblique by trooper, dismounted, each trooper +preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders parallel to +those of the directing guide and so regulating his step that the rank +may remain parallel to its original front. In resuming the original +direction, the troopers half face to the left in marching, then move +straight to the front. If at <b>half step</b> or <b>mark time</b> while obliquing, +the oblique march is resumed by the commands: 1 <b>Oblique</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> +Should the halt be commanded while the squad is obliquing, the +troopers halt faced to the front (fig. <a href="#img039">32</a>).</p> + +<a id="img045" name="img045"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img045.jpg" width="500" height="382" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 38</span>, par. 385.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>386. Being in line, to turn to the right or left</b>: 1. <b>Right (left) +turn</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Forward</b>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>; or 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>The principle of the movement is explained in par. 329a-a.</p> + +<p>The form of the third and fourth commands is determined by whether the +turn is to terminate with the advance in line or with the halt.</p> + +<p>In the turn the squad is led by its leader (par. 367) through a change +of direction of 90°. The leader (and, therefore, the guide) are +restricted not only to this particular change of direction but also to +a particular arc or path during the turn (par. 387).</p> + +<p>There is no special arm signal for the <i>turn</i> as such; but, as the +turn is a change of direction, the signal for the latter movement is +applicable. The signal for the change of direction does not in itself +indicate the degree of the turn, but the leader's subsequent signal +forward or halt indicates when the change of direction is to cease.</p> + +<p>In the turn, as in any case of the march in line, the leader, subject +to the restrictions just indicated, regulates the direction and gait +of march, the guide conforms to the movements of the leader, and all +the other troopers regulate their alignment <span class="pagenum"><a id="page160" name="page160"></a>(p. 160)</span> and interval on +the guide. The rate of march of the leader and the guide should not be +so rapid as to make it impracticable for the troopers on the marching +flank of the squad to preserve their alignment on the guide during the +turn. The guide moves in the <i>trace of the leader during the turn</i>, as +well as before and after the turn. When the turn is executed by the +<i>marching squad</i> the leader gives the command after he has begun to +change direction and at the moment when the guide arrives at the +<i>point where the leader straightened his horse in the new direction</i> +(par. 471). When executed from a <i>halt</i> the second command can not be +given as above indicated. The leader in that case begins to turn at +the command of execution, while the guide, instead of beginning the +actual turn at once, moves forward so as to move, during the turn, <i>in +the trace of the leader</i> (par. 367).</p> + +<p>In executing the turn dismounted the leader so regulates the length of +step of the guide that the <i>trooper on the marching flank</i> can keep +the regular step corresponding to the gait at which the turn is made. +The other troopers lengthen or shorten the step accordingly, +maintaining the cadence and their alignment and interval with respect +to the guide. If the turn be terminated by the commands: 3. <b>Forward</b>, +4. <b>MARCH</b>, all the troopers resume the regular step at the fourth +command.</p> + +<p><b>387.</b> In executing the turn in a <i>squad</i> or <i>platoon</i>, the leader, +followed by the guide, so turns on the arc of a circle that the pivot +trooper, in <i>conforming to the guide's movements</i>, marches on the arc +of a circle whose radius varies with the gait of the guide, this +radius being 2 yards at a walk, 4 yards at a trot, and 6 yards at a +gallop. When the turn is executed dismounted the corresponding radius, +in either quick or double time, is 1 yard.</p> + +<p><b>388.</b> At the command: 1. <b>Right (left) half turn</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Forward</b>, +4. <b>MARCH</b>; or 3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, a change of direction of 45° may be +made in accordance with the principles explained in pars. 386 and 387. +The arm signal for the half turn follows the rule indicated for the +full turn (par. 386).</p> + +<p><b>389.</b> In all movements in these regulations in the course of which +<b>fours</b>, <b>twos</b>, or <b>troopers</b> execute a turn or half turn this last +movement is made by each element in accordance with the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page161" name="page161"></a>(p. 161)</span> +principles explained in pars. 386 and 387, except that the commands 3. +<b>Forward</b>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>, are omitted and each element continues the march in +the new direction, upon completion of the turn, unless the commands: +3. <b>Squad</b>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, are given. The guide of a four in the turn is +always No. 2; the guide of a two the right trooper.</p> + +<p><b>390.</b> Where only a slight change in the direction of march is desired; +it is habitually accomplished by leading without any special command +or signal therefor. The leader may caution: <b>INCLINE TO THE RIGHT +(LEFT)</b>. The execution of this movement, like that of the turn, is a +special case of leading applied to the march in line. The leader +slightly alters the direction of march, the guide conforms to the +leader's movements, and the other troopers conform to the movements of +the guide.</p> + +<p><b>391. Being in line, to form column of fours to a flank</b>: 1. <b>Fours right +(left)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<a id="img046" name="img046"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img046.jpg" width="250" height="110" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 39</span>, par. 391.</p> +</div> + +<p>The fours move simultaneously, each executing right turn and taking up +the march in the new direction (par. 389). No. 2 of the four on the +flank toward which the movement is executed is the guide upon whom the +other Nos. 2 regulate during the movement (par. 326), as well as the +guide of the resulting column (par. 374). The leader promptly takes +position in front of the guide (par. 325). Gaits are regulated as in +par. 337d-<i>d</i>.</p> + +<p><b>The movement dismounted</b> is executed on the same principles except that +No. 2 of each four regulates his step and path as indicated for the +dismounted turn (pars. 386, 387). (Fig. <a href="#img040">33</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>392. Column of twos</b> is not formed directly to a flank from line. +Column of twos may be formed to the <i>front</i> as explained in pars. 393 +and 403, and the head of the column be at once marched in any desired +direction. The same principle regulates the formation of <b>column of +troopers</b> to a flank.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page162" name="page162"></a>(p. 162)</span> +<b>393. Being in column of fours, to form column of twos or +troopers</b>:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) To form column of twos: 1. <b>Right (left) by twos</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The right two of the leading four is the base. The other twos enter +the column successively, the right two of each four being followed +immediately by the left two of the same four, the left two obliquing +to enter the column (par. 331). All distances are 4 feet (par. 368). +Gaits are regulated as in movements from line into column (par. 337-a, +c).</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>Column of troopers</b> is formed on the same principles at the +commands: 1. <b>Right (left) by trooper</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> The right trooper of +the leading four is the base.</p> + +<p>Column of troopers from column of twos is formed by the same commands +as from column of fours and in accordance with the same principles.</p> + +<p><i>The movements described in this paragraph are among those referred to +in par. 468-b.</i></p> + +<p><b>394.</b> In executing any movement by which a column; of twos or troopers +is formed, a four composed of less than three troopers (par. 368b-b) +acts temporarily as a two—on the right of the four if the column of +twos is formed <b>right in front</b> (par. 370); on the left of the four if +the column of twos is formed <b>left in front</b>. When the column of fours +is re-formed the troopers take their proper places in column as +indicated in par. <i>368b-b</i>.</p> + +<p><b>395.</b> The squad in column of <b>fours</b>, <b>twos</b>, or <b>troopers</b> is marched to the +front, halted, marched backward, marched in an oblique direction, and +marched again to the original front by the same commands as the squad +in line, each element of the column conforming to the principles +indicated for the squad in line (pars. 329, 374).</p> + +<p><b>396. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers</b>, to change direction.</p> + +<p>The movement is executed as explained in par. 329, the fours (twos, +troopers) successively changing on the same ground, the guide of each +element moving in the trace of the leader.</p> + +<p>In changing direction in column of fours, <i>mounted</i>, the guide of +each rear four slightly diminishes the <i>pace</i> when 4 <span class="pagenum"><a id="page163" name="page163"></a>(p. 163)</span> feet +from the turning point, correspondingly increasing the pace during the +actual change of direction so as to have the proper distance of 4 feet +from the four <b>next</b> in front when the turn is completed. This provision +does not apply to the corresponding dismounted movement, nor to the +column of twos, or troopers.</p> + +<p>To indicate, for any column, a change of direction of 90° or 45°, the +leader may command, respectively: 1. <b>Column, right (left)</b>, or 1. +<b>Column half right (left)</b>; 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The leader may indicate a slight change of direction by the caution: +<b>INCLINE TO THE RIGHT</b>.</p> + +<p>The dismounted execution of the change of direction conforms in each +element of the column to the modifications noted in pars. 386 and 387 +for the execution of the turn dismounted. The leader regulates the +length of his own step accordingly during his actual change of +direction, and the guide of each successive element does the same when +he reaches the turning point.</p> + +<p><b>397. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to the +front</b>: 1. <b>Right (left) front into line</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<a id="img047" name="img047"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img047.jpg" width="150" height="284" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 40</span>, par. 397.</p> +</div> + +<p>The leading element (four, two, or trooper) of the column is the base +of the movement and moves forward.</p> + +<p>Each element in rear of the base, leaves the column by a movement +approximating a right oblique and proceeds (par. 375) to a place +abreast of the leading element, the elements taking successively, from +left to right in the new line, positions in the same order as that in +which they previously appeared from head to rear in the column.</p> + +<p>The guide of the leading element, when the movement begins, acts as +directing guide (Def.) of the squad from the moment the leader starts +to his new position until he indicates the guide of the new line +(pars. 326, 373) when all regulate on the latter guide.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page164" name="page164"></a>(p. 164)</span> Gaits are regulated as in pars. 337-<i>a</i>, <i>b</i>. (Fig. <a href="#img041">34</a>.)</p> + +<p><i>This is one of the movements referred to in par. 468-b.</i></p> + +<p>In the dismounted execution of the movement at quick time the leader +commands: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>HALT</b>, as soon as the leading element has +advanced to the point where it is desired that the line shall form +(par. 339-<i>a</i>, <i>b</i>, <i>c</i>). Only the leading (base) element halts at the +command, each rear element halting as it arrives on the line (par. +337f-<i>f</i>). If executed while marching in double time, the leader +similarly commands: 1. <b>Quick time</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, the reduced gait being +taken successively by the elements as they reach their positions (par. +337f-<i>f</i>). If marching in quick time, and <b>double time</b> be included in +the command, the command for the increased gait applies only to the +rear elements (par. 337f-<i>f</i>).</p> + +<p><b>398.</b> To prevent the inversion of twos or troopers in their respective +fours the squad in <b>column of twos or column of troopers</b> should form +line to the left front when the squad is right in front (par. 370), +and vice versa.</p> + +<p><b>399. Being in column of twos or troopers, to form column of fours</b>: 1. +<b>Column</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> (<i>See</i> Def. <a href="#column"><b>Column</b></a>.)</p> + +<a id="img048" name="img048"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img048.jpg" width="300" height="75" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 41</span>, par. 399.</p> +</div> + +<p>The leading element is the base and follows the leader.</p> + +<p><b>If in column of twos</b> the rear two of the leading four obliques at a +correspondingly faster gait (par. 335) and takes its proper place +abreast of, and to the <i>right or left</i> of, the leading two of that +four, so that the troopers of the four shall appear from right to +left, in the order of their respective numbers. All the other twos +take up a correspondingly faster gait than the leading two, and the +fours form successively from head to rear in the column in the manner +indicated above (par. 331). The leading two of each four, other than +the leading four, takes the gait of the head of the column (or halts) +when at 4 feet from the corresponding two of the four next in front. +In each four the rear two begins to oblique as the leading two of that +four approaches the position where it decreases the gait (or halts).</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page165" name="page165"></a>(p. 165)</span> The leader takes position in front of the guide of the column +(No. 2).</p> + +<p>Gaits are further regulated as in movements from column into line +(par. 337-<i>a</i>, <i>b</i>).</p> + +<p><b>Column of fours, from column of troopers</b> is formed by the same +commands and in accordance with the same principles.</p> + +<p><b>Column of twos from column of troopers</b> is formed in a similar manner +at the commands: 1. <b>Column of twos</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> The column of twos will +be right in front or left in front (par. 370), according as the column +of troopers was right in front or left in front prior to the movement.</p> + +<p>In the dismounted execution of the above movements in quick time the +leader habitually commands: 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>HALT</b>, immediately following +the command of execution (par. 339-<i>b</i>, <i>c</i>). Only the leading element +halts (par. 339f-<i>f</i>), each of the rear elements halting when it +reaches its prescribed position in the column. If executed in <b>double +time</b> the leader similarly follows the command of execution by the +command for <b>quick time</b> (par. 339-<i>b</i>, <i>c</i>), which is successively +taken by the elements, as above. If marching in <b>quick time</b>, and <b>double +time</b> be commanded, only the rear elements take the increased gait, +each taking <b>quick time</b> on arriving in its place. (Fig. <a href="#img048">41</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>400. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to a +flank</b>: 1. <b>Fours right (left)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Each, four turns to the right (par. 389). Each rear four regulates on +the leading four until the fours unite in line (par. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page166" name="page166"></a>(p. 166)</span> 326), +when, unless the leader halts the squad, all take up the march in the +new direction <i>without further command</i>, regulating on the new guide +(pars. 325, 372). If the squad is to form line without advancing in +the new direction, the leader gives the preparatory indication for the +halt immediately following the second command, so as to add the +command halt as the four unite in line.</p> + +<p><b>In an emergency</b> a similar movement may be executed from <b>columns of +twos</b> at the commands: 1. <b>Twos right (left)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> Loss of <b>order</b> +may result. In the absence of other indication, intervals are closed +toward the guide (par. 372). A similar movement executed from column +of troopers results in a line of foragers, which may be assembled or +rallied to form line (pars. 414, 416).</p> + +<p>Gaits are regulated as in par. 337d-<i>d.</i> (Fig. <a href="#img043">36</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img049" name="img049"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img049.jpg" width="500" height="210" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 42</span>, par. 400.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>401. Being in line, to face or march the line to the rear</b>: 1. <b>Fours +right (left) about</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>When the movement is executed by <b>signal</b> the elements of the column +always turn to the <i>left</i> about. The oral command <b>fours right about</b> is +not accompanied by an arm signal.</p> + +<p>Each four turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par. 389). The +leader, passing around a flank of the squad, promptly takes position +in front of the guide so as to lead the squad in the new direction +(pars. 325, 372).</p> + +<p>To face to the rear, the squad is halted as the fours unite in line.</p> + +<p>The modifications incident to the execution of the dismounted movement +are indicated in par. 391.</p> + +<p>Gaits are regulated as in par. 337d-<i>d</i>.</p> + +<p>A dismounted squad may also be marched a short distance to the rear by +the <i>oral</i> command and methods indicated in par. 82.</p> + +<p><b>402. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to face or march the +column to the rear</b>: 1. <b>Fours (twos, troopers), right (left) about</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The provision in the preceding paragraph regarding the execution of +the movement by signal applies equally to this paragraph. Each four +(two, trooper) turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par. +389). The leader promptly takes <span class="pagenum"><a id="page167" name="page167"></a>(p. 167)</span> position in front of the +guide of the column (par. 325). (Fig. <a href="#img044">37</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img050" name="img050"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img050.jpg" width="162" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 43</span>, par. 402.</p> +</div> + +<a id="img051" name="img051"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img051.jpg" width="192" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 44</span>, par. 403a (<i>a</i>).</p> +</div> + +<p class="nofloat"><b>403. Being in line to form column of fours, twos, or troopers to the +front</b>: 1. <b>Right (left) by fours (twos, troopers)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The formation is a successive one. The right element (four, two, or +trooper, according to the command) is the base; it moves forward and +follows the leader, becoming the leading element of the column.</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) In forming column of fours each four to the left of the base +successively obliques to the right (par. 385) at the gait of the base +as soon as it has sufficient space, and resumes the direct march so as +to enter the column at 4 feet distance. To avoid losing distance the +oblique must be begun in each four when the heads of its horses are +opposite the croups of the horses of the four on its right. Gaits are +regulated as in pars. 387-<i>a</i>, <i>c</i>. (Fig. <a href="#img051">44</a>.)</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) In forming column of twos or troopers only the elements of the +right four move in the manner indicated above. Each of the other +elements successively turns to the right (par. 389) and then, after +advancing in the new direction, turns to the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page168" name="page168"></a>(p. 168)</span> left so as to +enter the column at 4 feet distance (par. 331). Gaits are regulated as +in pars. 337-<i>a</i>, <i>c</i>. The movements described in (<i>a</i>) and (<i>b</i>) are +among those referred to in par. 468-<i>b</i>. (Fig. <a href="#img052">45</a>.)</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) <b>Right (left) by fours</b> is ordinarily unsuited to execution in +groups of any size. Should it be necessary to break to the front from +the <i>flank</i> of such a unit, column of fours to the front may be formed +by executing <b>fours right (left)</b> and then changing the direction of +march of the head of the column. The oral commands: 1. <b>Fours right +(left), column left (right)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, and 1. <b>Fours right (left), +column half left (right)</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, are authorized for this purpose. +Gaits are regulated as in par. 337d-<i>d</i>.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) For cases that are <i>not suitably met by (a) or (c) of this +paragraph</i> the commands: 1. <b>Right (left) forward, fours right (left)</b>, +2. <b>MARCH</b>, are authorized. The right four is the base and moves forward +following the leader, who promptly takes position in front of the +guide of the column (pars. 325, 374). The second four from the right +starts to move as in fours right (par. 391), its guide decreasing the +pace until the right four has partly cleared the second four, when the +latter four, by a movement approximating an oblique, enters the column +so as to follow in the trace of the leading (original right) four at +4 feet distance. The other fours execute <b>fours <span class="pagenum"><a id="page169" name="page169"></a>(p. 169)</span> right</b> (each +slightly decreasing the pace during the turn), and then <b>column left</b>, +so as to follow the second four at the proper distance. The fours move +simultaneously and, except as noted above, all at the same gait (par. +337d-<i>d</i>).</p> + +<p>In the execution of the movement dismounted the right four moves +forward; the remainder of the squad executes <b>fours right, column left</b>, +and follows the right (leading) four at 92 inches distance. The right +four takes four short steps just after it, clears the four next on its +left, then resumes the full step. (Fig. <a href="#img053">46</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img052" name="img052"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img052.jpg" width="240" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 45</span>, par. 403b (<i>b</i>).</p> +</div> + +<a id="img053" name="img053"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img053.jpg" width="231" height="250" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 46</span>, par. 403d (<i>d</i>).</p> +</div> + + +<p class="title nofloat">Extended Order.</p> + +<p><b>404.</b> In extended-order drills the troopers habitually march <b>at ease</b>, +but keep on the alert so as promptly to conform to the indications of +the leader and the movements of the guide.</p> + +<p>The rifles of dismounted troopers in extended order are carried as in +par. 61.</p> + +<p><b>405.</b> Foragers may be formed when the squad is in any authorized +formation (par. 468) or in disorder, when it is moving at any gait or +is halted. The extension is effected toward the direction of march. +When possible the deployment should be made upon ground protected from +hostile view and fire. Whatever the method employed for the extension, +the leader controls the movements of the base (par. 323). The other +troopers, moving at a <i>gallop</i>, form <b>foragers</b> in accordance with the +methods indicated.</p> + +<p>The squad, deployed as <b>foragers</b>, is marched to the front and halted, +obliques, resumes the original direction, executes changes in gait and +changes of direction, by the commands and methods prescribed for the +squad in <b>line</b>.</p> + +<p><b>406.</b> The appropriate substitution of <b>skirmishers</b> for <b>foragers</b>, is made +in the commands for movements in extended order, dismounted (par. +368c-<i>c</i>). The skirmishers move at a run to their positions on the line +of foragers.</p> + +<p><b>407.</b> A greater or less interval than 3 yards between foragers may be +ordered, the words <b>at (so many) yards</b> being added to the preparatory +command so as immediately to follow the word <b>foragers</b> or <b>skirmishers</b>.</p> + +<p><b>408. Being in line, to form foragers</b>: 1. <b>Foragers</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The guide continues to be the base and advances (par. 405) at the +gait of march unless the leader indicates otherwise <span class="pagenum"><a id="page170" name="page170"></a>(p. 170)</span> (pars. +337f-<i>f</i>, 405). The troopers to the right of the guide move at a gallop +obliquely to the right front; those to the left obliquely to the left +front. The troopers take position abreast of the base in the same +order as in line and at intervals of 3 yards measured from the side of +the base. Should the right trooper be the guide, all oblique to the +left; should the left trooper be the guide, all oblique to the right.</p> + +<p>In the execution of the corresponding dismounted movement (commands: +1. <b>Skirmishers</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>—par. 406) the troopers move to their places +at a run, taking intervals of one-half pace, unless some other +interval be indicated (pars. 368e-<i>e</i>, 407.) (Fig. <a href="#img044">37</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>409. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form foragers</b>: +1. <b>Right (left) front into foragers</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page171" name="page171"></a>(p. 171)</span> The <i>left trooper</i> of the leading element of the column as +the base of the deployment advances at the gait of march (par. +337a-<i>a</i>) unless the leader indicates otherwise +(pars. 337f-<i>f</i>, 405), +the other troopers of the leading element deploying as indicated in +par. 408. The remaining troopers move obliquely to the right front at +a gallop and extend the line in similar, manner, the order of the +successive elements being the same, from left to right in line, as it +formerly was from head to rear in the column.</p> + +<p>The possibility of the inversion of troopers in the fours as a result +of forming foragers from column of <i>twos</i> or <i>troopers</i> should be kept +in mind. No such inversion can occur in movements executed from column +of fours. The movement described in this paragraph is one of those +referred to in par. 468-<i>b</i>. (Fig. <a href="#img048">41</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img054" name="img054"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img054.jpg" width="300" height="446" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 47</span>, par. 409.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>410. Being in disorder, to form foragers</b>:</p> + +<p>Foragers may be formed from any condition of dispersion or disorder by +methods similar to those indicated in pars. 408 and 409. At the +command: 1. <b>Foragers</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, the troopers nearest the leader ride +toward him at a gallop. The leader indicates the guide (par. 373), who +follows the leader; the other troopers, moving at a gallop, take +position, with the proper interval, on the right and left of the +guide, without regard to order.</p> + +<p>Line of foragers from a condition of disorder may also be formed by +first rallying the squad (par. 416) and then forming foragers.</p> + +<p>Dismounted, skirmishers may similarly be formed.</p> + +<p><b>411. Being deployed as foragers, to march to a flank</b>: 1. <b>By the right +(left) flank</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>Each trooper turns 90° to the right and marches in the new direction +(par. 389). A column of troopers at 4 feet distance results. The line +of foragers may be resumed by again marching to the flank by the use +of corresponding commands and methods.</p> + +<p>Gaits are regulated as in par. 337d-<i>d</i>.</p> + +<p>Dismounted, each trooper moves as in par. 81. If at a halt, the +movement of the foragers by the flank is executed by the same commands +as when marching.</p> + +<p><b>412. Being deployed as foragers, to march to the rear</b>: 1. <b>To the +rear</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page172" name="page172"></a>(p. 172)</span> Each trooper executes an about to the <i>left</i> (pars. 389, 486). +To march again to the front the commands: 1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, are +given. Each trooper executes another about to the <i>left</i>. If a line of +foragers be halted while marching to the rear, each trooper turns to +the left about and halts, faced to the front (par. 474).</p> + +<p>Gaits are regulated as in par. 337d-<i>d</i>.</p> + +<p>Dismounted, each trooper executes <b>to the rear</b> (par. 82). If at a halt, +the movement of the foragers to the rear is executed by the same +commands as when marching.</p> + +<p><b>413.</b> The squad may be extended in depth as well as in front. The +commands are: 1. <b>Fours (twos, or troopers) at so many yards distance</b>, +2. <b>MARCH.</b> This movement may be used to cross a fire-swept area when +such a course is necessary. The leader indicates the point where the +squad is to be reassembled. The fours (twos or troopers) move out +successively from head to rear in column or right to left in line. +Each element may extend laterally on its guide. The gait is the +gallop.</p> + +<p><b>414. Being deployed as foragers and in order (par. 470) to assemble</b>: +1. <b>Assemble</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b> The guide advances and follows the leader. The +other troopers close in on the guide and form in <b>line</b> upon him in the +same relative order in which they were at the moment the assembly was +commanded. The leader halts the guide at any time if it is desired to +assemble without gaining further ground in the direction of march. +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page173" name="page173"></a>(p. 173)</span> The leader, by moving in any desired direction, may regulate +the direction toward which the assembly is executed. Gaits are +regulated as in par. 337e-<i>e</i>, the elements other than the base taking +a correspondingly faster <b>gait</b>. The assembly in each unit is explained +for that unit (par. 468-<i>b</i>).</p> + +<p>The leader may, by prior designation of any trooper (e.g., a flank +trooper) as guide (par. 373), cause the assembly to be executed on +that trooper by the commands and methods just indicated.</p> + +<p>The troopers always start to assemble in line, but when an assembly in +column is desired it may virtually be accomplished, by the leader's +designation of a flank trooper as the guide before ordering the +assembly and cautioning: <b>COLUMN</b> as soon as the assembly begins. The +fours, as they successively assemble toward the base, then take their +places in column of fours instead of in line; the leader takes post in +front of No. 2 (par. 325).</p> + +<p>If there be not space to advance in column of fours, the assembly in +<b>column of twos or troopers</b> may be accomplished by corresponding +commands and methods.</p> + +<p>The <i>squad</i> executes <b>assemble</b> only when deployed as foragers and <b>in +order</b>. Under other conditions the rally (par. 416), followed, by <b>count +fours</b>, more easily accomplishes the purposes of the <b>assembly</b> (Def.).</p> + +<p>In executing the assembly dismounted the troopers close in on the +guide in double time <i>without special command</i> if the guide and leader +continue to advance (par. 339g-<i>g</i>); otherwise they close in at quick +time unless double time be commanded (par. 339b-<i>b</i>). (Fig. <a href="#img049">42</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img055" name="img055"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img055.jpg" width="500" height="276" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 48</span>, par. 414.</p> +</div> + +<p><b>415.</b> If <b>to the rear</b> (par. 412) be executed by the squad, a temporary +loss of <b>order</b> occurs. If it be desired to pass to close order without +resuming the march to the front and assembling (par. 414), the squad +may rally (par. 416) and count fours.</p> + +<p><b>416. Being in any formation, or not formed, or in disorder, to rally</b>; +<b>RALLY</b>. <i>When the rally is ordered the signal is habitually accompanied +by the oral command, both the signal and the oral command, being +repeated until understood and obeyed. The signal is obeyed at once, +there being no preparatory command for this movement.</i></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page174" name="page174"></a>(p. 174)</span> The leader takes position at any point or moves in any +desired direction, and at any gait that will permit the movement to be +executed. The troopers ride toward the leader at an extended gallop +and, in the absence of other indication, form in rear of the leader in +line. The leader promptly designates the guide (pars. 371, 373), who +follows the leader. The other troopers form, as they come up, on the +right and left of the guide extending the line. The leader may +caution: <b>COLUMN</b>, as the leading troopers approach. The troopers then +form in <b>column of fours</b> instead of in <b>line</b>. The leading element forms +first; the other troopers, as they arrive, successively form fours, +extending the column to the rear. The leader designates the guide +(pars. 373, 374) and cautions: <b>NOTE YOUR NUMBERS</b>. The rally in column +is exceptional and is intended for use only on occasions when a narrow +road or other circumstances of the terrain prevent the rally in line.</p> + +<p>Should the route along which the leader is moving when the rally is +ordered be too narrow to permit the formation of column of fours, the +leader may caution: <b>COLUMN OF TWOS (COLUMN OF TROOPERS)</b> as the leading +troopers approach. The movement is executed as explained for the rally +in column of fours. <b>Fours</b> should be counted at once. The rally in +columns of twos or troopers is to be regarded as very exceptional.</p> + +<p>The squad being rallied in line, though ordinarily not <b>in order</b> until +fours are counted (par. 470), is available at once <span class="pagenum"><a id="page175" name="page175"></a>(p. 175)</span> to charge +or to execute any movement that does not involve a knowledge of their +respective numbers on the part of the individual troopers. Unless the +charge is to be executed at once, fours should be counted without +delay after rallying, so that the squad, may be <b>in order</b> and ready to +execute any movements whatever that conditions may demand.</p> + +<p>The rally dismounted, is always executed at a run. (Fig. <a href="#img056">49</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img056" name="img056"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img056.jpg" width="500" height="144" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 49</span>, par. 416.</p> +</div> + + +<p class="title">The Mounted Attack.</p> + +<p><b>417.</b> The mounted attack is made with the pistol or saber in accordance +with the principles indicated in pars. 562-565. The typical saber +charge is executed in <b>line</b>. Under some circumstances, as in the attack +of a dispersed enemy, etc., a saber charge may be made by troopers +deployed as <b>foragers</b>. The pistol attack is usually made in foragers. +In exceptional circumstances (as in breaking out from an ambush, +attacking in a narrow road, etc.) it may be made <b>in line</b> or <b>in column +of fours, twos, or troopers</b>.</p> + +<p><b>418.</b> Cohesion in the line and vigor in the shock are essential to the +success of the <i>saber charge</i>. High speed is necessary for the desired +shock; and in the saber charge, as executed in combat, the horses are, +at the culmination of the charge, habitually "turned loose" and urged +to the highest speed. This, except with men and horses that are highly +trained, necessarily involves <i>loss of control</i> over the horse on the +part of the trooper. The saber charge, executed with poorly trained +horsemen, especially if on imperfectly trained or excitable house's, +is apt to be futile as regards the instruction of the trooper and to +result in more or less permanent loss of control over the horses. +<i>Control of the mount</i> by the trooper is essential during the +execution of the <i>pistol attack</i> (ordinarily made in line of +foragers), and is, of course, necessary during march and maneuver. For +these reasons it is considered advisable that the first instruction of +the recruit in the actual saber charge be deferred until after platoon +instruction and that it be given then only after the troop commander +is satisfied that the recruit's progress in horsemanship and in the +use of his weapon has advanced to a point when the exercise will be +of value.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page176" name="page176"></a>(p. 176)</span> <b>419.</b> The work in the squad, with a view to <i>preparing the +recruit for the mounted attack with the saber and pistol</i>, will +therefore be limited to those exercises in which the horse is +<i>controlled</i>. It should consist, in substance, of an extension to +collective work of the individual instruction described in par. 297, +and should include occasional practice in advancing as rapidly as can +be done while maintaining a close formation and control of the mount. +The increase in speed should be made quietly and progressively, be +continued but a short distance, and <i>invariably be terminated by the +quiet resuming of a slow gait</i>. As the recruit gets more skill and +confidence the exercise will be conducted with sabers drawn, the +troopers taking the charging position (par. 251) when the instructor +does so and returning to the <i>carry</i> with him. Similar exercises will +be conducted with the pistol, with especial attention to directing the +horses through lines of silhouette targets and to drawing, returning, +and manipulating the pistol. The exercises with the pistol will +usually be conducted in <b>foragers</b> and may be extended to include the +actual execution of the pistol attack as described in the <b>School of +the Platoon</b>.</p> + +<p>In campaign any small group executes the mounted attack as explained +for the platoon.</p> + +<p><b>420.</b> In combat of every kind skill on the part of the individual +trooper in the use of the weapon or weapons employed is essential. So +important is this part of the training that where time for the +training of the troopers is limited all but the most essential +portions of close-order drill should be deferred or omitted in order +that the training of the trooper in the use of his weapons may be +thorough and efficient.</p> + + +<h3>Section 8. Tent pitching.</h3> + +<p class="title">TO PITCH ALL TYPES OF ARMY TENTS, EXCEPT SHELTER AND CONICAL WALL +TENTS.</p> + +<p>To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall +tents: Mark line of tents by driving, a wall pin on the spot to be +occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal +tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet, +which will give a passage of 2 feet <span class="pagenum"><a id="page177" name="page177"></a>(p. 177)</span> between tents. Spread +tripod on the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is +used. Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, +and place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door +(or doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the +bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left +(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the +pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already +driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the +rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to +complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops. +Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front +corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small +amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven. +According to the size of the tent, one or two men, crawling under the +tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or +ridge-pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes +are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the +tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at +each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or +storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The +four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the +large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as +to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth when the +guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each +remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven in +line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the +tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly +are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace +ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed.</p> + + +<p class="title">CONICAL WALL TENT.</p> + +<p>Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using the +hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two concentric +circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page178" name="page178"></a>(p. 178)</span> In +the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of +about 3 feet drive the other guy pins.</p> + +<p>In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case +of pyramidal tents.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, PYRAMIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS.</p> + +<p><b>STRIKE TENTS.</b></p> + +<p>The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy +ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall +tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.</p> + +<p>One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is +lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole +fastened together, and the remaining pins collected.</p> + + +<p class="title">TO FOLD TENTS.</p> + +<p>For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the tent +flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side walls +are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; fold +the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it +rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent +in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in +two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second +from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the +second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of +the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the +bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.</p> + + +<p class="title">METHOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT.</p> + +<p>The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas +pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the +rear-corner wall pins, in the ground with the wall loops attached, one +man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a +perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from +the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of +the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page179" name="page179"></a>(p. 179)</span> Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the +left-rear corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square +iron, and pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and +return to the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the +right side of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and +under the front side of tent.</p> + +<p>Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described, +above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the +tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each +on itself.</p> + +<p>Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward +toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the square +iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth and parallel +with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the +canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of +the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the +two on the center width, which should be pulled out and away from +bottom edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one +end, fold toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first +and second widths) and fold again toward the center, so that the +already folded canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle +width. Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. +Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, +then making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that +already folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take +the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle +over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle, drawing tight. +Turn bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.</p> + +<p>When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by +23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.</p> + +<p>Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle +width of canvas in the back wall.</p> + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page180" name="page180"></a>(p. 180)</span> CHAPTER VI.<br> + +FIELD SERVICE.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Principles of training.</h3> + +<p>Inaction gives every advantage to the enemy.</p> + +<p>The offensive alone gives decisive results.</p> + +<p>A quick and energetic offensive minimizes losses.</p> + +<p>An advance against the enemy's position once entered upon must be +continued. To go back under fire is to die.</p> + +<p>The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy and to diminish his +power to inflict losses is to bring the position he occupies under +well-conducted and continued fire.</p> + +<p>Present as small a target as possible to the enemy by utilizing every +bit of cover the ground affords.</p> + +<p>Individual skill in marksmanship is an advantage in battle only when +united with fire discipline and control.</p> + +<p>Constant movement to the front lessens the effect of the enemy's fire. +Modern battles fought in the open show that the heaviest losses are in +the mid and long ranges. When close range is reached the losses +diminish rapidly.</p> + +<p>The best protection against artillery fire is a constant but irregular +movement to the front. When close to the enemy's position his fire is +least effective.</p> + +<p>A knowledge of how to use the bayonet and the will to use it must +often be the deciding factors in battle.</p> + +<p>Finally:</p> + +<p>In training we can not go far wrong or fail to accomplish the best +results if we keep before our minds the spirit as well as the wording +of paragraph 352 of the Infantry Drill Regulations: "The duties of +infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must be fit to cope with +all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires but one kind of +infantry—good infantry." Cavalry, dismounted, should be as efficient +as infantry under all conditions of service.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page181" name="page181"></a>(p. 181)</span> Section 2. Combat.</h3> + +<p>The field of battle is the final test of the instruction, discipline, +and efficiency of the fighting force of any army.</p> + +<p>The squadron is the <b>attack unit</b> or the <b>defense unit</b>, whether operating +alone or as part of a regiment. The troops constitute the <b>firing line</b> +and the <b>support</b>.</p> + +<p>An individual soldier is concerned only with the enemy in his +immediate front, in obeying orders, and instinctively doing what he +has been trained to do.</p> + +<p><b>The one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent team +work.</b> The army is handled just like a football team. A part is on the +first line facing the enemy. Another part, like the half backs, is +held back as supports. Another part, like the full backs, is held as a +reserve. Each unit, like each player, has a certain duty to perform. +When the signal is given, all work together—all play the game—team +work. The players consist of all branches of the service.</p> + +<p>The same rule holds true down to the smallest unit and even to the +individual enlisted man. Each regiment, is a team composed of three +players—each a squadron. Each squadron is a team of four +players—each a troop. In the same manner each troop is a team of two +or more platoons; each platoon a team of two sections; and last, but +not least, each section is a team of from 6 to 14 players.</p> + +<p>The one question that always presents itself on the battle field every +minute of the time to every person, whether he be a general or a +private, is, "<b>What play has my team captain ordered, and how best may +I act so as to work in conjunction with the other players to bring +about the desired result?"—team play.</b></p> + +<p>To the trooper this means—</p> + +<p>First. <b>Prompt and loyal obedience to the section leader.</b> Every section +always has a team captain. If the section leader and corporal are +killed or disabled, other players previously designated take their +places. If no one was designated, then the private with the longest +service takes command. When the section leader gives the command for a +certain play, don't stop to think if the play is a good one, but do +your very best to carry out the play as ordered. A poor play in which +every <span class="pagenum"><a id="page182" name="page182"></a>(p. 182)</span> player enters with his whole heart (team work) will +often win, while, on the other hand, the best play in which some of +the players are skulkers and shirkers will probably fail.</p> + +<p>Second. <b>Never lose touch with your section.</b> Every individual, as well +as every unit, should always be acting under the control of some +higher commander. This is necessary if there is to be any unity of +action. Therefore if you lose your section or it becomes broken up, +join the first section you can find and obey your new section leader +as loyally and as cheerfully as you did your own.</p> + +<p>While yet several miles from the enemy's position the troops may come +under artillery fire. On green men entering upon their fight, the +sound of the projectile whistling through the air, the noise, flash, +and smoke on the burst of the shrapnel, and the hum of the various +pieces thereafter, all produce a very terrifying effect, but old +soldiers soon learn to pay little attention to this, as the danger is +not great.</p> + + +<p class="title">The Mounted Attack.</p> + +<p class="title">THE TROOP ACTING ALONE.</p> + +<p><b>639.</b> When the troop acting alone charges it is ordinarily divided into +two parts, viz, the <b>attacking line</b> and the <b>reserve</b>, but a platoon is +never kept in rear except when the captain so directs.</p> + +<p>If the attacking line, or reserve, consists of only one platoon, it is +led by its chief; if it consists of two or more platoons, it is led by +the senior chief of platoon or by the captain.</p> + +<p>When a chief of platoon takes post as leader of two or more platoons, +his place as platoon leader is taken by the corresponding file closer. +Whenever the <b>rally</b> or <b>assembly</b> is ordered, the captain may cause the +guidon to be displayed at the rallying or assembly point indicated.</p> + +<p><b>640.</b> In instruction exercises the enemy must always be outlined or +represented by troopers, who may carry flags, under command of an +officer or noncommissioned officer. In the beginning of this +instruction these men will occupy fixed positions; later they will be +instructed to ride so as to represent the movements of an aggressive +enemy. The captain will explain <span class="pagenum"><a id="page183" name="page183"></a>(p. 183)</span> to the commander the object +of the exercise and tell him what to do.</p> + +<p><b>641.</b> The platoons of the <b>attacking line</b> may attack in one line or +successively, as from column of platoons with extended distances. The +captain, in addition to designating a reserve, may direct one or more +platoons to execute any special mission. In the absence of special +instructions from the captain the leader of each platoon, or +combination of platoons, that is acting separately uses his +discretion, endeavoring so to employ his command as best to assist in +carrying out the general plan indicated by the captain's orders.</p> + +<p><b>642.</b> The reserve, in the absence of special instructions, follows the +attacking line at from 100 to 150 yards in readiness to support the +attacking line, meet a counter attack, or press the pursuit, as +occasion may require.</p> + +<p>A platoon designated for a <b>flank attack</b> is so conducted by its leader +as to fall opportunely upon the enemy's flank.</p> + +<p>If a flank platoon be so designated, it attacks from that flank unless +otherwise directed.</p> + +<p>To guard against a flank attack or an enveloping attack the captain +may detach a platoon to move to the threatened flank so as to take an +enveloping attack in flank or meet a flank attack. If a flank platoon +be so designated, it acts on the corresponding flank unless otherwise +directed. When no platoon is specially designated for flank guard, the +corresponding duties fall upon the reserve.</p> + +<p><b>643.</b> The captain's commands should include an indication of the +objective, unless the latter is obvious, designate the elements of the +attack, and state any special mission that is assigned to any element. +The captain's orders also usually include an indication of the weapon +to be used by the several elements of the attack and may prescribe the +formations to be employed. All details not prescribed by the captain +are left to the discretion of the commanders of the several elements +into which the attack is divided.</p> + +<p>Where the same weapon is to be used by all it is ordinarily drawn at +the captain's orders before the instructions for the attack are given. +Otherwise, each commander gives the proper orders for drawing saber +or raising pistol.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page184" name="page184"></a>(p. 184)</span> <b>644.</b> The troop being, for example, <b>in line</b>, marching at a +gallop with sabers drawn, the captain may command: <b>Objective, Cavalry +in front; Second and Third platoons, to the charge; First platoon, +flank attack; Fourth platoon, reserve.</b> Each element of the attack +proceeds at once to carry out its orders. The leader of the attacking +line (whether the captain or a lieutenant) directs the leader of the +base platoon to close on him before charge is ordered (par. 563). In +other respects, the charge is conducted as explained for the platoon +(pars. 562-564).</p> + +<p>The troop being, for example, in column of platoons, marching at a +gallop, no weapon drawn, the captain may command (the objective being +obvious): <b>First and Second platoons, pistol attack; Third platoon, +reserve; Fourth platoon, left flank guard.</b> The leader of the attacking +line commands: 1. <b>As foragers</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, and attacks with the pistol +according to the principles explained for the platoon (pars. 566-568) +as soon as the second platoon completes its deployment on the left of +the first platoon. The commanders of the third and fourth platoons +move to their positions, drawing saber or raising pistol in their +discretion.</p> + +<p>Should the captain command, for example: <b>First and Second platoons, +pistol attack in two lines; Third platoon, charge enemy's right flank; +Fourth platoon, reserve</b>, the third platoon may charge with the saber.</p> + +<p>Should the captain cause pistols to be raised before ordering the +attack all use the pistol.</p> + +<p>The above are only examples to indicate the character of the captain's +commands. The actual orders must meet the situation presented.</p> + +<p><b>645.</b> At the first indication for the charge the ground scouts move out +from the flanks of the attacking line (par. 569) unless otherwise +specially directed. The captain usually sends out any necessary combat +patrols; but each leader of a separate group is responsible that any +further steps necessary for the immediate protection of his own flanks +are taken.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE TROOP IN THE SQUADRON.</p> + +<p><b>646.</b> The troop in squadron, in mounted attack, has no reserve, but +may have a support in the discretion of the major. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page185" name="page185"></a>(p. 185)</span> If on the +flank of the squadron, its own flank defense must be provided by the +captain in the absence of instructions.</p> + + +<p class="title">Passing from Mounted Action to Dismounted Action.</p> + +<p><b>647.</b> The movements are executed by commands and methods corresponding +to those already explained for the squad and platoon, with the +following modifications and additions thereto:</p> + +<p>The horses of the captain and of one bugler who accompanies the +captain are held by the other bugler or by a man specially designated +<i>in advance</i> for that duty.</p> + +<p>The horses of the first sergeant and other men out of ranks, and not +otherwise specially provided for, are secured in the same manner +indicated in the corresponding provisions for the squad and platoon.</p> + +<p><b>648.</b> The guidon, in the absence of instructions to the contrary, takes +general charge of the led horses and performs the duties prescribed +for the trooper in charge of the horse-holders and horses (par. 431). +Should one of the platoon file closers be senior to the guidon, the +first sergeant cautions such file closer and the guidon <i>in advance</i> +that the senior will have general charge of the led horses of the +troop while such senior remains with the horses. In the absence of +other special instructions, the file closer of each platoon reports +the additional troopers of his platoon to the troop commander after +Nos. 2 dismount. The guidon remains in general charge of the other +horse-holders and the horses, a designated trooper having, under the +guidon, immediate charge of the horse-holders and horses of each +platoon.</p> + +<p><b>649.</b> The captain gives any desired special instructions to the guidon +and sees that proper measures for security are taken. On dismounting, +the first sergeant remains near the horses long enough to see that the +designated noncommissioned officer is in charge and is making proper +provision as regards the horses; he then joins the captain. Any +sergeants who may be extra file closers without special assignment of +duties join the captain; other extra file closers not specially +assigned join the platoons with which they were riding. The captain, +on dismounting, takes position at the point where he <span class="pagenum"><a id="page186" name="page186"></a>(p. 186)</span> desires +the base platoon to form or otherwise indicates that position to the +leader of the base platoon. The platoon that was the base when the +troop dismounted remains the base of the dismounted formation in the +absence of other indication. Its leader takes position at once in rear +of the captain, or as indicated by the latter, and the dismounted +platoon forms in <b>double column</b> or as directed. The other platoons form +so as to extend the formation <b>in line of double columns</b>, or as the +captain orders, in accordance with the principles governing the +assembly of the troop. The captain may direct the platoon leaders to +proceed at once to designated positions without forming the troop as a +unit. <i>In all cases the measures taken must be such as to prevent +unnecessary exposure of men or horses to hostile view or fire.</i></p> + +<p class="title">Dismounted Combat (The Troop).</p> + +<p>GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.</p> + +<p><b>650.</b> When the troop, acting alone, dismounts to engage in deliberate +fire action the captain makes provisions for the led horses (par. 649) +and at once sends out scouts (usually two experienced men detailed and +trained as such) to the front to reconnoiter. The captain reconnoiters +usually in rear of, but in touch with the scouts, and accompanied by +platoon commanders and the first sergeant; he explains to them the +purpose of the attack, gives them all the information he has about the +enemy and about our own troops in the vicinity, points out to them the +objective of each platoon if they are to advance, or indicates the +part of the line to be held by each if to take the defensive.</p> + +<p><b>651.</b> The advance of a troop after dismounting, in anticipation of fire +action either in attack or defense is made in close order, preferably +in columns of fours or twos, until the probability or the actual +encountering of hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy. After such +deployment the advance (now designated <b>the approach</b>) may be continued +in line of skirmishers or other suitable formation before opening +fire. The approach dismounted may often be facilitated, better +advantage taken of cover, and losses minimized by using formations +such as <span class="pagenum"><a id="page187" name="page187"></a>(p. 187)</span> line of platoons each in column of twos or troopers, +or a succession of thin lines at varying distances, one directly +behind the other or echeloned. The choice of a formation would depend +upon conditions, such as the effectiveness of the enemy's fire, cover +afforded by folds of the ground, or by natural obstacles. If the +deployment is found to be premature, it will generally be better to +assemble the troop and resume the advance in close order.</p> + +<p>The formations mentioned as facilitating the advance, viz, line of +platoons in column of twos or troopers, or a succession of thin lines +find application most frequently in the approach when the ground is so +difficult or the cover so limited as to make it desirable to take +advantage of the few favorable routes on which to move forward.</p> + +<p><b>652.</b> The approach in a succession of thin lines is, if possible, made +by sections under the immediate direction of platoon commanders with +wide intervals between skirmishers. By so advancing continuous control +of the line is assured. If that method is not practicable, then the +successive lines are made up of one or more men from each four of a +platoon on the skirmish line, the command being: 1. <b>Numbers 1 (or such +number or numbers), first (or such) platoon, forward</b>; 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The captain having pointed out in advance the selected position in +front of the lines which are to be occupied, the designated numbers +move to the front. The line thus formed preserves the original +intervals as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced to the +indicated position, a second line is sent forward by similar commands, +and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has advanced. +Upon arriving at the indicated position the first line is halted. +Successive lines upon arriving halt on line with the first, and the +men take their proper places in the skirmish line.</p> + +<p>Ordinarily each line is made up of one man or more from each four of a +platoon, and the men of a four are sent forward in order from right to +left. The first line is led by the platoon leader of that platoon, the +second by its file closer, and so on. Under favorable conditions the +successive lines may be made up from all of the platoons which are +deployed as skirmishers.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page188" name="page188"></a>(p. 188)</span> The movement is conducted in quick time unless conditions +make double time necessary.</p> + +<p>After the entire troop has reached the line a further advance in the +same manner may be found advisable.</p> + +<p>The movement in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide +stretch swept or likely to be swept by artillery fire or heavy +long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its +purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to +engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing by thin lines +results in serious, though temporary, loss of control over the +successive platoons of the troop. Its advantages lie in the fact that +it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire.</p> + +<p><b>653.</b> These are merely suggested methods of advancing preliminary to +opening the fire attack; other formations better adapted to particular +occasions or terrain may be devised. The best formation is that which +advances the line the farthest without drawing the enemy's fire, or, +if he does open fire, then with the least loss of men, time, and +control.</p> + + +<p class="title">THE FIRE ATTACK.</p> + +<p><b>654.</b> The principles involved in the fire attack are discussed under +<b>Dismounted Fire Action, the Squadron</b> (par. 716), and necessary +modifications as to details made under <b>Dismounted Action, the Regiment</b> +(par. 760).</p> + +<p>When the enemy's fire makes it impracticable for the troop to move +forward in one of the above-mentioned formations, it may advance by +rushes.</p> + +<p>Being in skirmish line: 1. <b>By platoon (section) from the right (left)</b>, +2. <b>RUSH.</b></p> + +<p>The platoon leader on the indicated flank arranges the details for a +prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it into effect as +soon as practicable. If necessary he designates the leader for the +indicated unit. When about to rush he causes the men of the indicated +unit to suspend firing and to hold themselves flat on the ground but +in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at +the signal of the platoon leader if the latter is not the leader +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page189" name="page189"></a>(p. 189)</span> of the rush) commands, <b>Follow me</b>, and, running at top speed, +leads the fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to +open fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not +been previously designated.</p> + +<p>The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next +like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader without further +command from the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire +troop is on the line established by the first rush.</p> + +<p>The men must be trained to lie perfectly still until the command +(since any movement might warn the enemy of the rush to follow), then +at command to spring instantly and together to their feet, run at top +speed, and drop together at command.</p> + +<p><b>655.</b> In an advance by rushes, leaders of platoons in firing positions +are responsible for the delivery of an effective fire to cover the +advance of each rushing fraction. Troops are cautioned so to fire as +not to endanger the flanks of advanced portions of the firing line. +The husbanding of ammunition for the final stages of the fire attack +must be constantly impressed on the men.</p> + +<p>The rush of a troop as a whole is conducted by the captain on the same +principle as described for the platoon. The captain leads the rush, +platoon leaders lead their respective platoons, and file closers +follow the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance.</p> + +<p>When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes +impracticable, any method of advance that carries the attack closer to +the enemy, such as <b>crawling</b>, should be employed.</p> + +<p>The charge corresponds to that described <b>in the squadron</b>.</p> + +<p>When a leader in command of a platoon or section receives an order or +signal to rush, he should cause his men to suspend firing and to hold +themselves flat but ready for a sprinter's start. He selects the +point, as far as possible with reference to cover, to which he intends +to carry his unit forward. He then gives the command "<b>RUSH</b>," springs +forward, and running at full speed about three paces ahead of his men, +leads them in the rush. Arriving at the position he has selected, he +throws himself prone, and the men drop on either side of him. All +crawl forward to good firing positions, considering the cover <span class="pagenum"><a id="page190" name="page190"></a>(p. 190)</span> +also, and the leader gives the necessary orders for resuming the fire. +The latter will include giving the range again, the length of the rush +being subtracted from the sight setting ordered at the last position.</p> + +<p>The original platoon and section divisions of the troop in the firing +line should be maintained, if possible, and should only be broken up +if the mingling of reinforcements renders it unavoidable.</p> + +<p>Upon joining the firing line, officers and noncommissioned officers +accompanying a reinforcement take over the duties of others of like +grade who have been disabled, or they distribute themselves so as best +to exercise their normal functions. Conditions vary and no exact rules +can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering the +increased difficulties of control.</p> + + +<p class="title">FIRE.</p> + +<p><b>657.</b> Ordinarily rifles are loaded and extra ammunition in bandoliers +is distributed before the troop deploys for combat. In close order the +troop executes the firings at the command of the captain, who posts +himself in rear of the center.</p> + +<p>Firings in close order are exceptional.</p> + +<p><b>658. Signals during fire action</b>: The voice is generally inadequate for +giving commands during firing, and must be replaced by signals of such +character that proper fire direction and control are assured (par. +989). To attract attention signals must usually be preceded by the +whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the firing line about to +rush should avoid using the long blast signal as an indication to +<b>suspend firing</b>. Officers and men behind the firing line can not +ordinarily move freely along the line, but each must depend on the +other's watchfulness, in addition to his own, and make use of +prescribed signals (par. 997, Cav. Drill Reg., 1916). All should place +themselves so as to see their immediate superiors and subordinates.</p> + +<p>The bugler with the captain assists by observing the enemy, the +target, and the fire effect, and by watching for and transmitting +commands.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page191" name="page191"></a>(p. 191)</span> The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in +relation thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in +marksmanship are treated in the <b>Small-Arms Firing Manual</b>.</p> + +<p><b>659. Volley fire</b> has limited application. It has a moral effect both +on the troops employing it and on those subjected to it. It may be +employed to restore control. In defense it may be used in the early +stages of the action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It +may be used by troops especially posted on the flank or in a dominant +position in rear of an attacking force for the purpose of aiding the +advance by so-called <i>fire of position</i>. When the ground near the +target is such that the strike of bullets can be seen from the firing +line, ranging volleys may be used to correct the sight setting.</p> + +<p>In combat, volley firing, if used, is executed habitually by platoon.</p> + +<p><b>660. Fire at will</b> is the class of fire normally employed in attack or +defense.</p> + +<p><b>661. Clip fire</b> has limited application. It is principally used (<i>a</i>) +in the early stages of combat to steady the men by habituating them to +brief pauses in firing; (<i>b</i>) to produce a short burst of fire.</p> + + +<p class="title">FIRE DIRECTION.</p> + +<p><b>662.</b> When the troop is large enough to be divided into platoons, it is +impracticable for the captain to command it in combat. His efficiency +in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to enforce his +will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly what he +desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct serious +errors or omissions.</p> + +<p>The captain directs the fire of his troop or of designated platoons. +He designates the target and, when practicable, allots a part of the +target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he determines +the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the class of +fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter he observes +the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight setting, prevents +exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of +such extra ammunition as may be received.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page192" name="page192"></a>(p. 192)</span> FIRE CONTROL.</p> + +<p><b>663.</b> In combat the platoon is the <i>fire unit</i>. From 20 to 35 rifles +are as many as one leader can control effectively.</p> + +<p>Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or directions of +the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure correct +sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point as +the situation permits or requires (par. 141); thereafter he gives such +additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance +with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary. +When the target can not be seen with the naked eye, he designates an +aiming point (by one of the methods described in par. 141 if +necessary) and orders fire upon it, first announcing the proper sight +setting to correct the error of aim.</p> + +<p>In general, <b>platoon leaders</b> observe the target and the effect of the +fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands; they observe and +regulate the rate of fire. The <b>file closers</b> watch the firing line and +check every breach of fire discipline. <b>Chiefs of section</b> transmit +commands when necessary, observe the conduct of their sections and +abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire discipline, and participate +in the firing unless otherwise directed by the <b>platoon commanders</b>.</p> + +<p>The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. To +avoid or delay such loss of control should be the constant aim of all.</p> + +<p>Fire control implies the ability of the commander to stop the firing, +change the sight setting and target, and resume a well-directed fire.</p> + + +<p class="title">FIRE DISCIPLINE.</p> + +<p><b>664.</b> Fire discipline implies, besides an unquestioning habit of +obedience to commands, a control of the rifle by the soldier (the +result of training), which will enable him in action to make hits +instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground; proper +understanding of orders as to target designation; care in setting the +sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of the +leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an increase of fire +when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy +disappears; economy of ammunition. Orderly and regular methods +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page193" name="page193"></a>(p. 193)</span> on the part of leaders aid fire discipline. Self possession +and a confident tone in giving commands and instructions are +indispensable.</p> + +<p>In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position, and thus +reduce the effectiveness of his fire, have the approximate value of +hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire +superiority.</p> + +<p>Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each +man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the +proper target.</p> + +<p><b>665.</b> To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire +discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire, having constantly in +view the available ammunition supply, should be as rapid as is +consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the +visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper +rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man usually +rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.</p> + +<p><b>666.</b> In attack, ammunition must be used with extreme caution in order +that the highest rate of fire may be employed at the halt preceding +the assault and in pursuing fire.</p> + +<p><b>667.</b> In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon +leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point +where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly +with a vigorous burst of fire. In defense the available ammunition +supply is not ordinarily so limited as in the attack.</p> + +<p><b>668.</b> For communication between the firing line and the reserve or +commander in rear certain signals are prescribed (par. 997). In +transmission their concealment from the enemy's view should be +insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or other +substitute may be used.</p> + + +<p class="title">RANGES.</p> + +<p><b>669.</b> For convenience of reference, ranges are classified as follows:</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="3" summary="Classes."> +<colgroup> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="5%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="75%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="right">0</td> +<td>to</td> +<td class="right">600</td> +<td>yards, close range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">600</td> +<td>to</td> +<td class="right">1,200</td> +<td>yards, effective range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">1,200</td> +<td>to</td> +<td class="right">2,000</td> +<td>yards, long range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right" colspan="2">Over</td> +<td class="right">2,000</td> +<td>yards, distant range.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page194" name="page194"></a>(p. 194)</span> The distance to the target must be determined as accurately +as possible and the sights set accordingly.</p> + +<p>Aside from training and morale, this is the most important single +factor in securing effective fire at the longer ranges.</p> + +<p>Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most +accurate and only practicable method of determining the range, in +absence of a suitable mechanical range finder, will generally be to +take the mean of several estimates made independently.</p> + +<p><i>Estimation of ranges.</i>—Five or six officers and men, selected from +the most accurate estimators in the troop and designated as <i>range +estimators</i>, should be specially trained in estimating distances.</p> + +<p>Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range +estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of +their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.</p> + +<p>When a range is announced, the men at once set their sights to +correspond, and whenever practicable an examination of the pieces is +made in order to verify the sight setting.</p> + +<p>(<i>C. C. D. R., No. 1, Apr. 26, 1917.</i>)</p> + +<p>Firing is delayed as long as possible for three reasons, viz: (<i>a</i>) At +the extreme ranges little damage can be done on the enemy, and +ineffective firing always encourages him; (<i>b</i>) halting to fire delays +the advance, and the great object to be accomplished is to close in on +the enemy where you can meet him on better terms; (<i>c</i>) plenty of +ammunition will be required at the decisive stage of the fight, and it +is very difficult to send extra ammunition up to the firing line. +<b>Therefore never fire until ordered to do so, and then never fire more +than the number of rounds designated. Never fire after the command +"cease firing" is given.</b></p> + +<p>Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. Thirty +rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a +reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer.</p> + +<p>Soon, however, it will be necessary to halt and open fire on the enemy +in order to cause him some loss, to make his riflemen keep down in +their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It is probable that at +this time and until you arrive much closer <span class="pagenum"><a id="page195" name="page195"></a>(p. 195)</span> you will not see +any of the enemy to fire at. You may not even see any trenches nor +know just where the enemy is. Your higher officers, however, with +their field glasses and the messages they receive, will know. Each +troop will be assigned a certain front to cover with its fire. +<b>Therefore be careful to fix your sights at the designated range and +fire only at the designated target.</b> This means team work in firing, +which is one of the most important elements of success.</p> + +<p>The firing line advances from position to position by means of rushes. +At long range the entire line may rush forward at the same time, but +as the range decreases one part of the line rushes forward while the +remainder keeps up a hot fire on the enemy. The number taking part in +each rush decreases as the fire of the enemy becomes warmer, until +perhaps only one squad, or even less, rushes or crawls forward at a +time, protected by the fire of the rest of the company. The distance +covered by each rush also becomes less and less. After any rush no +part of the line again advances until the rest of the line is up. <b>In +making a rush, the leader of the unit gives the signal and leads the +way. The rest follow. No attempt is made to keep a line, but each man +rushes forward at a run, seeking only to reach the new halting +position as quickly and with as little exposure as possible.</b> When +halted, the skirmishers need not be in a perfect line, but every +advantage should be taken of the ground for concealment and +protection. It is necessary only that no man or group of men should +interfere with the fire of other parts of the firing line.</p> + +<p>The noise on the firing line will be great. Leaders will be disabled +and new men will take their places. Reinforcements coming up will +cause units to become mixed. To the green man everything may appear to +be in confusion, but this is not so. This is war as it really is. <b>If +you have lost your section or your section leader, join the leader +nearest to you.</b> This is the way the game is played.</p> + +<p>As long as the fight lasts every available rifleman must be kept in +the firing line. The first and last consideration is to win the +battle. <b>Therefore, under no circumstances will any soldier be +permitted to go to the rear, either for ammunition or to assist the +wounded.</b></p> + +<p>If the attacking force can no longer advance, it is much safer to +throw up hasty intrenchments and await the arrival of reinforcements +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page196" name="page196"></a>(p. 196)</span> or darkness than it is to retreat. Retreating troops are the +ones that suffer the greatest. This lesson is taught by every great +war. <b>Therefore, always remember that the safest thing to do is to +stick to the firing line.</b></p> + +<p>Troops on the firing line, when not actually engaged in firing at the +enemy, busy themselves throwing up shelter trenches. It only requires +a few minutes to construct a trench that gives great protection. +<b>Therefore, never get separated from your intrenching tool.</b></p> + +<p>Concealment is no less important than protection. Therefore, when +conditions permit, as is generally the case when on the defensive, +every effort should be made to hide intrenchments by the use of sod, +grass, weeds, bushes, etc.</p> + +<p>In making an attack the infantry is always supported when possible by +its own artillery, which continues to fire over its head until the +infantry arrives very close to the enemy's trenches. This fire is +helping you a great deal by keeping down the fire of the enemy's +infantry and artillery. Therefore, don't think you are being fired +into by your own artillery because you hear their shells and shrapnel +singing through the air or bursting a short distance in your front, +but rather be thankful you are receiving their help up to the very +last minute.</p> + +<p>In the last rush which carries the enemy's position there is always +much mixing of units. The firing line does not continue rushing madly +as individuals after the enemy, but halts and fires on him until he +gets out of good range. The pursuit is taken up by formed troops held +in reserve or by the firing line only after its units are again gotten +together.</p> + +<p>As the fighting often lasts all day, and great suffering is caused +from thirst, <b>don't throw away your canteen when the fight commences</b>. +It may also be impossible to get rations up to the line during the +night. <b>Therefore, it is advisable to hold onto at least one ration.</b></p> + +<p>As the recent war has shown the possibility of hand-to-hand fighting, +especially at night, each soldier should be schooled in the use of the +bayonet.</p> + +<p>The following has particular reference to the duties of platoon and +section leaders and to the teamwork of the platoon in combat:</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page197" name="page197"></a>(p. 197)</span> Attacking troops must first gain <b>fire superiority</b> in order to +reach the hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is meant +making one's fire superior to that of the enemy in volume and +accuracy, and it depends upon the number of rifles employed, the rate +of fire, the character of the target, training and discipline, and +fire direction and control. When the fire of the attackers becomes +effective and superior to that of the defenders the latter are no +longer able to effectively and coolly aim and fire at the former, and, +as a consequence, the attackers are able to inaugurate a successful +rush or advance which carries them nearer to the enemy's position.</p> + +<p>When a trained organization has been committed to the attack, the +gaining of fire superiority depends upon the way in which <b>fire +direction</b> and <b>fire control</b> are exercised.</p> + +<p>The captain <b>directs</b> the fire of the troop. He indicates to the platoon +commanders the target (enemy) which the troop is to fire and advance +upon, and tells each upon which part of this target he is to direct +the fire of his platoon. When he desires the fire to be opened, he +gives the necessary commands or signals, including the range at which +the sights are to be set.</p> + +<p>When the fire fight has once started, it becomes to a great extent a +fight of a number of platoons. The platoon is the largest organization +which can be controlled by a single leader in action. The platoon +commander (lieutenant or sergeant) <b>controls</b> its fire in order to gain +the maximum fire effect and to avoid wasting ammunition. He must try +his best to make the fire of his platoon effective, to get it forward, +and to support neighboring platoons in their effort to advance. At the +same time he must hold himself subject to his captain's directions. He +should take advantage of every chance to carry his platoon forward +unless otherwise ordered. In all this he is assisted by his section +chiefs (sergeants) and by his corporals.</p> + +<p>At the commencement of an engagement the platoon commander will give +the objective (part of the enemy's line or aiming target) at which his +platoon is to direct its fire. Noncommissioned officers must be sure +that they see and understand the objective, and that all the men in +their squads do likewise. Fire is then directed at this objective +without further command until the platoon commander gives a new +objective.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page198" name="page198"></a>(p. 198)</span> Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the target +assigned to their platoon which corresponds with their own position in +their own platoon, so that there will be no portion of the target +which is not covered by fire. A portion of the enemy's line not +covered by fire means that that portion is able to coolly aim and fire +at their opponents.</p> + +<p>In an engagement the voice can seldom be heard over a few feet, and +the platoon commander will generally have to convey his orders by +signals. A sergeant may be able to shout orders to his section, and +orders may be repeated along a skirmish line by shouting. Care should +be taken that orders intended for one platoon only are not thus +conveyed to another platoon.</p> + +<p>A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon commander, means +"Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned officers at once suspend +firing and glance toward the platoon commander to see if the latter +has any signals or orders for them. If not, they resume firing. A long +blast on the whistle means "Suspend Firing." When a noncommissioned +officer hears this signal from his platoon commander, he should at +once shout "Suspend Firing." Upon receiving a signal, the +noncommissioned officer for whom it is intended should at once repeat +it back, to be sure that it is correctly understood.</p> + +<p>As a rule, rushes should be started by a unit on one flank and should +be followed in succession by the other units to the opposite flank. +Each succeeding unit should halt on the line established by the unit +which first rushed. When a unit is about to rush, leaders in charge of +adjacent units should caution their men to be careful not to fire into +the rushing unit as it bounds forward.</p> + +<p>When one unit suspends fire for the purpose of rushing, adjacent +leaders should arrange to have a portion of their men turn their fire +on the target of the rushing unit, to the end that there may be no +portion of the enemy's line not under fire and able to fire coolly on +the rushing unit.</p> + +<p>Rushes should be made for as long a distance as possible, due regard +being had for the wind of the men and not to get beyond supporting +distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate an advance, and +quickly place a skirmish line close to the enemy's position, where +its fire will have more effect. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page199" name="page199"></a>(p. 199)</span> An attacking line suffers +less from casualties at short ranges than it does at mid range.</p> + +<p>Every advantage should be taken to utilize the cover available. The +best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers from +the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions for +firing and for readily advancing. In order to allow men to regain +their wind, or should the fire of the enemy be so effective as to +prevent a further advance without reinforcement, advantage may be +taken to lie close in cover, or hasty fire trenches may be thrown up +in order to allow the line to maintain its position. "<b>To go back under +fire is to die.</b>"</p> + +<p>When a platoon is firing, all noncommissioned officers watch every +opportunity to make the fire more effective. The section chiefs and +corporals should constantly watch the men to see that they do not +become excited, fire too hastily or without aim, that their sights are +set at the correct range, that they are obviously firing at the +designated target, and that they assume steady firing positions and +take advantage of cover. In performing these duties it may be +necessary for the section chiefs to be constantly crawling along the +line. A substitute chief assists the chief of his section by +supervising the fire of the men near him, firing when not actively +engaged in that duty.</p> + +<p>Bayonets are fixed preparatory to a charge when armed with that +weapon. This command is usually given by the bugle. Only two or three +men in each section should fix their bayonets at the same time, in +order that there may be no marked pause or diminution in the fire at +this critical stage of the engagement.</p> + +<p>In order to be effective in combat, the platoon must be thoroughly +trained to work as a team. Each noncommissioned officer must be +conversant with the signals and commands and the proper methods for +instantly putting into effect the orders of his platoon commander. +Each private must be trained until he instinctively does the right +thing in each phase of the action.</p> + + +<h3>Section 3. Patrolling.</h3> + +<p>The designation of a patrol indicates the nature of the duty for which +it is detailed, as, for example, visiting, reconnoitering, exploring, +flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. An Infantry <span class="pagenum"><a id="page200" name="page200"></a>(p. 200)</span> +patrol consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men, a Cavalry patrol +generally of from 4 to 10 men.</p> + +<p>Reconnoitering patrols are habitually small and seek safety in +concealment or flight, fighting only when their mission demands it. +The most skillful reconnoissance is where patrols accomplish their +mission and return without being discovered by the enemy. When +resistance is expected stronger detachments are required. These cover +themselves with small patrols of two to four men, the remainder acting +as support.</p> + +<p>The commander determines the number and strength of patrols and when +they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal principle to send out +patrols of such strength only as will accomplish the object.</p> + +<p>The officer sending out the patrol verifies the details, designates a +second in command, and gives the necessary instruction. The orders or +instructions for a patrol, or for any detachment going on +reconnoissance, must state clearly where the enemy is or is supposed +to be, what information is desired, what features are of special +importance, the general direction to be followed, whether friendly +patrols are liable to be encountered, and where messages are to be +sent or the patrol is to report. Important and comprehensive +instructions should be in writing, but precautions against capture of +papers must be taken. An officer sending out a patrol must be certain +that his orders are understood. Detailed instructions are, as a rule, +avoided. When necessary the time of return is stated.</p> + +<p>The patrol leader should be selected with care. He should be an +excellent horseman, have good judgment, courage, be able to read maps, +make sketches, and send clear and concise messages. In addition to his +ordinary equipment, he should have a map of the country, a watch, +field glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils.</p> + +<p>The leader of a patrol should carefully inspect the men and horses +before starting out. He should see that the horses are well shod and +in good working condition. Nervous horses or those that neigh when +left alone should not be taken. The equipment of each man should be +complete and so arranged as to prevent rattling. Articles that are +liable to glitter in the sunlight should be covered. Nothing should be +taken along that would be of information to the enemy if any members +of <span class="pagenum"><a id="page201" name="page201"></a>(p. 201)</span> the patrol were captured, for example, copies of orders, +maps with positions of troops marked thereon, letters, newspapers, or +collar ornaments.</p> + +<p>The leader then gives his patrol information and instructions. These +embrace instructions from higher authority; his detailed plans; +information of the country and enemy; the countersign, if any; the +point where the patrol will assemble if scattered. He will see that +the men understand the prescribed signals.</p> + +<p><b>It must always be remembered that it makes no difference, how valuable +may be the information that the patrol gets, it is worthless if not +sent back in time to be of service.</b> Herein is where most patrols fail. +This applies particularly to the information obtained by patrols +acting as a point or flankers of advance, rear, and flank guards. +Whenever the patrol gets any information, the leader must think +whether the commanding officer would change his plans or issue new +orders if he had the information. If he would, the information should +be sent back at once. If the distance is great or the inhabitants are +hostile, it is well to send two men with the message. These men should +not travel side by side, but as a patrol of two men. If the +information is very important, and the danger of capture is +considerable, the message should be sent by two parties, each +traveling by a different route. The gaits should be specified.</p> + +<p>A message from a patrol should always show (<i>a</i>) the place from which +it is sent; (<i>b</i>) the time it is sent (date, hour, and minute); (<i>c</i>) +to whom it is sent; (<i>d</i>) the message itself; (<i>e</i>) what the patrol +intends doing after sending the message; (<i>f</i>) the name of the sender. +Under (<i>d</i>) care must be taken to separate what has actually been seen +by the patrol from information received from other sources. Care must +also be taken not to exaggerate what is seen, but to report only the +exact facts.</p> + +<p>Whether moving or halted, patrols exercise the greatest vigilance to +prevent discovery. No formal formation is or should be prescribed. +Under the leader's guidance it moves so as to guard against surprise, +usually with point and flankers. To extend the sphere of its +observation, still smaller patrols (one or two men) may be sent out +for short distances, communication with the leader being maintained by +signals. Whatever the formation adopted, it should favor the escape of +at least one man in case of surprise.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page202" name="page202"></a>(p. 202)</span> In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads. +In this formation few signals are necessary, the men simply regulating +their movements by his.</p> + +<p>In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose +information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are not +allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize +telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the +facts as soon as possible.</p> + +<p>Patrols should observe everything for signs of the enemy. Even +apparent trifles may be of great value. The finding of a collar +ornament showing a man's regiment may enable the chief of staff to +determine that the enemy has been reenforced.</p> + +<p>Patrols should not travel on the main roads if they can observe them +and at the same time make the necessary progress by moving some +distance to the side of the roads.</p> + +<p>Except in case of attack or of great personal danger, no member of the +patrol should fire on hostile troops without orders from the patrol +leader. When sent out to gain information, patrols should avoid +fighting unless it is absolutely necessary in order to carry out their +orders. If the leader determines to fight, he should quickly decide +whether he will attack mounted with the saber and thus dispose pf the +enemy without the noise of fire action. Cases will arise where a quick +mounted pistol attack will obtain the best results. If discovered, the +patrol would dismount only as a last resort. The leader should always +have in mind, as he rides long, what he will do if he meets the enemy.</p> + +<p>Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered with +precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at points +affording good view, and the country is studied in all directions, +landmarks to the rear being impressed on the minds of the men so that +the way back can be readily found; the leader consults his map and +locates himself thereon.</p> + +<p>When a patrol is scattered it reassembles at some place previously +selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut off it +returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it +scatters so that at least one man may return with information. Patrols +nearing their own lines should march at a walk unless pressed by the +enemy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page203" name="page203"></a>(p. 203)</span> Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his +patrol and continue the reconnaissance with one or two companions.</p> + +<p>Patrols far from their commands or in contact with the enemy often +remain out overnight. In such cases they seek a place of concealment, +proceeding thereto after nightfall or under cover.</p> + +<p>When the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate his main +force. Information is particularly desired of his strength, whether he +has infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the route and direction of his +march, or the location of his camp and line of outposts.</p> + +<p>Dust clouds indicate moving bodies. Infantry raises a low, thick +cloud; cavalry a high, thin cloud; artillery and wagons a broken +cloud. The kind of troops, direction of march, and approximate +strength may thus sometimes be roughly estimated. If from some +position a body of troops can be seen marching along in column, the +exact time in minutes and seconds it requires for them to pass a +certain point should be noted, together with the formation they are +in, thus: Infantry, column of squads, three minutes and twelve +seconds; cavalry, columns of twos at a trot, one minute and twenty +seconds; wagons, four-mule, five minutes. From this information the +strength can be determined by the following rule:</p> + +<p>Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupy half a yard per man, +cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per man, and artillery and wagons in +single column 20 yards per gun, caisson, or wagon, a given point would +be passed in one minute by about—</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="3" summary="Estimate."> +<colgroup> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="90%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="right">175</td> +<td>infantry.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">110</td> +<td>cavalry at a walk.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">200</td> +<td>cavalry at a trot.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">5</td> +<td>guns, caissons, or wagons.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above estimate.</p> + +<p>Patrols should always observe the country marched over, with a view to +making a report on the same. The following information is always of +value:</p> + +<p><b>Roads.</b>—Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam, etc.; width, +whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; border, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page204" name="page204"></a>(p. 204)</span> whether +fenced with stone, barbed wire, rails, etc.; steepness in crossing +hills and valleys; where they pass through defiles and along +commanding heights, etc.; crossroads.</p> + +<p><b>Surrounding country.</b>—Whether generally open and passable for +infantry, cavalry, and artillery, or whether broken and impassable, +due to fences, woods, crops, ravines; whether good grazing is +available, etc.</p> + +<p><b>Railroads.</b>—Single or double track, narrow or broad gauge, tunnels, +bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc.</p> + +<p><b>Bridges.</b>—Material, wood, stone, steel, etc.; length and breadth; +number and kind of piers or supports.</p> + +<p><b>Rivers.</b>—Direction; width, depth; kind of bottom, such as mud, sand, +rocky, etc.; banks, steep or gentle, open or wooded; rapidity of +current; variations in depth at different times as indicated by +driftwood and high-water marks; islands; heights in vicinity +commanding streams.</p> + +<p><b>Woods.</b>—Extent and shape; kind of trees; free from underbrush or not; +clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc.</p> + +<p><b>Telegraph lines.</b>—Number of wires, along roads or railroads, stations, +etc.</p> + +<p><b>Villages.</b>—Size, kind of houses, nature of streets, means of defense, +etc.</p> + +<p><b>Hills and ridges.</b>—Whether scopes are gentle or steep; whether top is +narrow or wide; whether ground is broken or smooth, wooded or clear; +whether difficult or easy to cross, etc.; whether commanded by other +hills.</p> + +<p><b>Defiles.</b>—Their direction, length, and width; whether surrounding +heights are passable for infantry and artillery: kind of country at +each opening of the defile, etc.</p> + +<p><b>Ravines, ditches, etc.</b>—Width and depth; banks, whether passable for +infantry, cavalry, and wagons; whether suitable for trenches, or for +movement of troops therein, etc.</p> + +<p>In general, every soldier should be constantly on the lookout to +obtain information that might be of some military value. Remember that +information of the enemy and of the country is worthless unless made +known to the proper officials in time to be of use.</p> + +<p>Every soldier should be able to find his way in a strange country; +should know how to use a compass; should know how to locate the North +Star; should be able to travel across country, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page205" name="page205"></a>(p. 205)</span> keeping a +given direction, both by day and by night, and by observing landmarks +he should be able to return to the starting point either over the same +route or by a more circuitous one. This can easily be learned <b>by a +little practice</b>.</p> + +<p>It adds a great deal to the value of a soldier if he knows how to use +a map to find his way. If he knows how to <b>make</b> a rough sketch of the +country showing the position of roads, streams, woods, railroads, +bridges, houses, villages, fields, fences, hills, etc., he has added +to his value as a soldier very much, indeed, because a rough sketch of +a country will give more and better information at a glance than can +be obtained by reading many pages of written description.</p> + +<p><b>Patrolling</b> is one of the most important duties a soldier can learn. +Any enlisted man who understands thoroughly his duties as a member of +a patrol will understand also most of his duties when with advance or +rear guards or when on outpost duty. Patrolling can not be learned +merely by reading books nor by work indoors. Thoroughness comes only +by actually going out in the country and acting as a patrol.</p> + +<p>In carrying out this idea the following scheme is recommended:</p> + +<p>Let four or more men and a noncommissioned officer act as a patrol. +They assemble at a certain time, at a convenient point on some country +road. An officer, whom we will call Captain A, acts as the director; +the noncommissioned officer, whom we will call Sergeant B, acts as +patrol leader; and the others (Privates C, D, E, etc.) act as members +of Sergeant B's patrol.</p> + +<p>Assume that the troop (squadron, etc.) has just made camp in this +vicinity and that the inhabitants are friendly (or hostile).</p> + +<p>Captain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is situated +and points out where the various sentinels are posted. (This in itself +affords an opportunity for much discussion and for teaching many +valuable lessons.)</p> + +<p>Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him—</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) Just what information Captain A has of the enemy, and also any +information of the country or of friendly troops in the vicinity that +might be of service to Sergeant B.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) How many men he shall take for the patrol (this is another +problem for Captain A to solve). Any men present <span class="pagenum"><a id="page206" name="page206"></a>(p. 206)</span> not used as +part of the patrol ride along with Captain A as observers.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) How far he shall go and what country he shall cover with the +patrol.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) Just what information it is particularly desired he shall +obtain.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) Where he shall send his messages and when he shall return.</p> + +<p><b>Example 1</b>:</p> + +<p>"Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that a company of hostile +infantry was in camp last night at X, about 5 miles from here on this +road. Take 5 men and proceed toward X and find out whether the enemy +is still there, and if not, when he left and where he went. Send +messages to me here, and return by 8 o'clock this evening."</p> + +<p><b>Example 2</b>:</p> + +<p>"Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns over in that +direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and proceed to that high hill +you see over there about 4 miles away. Send a message to me here when +you reach there. You may go farther if you then think it advisable, +but return before daylight. I desire particularly to know if there are +any hostile troops in this vicinity, especially artillery. I shall +send Sergeant X with 3 men to observe the country from that hill you +see over there farther to the south. He will remain there till dark. +Send messages to me here. If the troop is not here on your return you +will find a note for you underneath this rail."</p> + +<p><b>Example 3</b>:</p> + +<p>"Sergeant B, this friendly country boy has just reported that four +hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour ago at his father's +house, which he says is about 2 miles up this road. One of the men +seemed to be very sick. You will select eight men from your section +and endeavor to capture these men. If they have disappeared you will +reconnoiter in that vicinity until dark. This boy will accompany you +as a guide. He will ride Private X's horse. I desire particularly to +learn the position, strength, and composition of any hostile troops in +this vicinity. Send reports to me here. Return before daylight."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page207" name="page207"></a>(p. 207)</span> <b>Example 4</b>:</p> + +<p>"Sergeant B, here is a map of the country in this vicinity on a scale +of 1 inch to the mile. Here is where we are camped [indicating +position on the map]. I have just learned that foraging parties of the +enemy are collecting supplies over here at X [indicating point on +map], which is 10 miles off in that direction [pointing across country +toward X]. It is reported that this bridge over this stream +[indicating same on the map], which is about 3 miles down this road +[indicating road and direction on the ground], has been destroyed. You +will take three men from your platoon and verify this report. You will +also reconnoiter the stream for a distance of 3 miles both above and +below the bridge for fords suitable for infantry. Messages will reach +me here. Return by 8 o'clock to-night."</p> + +<p>Sergeant B then inspects his horses and men and gives them their +instructions. The patrol is then formed and moves out exactly as it +would under actual war conditions.</p> + +<p>Captain A may halt (and assemble if desirable) the patrol at intervals +in order to discuss the formation used and the movement of any members +of the patrol, their route, use of cover, etc., with the reasons +therefor, and compare the same with suggested modifications of the +formations, etc. After the discussion, the patrol is again set in +motion. Captain A may accompany any part of the patrol. From time to +time he presents certain situations to some member of the patrol, +being very careful to assume only such situations as might naturally +occur.</p> + +<p>Thus, take Example 1:</p> + +<p>Captain A is with Sergeant B, who, with Private C, is marching along +the road as the point of the patrol. The other members of the patrol +are distributed to suit the nature of the country over which the +patrol is marching. The point has just reached a ridge beyond which +the country is open and cultivated for about half a mile. Beyond this +the road enters a woods. Captain A now says: "Sergeant B, from this +point you see two soldiers in khaki on the road there at the beginning +of that cornfield about 200 yards from the woods [points out same]. +They are moving in this direction. About 200 yards to the right of +these and somewhat farther to their rear you see two more men moving +along that rail fence."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page208" name="page208"></a>(p. 208)</span> Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in actual war. How +does he signal to his patrol? Does he assemble his men? If so, how and +where? Does he send a message back to camp; and if so, by whom, and is +it written or verbal? (If written, Sergeant B actually writes it and +delivers it to Private ——, with the necessary instructions. If +verbal, it is actually given to Private —— with instructions.) +Captain A must in this case make notes of what the message was. In +either case, Private —— ceases to be a member of the patrol and +joins Captain A as an observer. He should, however, at some later time +be required to repeat his message to Captain A, on the assumption that +he had reached camp with the same. The message, whether oral or +written, should be thoroughly analyzed and discussed. Was it proper to +send a message at this time? Does Sergeant B intend to remain in +observation; if so, how long? (Captain A can give such information +from time to time concerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant B might +reasonably be supposed to learn in view of his dispositions. In order +that Captain A may present natural assumptions, it is very essential +that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume a situation for +the hostile forces and that he should consider himself as in command +of all hostile troops. In this particular case he should assume +himself to be in command of the hostile patrol, acting under certain +specified orders similar to examples given, and he should conduct this +patrol in his own mind in accordance with these orders, giving +Sergeant B only such information as he might reasonably be expected to +obtain in view of whatever action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant B +attempt to capture this patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighting and +attempt to pass it unobserved; and if so, how and why?</p> + +<p>In this manner the exercise is continued. Care must be taken not to +have the patrol leader or members state what they would do, but they +must actually do it. Explanations and discussions may take place +later.</p> + +<p>In a similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or any member +of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed by a squad (on the +assumption that it is the leading unit of an advance guard), and the +exercise is then continued along these lines.</p> + +<p>The following are examples of assumption that might be made and +carried out:</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page209" name="page209"></a>(p. 209)</span> (<i>a</i>) That the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) That one or more of the patrol is wounded.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) That a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as prisoner).</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) That a friendly inhabitant gives certain information.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) That a dust cloud is seen in the distance over the trees.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) That a column of troops can be seen marching along a distant +road.</p> + +<p>(<i>g</i>) That an abandoned camp is discovered and certain signs noted.</p> + +<p>(<i>h</i>) That the patrol is attacked by a superior force and compelled to +scatter.</p> + +<p>There is practically no end to the number of reasonable assumptions +that may be made.</p> + +<p>Troop officers may use this method of instructing noncommissioned +officers in patrolling, advance and rear guard duty, outposts, and in +squad leading, in writing messages, in selecting positions for +trenches, and in constructing and concealing same. This form of +instruction is called "a tactical ride or, if dismounted, a tactical +walk." It is very greatly used by all foreign armies. Exercises along +the same general lines are conducted for field and staff officers and +even general officers, and are called "tactical rides" and +"strategical rides," depending upon their object.</p> + +<p>After some proficiency has been attained as a result of these tactical +rides, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be awakened in this +work by sending out two patrols the same day, one to operate against +the other. Each should wear a distinctive uniform. The strength of +each patrol, its starting point, route to be followed, and its orders +should all be unknown to the other patrol. If blank ammunition is +used, an officer should supervise its issue and carefully inspect to +see that no man carries any ball cartridges. One umpire should +accompany the commander of each party. Each umpire should be fully +informed of the strength, orders, and route of both patrols. He must, +however, carefully avoid giving suggestions or offering any +information to the commander. Observers in these small maneuver +problems are generally in the way and none should be permitted to be +along.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page210" name="page210"></a>(p. 210)</span> These small maneuvers may be gradually developed by having +one side establish an outpost or fight a delaying action, etc.</p> + +<p>It should always be remembered that there is no hard and fast rule +prescribing how a patrol of three, five, or any number of men should +march. The same is equally true of advance guards, and applies also to +the establishment of outposts. It is simply a question of common sense +based on military knowledge. Don't try to remember any diagrams in a +book. Think only of what you have been ordered to do and how best you +can handle your men to accomplish your mission, and at the same time +save the men and horses from any unnecessary hardships. Never use two +or more men to do what one can do just as well, and don't let your men +get beyond your control.</p> + +<p>In addition to the signals prescribed in the Cavalry Drill +Regulations, the following should be clearly understood by the members +of a patrol:</p> + +<p>Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold rifle above the head +horizontally; enemy in force, same proceeding, raising and lowering +the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the hand.</p> + +<p>Other signals may be agreed upon, but they must be familiar to the +men; complicated signals are avoided. Signals must be used cautiously +so as not to convey information to the enemy.</p> + + +<h3>Section 4. Advance guards.</h3> + +<p>The advance guard is a detachment of the main body which precedes and +covers it on the march. The primary duty of an advance guard is to +insure the safe and uninterrupted march of the main body. Specifically +its duties are:</p> + +<p>1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by +reconnoitering.</p> + +<p>2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their +observing, firing upon, or delaying the main body.</p> + +<p>3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit the +main body to prepare for action.</p> + +<p>4. When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to seize a good +position and locate his lines, care being taken not to bring on a +general engagement unless the advance guard commander is empowered to +do so.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page211" name="page211"></a>(p. 211)</span> 5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every +way the steady, march of the column.</p> + +<p>The strength of the advance guard will vary with the proximity of the +enemy and character of the country; for a regiment it will generally +consist of from two troops to a squadron, for a squadron of one troop; +for a troop of from a section to a platoon. The advance guard +commander is responsible for the proper performance of the duties with +which it is charged and for its conduct and formation.</p> + +<p>The advance guard provides for its security and gains information by +throwing out to the front and flanks smaller bodies: Each part must +keep in touch with the unit from which it is sent out. An advance +guard is generally divided into a reserve and a support; where it +consists of less than a squadron, the reserve is generally omitted.</p> + +<p>The support sends forward an advance party, which, in turn, sends +forward a point. In small advance guards the point precedes the +advance party about 350 yards, the advance party the support about 500 +yards, and the support the main body about 600 yards. Where advance +guards are large enough to require a reserve these distances are +increased about one-fourth, the reserve following the support, the +main body following the reserve at a distance varying from 500 to 800 +yards.</p> + +<p>Unless the country to the flanks is distinctly visible from the roads +for a distance of what may be said to be effective rifle fire, +approximately 1,000 yards, flanking patrols of two or three men each +should be sent out from the advance party, and, when in proximity of +the enemy, in addition from the support. When the nature of the +country is such that patrols may move across country, without unduly +delaying the march these patrols should march at a distance of from +500 to 600 yards from the flank of the body from which detached. For +the examination of any object, such as a wood, buildings, etc., +examining patrols should be sent out from the main body. The usual +method of protecting the flanks, particularly when the country is at +all cut up or difficult, is to send out patrols from time to time to +some point from which a good outlook can be obtained, or which will +afford protection to the enemy. These patrols remain in observation, +observer being dismounted, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page212" name="page212"></a>(p. 212)</span> his horse held by another trooper +until the advance guard has passed, when they rejoin the nearest +subdivision, as quickly as possible working their way to that to which +they belong during the halts or by riding up the side of the road. By +sending out a succession of small patrols in this manner the flanks +are protected. Should the advance party become depleted, it must be +reenforced from the support.</p> + +<p>A squadron acting as advance guard would have two or three troops in +reserve and one or two in support. The support would send forward as +advance party two platoons, the advance party in turn sending forward +as point one section. A troop acting as advance guard would have no +reserve and would send forward as advance party one platoon. All Of +the above may be changed as circumstances warrant.</p> + +<p>Cases may arise when the best means of covering the head and flanks of +the column will be by a line of skirmishers extended at intervals of +from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance, when passing through high corn, +underbrush, etc.</p> + +<p>It must always be remembered that the principal duty of the advance +guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the main body. If the +point is fired upon, it should at once deploy and endeavor to advance +fighting. The flankers should assist in this and endeavor to locate +the enemy's flank should there be such resistance that advance was +impossible. Each succeeding body should march promptly forward, and in +turn be placed in action, with the idea of clearing the way for the +advance of the main body. Should this be impossible, the commander of +the entire body must determine what measures he will take.</p> + +<h3>Section 5. Rear guards.</h3> + +<p>A rear guard is a detachment detailed to protect the main body from +attack in rear. Cavalry is an excellent arm for rear guard duty on +account of its mobility. While part of the cavalry is using dismounted +fire action, the other part may gallop back and take up a new +position. In a retreat it checks pursuit and enables the main body to +increase the distance between it and the enemy and to re-form if +disorganized. The general formation is that of an advance guard +reversed.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page213" name="page213"></a>(p. 213)</span> Its commander should take advantage of every favorable +opportunity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road, or by +taking up specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy +to deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so +closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The +position taken should be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal +and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long range.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. Flank guards.</h3> + +<p>A flank guard is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a column +marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be placed in +position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as to cover +the passage. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in +check long enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the +advance guard, to enable the main body to deploy. Like all other +detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary, and should not +be detailed except when its protection is required.</p> + +<p>When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance from +the main body should not be much over 5 miles. Practicable +communication must exist between it and the main body. The flank guard +is marched as a separate command; that is, with advance or rear +guards, or both, as circumstances demand, and with patrolling on the +exposed flank.</p> + + +<h3>Section 7. Outposts.</h3> + +<p>Troops not on the march provide for their security by outposts. The +general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance, observation, and +resistance.</p> + +<p>The specific duties are:</p> + +<p>1. To protect the main body, so that the troops may rest undisturbed.</p> + +<p>2. In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable the +main body to make the necessary dispositions.</p> + +<p>During an advance the outposts are usually detailed from the advance +guard. During the retreat the outposts for the night usually forms +the rear guard the next day. If the command <span class="pagenum"><a id="page214" name="page214"></a>(p. 214)</span> remains in +bivouac, the new outpost generally goes on duty at daybreak.</p> + +<p>The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but they should +avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the command. +Firing disturbs the rest of troops and, if frequently indulged in, +ceases to be a warning.</p> + +<p>No trumpet signals except "to arms" or "to horse" are sounded, and all +unnecessary noises must be avoided.</p> + +<p>As a rule an outpost will not exceed one-sixth the strength Of a +command. For a single troop a few sentinels and patrols will suffice; +for a larger command a more elaborate system must be devised. The +troops composing the outpost are generally divided into a reserve and +several supports.</p> + +<p>At a proper distance in front of the camp of the main body a line +which offers a good defensive position is selected. This is called <b>the +line of resistance</b>, and should be so located that an advancing enemy +will be held in check beyond effective rifle range in case of a small +force, artillery range in case of a large force, of the main body +until the latter can deploy. The reserve is stationed at some point in +rear of this line, where it can be moved quickly to reinforce any +point as needed. The line of resistance is divided into sections, the +limits of each of which are clearly defined. A support is assigned to +each section, which are numbered from right to left, and occupies a +position on or near the line, having special regard to covering +avenues of approach. The position occupied should always be +intrenched. The reserve and supports proceed to their respective +positions by the shortest routes, providing for their own protection +by sending out covering detachments.</p> + +<p>Generally speaking, about one-half the Infantry of the advance guard +should be in the supports. As each support arrives at its position it +sends out observation groups, varying in size from four men to a +platoon, to watch the country in the direction of the enemy. These +groups are called outguards. For convenience they are classified as +pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts, and should be sufficient in +number to cover the front of the section occupied by the support and +connect with the neighboring supports. The horses of the outguards +may be left at the position of the support.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page215" name="page215"></a>(p. 215)</span> A picket is a group consisting of one or two sections, +ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of +outposts to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more +sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for observation. Pickets +are placed at the more important points in the line of outguards, such +as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the number of small +groups required to observe properly its sector.</p> + +<p>A sentry squad is a squad (eight men) posted in observation at an +indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the +remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels. +In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.</p> + +<p>A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group +similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel.</p> + +<p>As a rule not more than one-third of the support should be on outguard +duty. As soon as they are sent out to their positions the support +commander selects a defensive position on the line of resistance; +gives instruction for intrenching same; establishes a sentinel to +watch for and transmit signals from outguards; sends out patrols to +reconnoiter the country to the front of his section and, if on the +flank of the line, the flank; and then proceeds to make a careful +reconnoissance of the section assigned him, rectifying the position of +outguards if necessary, seeing that they understand their instructions +in case of attack or when strangers approach their posts, and pointing +out their lines of retreat in case they are compelled to fall back on +the support.</p> + +<p>When the outguards are established, the members of the support may +stack arms and remove equipment except cartridge belts. Part of the +horses may be unsaddled and groomed and fed at one time. All girths +should be loosened. No fires will be built or smoking permitted unless +specially authorized, or no loud talking or other noise. All +patrolling to the front will be done, as a rule, from the support. The +support commander should locate the position of the adjacent supports +and make arrangements with the commanders for the joint defense of the +line of resistance. At nights all roads and trails should be carefully +covered and the country to the front and between adjacent outguards +well patrolled. Horses should, as far as possible, be permitted to +rest, unsaddled, at night.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page216" name="page216"></a>(p. 216)</span> The line occupied by the outguards is called the line of +observation. Outguards move to their positions providing for their own +protection and so as to conceal the movement from the enemy. These +positions are intrenched and are numbered from right to left in each +support.</p> + +<p>The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to guard the +outpost from surprise, and to make a preliminary resistance to the +enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will vary according to +its object. When an important road, which at night will afford a line +of advance, or a bridge is to be covered, or when several posts are +established from an outguard it should be of considerable strength, a +section or a platoon. When mere observation and alarm are all that is +required four men will suffice. One corporal and seven privates are a +good number to use as an outguard; this will allow one double sentry +post of three reliefs and one man in addition to the commander, who +may be used for messenger service. The outguard should be carefully +concealed.</p> + +<p>The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should be no cooking or +smoking. The intervals between outguards will depend upon the +situation and the terrain. The line of observation is not necessarily +continuous, but all avenues of approach must be carefully guarded. The +distance of the outguard from the support likewise is governed by the +terrain, but in general may be said to be from 300 to 400 yards. In +thick country or at night outguards patrol along the line of +observation between posts. Communication between outguards and the +support is by signal and messenger, in special cases by wire. Members +of the outguard retain possession of their weapons and do not remove +their equipment.</p> + +<p>Sentinels from the outguard are posted so as to avoid observation, but +so that they may have a clear lookout and be able to see, if possible, +by day, the sentinels of the adjacent outguards. Double sentinels are +always posted near enough to each other to communicate easily in +ordinary voice. Sentinels are generally on post two hours out of six. +For every sentinel and every patrol there should be three reliefs, and +outguards should be of a strength sufficient to allow this. The +position of a sentinel should be selected with reference to +observation. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page217" name="page217"></a>(p. 217)</span> It may be advantageous to place a sentinel in a +tree. Sentinels furnished by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept +near their group. Those furnished by their pickets may be kept as far +as 100 yards away.</p> + +<p>Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approach sentinels +from the rear.</p> + +<p>A sentinel on the line of observation should always have the following +instructions: The names of villages, streams, and prominent features +in sight and where the roads lead. The number (if any) of his post, +and the number of his and of the adjoining outguards; the position of +the support; the line of retreat to be followed if the outguard is +compelled to fall back; the position of advance detachments and +whether friendly patrols are operating in front; to watch to the front +and flanks without intermission and devote special attention to +unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he sees indications of the +enemy, to at once notify his immediate superior; in case of imminent +danger, or when an attack is made, to give the alarm by firing +rapidly; by day to pass in or out officers, noncommissioned officers, +and detachments recognized as part of the outposts, and officers known +to have authority to do so; to detain all others and notify the +outguard commander; at night, when persons approach his post, to come +to a ready, halt them, and notify the outguard commander; the latter +challenges, ascertains their identity, and acts accordingly. When +individuals fail to halt, or otherwise disobey, to fire upon them +after a second warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape; +to require deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a patrol +is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued by the enemy +to drop their arms and to give an alarm; if they fail to obey they are +fired upon; to require bearers of flags of truce and their escorts to +halt and to face outward; to permit them to hold no conversation and +to see that they are then blindfolded and disposed of in accordance +with instructions from the support commander; if they fail to obey to +fire upon them; at night, to remain practically stationary, moving +about for purposes of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless +authorized to do so; in the daytime, to make use of natural or +artificial cover and assume such positions as to give him the best +field <span class="pagenum"><a id="page218" name="page218"></a>(p. 218)</span> of view; to inform passing patrols of what he has seen; +to carry his weapon habitually loaded and locked and at will.</p> + +<p>Outpost patrols are divided into those which operate beyond the lines +and those whose duty lies principally within the lines. The former, +called reconnoitering patrols, scout in the direction of the enemy; +the latter, called visiting patrols, maintain communication between +the parts of the outpost and supervise the performance of duty on the +line of observation. Reconnoissance should be continuous. Though +scouts and detachments of cavalry remain in contact with the enemy, or +at least push forward to a considerable distance, more detailed +reconnoissance by infantry patrols in the foreground must not be +neglected. Reconnoitering patrols are composed of at least two men and +a skillful leader, who, in important cases, would be an officer. They +obtain information, ascertain the presence of the enemy, or discover +his approach. All patrols, when they cross the line of observation, +inform the nearest sentinel of the direction in which they are to +advance; on their return they similarly report what they have seen of +the enemy; signals are agreed upon so that they can be recognized when +returning. Any ground near the line of observation which might afford +cover for troops, or for scouts or spies, and the approach to which +can not be observed by sentinels, is searched frequently by patrols. +Definite information concerning the enemy is reported at once. Patrols +fire only in self-defense or to give the alarm. Supports on the flank +of an outpost position patrol the country on the exposed flank. +Visiting patrols and reliefs should not march in the open and thereby +expose the position of sentinels.</p> + +<p>During a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts are made, +special measures for protection are taken. When the halt is for a +short period, less than half an hour, the advance party and support +remain at ease, the point and flankers move to positions from which +they can obtain a good lookout, and additional patrols may be sent out +from advance parties and supports. Where the halt is for a period +exceeding half an hour a <b>march outpost</b> should be formed.</p> + +<p>With an advance guard consisting of a squadron, one troop as support +and three as reserve, a suggested form of march outpost might be +formed as follows: The leading platoon <span class="pagenum"><a id="page219" name="page219"></a>(p. 219)</span> moving to the front at +a trot for 400 yards would be outguard No. 2; the next platoon in +rear, moving to the right at a trot for about 600 to 800 yards would +be outguard No. 1; the next platoon, moving to the left in the same +manner would be outguard No. 3; and the 4th platoon would be the +support of the march outpost. The reserve (3 troops) would be the +reserve of the march outpost. On signal being given to resume the +march, the various units would close in at a trot or gallop, and as +soon as the support had assembled the march would be resumed.</p> + + +<h3>Section 8. Rifle trenches.</h3> + +<p>Soldiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on the +offensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The defensive may +delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy him. "Troops dig +because they are forced to halt; they do not halt to dig."</p> + +<p>Trenches will frequently be constructed, without being used, and +soldiers must expect this as a feature of campaigning and accept +cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary labor.</p> + +<p>When intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the lying +position, each man scooping but a depression for his body and throwing +the earth to the front. In this position no excavation can be +conveniently made for the legs, but if time permits the original +excavation is enlarged and deepened until it is possible to assume a +sitting position, with the legs crossed and the shoulder to the +parapet. In such apposition a man presents a smaller target to +shrapnel bullets than in the lying trench and can fire more +comfortably and with less exposure than in the kneeling trench. From +the sitting position the excavation may be continued until a standing +trench is secured.</p> + +<p>The accompanying plate shows some of the more common forms of trenches +in profile. Figure <a href="#img057">1</a> is the simplest form of standing trench. Figure <a href="#img057">2</a> +shows the same trench deepened in rear, so as to allow men to walk +along in the rear (deeper) portion of the trench without exposing +their heads above the parapet. Figure <a href="#img057">3</a> shows a cover and firing +trench, with a chamber in which men can find shelter when under heavy +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page220" name="page220"></a>(p. 220)</span> artillery fire. When the excavated earth is easily removed +figure <a href="#img057">4</a> shows a good profile. The enemy's infantry, as well as his +artillery, will generally have great difficulty in seeing this type of +trench.</p> + +<p>The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in front of a trench +is called the <b>parapet</b>. It should be at least 30 inches thick on top, +and the front should slope gradually, as shown in the plate, so that +shells will tend to glance from it, rather than penetrate and explode. +The top should be covered with sod, grass, or leaves, so as to hide +the newly turned earth, which could be easily seen and aimed at by the +enemy. There should be no rocks, loose stones, or pebbles on top, +which might be struck by the bullets, splintering and flying, thus +adding greatly to the number of dangerous projectiles, and often +deflecting bullets downward into the trench. A stone wall is a very +dangerous thing to be behind in a fight.</p> + +<p>The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and between the +parapet and the trench not covered by the parapet is to rest the +elbows on when firing, the rifle being rested on top of the parapet.</p> + +<p>To obtain head cover in a trench fill a gunny sack or other bag with +sand or soil and place it on top of the parapet, aiming around the +right-hand side of it, or dig a small lateral trench in the parapet, +large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over with boards, small logs, +or brush, and heap dirt on top, aiming through the small trench or +resulting loophole.</p> + +<p>Figure <a href="#img057">5</a> shows the plan of a section of a rifle trench.<a id="footnotetag10" name="footnotetag10"></a><a href="#footnote10" title="Go to footnote 10"><span class="smaller">[10]</span></a> Between +the portions occupied by each squad there is often placed a mound of +earth as high as the top of the parapet and projecting back into the +trench. This is called a <b>traverse</b> and protects the occupants of the +trench from fire from a flank. Bullets from this direction hit a +traverse, instead of flying down into the trench and wounding several +men.</p> + +<p>Trenches are seldom continuous, but are made in sections placed at the +most advantageous points, as shown in figure <a href="#img057">6</a>. A company or battalion +may occupy a single section. The firing trenches have cover trenches +in rear of them, where the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page221" name="page221"></a>(p. 221)</span> supports can rest undisturbed by +the hostile fire until they are needed in the firing trench to repel a +serious assault or to take part in a counter attack. Passages +consisting of deep communicating trenches facilitate passage from the +cover trenches to the firing trenches when under fire. These +communicating trenches are usually zigzag or traversed to prevent +their being swept by hostile fire.</p> + +<p>When troops are likely to remain in trenches for a considerable time +drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and dressing stations +should be constructed in trenches. Water should be brought into the +trenches and holes excavated in the front wall of the trench for extra +ammunition.</p> + +<p>In digging trenches men usually work in reliefs, one relief digging +while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to pickmen being +about 3 to 1. If a plow can be obtained to turn the sod, it will +greatly facilitate the initial work of digging.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page222" name="page222"></a>(p. 222)</span> + +<a id="img057" name="img057"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img057.jpg" width="450" height="607" alt="" title=""> +<p>Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. +6, Plate V.</p> +</div> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page223" name="page223"></a>(p. 223)</span> CHAPTER VII.<br> + +MARCHING AND CAMPING.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march.</h3> + +<p class="title">THE EVENING BEFORE THE MARCH.</p> + +<p>When a command learns that it is to make a march on the following day, +presumably starting early in the morning, certain details should be +attended to the evening before.</p> + +<p>All men should fill their canteens, as there will probably be no time +for this in the morning.</p> + +<p>The mess sergeant should find out whether lunch or the reserve ration +will be carried on the march, and should attend to these details in +the evening in order that the issue can be made promptly in the +morning.</p> + +<p>The stable sergeant will have the stable detail fill all of the feed +bags for the morning's feed, and the section leaders will see that +each of their men has filled his grain bag with the noon feed for the +following day.</p> + +<p>The commander of the guard should be given a memorandum as to what +time to awaken the cooks and where their tent is. The member of the +guard who does this should awaken them without noise, so as not to +disturb the rest of the remainder of the command.</p> + +<p>The cooks should be instructed as to what time breakfast is to be +served and what time to awaken the first sergeant.</p> + +<p>The cooks or cooks' police must cut and split all firewood for the +morning before 9 p. m. There must be no chopping, talking, or rattling +of pans before reveille which will disturb the rest of the command. +This applies to every morning in camp.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page224" name="page224"></a>(p. 224)</span> THE MORNING OF THE MARCH.</p> + +<p>Cooks arise when called by the guard and start the preparation of +breakfast without noise. The first sergeant and stable sergeant are +usually awakened by one of the cooks about half an hour before +reveille in order that they may complete their toilets and breakfast +early and be able to devote all their time to supervising the details +of the morning's work. If the officers desire to be awakened before +reveille they will notify the first sergeant accordingly.</p> + +<p>At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets, strike their +shelter tents (unless it has been directed to await the sounding of +the general for this), and make up their packs. The stable detail +feeds the horses.</p> + +<p>At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille each man must +be in his proper place in ranks, except the kitchen and stable details +who are actually at work. This assembly is under arms. The first +sergeant starts to call the roll or commands "Report" at the last note +of assembly. Arms are stacked before the troop is dismissed.</p> + +<p>Breakfast is served to the troop immediately after roll call. +Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his mess kit in the hot +water provided for that purpose at the kitchen and will at once pack +the mess kit in his saddlebags.</p> + +<p>The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits at the same +time that breakfast is served.</p> + +<p>Immediately after breakfast the troop proceeds to the work of breaking +camp and packing in accordance with a prearranged system similar to +the following:</p> + +<p>One section assists the cooks in packing the kitchen.</p> + +<p>One section strikes and folds the officers' tents and brings them to +the kitchen.</p> + +<p>One section fills in the sink. The sink should not be filled in +earlier than is absolutely necessary.</p> + +<p>The stable detail police the picket line and vicinity.</p> + +<p>One section polices the camp within the company police limits.</p> + +<p>One section is available for possible details from regimental +headquarters.</p> + +<p>Officers and first sergeant supervise the work.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page225" name="page225"></a>(p. 225)</span> A permanent assignment of squads to these duties lightens the +labor and decreases the time necessary for breaking camp.</p> + +<p><b>Boots and saddles</b> should not be sounded before all of the above work +has been completed, and without confusion. Don't begin the day by +nagging your men, thereby making them "grouchy" during the march.</p> + +<p>Always be most careful to groom all parts of your horse that will be +touched by the equipment before you begin to saddle up.</p> + +<p>Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should drink all the water +they want immediately after breakfast. All canteens should be filled +before marching.</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Marches, camps.</h3> + +<p class="title">GENERAL PROVISIONS.</p> + +<p><b>977.</b> The successful conduct of a march is one of the surest tests of +the ability and good judgment, not only of the commander, but of all +subordinate officers as well. Certain general principles and some +exact rules are laid down to fit the case of a normal march, but +tactical considerations as well as the condition of roads and weather, +the necessary forage, water and shelter, sanitation, and other +circumstances render a march of any considerable body of mounted +troops one requiring the most unremitting attention to details on the +part of the commander and his subordinates. A successful Cavalry march +whether in peace or war is one that places the men and horses at the +time and place needed in the best possible condition for the service +required. Failure of mounted troops to successfully carry out a +mission is due as a rule to exhaustion or injuries to the horses +rather than to the men.</p> + +<p>The training of officers of all grades must be such that solicitude +for the condition of horses on the march is second nature; constant +effort should be made, however severe the work, to stimulate the pride +of the trooper in having and in keeping his mount in fit condition; if +such stimulus is ineffective then the remedy, if the trooper is at +fault, lies in other directions. Under favorable conditions field +service <span class="pagenum"><a id="page226" name="page226"></a>(p. 226)</span> offers the best opportunity for conditioning the +horses and hardening the men.</p> + +<p><b>978. Preparation</b>: Responsibility for the timely ordering of necessary +preparations preliminary to leaving a permanent camp or station rests +with the commander. All probable needs of the command for the service +on which ordered should be anticipated, instructions prepared, +verified, and issued once in complete form, and no departure therefrom +permitted. The <b>march order</b> proper for the actual movement of the +command conforms to the requirements of Field Service Regulations. <b>An +order or memorandum of service calls</b> will be issued and distributed in +ample time the night before beginning a march stating the hour for +reville, stables, and breakfast and such other duties as can +reasonably be anticipated.</p> + +<p>Except on account of imperative military reasons, Cavalry should not +leave camp for an hour or more after daylight. If grazing is depended +upon, this is especially necessary, since horses as a rule graze more +freely in the early morning when rested. Ample time should be allowed +after reville for grooming and feeding and thereafter for the men to +breakfast. All stable duties should be done quietly and without hurry +or confusion under the immediate supervision of troop and squadron +commanders. In each troop a man is detailed to walk the picket line +while grain is being fed, to look out for the horses generally and to +take off the feed or the nose bag of a horse as soon as he has +finished feeding.</p> + +<p>The signals for striking tents (<b>the general</b>), for policing, saddling, +and beginning the march should be ordered personally by the commanding +officer and only when the duties pertaining to the previous signal are +completed.</p> + +<p><b>979. The march, its length and rate</b>: The average daily march of a +Cavalry column of the size of a squadron, or larger, is about 25 miles +when horses are in condition; when starting on long-distance marches +the rate per day for the first few days should be less than 20 miles +and gradually increased. These rules may necessarily be modified, even +when horses are not in fit condition, by reason of emergencies, +character of roads or weather, proximity of water, grazing, etc., but, +with these exceptions, the question of the <b>length</b> of the daily march +is one of good judgment and experience on the part of the commander. +The <b>gait</b> and <b>pace</b> of the daily march are influenced <span class="pagenum"><a id="page227" name="page227"></a>(p. 227)</span> by both +the time the horse is to carry the load and the distance to be +covered. The quicker a march can be completed without forcing the less +the fatigue to both horse and man. Where the footing is good, the road +level, and other considerations do not hamper the column, after the +first or a subsequent halt, may advance first by leading dismounted, +then mount and walk, then trot, a short gallop (exceptional), then the +trot, followed by the walk to the next halt. No gait is to be +maintained continuously long enough to weary either horse or man, +neither must it be changed too frequently in long columns; but +whatever pace or gait is taken it should conform to the standards +(par. 279). The officer setting the pace should occasionally drop back +to observe its effect on the column, and veterinarians, if present, +should be habitually utilized for this purpose.</p> + +<p>The walk, if the footing is good, should be at the rate of 4 miles per +hour, exclusive of halts; the trot at 8 miles per hour, so as to +facilitate posting; the gallop, a very exceptional gait even for small +commands, should be not faster than the maneuvering gallop (par. 236), +and its practicability will depend upon the training and condition of +the horses, since on long marches, unless accustomed to this gait with +packed saddles, the horses will soon break down.</p> + +<p>Very rarely, however, will the conditions allow the regular +arrangement of gaits indicated above. Rolling country, with ascents +and descents, stretches of hard or stony road or of mud, dust, or +sand, crossings of streams, etc., will ordinarily impose corresponding +changes of gait or pace on each of the small elements of the column as +it reaches them. To provide for this the troops in route column, when +so directed, take greater distances than prescribed in order to allow +for closing up at checks.</p> + +<p>The commander must give this matter unremitting attention, since +normal route-order distances in column frequently entail discomfort to +the men and sometimes injuries to the horses which might have been +avoided.</p> + +<p>Unless under exceptional circumstances, the commander of a marching +column will authorize each troop commander to so regulate the gait and +pace of his troop as to conform to that next in front, the gait and +pace of the leading troop being regulated by the commander himself. +This results in each <span class="pagenum"><a id="page228" name="page228"></a>(p. 228)</span> troop changing to the trot, walk, +leading dismounted, etc., at the same place at which the leading troop +did, and although regulation distances, are frequently exceeded, the +tendency on all stretches of good road is to close on the leading +troop of the column. With care this method of marching should result +in enabling each troop in the column to move with almost the same +regularity and freedom from checks as though it were in the lead.</p> + +<p>The fast rate of march that can be expected of small detachments and +of single riders can not be demanded of a long Cavalry column, and as +the command increases in size the rate of march will decrease. The +regulation gaits being, at the walk, 4 miles, the trot, 8 miles, +Cavalry should be able to make, including halts, 5 miles per hour or +better. This rate can be maintained for daily marches of 25 miles +under ordinary conditions for a week at a time, after which a day of +rest should be allowed before continuing the march.</p> + +<p><b>980. Formations</b>: The habitual formation for marches is route order in +column of fours (par. 754). When the roads are unsuitable or the +command is small, column of twos or troopers is permissible. To +economize road space in large commands <b>double column</b> or parallel +columns should be used if practicable. Squadrons in regiment and +troops in squadrons alternate in leading, the rule being that the one +in front one day automatically follows in rear the next day.</p> + +<p><b>981. Halts</b>: The first half hour of a march should be made at a walk +and the first halt of 10 or 15 minutes toward the end of the first +hour after starting; it should, if possible, be preceded by a short +trot in order to make apparent any faulty adjustment of equipment. +This halt gives an opportunity for the horses to stale and for the +troopers to attend to the calls of nature, to tighten girths, and to +adjust saddles, equipment, and clothing.</p> + +<p>Other halts of 5 to 10 minutes should be made at hourly intervals, +and, if the march is to be prolonged into the afternoon, a longer halt +should be made at noon, when girths are loosened, bridles removed, +horses fed, and the men eat their lunches.</p> + +<p><b>An invariable rule on the march and in camp is to have all troopers +dismount promptly on halting; in other words, never to permit a man +to sit a moment in the saddle while his horse <span class="pagenum"><a id="page229" name="page229"></a>(p. 229)</span> is standing +still, and under no circumstances to lounge in the saddle.</b></p> + +<p><b>982. Watering</b>: On the march horses should be watered whenever +opportunity occurs, conforming as far as practicable to the rule of +watering before feeding and of removing the bit when by so doing the +horse can drink more freely, as when the stream or watering place is +shallow. Public watering troughs should ordinarily be avoided on +account of danger from infection. The use of buckets or of portable, +collapsible canvas watering troughs (articles of issue) will often +make watering places otherwise insufficient thoroughly satisfactory. +On the march and in camp watering is always done under supervision of +an officer.</p> + +<p><b>983. Feeding</b>: In time of peace when a regular supply of grain and long +forage can be counted on, effort should be made to follow, as far as +practicable, the routine to which horses have been accustomed in +garrison. In time of war regularity of supply of forage, and +especially of the long forage, can not be expected, and officers must +neglect no opportunity of anticipating the needs of their animals when +passing grain fields, pastures, or stacks of hay and other fodder. A +supply for the night can often be gathered and carried along on the +wagons or it may be tied up compactly with the lariat and carried on +the horse.</p> + +<p>The trooper with habitual solicitude for his mount will, if permitted, +be prompt to remove the bits to let his horse graze (facing the wind +in hot weather) at every delay or check, and he will miss no chance to +pick up an extra feed of grain.</p> + +<p><b>984. Camps</b> (<i>see also</i> <b>Care of Troops</b>, F. S. R.): The ground being +suitable, a troop encamps in line, with first sergeant's cook and +officers' tents on one flank, the men's sink on the other, and with +picket line 15 yards in front of and parallel to the men's tents, the +open ends of the tents toward the picket line. A squadron or regiment +encamps in column of troops as above, but with picket lines on the +flank of the column on the side opposite the cook and officers' tents, +each in prolongation of its own company street. Intervals and +distances should approximate those of the normal semipermanent camps +(F. S. R.), if space is available. For a shelter-tent camp in column +of troops with picket lines stretched between the rows of tents the +guidons which mark first sergeants' <span class="pagenum"><a id="page230" name="page230"></a>(p. 230)</span> tents should not be less +than 15 yards apart. The squadron or regiment may encamp in line +similarly to the troop if the ground is more favorable for such form +of camp, but ordinarily they encamp in column of troops with picket +lines between the rows of tents.</p> + +<p><b>985. On nearing the end of a day's march, the regimental commander +will send his adjutant and supply officer ahead to locate the camp and +provide for the arrival of the column</b>: On approaching the camping +place, squadron adjutants and the guidon of each troop will be +summoned by the colonel's bugler sounding <b>adjutant's call</b> followed by +guidons (or otherwise according to circumstances). At these calls each +squadron adjutant followed by the guidons of his squadron will move +rapidly to the front and will join the regimental adjutant, who +indicates to each the ground which his squadron is to occupy. If the +available ground is sufficient to encamp the entire regiment as +prescribed in the Field Service Regulations, the regimental adjutant +causes the guidons to be aligned and planted at the prescribed +intervals, thereby marking the first sergeant's tent on the flank of +each troop, otherwise each squadron adjutant has the guidons of his +squadron so placed on the ground allotted to his squadron as to +conform, as nearly as conditions will permit, to the normal camp, +having in view the comfort of horses and men and convenience to +supplies. The object in marking off the camp as prescribed, by +establishing the guidons before the arrival of the column, is to +relieve the horse of his rider and pack as soon as possible. To +further minimize delay, commanding officers, <b>unless under exceptional +circumstances</b>, will, immediately on reaching the ground, direct majors +to dismiss their squadrons and have their troop commanders proceed +directly to their guidons, dismount at once, and pitch camp.</p> + +<p>The foregoing principles will also, in so far as applicable, be +enforced by commanders of all units smaller than the regiment.</p> + +<p>The regimental supply officer has the drivers of the baggage section +of the regimental train go direct to their proper troops and unhitch. +Ordinarily, for convenience in a one-night camp or bivouac the wagons +of the baggage section are left between the cook tents and the troop +officers' tents, the supply section being parked outside by itself. +After arrival at the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page231" name="page231"></a>(p. 231)</span> camping place a guard is at once placed +over the source of supply of drinking water.</p> + +<p>Before pitching tents the rifles are stacked, sabers, rolls, saddle +bags, and lariats removed from the saddles, girths loosened (the +saddles being left on until backs are cooled), and the horses either +linked by section, in circle (par. 428), or coupled head and tail +(par. 427), and a man detailed to watch them until tents are pitched.</p> + +<p>After pitching tents, stacks are broken, rifles placed in the tents, +horses unsaddled, unbridled, and tied on the line or herded, saddles +placed in a row in front of the tents and saddle blankets spread on +them to dry, fuel secured, sinks dug, and other necessary preparations +made for the night. The use of saddle blankets as bedding by the men +will be permitted only under very exceptional conditions, and special +care must be exercised to keep them free from dirt and burs. During +evening stables, troop commanders, accompanied, if practicable, by a +veterinarian, inspect the backs and feet of their horses, and in the +morning they permit no trooper who is not specially authorized, to +saddle his horse before the call <b>boots and saddles</b>, or to mount before +the command for so doing.</p> + +<p><b>986. Herding</b>: In a hostile country camps should be selected, if +possible, where grazing is good and beyond rifle range of cover for an +enemy. Orders are issued as to places of assembly, and in each troop +men are detailed beforehand to go among the horses and quiet them in +case of a night alarm. In the event of a stampede, men should mount +the fastest animals within reach, ride ahead of the herd, and lead it +back to camp. Sometimes the sounding of stable and water call will +prevent or check a stampede.</p> + +<p>In case it is necessary to graze the horses in an enemy's country, +they are sent out to herd under charge of an officer as soon as +possible after making camp, they being taken during daylight as far +away as is safe so as to keep the grass nearer camp for the night.</p> + +<p><b>987. Forced and night marches</b>: To conduct a rapid march of a command +of any magnitude successfully, horses must be <b>in condition</b> (pars. 950, +959) and men must have been trained (par. 175); if either is lacking, +the daily marches at first must be short.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page232" name="page232"></a>(p. 232)</span> A night march, being slow and fatiguing to horses and men, is +seldom undertaken unless as a forced march to seize a position or to +surprise an enemy by attacking him at dawn. In a forced march +frequently the gait, if the footing is favorable, and always the +number of hours in the saddle, are increased. Under favorable +conditions a rate of 50 miles in 24 hours for three or four days can +be maintained. During such a march, in addition to the usual hourly +halts, a halt of 2 hours is made toward the end of the first half of +each day's march, during which bits are removed, horses unsaddled, +watered, fed, and their legs hand rubbed; the rate should be about 5 +miles an hour, exclusive of halts.</p> + +<p>Under very favorable conditions a single march of 100 miles can be +made in from 24 to 30 hours. During a march of this character, in +addition to the usual hourly halts, halts of 2 hours are made toward +the end of the first and second thirds of the march, during which bits +are removed, the horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs hand +rubbed; the rate of march should be from 5 to 6 miles an hour, +exclusive of halts.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page233" name="page233"></a>(p. 233)</span> CHAPTER VIII.<br> + +TARGET PRACTICE.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship.</h3> + +<p>Effective rifle fire is generally what counts most in battle. To have +effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must be able to HIT +what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no man who can not be +taught how to shoot. It is not necessary or even desirable to begin +instruction by firing on a rifle range. A perfectly green recruit who +has never fired a rifle may be made into a good shot by a little +instruction and some preliminary drills and exercises.</p> + +<p>Before a man goes on the range to fire it is absolutely necessary that +he should know—</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>1. How to set the rear sight.</li> +<li>2. How to sight or aim.</li> +<li>3. How to squeeze the trigger.</li> +<li>4. How to hold the rifle in all positions.</li> +</ul> + +<p>If he does not know these things it is worse than useless for him to +fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse he will shoot, +and it will become more difficult to teach him.</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Sight adjustment.</h3> + +<p>Men must be able to adjust their sights correctly and quickly. An +error in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it on the sight +leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at 500 yards and over.</p> + +<p>Notice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the <b>battle sight</b> +appears on top. This sight is set for 547 yards and is not adjustable. +When the leaf is raised four sights come into view. The extreme range +sight for 2,850 yards at the top of <span class="pagenum"><a id="page234" name="page234"></a>(p. 234)</span> the leaf is seldom used. +The open sight at the upper edge of the drift slide is adjustable from +1,400 to 2,750 yards. To set it the upper edge of the slide is made to +correspond with the range reading on the leaf, and the slide is then +clamped with the slide screw. This sight also is seldom used. The open +sight at the bottom of the triangular opening in the drift slide is +adjustable from 100 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index line at the +lower corners of the triangle is set opposite the range graduation on +the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peep sight just below it +are the sights most commonly used. To set the peep sight, the index +lines on either side of the peephole are set opposite the range +desired and the slide clamped.</p> + +<p>Notice the scales for the various ranges on either side of the face of +the leaf. The odd-numbered hundreds of yards are on the right and the +even on the left. <b>The line below the number is the index line for that +range.</b> Thus to set the sight for 500 yards the index line of the slide +is brought in exact line with the line on the leaf below the figure 5 +and the slide clamped. To set for 550 yards the index lines of the +slide are set halfway between the index lines on the leaf below the +figure 5 on the right side and the figure 6 on the left side. Look at +your sight carefully when setting it and take great pains to get it +exact. An error in setting the width of one of the lines on the leaf +will cause an error of about 8 inches in where your bullet will strike +at 500 yards.</p> + +<p>The <b>wind gauge</b> is adjusted by means of the windage screw at the right +front end of the base of the sight. Each graduation on the wind-gauge +scale is called a "point." For convenience in adjusting the line of +each third point on the scale is longer than the others. If you turn +the windage screw so that the movable base moves to the right, you are +taking right windage, which will cause your rifle to shoot more to the +right.</p> + +<p>It is seldom that a rifle will shoot correctly to the point aimed at +at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly to the scale +graduations for that range. If your sight is not correctly adjusted +for your shooting and you wish to move it slightly to make it correct, +remember to <b>move it in the direction you wish your shot to hit</b>. If you +wish to shoot higher raise your sight. If to the right, move the wind +gauge to the right. Always move your sight the correct amount in +accordance with the following table:</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page235" name="page235"></a>(p. 235)</span> Section 3. Table of sight corrections.</h3> + +<p><i>Showing to what extent the point of impact is moved by a change of 25 +yards in elevation or 1 point in windage.</i></p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Sight corrections."> +<colgroup> + <col width="25%"> + <col width="25%"> + <col width="25%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="center">Range.</td> +<td class="center">Correction by a change in elevation of 25 yards.</td> +<td class="center">Correction by a change in windage of 1 point.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="3"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center"><i>Yards.</i></td> +<td class="center"><i>Inches.</i></td> +<td class="center"><i>Inches.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">100</td> +<td class="center">0.72</td> +<td class="center">4</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">200</td> +<td class="center">1.62</td> +<td class="center">8</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">300</td> +<td class="center">2.79</td> +<td class="center">12</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">400</td> +<td class="center">4.29</td> +<td class="center">16</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">500</td> +<td class="center">6.22</td> +<td class="center">20</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">600</td> +<td class="center">8.59</td> +<td class="center">24</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">800</td> +<td class="center">15.43</td> +<td class="center">32</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="center">1,000</td> +<td class="center">25.08</td> +<td class="center">40</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>An easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A change of 1 +point of wind changes the point of impact 4 inches for every 100 yards +of range."</p> + +<p>Copy this table and take it to the range with you.</p> + +<p>Example of sight adjustment: Suppose you are firing at 500 yards. The +first two or three shots show you that your shots are hitting about a +foot below and a foot to the right of the center of the bull's-eye. +From the above table you will see that if you will raise your sight 50 +yards and move the wind gauge half a point to the left the rifle will +be sighted so that if you aim correctly the bullets will hit well +inside the bull's-eye.</p> + + +<h3>Section 4. Aiming.</h3> + +<p><b>Open sight</b>: Always align your sights with the front sight squarely in +the middle of the "U" or notch of the rear sight, and the top of the +front sight even with the upper corners of the "U." (See fig. <a href="#img058">1</a>.) All +the sights on the rifle except the peep sight are open sights.</p> + +<a id="img058" name="img058"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img058.jpg" width="400" height="227" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Figure 1.</span></p> +</div> + +<p><b>Peep sight</b>: Always center the tip of the front sight in the center of +the peephole when aiming with this sight. (See fig. <a href="#img059">2</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img059" name="img059"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img059.jpg" width="400" height="380" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Figure 2.</span></p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page236" name="page236"></a>(p. 236)</span> Always aim below the bull's-eye. Never let your front sight +appear to touch the bull's eye in aiming. Try to see the same amount +of white target between the top of the front sight and the bottom of +the bull's-eye each time. The eye must be focused on the bull's-eye or +mark and not on the front or rear sight.</p> + +<p>Look at figures <a href="#img058">1</a> and <a href="#img059">2</a> until your eye retains the memory of them, +then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim. Aim +consistently, always the same. Never change your aim; change your +sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in the right place. +Many shots have been wasted when the point of aim has been moved to +what the firer thought was the necessary change on the target, instead +of changing the sights according to the table on page 191.</p> + + +<h3>Section 5. Battle sight.</h3> + +<p>The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf is laid flat. It +is adjusted for a range of 547 yards. It is intended to be used in +battle when you get nearer to the enemy than 600 yards. Always aim at +the belt of a standing enemy, or just <span class="pagenum"><a id="page237" name="page237"></a>(p. 237)</span> below him if he is +kneeling, sitting, or lying. On the target range this sight is used +for rapid fire. With it the rifle shoots about 2 feet high at ranges +between 200 and 400 yards, so you must aim below the figure on the +target "D." Find out in your instruction practice just how much you +must aim below to hit the figure.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. Trigger squeeze.</h3> + +<p>Use the first joint of the forefinger to squeeze the trigger. It is +the most sensitive and best controlled portion of the body. As you +place the rifle to your shoulder, squeeze the trigger so as to pull it +back about one-eighth of an inch, thus taking up the safety portion or +slack of the pull. Then contract the trigger finger gradually, slowly +and steadily increasing the pressure on the trigger while the aim is +being perfected. Continue the gradual increase of pressure so that +when the aim has become exact the additional pressure required to +release the point of the sear can be given almost insensibly and +without <span class="pagenum"><a id="page238" name="page238"></a>(p. 238)</span> causing any deflection of the rifle. Put absolutely +all your mind and will power into holding the rifle steady and +squeezing the trigger off without disturbing the aim. Practice +squeezing the trigger in this way every time you have your rifle in +your hand until you can surely and quickly do it without a suspicion +of a jerk.</p> + +<p>By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger squeeze of +his rifle, and knowing this he is able to judge at any time, within +limits, what additional pressure is required for its discharge. By +constant repetition of this exercise he should be able finally to +squeeze the trigger to a certain point beyond which the slightest +movement will release the sear. Having squeezed the trigger to this +point the aim is corrected, and when true the additional pressure is +applied and the discharge follows and the bullet flies true to the +mark.</p> + + +<h3>Section 7. Firing positions.</h3> + +<p>When in ranks at close order the positions are those described in the +Cavalry Drill Regulations. When in extended order or when firing alone +these positions may be modified somewhat to better suit the +individual. The following remarks on the various positions are offered +as suggestions whereby steady positions may be learned by the soldier.</p> + +<p><b>Standing position</b>: Face the target, then execute right half face. +Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you raise the rifle to the +shoulder lean very slightly backward just enough to preserve the +perfect balance on both feet which the raising of the rifle has +somewhat disturbed. Do not lean far back and do not lean forward at +all. If your body is out of balance, it will be under strain and you +will tremble. The right elbow should be at about the height of the +shoulder. The left hand should grasp well around the stock and +handguard in front of the rear sight, and the left elbow should be +almost directly under the rifle. The right hand should do more than +half the work of holding the rifle up and against the shoulder, the +left hand only steadying and guiding the piece. Do not try to meet the +recoil; let the whole body move back with it. Do not be afraid to +press the jaw hard against the stock; this <span class="pagenum"><a id="page239" name="page239"></a>(p. 239)</span> steadies the +position, and the head goes back with the recoil and insures that your +face is not hurt.</p> + +<p><b>Kneeling position</b>: Assume the position very much as described in the +Cavalry Drill Regulations. Sit on the right heel. The right knee +should point directly to the right; that is, along the firing line. +The point of the left elbow should rest over the left knee. There is a +flat place under the elbow which fits a flat place on the knee and +makes a solid rest. Lean the body well forward. This position is +uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases to be +uncomfortable.</p> + +<p><b>Sitting position</b>: Sit down half faced to the right, feet from 6 to 8 +inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher than the left, +left leg pointed toward the target. Rest both elbows on the knees, +hands grasping the piece the same as in the prone position. This is a +very steady position, particularly if holes can be found or made in +the ground for the heels.</p> + +<p><b>Prone position and use of the gun sling</b>: To adjust the sling for +firing, unhook the straight strap of the sling and let it out as far +as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when stretched along the bottom +of the stock its rear end (bight) comes about opposite the comb of the +stock. A small man needs a longer loop than a tall man. Lie down +facing at an angle of about 60° to the right of the direction of the +target. Spread the legs as wide apart as they will go with comfort. +Thrust the left arm through between the rifle and the sling, and then +back through the loop of the sling, securing the loop, by means of the +keeper, around the upper left arm as high up as it will go. Pass the +hand under and then over the sling from the left side, and grasp the +stock and handguard just in rear of the lower band. Raise the right +elbow off the ground, rolling slightly over on the left side. Place +the butt to the shoulder and roll back into position, clamping the +rifle hard and steady in the firing position. The rifle should rest +deep down in the palm of the left hand with fingers almost around the +handguard. Shift the left palm a little to the right or left until the +rifle stands perfectly upright (no cant) without effort. The left +elbow should rest on the ground directly under the rifle, and right +elbow on the ground about 5 inches to the right of a point directly +under the stock. In this position the loop of the sling, starting at +the lower band, passes to the right of the left wrist, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page240" name="page240"></a>(p. 240)</span> and +thence around the left upper arm. The loop should be so tight that +about 50 pounds tension is placed on it when the position is assumed. +This position is uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases +to be uncomfortable. It will be steadier if small holes can be found +or dug in the ground for the elbows. In this position the sling binds +the left forearm to the rifle and to the ground so that it forms a +dead rest for the rifle, with a universal joint, the wrist, at its +upper end. Also the rifle is so bound to the shoulder that the recoil +is not felt at all. This is the steadiest of all firing positions.</p> + +<p>The gun sling can also be used in this manner with advantage in the +other positions.</p> + + +<h3>Section 8. Calling the shot.</h3> + +<p>It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted at each range that +the rifle will hit where you aim. In order to determine that the +sights are so adjusted, it is necessary that you shall know each time +just where you were aiming on the target at the instant your rifle was +discharged. If you know this and your rifle hits this point, your +rifle is correctly sighted. If your shot does not hit near this point, +you should change your sight adjustment in accordance with the table +of sight corrections on page 191.</p> + +<p>No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle trembles slightly, and +the sights seem to wabble and move over the target. You try to squeeze +off the last ounce of the trigger squeeze just as the sights move to +the desired alignment under the bull's-eye. At this instant, just +before the recoil blots out a view of the sights and target, you +should catch with your eye a picture, as it were, of just where on the +target your sights were aligned, and call to yourself or to the coach +this point. This point is where your shot should strike if your sights +are correctly adjusted and if you have squeezed the trigger without +disturbing your aim. Until a man can call his shots he is not a good +shot, for he can never tell if his rifle is sighted right or not, or +if a certain shot is a good one or only the result of luck.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page241" name="page241"></a>(p. 241)</span> Section 9. Coordination.</h3> + +<p>Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly the details of—</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>Holding the rifle in the various positions.</li> +<li>Aiming.</li> +<li>Squeezing the trigger.</li> +<li>Calling the shot.</li> +<li>Adjusting the sights.</li> +</ul> + +<p>And when these have been mastered in detail then the coordination of +them in the act of firing. This coordination consists in putting +absolutely all of one's will power into an effort to hold the rifle +steadily, especially in getting it to steady down when the aim is +perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off easily at the instant +the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected; in calling the shot at +this instant; and if the shot does not hit near the point called, then +in adjusting the sights the correct amount so that the rifle will be +sighted to hit where you aim.</p> + + +<h3>Section 10. Advice to riflemen.</h3> + +<p>Before going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing every +trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done with a rag saturated +with gasoline. Put a light coat of oil on the bolt and cams. Blacken +the front and rear sights with smoke from a burning candle or camphor +or with liquid sight black.</p> + +<p>Look through the bore and see that there is no obstruction in it.</p> + +<p>Keep the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb dampness, the +sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt.</p> + +<p>Watch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the line of sight +is at discharge. It is only in this way that the habit of calling +shots, which is essential to good shooting, can be acquired.</p> + +<p>Study the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before going +to the firing point.</p> + +<p>Look at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it has not +changed.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page242" name="page242"></a>(p. 242)</span> If sure of your hold and if the hit is not as called, +determine and make FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the +next shot in the bull's-eye.</p> + +<p>Keep a written record of the weather conditions and the corresponding +elevation and windage for each day's firing.</p> + +<p>Less elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet days; in +a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a cold barrel.</p> + +<p>More elevation will generally be required on cold days; on very dry +days; with a 12 o'clock wind; with a hot barrel; in a dull or cloudy +light.</p> + +<p>The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the barrel.</p> + +<p>Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready to fire. Do not +place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot and shoot high.</p> + +<p>Do not rub the eyes—especially the sighting eye.</p> + +<p>In cold weather warm the trigger hand before shooting.</p> + +<p>After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oil it to prevent +rust.</p> + +<p>Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam, properly cut to +size, for use in cleaning.</p> + +<p>Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass cleaning rod +when available. An injury to the rifling at the muzzle causes the +piece to shoot very irregularly.</p> + +<p>Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will cause a marked +improvement in shooting.</p> + +<p>Frequent practice of the "Position and aiming drills" and gallery +practice are of the greatest help in preparing for shooting on the +range.</p> + +<p><b>Rapid firing</b>: Success in rapid firing depends upon catching a quick +and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly, and in +squeezing the trigger without a jerk.</p> + +<p>In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, the +soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, and +working the bolt, so that no time will be lost in these operations. +With constant practice all these movements may be made quickly and +without false motions.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page243" name="page243"></a>(p. 243)</span> When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with enough +force to start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled +back it must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell well +away from the chamber and far enough to engage the next cartridge.</p> + +<p>In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one motion.</p> + +<p>The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, must be held and the +trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding, aim, and +squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with all the +precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in getting ready to +fire, loading, and working the bolt.</p> + +<p><b>Firing with rests</b>: In order that the shooting may be uniform the piece +should always be rested at the same point.</p> + + +<h3>Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.</h3> + +<p>The course in small-arms firing consists of—</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>(<i>a</i>) Nomenclature and care of rifle.</li> +<li>(<i>b</i>) Sighting drills.</li> +<li>(<i>c</i>) Position and aiming drills.</li> +<li>(<i>d</i>) Deflection and elevation correction drills.</li> +<li>(<i>e</i>) Gallery practice.</li> +<li>(<i>f</i>) Estimating distance drill.</li> +<li>(<i>g</i>) Individual known-distance firing, instruction practice.</li> +<li>(<i>h</i>) Individual known-distance firing, record practice.</li> +<li>(<i>i</i>) Long-distance practice.</li> +<li>(<i>j</i>) Practice with telescopic sights.</li> +<li>(<i>k</i>) Instruction combat practice.</li> +<li>(<i>l</i>) Combat practice.</li> +<li>(<i>m</i>) Proficiency test.</li> +</ul> + +<p>The regulations governing these are found in Small Arms Firing Manual, +1913. There should be several copies of this manual in every troop.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page244" name="page244"></a>(p. 244)</span> Section 12. Targets.</h3> + +<p>The accompanying plates show the details and size of the targets:</p> + +<a id="img060" name="img060"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img060.jpg" width="400" height="512" alt="" title=""> +<p>TARGET A, TARGET B, TARGET C,</p> +</div> + +<a id="img061" name="img061"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img061.jpg" width="400" height="388" alt="" title=""> +<p>TARGET D.</p> +</div> + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page245" name="page245"></a>(p. 245)</span> Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice.<a id="footnotetag11" name="footnotetag11"></a><a href="#footnote11" title="Go to footnote 11"><span class="smaller">[11]</span></a></h3> + +<p><b>135.</b><a id="footnotetag12" name="footnotetag12"></a><a href="#footnote12" title="Go to footnote 12"><span class="smaller">[12]</span></a> <b>Nomenclature and care of the weapon; handling and +precautions against accidents.</b>—The soldier will first be taught +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page246" name="page246"></a>(p. 246)</span> the nomenclature of those parts of the weapon necessary to an +understanding of its action and use and the proper measures for its +care and preservation. Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description of +the Colt's automatic pistol), 1919, and 1927 (descriptions of the +Colt's revolver, calibers .38 and .45, respectively), contain full +information on this subject, and are furnished to organizations armed +with these weapons.</p> + +<p>Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many +accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The following +rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) On taking the <b>pistol</b> from the armrack or holster, take out the +magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it; then draw back +the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded. Observe the same +precaution after practice on the target range, and again before +replacing the pistol in the holster or in the armrack. When taking the +<b>revolver</b> from the armrack or holster and before returning it to the +same, open the cylinder and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before +beginning a drill and upon arriving on the range observe the same +precaution.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Neither load nor unlock the weapon until the moment of firing, +nor until a run in the mounted course is started.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position of "Raise +pistol" (par. 147, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916), except when it is +pointed at the target. (The position of "Lower pistol" is authorized +for mounted firing only.)</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or earth can +enter the bore or mechanism.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) Before loading the <b>pistol</b>, draw back the slide and look through +the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. Before loading the +<b>revolver</b>, open the cylinder and look through the bore to see that it +is free from obstruction. When loading the <b>pistol</b> for target practice +place five cartridges in the magazine and insert the magazine in the +handle; draw back the slide and insert the first cartridge in the +chamber and carefully lock the hammer.</p> + +<p>In loading the <b>revolver</b> place five cartridges in the cylinder and let +the hammer down on the <b>empty chamber</b>.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) Whenever the pistol is being <b>loaded</b> or <b>unloaded</b>, the muzzle +<b>must be kept up</b>.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page247" name="page247"></a>(p. 247)</span> (<i>g</i>) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an +accidental discharge might do harm.</p> + +<p>(<i>h</i>) After loading do not cock the revolver or unlock the pistol +until ready to fire.</p> + +<p>(<i>i</i>) Keep the working parts properly lubricated.</p> + +<p><b>136. Position, dismounted</b>: Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly +balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most comfortable +when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart +to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to 10 inches); +weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right arm fully extended, +left arm hanging naturally.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Remarks.</span>—The right arm may be slightly bent, although the difficulty +of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping it as well as the +forearm in the same vertical plane makes this objectionable.</p> + +<p><b>137. The grip</b>: Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and +last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the +thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and forearm should +be as nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward +the target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors of +the hand or arm to be communicated to the weapon, but should be firm +enough to avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes place.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Remarks.</span>—The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted in +a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the stock is +grasped the greater will be the movement or "jump" of the muzzle +caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe strain upon +the wrist but in loss of accuracy.</p> + +<p>If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the stock, +the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon toward the +opposite side.</p> + +<p>The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, +generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock +overcomes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged to +practice this method of holding until it becomes natural.</p> + +<p>To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same +grip for each shot. Not only must the hand <span class="pagenum"><a id="page248" name="page248"></a>(p. 248)</span> grasp the stock at +the same point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be +uniform.</p> + +<p><b>138.</b> (<i>a</i>) <b>The trigger squeeze</b>: The trigger must be squeezed in the +same manner as in rifle firing. (See p. <a href="#page193">193</a>.) The pressure of the +forefinger on the trigger should be steadily increased and should be +straight back, not sideways. The pressure should continue to that +point beyond which the slightest movement will release the sear. Then, +when the aim is true, the additional pressure is applied and the +pistol fired.</p> + +<p>Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the trigger +squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the most +important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>Self-cocking action.</b>—The force required to squeeze the trigger +of the revolver when the self-cocking device is used is considerably +greater than with the single action. To accustom a soldier to the use +of the self-cocking mechanism, and also to strengthen and develop the +muscles of the hand, a few minutes' practice daily in holding the +unloaded revolver on a mark and snapping it, using the self-cocking +mechanism, is recommended. The use of the self-cocking device in +firing is not recommended except in emergency. By practice in cocking +the revolver the soldier can become sufficiently expert to fire very +rapidly, using single action, while his accuracy will be greater than +when using double action.</p> + +<p><b>139. Aiming.</b>—Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the rear and +front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the rifle +sights. The normal sight is habitually used (see <a href="#img062">Pl. VI</a>), and the line +of sight is directed upon a point just under the bull's-eye at "6 +o'clock." The front sight must be seen through the middle of the +rear-sight notch, the top being on a line with the top of the notch. +Care must be taken not to cant the pistol to either side.<a id="footnotetag13" name="footnotetag13"></a><a href="#footnote13" title="Go to footnote 13"><span class="smaller">[13]</span></a></p> + +<p>If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's +instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for the +rifle so far as they may be applicable. The sighting <span class="pagenum"><a id="page249" name="page249"></a>(p. 249)</span> bar with +open sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to demonstrate +errors likely to be committed.</p> + +<p>To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see <a href="#img062">Pl. VI</a>) take a piece +of wood about 10 inches long, 1-<sup>1</sup>/<sub>4</sub> inches wide, and <sup>9</sup>/<sub>16</sub> inch thick. +Shape one end so that it will fit snugly in the handle of the pistol +when the magazine has been removed. Screw or nail this stick to the +top of a post or other object at such an angle that the pistol when +placed on the stick will be approximately horizontal. A suitable +sighting rest for the revolver may be easily improvised.</p> + +<p><b>140.</b> (<i>a</i>) <b>How to cock the pistol.</b>—The pistol should be cocked by the +thumb of the right hand and with the least possible derangement of the +grip. The forefinger should be clear of the trigger when cocking the +pistol. Some men have difficulty at first in cocking the pistol with +the right thumb. This can be overcome by a little practice. Jerking +the pistol forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be +permitted.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) <b>How to cock the revolver</b>: The revolver should be cocked by +putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right angle to the +hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb muscles alone +bringing the hammer back to the position of full cock. Some men with +large hands are able to cock the revolver with the thumb while holding +it in the position of aim or raise pistol. Where the soldier's hand is +small this can not be done, and in this case it assists the operation +to give the revolver a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the +right). Particular care should be taken that the forefinger is clear +of the trigger or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver +forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted.</p> + +<p><b>141. Position, and aiming drills, dismounted</b>: For this instruction the +squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace between files. Black +pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be pasted opposite each man on +the barrack or other wall, from which the squad is 10 paces distant.</p> + +<p>The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives the +command: 1. <b>Raise</b>, 2. <b>Pistol</b> (par. 147, Cavalry Drill Regulations), +and cautions, "<b>Position and aiming drill, dismounted.</b>" The men take +the positions described in paragraph 136, except that the pistol is +held at "Raise pistol."</p> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page250" name="page250"></a>(p. 250)</span> +<a id="img062" name="img062"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img062.jpg" width="350" height="416" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Plate VI.</span></p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page251" name="page251"></a>(p. 251)</span> The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise." At the +command <b>READY</b>, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At the +command, 1. <b>Squad</b>, 2. <b>FIRE</b>, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly +horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 inches below the +bull's-eye. At the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger +guard and gradually "feel" the trigger. Inhale enough air to +comfortably fill the lungs and gradually raise the piece until the +line of sight is directed at the point of aim, i. e., just below the +bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, +gradually increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that +point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. +Then, when the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire +the piece is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the +sights. The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the +hammer falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the +squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim.</p> + +<p>It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the +line of sight is directed on the point of aim a slight additional +pressure is applied to the trigger until the piece is finally +discharged at one of the moments when the sights are correctly aligned +upon the mark.</p> + +<p>When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position, +the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor +prefaces the preparatory command by "At will" and give the command +<b>HALT</b> at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will return +to the position of "Raise pistol."</p> + +<p>At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but +gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly and to +lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing it to the +point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Remarks.</span>—In service few opportunities will be offered for slow aimed +fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be made of the +weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing and rapid +manipulation are of vital importance.</p> + +<p>In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon +the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing pressure on +the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights as nearly on +the mark as possible before the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page252" name="page252"></a>(p. 252)</span> hammer again falls. The great +difficulty in quick firing with the pistol lies in the fact that when +the front sight is brought upon the mark the rear sight is often found +to be outside the line joining the eye with the mark. This tendency to +hold the pistol obliquely can be overcome only by a uniform manner of +holding and pointing. This uniformity is to be attained only by +acquiring a grip which can be taken with certainty each time the +weapon is fired. It is this circumstance which makes the position and +aiming drills so important. The soldier should constantly practice +pointing the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on the +mark in the briefest interval of time and practically without the aid +of sights.</p> + +<p>The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the left +hand, the left side being turned toward the target.</p> + +<p><b>142. To draw and fire quickly—Snap shooting.</b>—With the squad formed +as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol is in the holster +and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor cautions "Quick-fire +exercise." And gives the command, 1. <b>SQUAD</b>, 2. <b>FIRE.</b> At this command +each soldier, keeping his eye on the target, quickly draws his pistol, +unlocks it, thrusts it toward the target, squeezes the trigger, and at +the instant the weapon is brought in line with the eye and the +objective increases the pressure, releasing the sear. To enable the +soldier to note errors in pointing, the weapon will be momentarily +held in position after the fall of the hammer. Efforts at deliberate +aiming in this exercise must be discouraged.</p> + +<p>Remarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to this type +of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in the details of this +exercise, it should be repeated at will; the instructor cautions, "At +will; quick-fire exercise." The exercise should be practiced until the +mind, the eye, and trigger finger act in unison.</p> + +<p>To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places the squad +so that the simulated bull's-eyes are in turn, to the <b>RIGHT</b>, to the +<b>LEFT</b>, to the <b>RIGHT FRONT</b>, to the <b>LEFT FRONT</b>, to the <b>RIGHT REAR</b>. With +the squad in one of these positions, the instructor cautions, +"Position and aiming drill, mounted." At this caution the right foot +is carried 20 inches to the right and the left hand to the position of +the bridle hand (par. 145, Cavalry Drill Regulations). The exercise +is carried <span class="pagenum"><a id="page253" name="page253"></a>(p. 253)</span> out as described for the exercise dismounted, +using the commands and means laid down in paragraph 141 for firing in +the several directions. The exercise is to be executed at will when +the squad has been sufficiently well instructed in detail.</p> + +<p>When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite the +left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45° to the left; when +firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about 45° to the +right.</p> + +<p>When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol in +the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left hand.</p> + +<p><b>Revolver or pistol range practice.</b>—The courses in range practice are +given in paragraphs 147 to 199, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page254" name="page254"></a>(p. 254)</span> CHAPTER IX.<br> + +EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.<br> + +<span class="smaller">UNITED STATES ARMY, 1914.<br> + +[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.]</span></h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Introduction.</h3> + +<p><b>1.</b> Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards, interior +guards, military police, and provost guards.</p> + +<p><b>2.</b> Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong to the +domain of tactics and are treated of in the Field Service Regulations +and in the drill regulations of the different arms of the service.</p> + +<p>The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay +attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main body.</p> + +<p>On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, and +flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts.</p> + +<p><b>3.</b> Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve order, +protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time of war +such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary are placed +close in or about a camp, and normally there is an exterior guard +further out consisting of outposts. In time of peace the interior +guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison.</p> + +<p><b>4.</b> Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes. (See +Field Service Regulations.) They are used in time of war to guard +prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to maintain order +and enforce police regulations in the rear of armies, along lines of +communication, and in the vicinity of large camps.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page255" name="page255"></a>(p. 255)</span> <b>5.</b> Provost guards are used in the absence of military police, +generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near large +posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers beyond the +interior guard.</p> + + +<h3>Section 2. Classification of interior guards.</h3> + +<p><b>6.</b> The various elements of an interior guard classified according to +their particular purposes and the manner in which they perform their +duties are as follows:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) The main guard.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner guards, +herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc.</p> + +<h3>Section 3. Details and rosters.</h3> + +<p><b>7.</b> At every military post, and in every regiment or separate command +in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly mounted.</p> + +<p>It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as the +commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded by the +senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under the +supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed by the +commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>8.</b> The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in discipline +and training because of the direct individual responsibility which is +imposed and required to be discharged in a definite and precise +manner. While the desirability of this type of duty is recognized, it +should only be put in practice to an extent sufficient to insure +thorough instruction in this method of performing guard duty, and +should not be the routine method of its performance. The usual guard +duty will be performed by watchmen, patrols, or such method as in the +opinion of the commanding officer may best secure results under the +particular local conditions.</p> + +<p><b>9.</b> At posts where there are less than three companies the main guard +and special guards may all be furnished by one company or by details +from each company. It is directed that whenever possible such guards +shall be furnished by a single company, for the reason that if guard +details are taken from each organization at a post of two companies, +troops, or batteries <span class="pagenum"><a id="page256" name="page256"></a>(p. 256)</span> it will result in both being so reduced +as to seriously interfere with drill and instruction, whereas if +details are taken from only one the other is available for instruction +at full strength.</p> + +<p>Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, if +practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far as +practicable, the same organization will supply all details for that +day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In this case the +officer of the day and the officers of the guard, if there are any, +will, if practicable, be from the company furnishing the guard.</p> + +<p><b>10.</b> At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than one regiment +are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in the field, if but +one guard be necessary for the whole command, the details will be made +from the headquarters of the command.</p> + +<p>If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant major, +and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by the commanding +officer.</p> + +<p><b>11.</b> When a single organization furnishes the guard, a roster of +organizations will be kept by the sergeant major under the supervision +of the adjutant. (See Appendix <a href="#appendix">B</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>12.</b> When the guard is detailed from several organizations, rosters +will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and officers of +the guard by name; by the sergeant major under the supervision of the +adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates of the +guard by number per organization; and by first sergeants, of +sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates by name. (See Appendix +<a href="#appendix">A</a>.)</p> + +<p><b>13.</b> When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable and park +guards, credit will be given each for the number of enlisted men so +furnished as though they had been detailed for main guard.</p> + +<p><b>14.</b> Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will be credited +the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue duty, carried on +special duty, or credited as the commanding officer may direct. (Pars. +6, 221, 247, and 300.)</p> + +<p><b>15.</b> Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters and see +that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. 355-364, A. +R., for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. O., for +instructions as to how rosters should be kept.)</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page257" name="page257"></a>(p. 257)</span> <b>16.</b> There will be an officer of the day with each guard, +unless in the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small +that his services are not needed. In this case an officer will be +detailed to supervise the command and instruction of the guard for +such period as the commanding officer may direct.</p> + +<p><b>17.</b> When more than one guard is required for a command, a field +officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his orders from +the brigade or division commander, as the latter may direct. When +necessary captains may be placed on the roster for field officer of +the day.</p> + +<p><b>18.</b> The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the +necessities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced +officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard for +purposes of instruction.</p> + +<p><b>19.</b> Officers serving on staff departments are, in the discretion of +the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty.</p> + +<p><b>20.</b> Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or published the day +preceding the beginning of the tour and officers notified personally +by a written order at the same time.</p> + +<p><b>21.</b> The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for +which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated as to +insure privates of the main guard an interval of not less than five +days between tours.</p> + +<p>When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty men +will be detailed for night guard duty, still performing their daily +duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the adjutant showing +the duty performed by them.</p> + +<p><b>22.</b> The members of main guards and stable and park guards will +habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour of +enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than stable or park +guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these men being held +accountable for a strict performance of their duty.</p> + +<p><b>23.</b> Should the officer of the day be notified that men are required to +fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be supplied from +the organization to which the guard belongs. If none are available in +that organization, the adjutant will be notified and will cause them +to be supplied from the organization that is next for guard. (Par. +63.)</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page258" name="page258"></a>(p. 258)</span> <b>24.</b> The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at +his office all data needed by company commanders in making details +from their companies.</p> + +<p>At first sergeant's call first sergeants will go to headquarters and +take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making the details +required from their companies; these details will be made from their +company rosters.</p> + +<p><b>25.</b> In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, when +practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company bulletin board +all details made from the company for duties to be performed.</p> + +<p><b>26.</b> Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, all details +will be made by roster.</p> + + +<h3>Section 4. Commander of the guard.</h3> + +<p><b>41.</b> The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction and +discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members are +correctly instructed in their orders and duties and that they +understand and properly perform them. He will visit each relief at +least once while it is on post, and at least one of these visits will +be made between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight.</p> + +<p><b>42.</b> He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer and the +officer of the day, and reports to the latter without delay all orders +to the guard not received from the officer of the day; he transmits to +his successor all material instructions and information relating to +his duties.</p> + +<p><b>43.</b> He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general +safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away from +the guardhouse. In case of emergency, while both guards are at the +guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards will be responsible +that the proper action is taken.</p> + +<p><b>44.</b> Officers of the guard will remain constantly with their guards, +except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere in the +performance of their duties. The commanding officer will allow a +reasonable time for meals.</p> + +<p><b>45.</b> A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will +inform the next in command of his destination and probable time of +return.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page259" name="page259"></a>(p. 259)</span> <b>46.</b> Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may +divide the night with the next in command, but retains his +responsibility; the one on watch must be constantly on the alert.</p> + +<p><b>47.</b> When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will be +informed immediately. (Par. 234.) If the case be serious, the proper +call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard will cause the +commanding officer and the officer of the day to be at once notified.</p> + +<p><b>48.</b> If a sentinel calls: "The guard," the commander of the guard will +at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger be great, +in which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, the patrol will +be as strong as possible.</p> + +<p><b>49.</b> When practicable, there should always be an officer or +noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the +guardhouse in addition to the sentinels there on post.</p> + +<p><b>50.</b> Between reveille and retreat, when the guard has been turned out +for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars. 222 and 224), the +commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive the report of the +sergeant, returning the salute of the latter with the right hand. He +will then draw his saber and place himself two paces in front of the +center of the guard. When the person for whom the guard has been +turned out approaches he faces his guard and commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. +<b>ARMS</b>; faces to the front and salutes. When his salute is acknowledged +he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; +and faces to the front.</p> + +<p>If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting and +before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the guard +reports: "<b>Sir, all present or accounted for</b>"; or "<b>Sir, (so-and-so) is +absent</b>"; or, if the roll call has been omitted: "<b>Sir, the guard is +formed</b>," except that at guard mounting the commanders of the guards +present their guards and salute without making any report.</p> + +<p>Between retreat and reveille the commander of the guard salutes and +reports, but does not bring the guard to a present.</p> + +<p><b>51.</b> To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not entitled to +inspect it no report will be made; nor will a report be made to any +officer unless he halts in front of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>52.</b> When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned out +as a compliment or for inspection the noncommissioned <span class="pagenum"><a id="page260" name="page260"></a>(p. 260)</span> +officer, standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide, +commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS.</b> He then executes the rifle salute. If a +report be also required, he will, after saluting and before bringing +his guard to an order, report as prescribed for the officer of the +guard. (Par. 50.)</p> + +<p><b>53.</b> When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded by an +officer; the commander of the guard salutes his regimental, battalion, +and company commander by bringing the guard to attention and saluting +in person.</p> + +<p>For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment +from a guard (par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in person, +but does not bring the guard to attention.</p> + +<p>When commanded by a noncommissioned officer, the guard is brought to +attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer salutes.</p> + +<p>The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders of all +other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention during the +exchange.</p> + +<p>"Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned out for +inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies of guard mounting +and relieving the old guard.</p> + +<p><b>54.</b> In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles of +paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes right" is executed only in the ceremonies of +guard mounting and relieving the old guard.</p> + +<p><b>55.</b> If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental, +battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a guard, neither +the compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to +attention while such person is opposite the post of the commander.</p> + +<p>After any person has received or declined the compliment, or received +the salute from the commander of the guard, official recognition of +his presence thereafter while he remains in the vicinity will be taken +by bringing the guard to attention.</p> + +<p><b>56.</b> The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille and +retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to assure +himself that the men are in proper condition to perform their duties +and that their arms and equipments are in proper condition. For +inspection by other officers, he prepares <span class="pagenum"><a id="page261" name="page261"></a>(p. 261)</span> the guard in each +case as directed by the inspecting officer.</p> + +<p><b>57.</b> The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless directed by +the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>58.</b> At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute +inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their arm.</p> + +<p><b>59.</b> The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are +habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other +causes makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer +intervals, as directed by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>60.</b> He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels +relative to the instructions they may have received from the old +guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection are made as +directed by the officer of the day.</p> + +<p><b>61.</b> He will see that the special orders for each post and member of +the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse +and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place to +which the member of the guard has constant access.</p> + +<p><b>62.</b> He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours +appointed by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>63.</b> Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, or +desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer of the +day. (Par. 23.)</p> + +<p><b>64.</b> He will, when the countersign is used (pars. 210 to 216), +communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and see +that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour of +challenging; the countersign will not be given to sentinels posted at +the guardhouse.</p> + +<p><b>65.</b> He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille and +lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat gun, +made in time for the proper performance of these duties. (See pars. +338, 344, 345, and 346.) He will see that the flags are kept in the +best condition possible, and that they are never handled except in the +proper performance of duty.</p> + +<p><b>66.</b> He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse to +remove their headdress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave the +guardhouse for any purpose whatever, he will require that they be +properly equipped and armed according to <span class="pagenum"><a id="page262" name="page262"></a>(p. 262)</span> the character of the +service in which engaged, or as directed by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>67.</b> He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of duty +and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the officer of +the day. He will transmit with his report all passes turned in at the +post of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>68.</b> Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent for +confinement he will cause him to be searched, and will, without +unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day.</p> + +<p><b>69.</b> Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out of camp at +night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard, who will have +him passed beyond the sentinels.</p> + +<p><b>70.</b> The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all +suspicious characters or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post +without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to +whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary.</p> + +<p><b>71.</b> He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the irons of such +prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at such +other times as he may deem necessary.</p> + +<p><b>72.</b> He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to verify +together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the number of +prisoners who should then properly be at the guardhouse.</p> + +<p><b>73.</b> He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge are +executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing +authority.</p> + +<p><b>74.</b> When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (par. 300), he +will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working parties of +prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only.</p> + +<p><b>75.</b> The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to the +guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food are in +accordance with regulations.</p> + +<p><b>76.</b> At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day all +cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day, and +also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges +has been received. (See par. 241.)</p> + +<p><b>77.</b> The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of the +prisoners under the charge of his guard; he <span class="pagenum"><a id="page263" name="page263"></a>(p. 263)</span> becomes +responsible for them after their number has been verified and they +have been turned over to the custody of his guard by the old guard or +by the prisoner guard or overseers.</p> + +<p><b>78.</b> The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new guard +without parading them, unless the commanding officer or the officer of +the day shall direct otherwise.</p> + +<p><b>79.</b> To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have been +paraded and after they have been verified by the officers of the day, +the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form his guard +with an interval, and commands: 1. <b>Prisoners</b>, 2. <b>Right</b>, 3. <b>FACE</b>, 4. +<b>Forward</b>, 5. <b>MARCH</b>. The prisoners having arrived opposite the interval +in the new guard, he commands: 1. <b>Prisoners</b>, 2. <b>HALT</b>, 3. <b>Left</b>, 4. +<b>FACE</b>, 5. <b>Right</b> (or <b>left</b>), 6. <b>DRESS</b>, 7. <b>FRONT</b>.</p> + +<p>The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard.</p> + + +<h3>Section 5. Sergeant of the guard.</h3> + +<p><b>80.</b> The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as +sergeant of the guard and if there be no officer of the guard will +perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>81.</b> The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the other +noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the guard, +and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their orders and duties.</p> + +<p><b>82.</b> He is directly responsible for the property under charge of the +guard and will see that it is properly cared for. He will make lists +of articles taken out by working parties and see that all such +articles are duly returned. If they are not, he will immediately +report the fact to the commander of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>83.</b> Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate lists +of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and privates +of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each. One list +will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the guard; the +other will be retained by the sergeant.</p> + +<p><b>84.</b> He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper time, +and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and +efficient in the discharge of their duties.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page264" name="page264"></a>(p. 264)</span> <b>85.</b> During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the +sergeant of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned +officers will perform his duties.</p> + +<p><b>86.</b> Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away from +the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a +noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's place until his return.</p> + +<p><b>87.</b> The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for the +proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including the ground +about them and the prison cells.</p> + +<p><b>88.</b> At <b>first sergeant's call</b> he will proceed to the adjutant's office +and obtain the guard report book.</p> + +<p><b>89.</b> When the national or regimental colors are taken from the stacks +of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant of the +guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort the +colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color guard in +the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard +belongs.</p> + +<p><b>90.</b> He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or +unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the +approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested +by the guard.</p> + +<p><b>91.</b> When the guard is turned out its formation will be as follows: The +senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is on the +right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, he is in the +line of file closers, in rear of the right four of the guard; the next +in rank is right guide; the next left guide; the others in the line of +file closers, usually each in rear of his relief; the field music, +with its left three paces to the right of the right guide. The reliefs +form in the same order as when the guard was first divided, except +that if the guard consists of dismounted Cavalry and Infantry, the +Cavalry forms on the left.</p> + +<p><b>92.</b> The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in +command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as +prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop +or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and, +except when the whole guard is formed prior to marching off, fours are +not counted.</p> + +<p><b>93.</b> The sergeant reports as follows: "<b>Sir, all present or accounted +for</b>," or "<b>Sir, (so-and-so) is absent</b>"; or if the roll <span class="pagenum"><a id="page265" name="page265"></a>(p. 265)</span> call +has been omitted, "<b>Sir, the guard is formed.</b>" Only men absent without +proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place without +command.</p> + +<p><b>94.</b> At night the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead of +names; thus, the first relief being on post: <b>Second relief; No. 1; No. +2; etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc.</b></p> + +<p><b>95.</b> Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard when +it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed body, or +in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be called +before dismissing the guard. If the guard be turned out for an officer +entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs otherwise, +always be called before a report is made.</p> + +<p><b>96.</b> The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners, +except during such time as they may be under the charge of the +prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander of +the guard for their security.</p> + +<p><b>97.</b> He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will not +suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the +guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 99.) Should he leave +the guardhouse for any purpose he will turn the keys over to the +noncommissioned officer who takes his place. (Par. 85.)</p> + +<p><b>98.</b> He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners with +their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their +possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are +conveyed to the prisoners.</p> + +<p><b>99.</b> Prisoners when paraded with the guard are placed in line, in its +center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will turn +over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guardhouse. Having +formed the guard he will divide it into two nearly equal parts. +Indicating the point of division with his hand, he commands: 1. <b>Right +(or left)</b>, 2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <b>Forward</b>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>, 5. <b>Guard</b>, 6. <b>HALT</b>, 7. <b>Left +(or right)</b>, 8. <b>FACE</b>.</p> + +<p>If the first command be <b>right face</b>, the right half of the guard only +will execute the movements; if <b>left face</b>, the left half only will +execute them. The command <b>halt</b> is given when sufficient interval is +obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells +are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The +prisoners will file <span class="pagenum"><a id="page266" name="page266"></a>(p. 266)</span> out under the supervision of the +sergeant, the noncommissioned officer, and sentinel on duty at the +guardhouse, and such other sentinels as may be necessary; they will +form in line in the interval between the two parts of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>100.</b> To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the sergeant +commands: 1. <b>Prisoners</b>, 2. <b>Right (or left)</b>, 3. <b>FACE</b>, 4. <b>Column right +(or left)</b>, 5. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to their +proper rooms or cells.</p> + +<p><b>101.</b> To close the guard, the sergeant commands: 1. <b>Left (or right)</b>, 2. +<b>FACE</b>, 3. <b>Forward</b>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>, 5. <b>Guard</b>, 6. <b>HALT</b>, 7. <b>Right</b> (or <b>left</b>), 8. +<b>FACE.</b></p> + +<p>The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes the +movement.</p> + +<p><b>102.</b> If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the +point of division as above, and form the necessary interval by the +commands: 1. <b>Right</b> (or <b>left</b>) <b>step</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, and +close the intervals by the commands: 1. <b>Left</b> (or <b>right</b>) <b>step</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p><b>103.</b> If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of the +commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants as well as +corporals required to relieve and post them.</p> + + +<h3>Section 6. Corporal of the Guard.</h3> + +<p><b>104.</b> A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none but +noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the officers +of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>105.</b> It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and relieve +sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief in their orders +and duties.</p> + +<p><b>106.</b> Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the +corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts +by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed +to another during the same tour of guard duty unless by direction of +the commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually experienced +soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard and at remote and +responsible posts.</p> + +<p><b>107.</b> Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his +relief, including himself. This list will contain the number <span class="pagenum"><a id="page267" name="page267"></a>(p. 267)</span> +of the relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every member +thereof and the post to which each is assigned. The list will be made +in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as +soon as completed, the other to be retained by the corporal.</p> + +<p><b>108.</b> When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal of the +first relief forms his relief, and then commands: <b>CALL OFF</b>.</p> + +<p>Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately <b>rear</b> and <b>front +rank</b>, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; if in single rank, +they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: 1. +<b>Right</b>, 2. <b>FACE</b>, 3. <b>Forward</b>, 4. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The corporal marches on the left and near the rear file in order to +observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the right +of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the old +sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new +guard.</p> + +<p><b>109.</b> When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (see par. +168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the number of +the post: <b>No. (——)</b>.</p> + +<p>Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel approaches +the old, halting about one pace from him. (See par. 172.)</p> + +<p><b>110.</b> The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other, a +little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his right, +the new corporal on his left, both at a right shoulder, and observe +that the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions.</p> + +<p>The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken:</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" style="font-size: 90%; width: 191px; margin-left: 20%;" summary="Position."> +<colgroup> + <col width="10px"> + <col width="10px"> + <col width="10px"> + <col width="10px"> + <col width="10px"> + <col width="80px"> + <col width="15px"> + <col width="8px"> + <col width="15px"> + <col width="8px"> + <col width="15px"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="2" class="center">R</td> +<td colspan="4"> </td> +<td class="center" style="border-bottom: solid; border-color: black;">A</td> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;" class="right">C</td> +<td colspan="3"> </td> +<td style="border-left: solid; border-color: black;">D</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="8"> </td> +<td style="border-top: solid; border-color: black;">B</td> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td style="border-right: solid; border-color: black;"> </td> +<td colspan="6"> </td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new sentinel; +D, the old.</p> + +<p><b>111.</b> The instructions relative to the post having been communicated, +the new corporal commands, <b>Post</b>; both sentinels <span class="pagenum"><a id="page268" name="page268"></a>(p. 268)</span> then resume +the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal, and step back so as +to allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then +commands: "1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>"; the old sentinel takes his place in +rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position an +those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a right shoulder +until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he walks his +post. The corporals take their places as the relief passes them.</p> + +<p><b>112.</b> Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with the +same principles.</p> + +<p><b>113.</b> On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard +falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms +his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the +commander of his guard: "<b>Sir, the relief is present</b>"; or "<b>Sir, +(so-and-so) is absent</b>," and takes his place in the guard.</p> + +<p><b>114.</b> To post a relief other than that which is posted when the old +guard is relieved, its corporal commands:</p> + +<p>1. <b>(Such) relief</b>, 2. <b>FALL IN</b>; and if arms are stacked, they are taken +at the proper commands.</p> + +<p>The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order, the +men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective +posts, viz, <b>two</b>, <b>four</b>, <b>six</b>, and so on, in the <b>front rank</b>, and <b>one</b>, +<b>three</b>, <b>five</b>, and so on, in the <b>rear rank</b>. The corporal, standing about +two paces in front of the center of his relief, then commands: CALL +OFF.</p> + +<p>The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: 1. +<b>Inspection</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, 3. <b>Order</b>, 4. <b>ARMS</b>; faces the commander of the +guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "<b>Sir, the relief is +present</b>"; or "<b>Sir, (so-and-so) is absent</b>"; he then takes his place on +the right at order arms.</p> + +<p><b>115.</b> When the commander of the guard directs the corporal, <b>Post your +relief</b>, the corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed (Pars. +108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not go with the +new relief, except when necessary to show the way.</p> + +<p><b>116.</b> To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the front at +the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls out; +the corporal of the old relief then steps in front of the relief and +dismisses it by the proper commands.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page269" name="page269"></a>(p. 269)</span> <b>117.</b> Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was +posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see that no +cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The same rule +applies to sentinels over prisoners.</p> + +<p><b>118.</b> Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all the +special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that each +understands and correctly transmits such orders <b>in detail</b> to his +successor.</p> + +<p><b>119.</b> There should be at least one noncommissioned officer constantly +on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief is +on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the entrance of +the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard when it is formed. +He will have his rifle constantly with him.</p> + +<p><b>120.</b> Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his post +near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify the sergeant of +the guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another +noncommissioned officer to do so.</p> + +<p><b>121.</b> He will see that no person enters the guardhouse or guard tent, +or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted without proper +authority.</p> + +<p><b>122.</b> Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, the +corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to such +sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the +guardhouse.</p> + +<p><b>123.</b> He will at once report to the commander of the guard any +violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported +to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way.</p> + +<p><b>124.</b> Should a sentinel call "<b>The Guard</b>," the corporal will promptly +notify the commander of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>125.</b> Should a sentinel call "<b>Relief</b>," the corporal will at once +proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for +duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only, +the corporal will again post him as soon as the necessity for his +relief ceases.</p> + +<p><b>126.</b> When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of the +relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the countersign +to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at the +guardhouse.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page270" name="page270"></a>(p. 270)</span> <b>127.</b> He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post +in time for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and +post it at the proper hour.</p> + +<p><b>128.</b> Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his own +relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly.</p> + +<p><b>129.</b> Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the +reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be +found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the +least confusion.</p> + +<p><b>130.</b> When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the +corporal commands: 1. <b>Relief</b>, 2. <b>HALT</b>; to the sentinel's challenge he +answers "<b>Relief</b>," and at the order of the sentinel he advances alone +to give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel says, +"<b>Advance relief</b>," the corporal commands: 1. <b>Forward</b>, 2. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed.</p> + +<p><b>131.</b> Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will +challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe, +first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will +advance them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like +parties (Pars. 191 to 197), but if the route of a patrol is on a +continuous chain of sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming +near him unless he has reason to believe that they have eluded the +vigilance of sentinels.</p> + +<p><b>132.</b> Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an officer +entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: "<b>Turn out the +guard</b>," announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not +otherwise ordered, he will salute and return to his post.</p> + +<p><b>133.</b> As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the guard +at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like +parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats +the answer to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter (Par. 200); the +corporal, advancing at port arms, says: "<b>Advance (so-and-so) with the +countersign</b>," or "<b>to be recognized</b>," if there be no countersign used; +the countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly +recognized, the corporal says: "<b>Advance (so-and-so)</b>," repeating the +answer to the challenge of the sentinel.</p> + +<p><b>134.</b> When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from +different directions at the same time, the senior <span class="pagenum"><a id="page271" name="page271"></a>(p. 271)</span> will be +advanced first, and will not be made to wait for his junior.</p> + +<p><b>135.</b> Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the rifle +salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or night.</p> + +<p><b>136.</b> The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by +sentinels, and, if he have reason to believe the parties have no +authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to the +commander of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>137.</b> The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking +characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a +disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in +the act of committing crime against the Government on a military +reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard or +by sentinels will at once be conducted to the commander of the guard +by the corporal.</p> + + +<h3>Section 7. Musicians of the guard.</h3> + +<p><b>138.</b> The musicians of the guard will sound calls as prescribed by the +commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>139.</b> Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental colors +or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, when the +guard present arms, sound, "<b>To the color</b>" or "<b>To the standard</b>"; or, if +for any person entitled thereto, the march, flourishes, or ruffles, +prescribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A. R.</p> + + +<h3>Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels.</h3> + +<p><b>140.</b> When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer who +inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the members of +the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer and such number of +other orderlies and color sentinels as may be required.</p> + +<p><b>141.</b> For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are most +correct in the performance of duty and in military bearing, neatest in +person and clothing, and whose arms and accouterments are in the best +condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must conform to regulations. +If there is any doubt as to the relative qualifications of two or +more soldiers, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page272" name="page272"></a>(p. 272)</span> the inspecting officer will cause them to fall +out at the guardhouse and to form in line in single rank. He will +then, by testing them in drill regulations, select the most +proficient. The commander of the guard will be notified of the +selection.</p> + +<p><b>142.</b> When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out and +report an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment to the +sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in his +company quarters, will proceed at once to the officer to whom he is +assigned, reporting: "<b>Sir, Private ——, Company ——, reports as +orderly.</b>"</p> + +<p><b>143.</b> If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his rifle +in the arm rack of his troop quarters and report with his belt on, but +without side arms unless specially otherwise ordered.</p> + +<p><b>144.</b> Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the orders +of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom they are ordered +to report.</p> + +<p><b>145.</b> When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be careful +to deliver it exactly as it was given to him.</p> + +<p><b>146.</b> His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the orderly selected +from the guard relieving his own.</p> + +<p><b>147.</b> Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company, and +regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>148.</b> If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are placed +on the color line to guard the colors and stacks.</p> + +<p><b>149.</b> Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks are formed. +The commander of the guard will divide the time equally among them.</p> + +<p><b>150.</b> When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted to +return to their respective companies. They are required to report in +person to the commander of the guard at reveille and retreat. They +will fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard mounting.</p> + +<p><b>151.</b> Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor are +their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the guard, they +call: "<b>Corporal of the guard. Color line.</b>"</p> + +<p><b>152.</b> Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will render +the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, the salute +will be made on crossing the color line or on passing the colors.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page273" name="page273"></a>(p. 273)</span> <b>153.</b> A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them +to be moved except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless +otherwise ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to +touch them but the color bearer.</p> + +<p>He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks or to +touch them except by order of an officer or noncommissioned officer of +the guard.</p> + +<p>If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line fails to +salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the +caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of the guard and +report the facts.</p> + + +<h3>Section 9. Privates of the Guard.</h3> + +<p><b>154.</b> Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander of the guard, +and to posts usually by the corporal of their relief. They will not +change from one relief or post to another during the same tour of +guard duty unless by proper authority.</p> + + +<h3>Section 10. Orders for Sentinels.</h3> + +<p><b>155.</b> Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and +special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special orders +relate to particular posts and duties.</p> + +<p><b>156.</b> Sentinels will be required to memorize the following:</p> + +<p>My general orders are:</p> + +<p><b>1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in view.</b></p> + +<p><b>2. To walk my post in a military manner keeping always on the alert +and observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing.</b></p> + +<p><b>3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.</b></p> + +<p><b>4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse +than my own.</b></p> + +<p><b>5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.</b></p> + +<p><b>6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all +orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers +and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.</b></p> + +<p><b>7. To talk to no one except in line of duty.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page274" name="page274"></a>(p. 274)</span> <b>8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.</b></p> + +<p><b>9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post.</b></p> + +<p><b>10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal of +the guard.</b></p> + +<p><b>11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased.</b></p> + +<p><b>12. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for +challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my port and to allow +no one to pass without proper authority.</b></p> + + +<p class="title">REGULATIONS RELATING TO THE GENERAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 1: <b>To take charge of this post and all Government property in +view.</b></p> + +<p><b>157.</b> All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to +observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard when such +are in the performance of their duties.</p> + +<p><b>158.</b> A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard every +unusual or suspicious occurrence noted.</p> + +<p><b>159.</b> He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post or camp +at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or near his post, +and all, except authorized persons, who attempt to enter the camp at +night, and will turn over to the corporal of the guard all persons +arrested.</p> + +<p><b>160.</b> The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably +constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. The +limits of his post should be so defined as to include every place to +which he is required to go in the performance of his duties.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 2: <b>To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the +alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or +hearing.</b></p> + +<p><b>161.</b> A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position of his +rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute <b>to the rear, +march</b>, precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, but faces +about while walking in the manner most convenient to him and at any +part of his post as may be best suited to the proper performance of +his duties. He carries his <span class="pagenum"><a id="page275" name="page275"></a>(p. 275)</span> rifle on either shoulder, and in +wet or severe weather, when not in a sentry box, may carry it at a +secure.</p> + +<p><b>162.</b> Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes will +be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially +authorized by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p><b>163.</b> In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand at ease +on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge their duties +in this position; but they will take advantage of this privilege only +on the express authority of the officer of the day or the commander of +the guard.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">164.</span> A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead the horse, +but will not relax his vigilance.</p> + + +<p class="center">No. 3: <b>To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.</b></p> + +<p><b>165.</b> A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders when he +is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent, he will call the +corporal of the guard, and also, if necessary, will arrest the +offender.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 4: <b>To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse +than my own.</b></p> + +<p><b>166.</b> To call the corporal of the guard for any purpose other than +relief, fire, or disorder (pars. 167 and 178), a sentinel will call, +"<b>Corporal of the guard, No. (—)</b>," adding the number of his post. In +no case will any sentinel call, "<b>Never mind the corporal</b>"; nor will +the corporal heed such call if given.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 5: <b>To quit my post only when properly relieved.</b></p> + +<p><b>167.</b> If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other +cause, a sentinel will call, "<b>Corporal of the guard, No. (——), +Relief</b>," giving the number of his post.</p> + +<p><b>168.</b> Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and with +arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief, when it is 30 +paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the new sentinel, and +in a low tone will transmit to him all the special orders relating to +the post and any other information which will assist him to better +perform his duties.</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page276" name="page276"></a>(p. 276)</span> No. 6: <b>To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who +relieves me, all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the +day, and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.</b></p> + +<p><b>169.</b> During his tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders of the +commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and +noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is +competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by members +of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>170.</b> A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from any +person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; under no +circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless necessity +therefor exists, no person will require a sentinel to quit his piece, +even to allow it to be inspected.</p> + +<p><b>171.</b> A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (Pars. 209 to 217) to +anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from whom +he properly receives orders, on such person's verbal order given +personally. Privates of the guard will not use the countersign except +in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 7: <b>To talk to no one except in line of duty.</b></p> + +<p><b>172.</b> When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding +communication with any person a dismounted sentinel armed with a rifle +or saber will take the position of port arms or saber. At night a +dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol takes the position of raised +pistol in challenging or holding communication. A mounted sentinel +does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the daytime when challenging or +holding conversation; but if drawn he holds it at advance rifle, raise +pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed with a rifle, pistol, +or saber. At night in challenging and holding conversation his weapon +is drawn and held as just prescribed, depending on whether he is armed +with a rifle, pistol, or saber.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 8: <b>In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.</b></p> + +<p><b>173.</b> In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "<b>Fire, No. (——)</b>," +adding the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page277" name="page277"></a>(p. 277)</span> the fire himself. In case of disorder he will call, "<b>The +Guard, No. (——)</b>," adding the number of his post. If the danger be +great, he will in either case discharge his piece before calling.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 11: <b>To salute all officers and all colors and standards not cased.</b></p> + +<p><b>174.</b> When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, the +proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the guard will +salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies at all hours of +the day or night, except in the case of mounted sentinels armed with a +rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after +challenging. (See par. 181.)</p> + +<p><b>175.</b> Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed +with a rifle or saber salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise armed, +he salutes with the right hand.</p> + +<p>A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn, +salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases with +the right hand.</p> + +<p><b>176.</b> To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right shoulder +or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person to be saluted +when the latter arrives within 30 paces.</p> + +<p>The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily +recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and therefore at this +distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to be saluted.</p> + +<p><b>177.</b> The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person to be saluted +does not arrive within that distance, then when he is nearest.</p> + +<p><b>178.</b> A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at +attention in the doorway on the approach of a person or party entitled +to salute, and salutes by presenting arms according to the foregoing +rules.</p> + +<p>If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before.</p> + +<p><b>179.</b> A mounted sentinel on a regular post, halts, faces, and salutes +in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol duty, he +salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to.</p> + +<p><b>180.</b> Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, all +persons and parties entitled to compliments from the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page278" name="page278"></a>(p. 278)</span> guards +(Pars. 224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine +Corps; military and naval officers of foreign powers; officers of +volunteers and militia officers when in uniform.</p> + +<p><b>181.</b> A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes on +his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, the +sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him.</p> + +<p>During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute is +given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and advanced. A +mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a dismounted +sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after challenging.</p> + +<p>He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes.</p> + +<p><b>182.</b> In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the +sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing toward +the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself +relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself so that the +party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking his post when the +party has reached six paces beyond him.</p> + +<p><b>183.</b> An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether in +uniform or not.</p> + +<p><b>184.</b> A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt +the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer will +salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute.</p> + +<p><b>185.</b> When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on post and +in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the first note of the +Star-Spangled Banner or <b>to the color</b> will come to a present arms. At +the sounding of the last note he will resume walking his post.</p> + +<p class="center">No. 12: <b>To be especially watchful at night and during the time for +challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow +no one to pass without proper authority.</b></p> + +<p><b>186.</b> During challenging hours, if a sentinel sees any person or party +on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his post toward +such person or party and when within about 30 yards will challenge +sharply, "<b>Halt, who is there?</b>" He will <span class="pagenum"><a id="page279" name="page279"></a>(p. 279)</span> place himself in the +best possible position to receive or, if necessary, to arrest the +person or party.</p> + +<p><b>187.</b> In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will call, +"<b>Halt, Dismount. Who is there?</b>"</p> + +<p><b>188.</b> The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach him +for the purpose of giving the countersign (Pars. 200 to 217), or, if +no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this is done +the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass.</p> + +<p><b>189.</b> In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a +reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves +to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause +them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if he +have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or when the +party has not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one.</p> + +<p><b>190.</b> A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close as to +prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing the person +or receiving the countersign.</p> + +<p><b>191.</b> When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel, on +receiving an answer that indicates that some one in the party has the +countersign, will say, "<b>Advance one with the countersign</b>," and if the +countersign is given correctly, will then say, "<b>Advance (so-and-so)</b>," +repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus if the answer be "<b>Relief +(friend with the countersign, patrol, etc.)</b>," the sentinel will say, +"<b>Advance one with the countersign</b>"; then "<b>Advance, relief (friends, +patrol, etc.).</b>"</p> + +<p><b>192.</b> If a person having the countersign approach alone, he is advanced +to give the countersign. Thus if the answer be "<b>Friend with the +countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)</b>," the sentinel will say, +"<b>Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.) with the +countersign</b>"; then "<b>Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.).</b>"</p> + +<p><b>193.</b> If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from different +directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged in turn +and required to halt and to remain halted until advanced.</p> + +<p>The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing rules.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page280" name="page280"></a>(p. 280)</span> <b>194.</b> If a party is already advanced and in communication with +a sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may +approach; if the party challenged be senior to the one already on his +post, the sentinel will advance the new party at once. The senior may +allow him to advance any or all of the other parties; otherwise the +sentinel will not advance any of them until the senior leaves him. He +will then advance the senior only of the remaining parties, and so on.</p> + +<p><b>195.</b> The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in advancing +different persons or parties approaching his post: Commanding +officers, officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, patrols, +reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard in order of rank, +friends.</p> + +<p><b>196.</b> A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor permit +two parties to advance upon him at the same time.</p> + +<p><b>197.</b> If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the +same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows: +Instead of saying "<b>Advance (so-and-so) with the countersign</b>," the +sentinel will say "<b>Advance (so-and-so) to be recognized.</b>" Upon +recognition he will say, "<b>Advance (so-and-so.)</b>"</p> + +<p><b>198.</b> Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse or mislead +him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as "<b>Friends with the +countersign</b>," is not to be understood as misleading, but as the usual +answer made by officers, patrols, etc., when the purpose of their +visit makes it desirable that their official capacity should not be +announced.</p> + + +<p class="title">SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD.</p> + +<p><b>199.</b> Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize the +following:</p> + +<p><b>Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons +designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards not +cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post, +except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard.</b></p> + +<p><b>At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no one but +call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the +challenge.</b></p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page281" name="page281"></a>(p. 281)</span> <b>200.</b> After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel +calls, "<b>Corporal of the guard (so-and-so)</b>," repeating the answer to +the challenge.</p> + +<p>He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post.</p> + +<p><b>201.</b> He remains in the position assumed in challenging until the +corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party challenged, +when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person or party be +entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the salute has been +acknowledged, resumes walking his post.</p> + +<p><b>202.</b> The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by +direction of the commanding officer of the presence in camp or +garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. 224.)</p> + +<p><b>203.</b> The following examples illustrate the manner in which the +sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the +approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment (Pars. 224, +227, and 228), "<b>Turn out the guard, commanding officer</b>"; "<b>Turn out the +guard, governor of a Territory</b>"; "<b>Turn out the guard, national +colors</b>"; "<b>Turn out the guard, armed party</b>"; etc.</p> + +<p>At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel will +call, "<b>Turn out the guard, armed party.</b>"</p> + +<p><b>204.</b> Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard +formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call "<b>Never mind +the guard.</b>"</p> + +<p><b>205.</b> After having called "<b>Turn out the guard</b>," the sentinel will never +call "<b>Never mind the guard</b>," on the approach of an armed party.</p> + +<p><b>206.</b> Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call, +"<b>Turn out the guard</b>," as required in his special orders, except that +the guard will not be turned out for any person while his senior is at +or coming to the post of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>207.</b> The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander of +the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the vicinity of +all suspicious or disorderly persons.</p> + +<p><b>208.</b> In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel at +the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report the +facts to him.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page282" name="page282"></a>(p. 282)</span> Section 11. Countersigns and Paroles.</h3> + +<p><b>209.</b> <i>Seventy-seventh article of war.</i>—Any person subject to military +law who makes known the parole or countersign to any person not +entitled to receive it according to the rules and discipline of war, +or gives a parole or countersign different from that which he +received, shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. (See +Par. 171.)</p> + +<p><b>210.</b> The <b>countersign</b> is a word given daily from the principal +headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying +persons who may be authorized to pass at night.</p> + +<p>It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and repass +sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncommissioned +officers, and sentinels of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>211.</b> The <b>parole</b> is a word used as a check on the countersign in order +to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It is imparted only +to those who are entitled to inspect guards and to commanders of +guards.</p> + +<p>The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form of an +order to those entitled to them.</p> + +<p><b>212.</b> When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will +advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. (See +Par. 133.)</p> + +<p><b>213.</b> As the communications containing the parole and countersign must +at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted to +many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers and +sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for large +commands, be prepared several days in advance, there is always danger +of their being lost or becoming known to persons who would make +improper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for +granted that any person who gives the right countersign is what he +represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is greater +security in omitting the use of the countersign and parole, or in +using them with great caution. The chief reliance should be upon +personal recognition or identification of all persons claiming +authority to pass.</p> + +<p>Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or +concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable <span class="pagenum"><a id="page283" name="page283"></a>(p. 283)</span> +doubt, should not be allowed to pass without the authority of the +corporal of the guard after proper investigation; the corporal will +take to his next superior any person about whom he is not competent to +decide.</p> + +<p><b>214.</b> The <b>countersign</b> is usually the name of a battle; the parole, that +of a general or other distinguished person.</p> + +<p><b>215.</b> When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words for +some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that are to +use the same parole or countersign as the main body.</p> + +<p><b>216.</b> If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard deserts +with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another for it and +report the case at once to headquarters.</p> + +<p><b>217.</b> In addition to the countersign, use may be made of preconcerted +signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand or striking the +hands together a certain number of times as agreed upon. Such signals +may be used only by guards that occupy exposed points.</p> + +<p>They are used before the countersign is given and must not be +communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. Their use +is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel.</p> + +<p>In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief in a +prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate with the +guard or with each other.</p> + + +<h3>Section 12. Guard Patrols.</h3> + +<p><b>218.</b> A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the +performance of some special service connected with guard duty.</p> + +<p><b>219.</b> If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels, +the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished +with the countersign and the outposts and sentinels warned.</p> + +<p><b>220.</b> If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its +commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances +alone and gives the countersign.</p> + + +<h3>Section 13. Watchmen.</h3> + +<p><b>221.</b> Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers over +prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform their +duties as the commanding officer may direct.</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page284" name="page284"></a>(p. 284)</span> Section 14. Compliments from Guards.</h3> + +<p><b>222.</b> The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning out and +presenting arms. (See Par. 50.) No compliments will be paid between +retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 and 362, nor +will any person other than those named in paragraph 224 receive the +compliment.</p> + +<p><b>223.</b> Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille as +a matter of compliment, it may be turned out for inspection at any +time by a person entitled to inspect it.</p> + +<p><b>224.</b> Between reveille and retreat, the following persons are entitled +to the compliment: The President; sovereign or chief magistrate of a +foreign country and members of a royal family; Vice President; +President and President pro tempore of the Senate; American and +foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief Justice; Speaker of +the House of Representatives; committees of Congress officially +visiting a military post; governors within their respective States and +Territories; governors general; Assistant Secretary of War officially +visiting a military post; all general officers of the Army; general +officers of foreign services visiting a post; naval, marine, +volunteer, and militia officers in the service of the United States +and holding the rank of general officer; American or foreign envoys or +ministers; ministers accredited to the United States; chargés +d'affaires accredited to the United States; consuls general accredited +to the United States; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer +of the day.</p> + +<p><b>225.</b> The relative rank between officers of the Army and Navy is as +follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with vice admiral, +major general with rear admiral, brigadier general with commodore,<a id="footnotetag14" name="footnotetag14"></a><a href="#footnote14" title="Go to footnote 14"><span class="smaller">[14]</span></a> +colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel with commander, major with +lieutenant commander, captain with lieutenant, first lieutenant with +lieutenant (junior grade), second lieutenant with ensign. (A. R. 12.)</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page285" name="page285"></a>(p. 285)</span> <b>226.</b> Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph +224, and, except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the +commanding officer and the officer of the day will be advised in each +case of the presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the +compliment.</p> + +<p><b>227.</b> Guards will turn out and present arms when the national or +regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past by a guard +or an armed party. This rule also applies when the party carrying the +colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the +guardhouse, the guard will be turned out when the colors first pass, +and not thereafter.</p> + +<p><b>228.</b> In case the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are carried +past, the guard will turn out and present arms.</p> + +<p><b>229.</b> In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when armed +parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the +guard, approach their post. (See Par. 53.)</p> + +<p><b>230.</b> The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence in +camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment except +general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, and the officer +of the day. Members of the guard will salute all persons entitled to +the compliment and all officers in the military or naval service of +foreign powers, officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps, officers +of volunteers, and officers of militia when in uniform.</p> + + +<p class="title">GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY.</p> + +<p><b>232.</b> <i>Eighty-fifth article of war.</i>—* * * Any person subject to +military law, except an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + +<p><b>233.</b> All material instructions given to a member of the guard by an +officer having authority will be promptly communicated to the +commander of the guard by the officer giving them.</p> + +<p><b>234.</b> Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks under +arms. At roll call each man, as his name or number and relief are +called, will answer "Here," and come to an order arms.</p> + +<p><b>235.</b> Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member not at +once required for duty will place his rifle in the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page286" name="page286"></a>(p. 286)</span> arm racks, +if they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom unless he +requires it in the performance of some duty.</p> + +<p><b>236.</b> Without permission from the commander of the guard, members of +the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate +vicinity of the guardhouse. Permission to leave will not be granted +except in cases of necessity.</p> + +<p><b>237.</b> Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove +their accouterments or clothing without permission from the commander +of the guard. (Par. 66.)</p> + + +<h3>Section 15. Prisoners.</h3> + +<p><b>238.</b> Articles of war 69, 70, 71, 72, and 73 have special reference to +the confinement of prisoners and should be carefully borne in mind.</p> + +<p><b>239.</b> The commander of the guard will place a civilian in confinement +on an order from higher authority only, unless such civilian is +arrested while in the act of committing some crime within the limits +of the military jurisdiction, in which case the commanding officer +will be immediately notified.</p> + +<p><b>240.</b> Except as provided in the sixty-eighth article of war, or when +restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined without the order +of an officer, who shall previously inquire into his offense. (<b>A. R. +930.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>241.</b> An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will send, as soon +as practicable, a written statement, signed by himself, to the +commander of the guard, setting forth the name, company, and regiment +of such soldier, and a brief statement of the alleged offense. It is a +sufficient statement of the offense to give the number and article of +war under which the soldier is charged.</p> + +<p><b>242.</b> A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and until his +sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as held in +confinement by the commanding officer. After due promulgation of his +sentence, the prisoner is held in confinement by authority of the +officer who reviews the proceedings of the court awarding sentence. +The commander of the guard will state in his report, in the proper +place, the name of the officer by whom the prisoner was originally +confined.</p> + +<p><b>243.</b> Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred will be +designated as "awaiting trial"; enlisted men <span class="pagenum"><a id="page287" name="page287"></a>(p. 287)</span> who have been +tried will, prior to the promulgation of the result be designated as +"awaiting result of trial"; enlisted men serving sentences of +confinement not involving dishonorable discharge will be designated as +"garrison prisoners." Persons sentenced to dismissal or dishonorable +discharge and to terms of confinement at military posts or elsewhere +will be designated as "general prisoners." (<b>A. R. 928.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>244.</b> The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when the order +promulgating the same is received. The officer of the guard, or the +officer of the day if there be no officer of the guard, will read them +unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise.</p> + +<p><b>245.</b> When the date for the commencement of a term of confinement +imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not expressly fixed by +sentence, the term of confinement begins on the date of the order +promulgating it. The sentence is continuous until the term expires, +except when the person sentenced is absent without authority. (<b>A. R. +969.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>246.</b> When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, or +undergoing sentence commit offenses for which they are tried, the +second sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the first.</p> + +<p><b>247.</b> Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of, a general +court-martial and those confined for serious offenses will be kept +apart, when practicable, from those confined by sentence of an +inferior court or for minor offenses. Enlisted men in confinement for +minor offenses, or awaiting trial or the result of trial for the same, +will ordinarily be sent to work under charge of unarmed overseers +instead of armed sentinels and will be required to attend drills +unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise.</p> + +<p><b>248.</b> Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished with +food from their respective companies or from the organizations to +which they may be temporarily attached.</p> + +<p>The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their places +of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send the prisoners, +under proper guard, to their messes for meals.</p> + +<p>When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will be +attached for rations to companies.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page288" name="page288"></a>(p. 288)</span> Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be +allowed to enter the prison room. (See Par. 289.)</p> + +<p><b>249.</b> With the exception of those specially designated by the +commanding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the +guardhouse unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an officer +or noncommissioned officer of the guard. The commanding officer may +authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled general prisoners to +leave the guardhouse, not under the charge of a sentinel, for the +purpose of working outside under such surveillance and restrictions as +he may impose.</p> + +<p><b>250.</b> Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick call, or at the time +designated by the commanding officer, will be sent to the hospital +under charge of proper guard, with a sick report kept for the purpose. +The recommendation of the surgeon will be entered in the guard report.</p> + +<p><b>251.</b> The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves upon the +post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply to the post commander for +a guard.</p> + +<p><b>252.</b> Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when directed by +the commanding officer or the officer of the day.</p> + +<p><b>253.</b> A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not salute an officer.</p> + +<p><b>254.</b> All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, and his +blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for his +confinement, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list sent to +that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner during transfer will be +furnished with a duplicate of this list, and will be held responsible +for the delivery of all articles itemized therein with the prisoner. +At least one serviceable woolen blanket will be sent with every such +prisoner so transferred. (<b>A. R. 939.</b>)</p> + +<p><b>255.</b> When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in the guardhouse +will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw per month for +bedding. So far as practicable iron bunks will be furnished to all +prisoners in post guardhouses and prison rooms. (<b>A. R. 1084.</b>)</p> + +<p>If the number of prisoners, including general prisoners, confined at a +post justifies it, the commanding officer will detail a commissioned +officer as "officer in charge of prisoners". <span class="pagenum"><a id="page289" name="page289"></a>(p. 289)</span> At posts where +the average number of prisoners continually in confinement is less +than 12, the detail of an officer in charge of prisoners will not be +made.</p> + + +<h3>Section 16. Guarding Prisoners.</h3> + +<p><b>299.</b> The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the prisoners +except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard or +overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.)</p> + +<p><b>(a) He will allow none to escape.</b></p> + +<p><b>(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse except +when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard.</b></p> + +<p><b>(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners without +permission from proper authority.</b></p> + +<p><b>(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any +suspicious noise made by the prisoners.</b></p> + +<p><b>(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how many prisoners +are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere.</b></p> + +<p>Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work or +elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the guard, +notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: "<b>Corporal of +the guard, (so many) prisoners.</b>"</p> + +<p>He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until the +corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered him to do +so.</p> + +<p><b>300.</b> Whenever practicable, special guards will be detailed for the +particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such prisoners +as can not be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.)</p> + +<p><b>301.</b> The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the police +officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer of the +day.</p> + +<p><b>302.</b> The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and +overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer and +the commander of the prisoner guard only.</p> + +<p><b>303.</b> Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and +mounted by being inspected by the commander of <span class="pagenum"><a id="page290" name="page290"></a>(p. 290)</span> the main +guard, who determines whether all of the men are in proper condition +to perform their duties and whether their arms and equipments are in +proper condition, and rejects any men found unfit.</p> + +<p><b>304.</b> When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard or +overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them under +their commander, and all responsibility and control of the main guard +ceases until they are returned to the main guard. (Par. 306.)</p> + +<p><b>305.</b> If a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call "<b>Halt.</b>" +If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated his call, and +if there be no other possible means of preventing his escape, the +sentinel will fire upon him.</p> + +<p>The following will more fully explain the important duties of a +sentinel in this connection:</p> + +<div class="quote"> +<p>(Circular.)</p> +<p class="right15 smcap bot0">War Department,</p> +<p class="right10 smcap top0 bot0">Adjutant General's Office,</p> +<p class="right10 top0"><i>Washington, November 1, 1887</i>.</p> + +<p>By direction of the Secretary of War, the following is published + for the information of the Army:</p> + +<p class="center smcap">United States Circuit Court, Eastern District of Michigan, + August 1, 1887.</p> + +<p class="center smcap">THE UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLARK.</p> + +<p>The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by one + soldier upon another within a military reservation of the United + States.</p> + +<p>If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice and + in the performance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such + homicide is excusable, unless it was manifestly beyond the scope + of his authority or was such that a man of ordinary sense and + understanding would know that it was illegal.</p> + +<p>It seems that the sergeant of the guard has a right to shoot a + military convict if there be no other possible means of + preventing his escape.</p> + +<p>The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has + no application to military offenses.</p> + +<p>While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner + of all blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled + to weight as an expression of the views of the military court of + the necessity of using a musket to prevent the escape of the + deceased.</p> + +<p class="bot0"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page291" name="page291"></a>(p. 291)</span> By order of the Secretary of War:</p> +<p class="top0 right10"><span class="smcap">R. C. Drum</span>, <i>Adjutant General</i>.</p> +</div> + +<p>The following is taken from Circular No. 3, of 1883, from Headquarters +Department of the Columbia:</p> + +<div class="quote"> + +<p class="right10 bot0"><span class="smcap">Vancouver Barracks, W. T.</span>, <i>April 20, 1883</i>.</p> +<p class="top0 bot0">To the <span class="smcap">Assistant Adjutant General</span>,</p> +<p class="center top0"><i>Department of the Columbia</i>.</p> + +<p>Sir:</p> + +<p class="center lspaced2em">*****</p> + +<p>A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their + escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, with + ammunition. To prevent escape is his first and most important + duty.</p> + +<p class="center lspaced2em">*****</p> + +<p>I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall not use more + force or violence to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is + necessary to effect that object, but if the prisoner, after being + ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel may maim or + even kill him, and it is his duty to do so.</p> + +<p>A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon + him, and firing to hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most + serious military offense, for which he should and would be + severely punished by a general court-martial.</p> + +<p class="center lspaced2em">*****</p> + +<p>(Signed) <span class="add5em smcap">Henry A. Morrow,</span><br> + <i>Colonel Twenty-first Infantry, Commanding Post</i>.</p> +</div> + +<div class="quote"> +<p class="center">[Third indorsement.]</p> +<p class="right15 smcap bot0">Office Judge Advocate,</p> +<p class="right10 smcap top0 bot0">Military Division of the Pacific,</p> +<p class="right top0"><i>May 11, 1883</i>.</p> + +<p>Respectfully returned to the assistant adjutant general, Military + Division of the Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed + by Col. Morrow. I was not aware that such a view had ever been + questioned. That the period is a time of peace does not affect + the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the + escaping prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise <span class="pagenum"><a id="page292" name="page292"></a>(p. 292)</span> be + prevented. He should, of course, attempt to stop the prisoner + before firing by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn him + by the words "Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect.</p> + +<p class="right10"><span class="smcap">W. Winthrop</span>, <i>Judge Advocate</i>.</p> +</div> + +<div class="quote"> +<p class="center">[Fourth indorsement.]</p> + +<p class="center smcap bot0">Headquarters Military Division of the Pacific,</p> +<p class="right10"><i>May 11, 1883</i>,</p> + +<p>Respectfully returned to the commanding general, Department of + the Columbia, approving the opinion of the commanding officer, + Twenty-first Infantry, and of the judge advocate of the division, + in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by sentinels + in preventing prisoners from escaping.</p> + +<p class="center lspaced2em">*****</p> + +<p class="bot0">By command of Maj. Gen. Schofield:</p> +<p class="bot0 top0 smcap right15">J. C. Kelton,</p> +<p class="top0 right10"><i>Assistant Adjutant General</i>.</p> +</div> + +<p>See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900.</p> + +<p><b>306.</b> On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, a +sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of prisoners +will halt them and call, "<b>No. 1, (so many) prisoners.</b>" He will not +allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until so directed by the +corporal of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>307.</b> Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over prisoners +for work will receive specific and explicit instructions covering the +required work; they will be held strictly responsible that the +prisoners under their charge properly and satisfactorily perform the +designated work.</p> + + +<h3>Section 17. Stable guards.</h3> + +<p class="title">STABLE GUARDS.</p> + +<p><b>308.</b> Under the head of stable guards will be included guards for +cavalry stables, artillery stables and parks, mounted infantry +stables, machine-gun organization stables and parks, and <span class="pagenum"><a id="page293" name="page293"></a>(p. 293)</span> +quartermaster stables and parks. Where the words "troop" and "cavalry" +are used, they will be held to include all of these organizations.</p> + +<p><b>309.</b> When troop stable guards are mounted they will guard the stables +of the cavalry (see Par. 13). When no stable guards are mounted the +stables will be guarded by sentinels posted from the main guard under +the control of the officer of the day.</p> + +<p>The instructions given for troop stable guard will be observed as far +as applicable by the noncommissioned officers and sentinels of the +main guard when in charge of the stables.</p> + + +<p class="title">TROOP STABLE GUARDS.</p> + +<p><b>310.</b> Troop stable guards will not be used except in the field, or when +it is impracticable to guard the stables by sentinels from the main +guard.</p> + +<p><b>311.</b> Troop stable guards will be under the immediate control of their +respective troop commanders; they will be posted in each cavalry +stable or near the picket line, and will consist of not less than one +noncommissioned officer and three privates.</p> + +<p>Stable guards are for the protection of the horses, stables, forage, +equipments, and public property generally. They will, in addition, +enforce the special regulations in regard to stables, horses, and +parks.</p> + +<p><b>312.</b> Sentinels of stable guards will be posted at the stables or at +the picket lines when the horses are kept outside. The troop stable +guard may be used as a herd guard during the day time or when grazing +is practicable.</p> + +<p><b>313.</b> The troop stable guard, when authorized by the post commander, +will be mounted under the supervision of the troop commander. It will +be armed, at the discretion of the troop commander, with either rifle +or pistol.</p> + +<p><b>314.</b> The tour continues for 24 hours, or until the guard is relieved +by a new guard.</p> + +<p><b>315.</b> The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue duties at +the stables is forbidden; but this will not prohibit them from being +required to assist in feeding grain before reveille.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page294" name="page294"></a>(p. 294)</span> <b>316.</b> The troop stable guard will attend stables with the rest +of the troop and groom their own horses, the sentinels being taken off +post for the purpose.</p> + +<p><b>317.</b> Neither the noncommissioned officer nor the members of the stable +guard will absent themselves from the immediate vicinity of the +stables except in case of urgent necessity, and then for no longer +time than is absolutely necessary. No member of the guard will leave +for any purpose without the authority of the noncommissioned officer +of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>318.</b> The noncommissioned officer and one member of the stable guard +will go for meals at the proper hour; upon their return the other +members of the guard will be directed to go by the noncommissioned +officer.</p> + +<p><b>319.</b> When the horses are herded each troop will furnish its own herd +guard. (Par. 14.)</p> + +<p><b>320.</b> Smoking in the stables or their immediate vicinity is prohibited. +No fire or light, other than electric light or stable lanterns, will +be permitted in the stables. A special place will be designated for +trimming, filling, and lighting lanterns.</p> + + +<p class="title">NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD.</p> + +<p><b>321.</b> The noncommissioned officer receives his orders from his troop +commander, to whom he will report immediately after posting his first +relief, and when relieved will turn over all his orders to his +successor. He instructs his sentinels in their general and special +duties; exercises general supervision over his entire guard; exacts +order and cleanliness about the guardroom; prevents the introduction +of intoxicants into the guardhouse and stables; receives, by count, +from his predecessor, the animals, horse equipments, and all property +(both private and public) pertaining thereto; examines, before +relieving his predecessor, all locks, windows, and doors, and should +any be found insecure he will report the fact to his troop commander +when he reports for orders. He will personally post and relieve each +sentinel, taking care to verify the property responsibility of the +sentinel who comes off post, and see that the sentinel who goes on +post is aware of the property responsibility that he assumes.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page295" name="page295"></a>(p. 295)</span> <b>322.</b> That the noncommissioned officer may be more thoroughly +informed of his responsibility, all horses returning, except those +from a regular formation, will be reported to him. He will then notify +the sentinel on post, and, in the absence of the stable sergeant, will +see that the horses are promptly cared for.</p> + +<p>In case of abuse, he will promptly report to the troop commander. +Should the horse be the private property of an officer, he will report +such abuse to the owner.</p> + +<p><b>323.</b> The noncommissioned officer will report any unusual occurrence +during his tour direct to his troop commander.</p> + +<p><b>324.</b> Horses and other property for which the noncommissioned officer +is responsible will not be taken from the stables without the +authority of the post or troop commander.</p> + +<p><b>325.</b> The noncommissioned officer must answer the sentinel's calls +promptly.</p> + +<p><b>326.</b> In case of fire, the noncommissioned officer will see that the +requirements of paragraph 334 are promptly carried out.</p> + +<p><b>327.</b> Whenever it becomes necessary for the noncommissioned officer to +leave his guard, he will designate a member of it to take charge and +assume his responsibility during his absence.</p> + + +<p class="title">SENTINELS OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD.</p> + +<p><b>328.</b> The sentinel in the discharge of his duties will be governed by +the regulations for sentinels of the main guard whenever they are +applicable—such as courtesies to officers, walking post in a +soldierly manner, challenging, etc.; he will not turn out the guard +except when ordered by proper authority.</p> + +<p><b>329.</b> The sentinel will receive orders from the commanding officer, the +troop commander, and the noncommissioned officers of the stable guard +only, except when the commanding officer directs the officer of the +day to inspect the stable guard.</p> + +<p><b>330.</b> In the field and elsewhere when directed by the commanding +officer the sentinel when posted will verify the number of horses for +which he is responsible, and when relieved will give the number to +his successor.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page296" name="page296"></a>(p. 296)</span> <b>331.</b> The sentinel will not permit any horse or equipments to +be taken from the stables, except in the presence of the +noncommissioned officer.</p> + +<p><b>332.</b> Should a horse get loose, the sentinel will catch him and tie him +up. If he be unable to catch the horse, the noncommissioned officer +will at once be notified. In case a horse be cast, or in any way +entangled, he will relieve him, if possible; if unable to relieve him, +he will call the noncommissioned officer. Sentinels are forbidden to +punish or maltreat a horse.</p> + +<p><b>333.</b> When a horse is taken sick, the sentinel will notify the +noncommissioned officer, who in turn will call the farrier and see +that the horse is properly attended to.</p> + +<p><b>334.</b> In case of fire the sentinel will give the alarm by stepping +outside the stable and firing his pistol or piece repeatedly, and +calling out at the same time, "<b>Fire, stables, Troop (——).</b>"</p> + +<p>As soon as the guard is alarmed, he will take the necessary +precautions in opening or closing the doors so as to prevent the +spreading of the fire and make it possible to remove the horses; he +will drop the chains and bars, and, with the other members of the +guard, proceed to lead out the horses and secure them at the picket +line or such other place as may have been previously designated.</p> + +<p><b>335.</b> Sentinels over horses, or in charge of prisoners, receive orders +from the stable sergeant, so far as the care of the horses and the +labor of prisoners are concerned.</p> + +<p><b>336.</b> In field artillery and machine-gun organizations, the guard for +the stables has charge of the guns, caissons, etc., with their +ammunition and stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage.</p> + + +<h3>Section 18. Flags.</h3> + +<p><b>337.</b> The garrison, post, and storm flags are national flags and shall +be of bunting. The union of each is as described in paragraph 216, +Army Regulations, and shall be of the following proportions: Width, +seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; length, seventy-six +one-hundredths of the hoist of the flag.</p> + +<p>The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It will be +furnished only to posts designated in orders from time <span class="pagenum"><a id="page297" name="page297"></a>(p. 297)</span> to +time from the War Department, and will be hoisted only on holidays and +important occasions.</p> + +<p>The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be +furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant +weather.</p> + +<p>The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. It will +be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and windy +weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. (A. R. +223.)</p> + +<p><b>338.</b> At every military post or station the flag will be hoisted at the +sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of the first note of +the march, if a march be played before the reveille. The flag will be +lowered at the sounding of the last note of the retreat, while the +flag is being lowered the band will play "The Star-Spangled Banner," +or, if there be no band present, the field music will sound "to the +color." When "to the color" is sounded by the field music while the +flag is being lowered the same respect will be observed as when "The +Star-Spangled Banner" is played by the band, and in either case +officers and enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the flag, +stand at attention, and render the prescribed salute at the last note +of the music. (A. R. 437.)</p> + +<p>The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be completed at +the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or "to the color."</p> + +<p><b>339.</b> The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or lake fort at +the beginning of and during an action in which a fort may be engaged, +whether by day or by night. (A. R. 437.)</p> + +<p><b>340.</b> The national flag will always be displayed at the time of firing +a salute. (A. R. 397.)</p> + +<p><b>341.</b> The flag of a military post will not be dipped by way of salute +or compliment. (A. R. 405.)</p> + +<p><b>342.</b> On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is +displayed at halfstaff and so remains between reveille and retreat +until the last salvo or volley is fired over the grave; or if the +remains are not interred at the post until they are removed therefrom. +(A. R. 422.)</p> + +<p><b>343.</b> During the funeral of an enlisted man at a military post the flag +is displayed at halfstaff. It is hoisted to the top after the final +volley or gun is fired or after the remains are <span class="pagenum"><a id="page298" name="page298"></a>(p. 298)</span> taken from +the post. The same honors are paid on the occasion of the funeral of a +retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.)</p> + +<p><b>344.</b> When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned +officer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the flag. +This detail wears side arms or if the special equipments do not +include side arms then belts only.</p> + +<p>The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail in +line, takes his post in the center and marches it to the staff. The +flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly hoisted. +The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat on the staff and +the detail marched to the guardhouse.</p> + +<p><b>345.</b> When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened from +the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is lowered at +the last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded and the halyards +made fast. The detail is then re-formed and marched to the guardhouse, +where the flag is turned over to the commander of the guard.</p> + +<p>The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should always +be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, the halyards +being held by two persons.</p> + + +<h3>Section 19. Reveille and Retreat Gun.</h3> + +<p><b>346.</b> The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment of the +guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two privates. +The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches +be played before the reveille, it is fired at the beginning of the +first march. The retreat gun is fired at the last note of retreat.</p> + +<p>The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which is +fired, sponged out, and secured under his direction.</p> + + +<h3>Section 20. Guard Mounting.</h3> + +<p><b>347.</b> Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding +officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill +regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs. If +none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In case the guard is +composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may be held +mounted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page299" name="page299"></a>(p. 299)</span> <b>348.</b> When Infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united +for guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for Infantry.</p> + + +<p class="title">FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING—MOUNTED.</p> + +<p class="center">(Extract Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.)</p> + +<p><b>857.</b> Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or +camps where a band is present. At the <i>assembly</i> the men of each troop +designated for guard form at stand to horse on their troop parade +grounds, the noncommissioned officers falling in as file closers; the +supernumeraries do not fall in; each first sergeant verifies his +detail and inspects the dress and general appearance, replaces any man +unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior +noncommissioned officer, and retires. The senior noncommissioned +officer then mounts, draws saber, and causes the detail to mount. The +band, accompanied by the buglers, takes its place on the parade ground +so that the left of its front rank shall be 12 yards to the right of +the rank when the guard is formed.</p> + +<p><b>858.</b> At <i>adjutant's call</i> the adjutant takes post so as to be 12 yards +in front of and facing the center of the guard when formed; the +sergeant major takes post facing to the left 12 yards to the left of +the front rank of the band; the band plays in appropriate time, the +details are marched to the parade ground by their senior +noncommissioned officers; the detail that arrives first is marched to +the line so that upon halting the head of the horse of the man on the +right shall be on line with and near to the sergeant major's horse, +the noncommissioned officer, having halted his detail, places himself +facing the sergeant major at a distance from him a little greater than +the front of his detail, and commands: <b>DRESS.</b> The detail dresses on +its right trooper; the noncommissioned officers of the detail in the +line of file closers rein back so as to be 6 yards in rear of the +rank; the noncommissioned officer in command of the detail then +commands, <b>Front</b>, salutes, and reports, <i>The detail is correct</i>, or +<i>(so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent</i>; the sergeant +major returns the salute; the noncommissioned officer in charge of the +detail then passes by the right of the guard and takes post on the +line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page300" name="page300"></a>(p. 300)</span> right trooper +of his detail. Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in +like manner on the left of the one preceding; the privates, +noncommissioned officers, and commander of each detail dress on those +of the preceding details in the same rank or line.</p> + +<p>Should the detail from a troop not include a noncommissioned officer, +one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the detail. +In this case such noncommissioned officer, after reporting to the +sergeant major, passes around the right flank between the guard and +the band and retires.</p> + +<p>The troops detailed alternate in taking the right of the line.</p> + +<p><b>859.</b> When the last detail has formed the sergeant major draws saber, +verifies the details, causes the guard to count fours, and, if there +be more than five fours, divides the guard into two or more platoons; +he designates the center guide or guides and then commands, <b>DRESS</b> +(Par. 362), verifies the alignment of rank and the line of +noncommissioned officers, and then returns to the right of the rank, +turns to the left, commands, <b>FRONT</b>, passes to a point midway between +the adjutant and center of the guard, halts facing the adjutant, +salutes, and reports: <i>Sir, the details are correct</i>; or, <i>Sir, (so +many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent</i>; the adjutant +returns the salute, directs the sergeant major: <i>Take your post</i>, and +then draws saber; the sergeant major turns to the left about and takes +post 3 yards to the left of and on a line with the rank. When the +sergeant major has completed his report the officer of the guard takes +post facing to the front 8 yards in front of the center of the guard +and draws saber. The adjutant then directs, <i>Inspect your guard, Sir</i>, +at which the commander of the guard turns about, commands: 1. <b>Draw</b>, 2. +<b>SABER</b>, 3. <b>Prepare for inspection</b>, 4. <b>MARCH</b>, moves toward and inspects +the guard, as in troop inspection. During the inspection the band +plays.</p> + +<p>The adjutant returns saber, observes the general condition of the +guard, and falls out any man who is unfit for guard duty or does not +present a creditable appearance. Substitutes will report to the +commander of the guard at the guard house.</p> + +<p>The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color sentinels +as prescribed in the Manual of Interior Guard Duty and notifies the +commander of the guard of his selection. He may require a trooper to +move out of the rank and to dismount <span class="pagenum"><a id="page301" name="page301"></a>(p. 301)</span> for a more minute +inspection. He also notifies the two senior noncommissioned officers +to act as platoon leaders if there has been a division into platoons. +If there be a junior officer of the guard, he takes post at the same +time as the senior, facing to the front 3 yards in front of the guide +of the first platoon, and the senior of the two noncommissioned +officers acts and takes post as chief of the second platoon. The +junior officer of the guard may be directed by the commander of the +guard to assist in inspecting the guard.</p> + +<p><b>860.</b> If there be no officer of the guard the adjutant inspects the +guard and during the inspection notifies the senior noncommissioned +officer to command the guard and the next two senior noncommissioned +officers to serve as platoon leaders. A noncommissioned officer +commanding the guard takes the post of the officer of the guard, the +next senior noncommissioned officer the post of the junior officer of +the guard.</p> + +<p>The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30 yards in +front of and facing the center of the guard and draws saber. The new +officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the guard about +30 yards from the adjutant. The old officer of the day takes post 3 +yards to the right of and 1 yard less advanced than the new officer of +the day. The commander of the guard takes post 8 yards in front of the +right trooper, facing to the front, and draws saber.</p> + +<p>The adjutant then commands: 1. <b>Draw</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b>, 3. <b>SOUND OFF.</b></p> + +<p>The band, playing, passes in front of the commander of the guard to +the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when it ceases +playing.</p> + +<p>The adjutant then commands <b>POSTS</b>, at which platoon leaders take their +posts 3 yards in front of the guides of their platoons, facing to the +front, and the commander of the guard takes post 6 yards in front of +the leader of the center (right) platoon, facing to the front, and the +file closers resume their places 3 yards in rear of the rank. If there +be no junior officer of the guard, the commander of the guard takes +post 3 yards in front of the center guide.</p> + +<p>The commander of the guard and the chiefs of platoon and file closers +having taken their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b>, +faces toward the officer of the day, salutes, and then reports, <i>Sir, +the guard is formed</i>.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page302" name="page302"></a>(p. 302)</span> The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, +salutes with the hand and directs the adjutant, <i>March the guard in +review, Sir.</i></p> + +<p><b>861.</b> The adjutant turns about, brings the guard to a carry, and +commands: 1. <b>Platoons right turn</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b> The +platoons execute the movement as in the troop, the band takes post in +front of the column (Par 806). The adjutant places himself abreast of +the first platoon and 6 yards from its left flank; the sergeant major +abreast of the second platoon and 6 yards from its left flank. The +adjutant then commands: 1. <b>Pass in review</b>, 2. <b>FORWARD</b>, 3. <b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p>The guard marches at the walk past the officer of the day, according +to the principles of squadron review, the adjutant, commander of the +guard, chiefs of platoon, sergeant major, and drum major saluting. The +new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of the +guard and the adjutant only, making one salute with the hand.</p> + +<p><b>862.</b> The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the left +out of the column, places itself opposite to and facing him, and +continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The +buglers detach themselves from the band when the latter turns out of +the column and remain in front of the guard, commencing to play when +the band ceases. In the absence of the band the buglers do not turn +out of the column, but continue to play in front of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>863.</b> The guard having passed 12 yards beyond the officer of the day, +the adjutant halts; the sergeant major halts alongside of the adjutant +and 1 yard to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire. +The commander of the guard then, without halting, breaks the guard +into column of fours and marches it to its post.</p> + +<p><b>864.</b> The officers of the day turn toward each other and salute, the +old officer of the day turning over the orders to the new officer of +the day.</p> + +<p>While the band is sounding off and while the guard is passing in +review the officers of the day remain at attention.</p> + +<p><b>865.</b> If the guard be not divided into platoons the adjutant commands: +1. <b>Guard right turn</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4: <b>HALT</b>, and it passes in +review as explained; the commander of the guard is 3 yards in front +of its center guide, the adjutant is <span class="pagenum"><a id="page303" name="page303"></a>(p. 303)</span> 6 yards from the rank +and abreast of the commander, the sergeant major covers the adjutant +and marches abreast of the rank.</p> + + +<p class="title">RELIEVING THE OLD GUARD—(FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, MOUNTED.)</p> + +<p><b>866.</b> As the new guard approaches the guardhouse the old guard is +formed in line at the carry saber, its buglers 3 yards to its right; +when the buglers at the head of the new guard arrive opposite the left +of the old guard its commander commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b>; both +commanders salute and, when the new guard has passed the commander of +the old guard, the latter commands: 1. <b>Carry</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b> The buglers +and guard continue marching without changing direction until the rear +of the column has passed 9 yards beyond the buglers of the old guard, +when the commander of the new guard commands: 1. <b>Fours right</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH.</b></p> + +<p><b>867.</b> The buglers and guard are marched 3 yards in rear of the line of +the old guard, when the commander of the new guard commands: 1. <b>Fours +right about</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT</b>; 5. <b>DRESS</b>; he then, facing to +the front, aligns his guard so as to be on a line with the old guard +and commands, <b>Front</b>; the buglers of the new guard are 3 yards to the +right of the rank.</p> + +<p><b>868.</b> The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in +front of and facing its center, commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>SABER</b>, +resumes his front, salutes, resumes the carry, faces his guard, and +commands: 1. <b>Carry</b>, 2. <b>SABER.</b></p> + +<p>Each guard is then presented by its commander to its officer of the +day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if an officer +acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is +presented to him by its commander.</p> + +<p><b>869.</b> If another person entitled to a salute approaches, each commander +of the guard brings his own guard to attention if not already at +attention. The senior commander of the two guards then commands: 1. +<b>Old and new guards</b>, 2. <b>Present</b>, 3. <b>SABER.</b> The junior will salute at +the command "Present, Saber," given by the senior. After the salute +has been acknowledged the senior brings both guards to the "Carry, +Saber."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page304" name="page304"></a>(p. 304)</span> <b>870.</b> After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers +of the day, each guard returns saber by command of its own officer of +the guard; the commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or +orderlies to fall out and report.</p> + +<p><b>871.</b> The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the +guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officer, divides the guard into three reliefs, +<i>first</i>, <i>second</i>, and <i>third</i>, from right to left, and directs a list +of the guard to be made by reliefs. The sentinels and detachments of +the old guard are at once relieved by members of the new guard, the +two guards standing at ease or dismounted while these changes are +being made. The commander of the old transmits to the commander of the +new guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning the +guard and its duties.</p> + +<p><b>872.</b> The commander of the new guard then has his own guard fall out, +takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in charge +of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>873.</b> If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of the +old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as +soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the +portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and +dismissed. In such case the remaining detachments of the old guard +will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when they reach +the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer +present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the +prescribed manner.</p> + +<p><b>874.</b> In bad weather, at night, or after long marches the music may be +omitted, or the buglers may take the place of the band and sound off +standing on the right of the guard and the march in review be omitted.</p> + +<p>In cases in which an organization, entire or in part, is detailed for +guard, it is marched to the parade ground as a single detail (Par. +858.)</p> + +<p><b>875.</b> For detailed instructions for guards and sentinels see Manual of +Interior Guard Duty.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page305" name="page305"></a>(p. 305)</span> FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, DISMOUNTED.</p> + +<p><b>876.</b> Guard mounting, dismounted, and relieving the old guard are +conducted on the same principles as when mounted, with the following +modifications:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) The men designated for guard fall in, dismounted, on their troop +parade grounds; noncommissioned officers not commanding detail, 2 +paces in rear of rank.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) The detail that is to be on the right is marched to the line so +that upon halting the breast of the man on the right shall be near to +and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major. At the command <b>DRESS</b>, +the detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and its +commander, the man on the right placing his breast against the left +arm of the sergeant major.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major takes a side +step to the right, draws saber if armed with one, verifies the detail, +takes post 2 paces to the right and 2 paces to the front of the guard, +facing to the left and causes the guard to count fours.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) When the sergeant major has reported, the officer of the guard +takes post 3 paces in front of the center of the guard, <i>draws saber</i> +and <i>orders saber</i>, the guard being at order arms.</p> + +<p>The inspection which corresponds to that of par. 882 being ended, and +the officers of the day, the adjutant, and the commander of the guard +having taken their posts, the commander of the guard draws saber with +the adjutant and comes to the order.</p> + +<p>The adjutant then commands: 1. <b>Parade</b>, 2. <b>Rest</b>, 3. <b>SOUND OFF</b>, and +comes to the <i>order</i> and <i>parade rest</i>.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) After the band has sounded off, the adjutant, commander of the +guard, and platoon leaders come to attention, and the adjutant +commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, faces toward the officer of the day and +reports: <i>Sir, the guard is formed.</i> The new officer of the day, after +the adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and +directs the adjutant: <i>March the guard in review, Sir.</i> The adjutant +carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an order and +commands: 1. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page306" name="page306"></a>(p. 306)</span> <b>At trail, platoons (or guard) right turn</b>, 2. +<b>MARCH</b>; 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT.</b></p> + +<p>The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according +to the principles as when mounted.</p> + +<p>While the band is sounding off and while the guard is marching in +review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded. +They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume +the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note +of the march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column +approaches.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant +commands: 1. <b>At trail, guard right turn</b>, 2. <b>MARCH</b>, 3. <b>Guard</b>, 4. <b>HALT</b>, +and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the guard is 3 +paces in front of its center guide.</p> + + +<h3>Section 21. Relieving the Old Guard.</h3> + +<p><b>360.</b> As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard is +formed in line, with its field music three paces to its right; and, +when the field music at the head of the new guard arrives opposite its +left, the commander of the new guard commands: 1. <b>Eyes, RIGHT</b>; the +commander of the old guard commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>; commanders +of both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick time past the +old guard.</p> + +<p>When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music of the +old guard, he commands: <b>FRONT</b>; the commander of the old guard +commands: 1. <b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, as soon as the new guard shall have +cleared the old guard.</p> + +<p>The field music having marched three paces beyond the field music of +the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the +guard, changes direction to the left when on a line with the old +guard; the changes of direction are without command. The commander of +the guard halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows +his guard to march past him, and, when its rear approaches, forms it +in line to the left, establishes the left guide three paces to the +right of the field music of the old guard, and on a line with the +front rank, and then dresses his guard to the left; the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page307" name="page307"></a>(p. 307)</span> field +music of the new guard is three paces to the right of its front rank.</p> + +<p><b>361.</b> The new guard being dressed the commander of each guard, in front +of and facing its center, commands: 1. <b>Present</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>, resumes his +front, salutes, carries saber, faces his guard, and commands: 1. +<b>Order</b>, 2. <b>ARMS</b>.</p> + +<p>Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he stands on +the right or left of the front rank, according as he commands the old +or new guard, and executes the rifle salute.</p> + +<p><b>362.</b> After the new guard arrives at its post and has saluted the old +guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of the +day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if one officer +acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is +presented to him by its commander.</p> + +<p><b>363.</b> If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander of +the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at +attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then command: +"1. <b>Old and new guards</b>, 2. <b>Present</b>, 3. <b>Arms</b>."</p> + +<p>The junior will salute at the command "<b>Present Arms</b>" given by the +senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings both +guards to the order.</p> + +<p><b>364.</b> After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the +day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the commander +of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and +report and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding +officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the tour except in +route marches while the guard is actually marching or when specially +directed by the commanding officer.</p> + +<p>The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the guard for +detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs, <b>first</b>, +<b>second</b>, and <b>third</b>, from right, to left, and directs a list of the +guard to be made by reliefs. When the guard consists of troops of +different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs so as to +insure a fair division of duty under rules prescribed by the +commanding officer.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page308" name="page308"></a>(p. 308)</span> <b>365.</b> The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at +once relieved by members of the new guard, the two guards standing at +ease or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of +the old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders, +instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. The +commander of the new guard then takes possession of the guardhouse and +verifies the articles in charge of the guard.</p> + +<p><b>366.</b> If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of the +old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as +soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the +portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and +dismissed. In such a case the remaining detachment or detachments of +the old guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when +they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned +officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the +prescribed manner.</p> + +<p><b>367.</b> In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the guard +is very small, the field music may be dispensed with.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page309" name="page309"></a>(p. 309)</span> CHAPTER X.<br> + +MAP READING AND SKETCHING.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. Military map reading.</h3> + +<p>When you pick up a map, the first question is, Where is the north? +This can usually be told by an arrow (see fig. <a href="#img063">1</a>, p. 259) which will +be found in one of the corners of the map, and which points to the +true north—the north of the north star.</p> + +<p>On some maps no arrow is to be found. The chances are a hundred to one +that the north is at the top of the map, as it is on almost all +printed maps. But you can only assure yourself of that fact by +checking the map with the ground it represents. For instance, if you +ascertain that the city of Philadelphia is due east of the city of +Columbus, then the Philadelphia-Columbus line on the map is a due +east-and-west line, and establishes at once all the other map +directions.</p> + +<p>Now, the map represents the ground as nearly as it can be represented +on a flat piece of paper. If you are standing up, facing the north, +your right hand will be in the east, your left in the west, and your +back to the south. It is the same with a map; if you look across it in +the direction of the arrow—that is, toward its north—your right hand +will be toward what is east on the map; your left hand to the west; +the south will be at the bottom of the map.</p> + +<a id="img063" name="img063"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img063.jpg" width="350" height="493" alt="" title=""> +<p>Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and scale.</p> +</div> + +<p>There is another kind of an arrow that sometimes appears on a map. It +is like the one in figure <a href="#img063">2</a>, page 259, and points not to the true +north but to the magnetic north, which is the north of the compass. +Though the compass needle, and therefore the arrow that represents it +on the map, does not point <span class="pagenum"><a id="page311" name="page311"></a>(p. 311)</span> exactly north, the deviation is, +from a military point of view, slight, and appreciable error will +rarely result through the use of the magnetic instead of the true +north in the solution of any military problems.</p> + +<p>Should you be curious to know the exact deviation, consult your local +surveyor or any civil engineer.</p> + +<p>Both arrows may appear on your map. In that case disregard the +magnetic arrow unless you are using the map in connection with a +compass.</p> + +<p>If a map is being used on the ground, the first thing to be done is to +put the lines of the map parallel to the real outlines of the ground +forms, and roads, fences, railroads, etc., that the map shows; for the +making of a map is no more than the drawing on paper of lines parallel +to and proportional in length to real directions and distances on the +ground.</p> + +<p>For instance, the road between two places runs due north and south. +Then on the map a line representing the road will be parallel to the +arrow showing the north and will be proportional in length to the real +road. In this way a map is a picture, or better, a bare outline +sketch; and, as we can make out a picture, though it be upside down, +or crooked on the wall, so we can use a map that is upside down or not +parallel to the real ground forms. But it is easier to make out both +the picture and the map if their lines are parallel to what they +represent. So in using a map on the ground we always put the lines +parallel to the actual features they show. This is easy if the map has +an arrow.</p> + +<p>If the map has no arrow, you must locate objects or features on the +ground, and on the map, their representations. Draw on the map a line +connecting any two of the features; place this line parallel to an +imaginary line through the two actual features located, and your map +will be correctly placed. Look to it that you do not reverse on the +map the positions of the two objects or features, or your map will be +exactly upside down.</p> + +<p>When the map has been turned into the proper position—that is to say, +"oriented"—the next thing is to locate on the map your position. If +you are in the village of Easton and there is a place on the map +labeled Easton, the answer is apparent. But if you are out in the +country, at an unlabeled point that looks like any one of a dozen +other similar points, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page312" name="page312"></a>(p. 312)</span> the task is more complicated. In this +latter case you must locate and identify, both on the map and on the +ground, other points—hills, villages, peculiar bends in rivers, +forests—any ground features that have some easily recognizable +peculiarity and that you can see from your position.</p> + +<p>Suppose, for instance, you were near Leavenworth and wanted to locate +your exact position, of which you are uncertain. You have the map +shown in this manual, and, looking about, you see southwest from where +you stand the United States Penitentiary; also, halfway between the +south and the southeast—south-southeast a sailor would say—the +reservoir (rectangle west of "O" in "Missouri"). Having oriented your +map, draw on it a line from the map position of the reservoir toward +its actual position on the ground. Similarly draw a line from the map +position of penitentiary toward its actual position. Prolong the two +lines until they intersect. The intersection of the lines will mark +the place where you stand—south Merritt Hill.</p> + +<p>This method consists merely in drawing on the map lines that represent +the lines of sight to known and visible places. The lines pass through +the map position of the places you see and are parallel to the actual +lines of sight; therefore they are the map representations of the +lines of sight, and their intersection is the map position of the eye +of the observer.</p> + +<p>After this orientation and location of position, one can deduce from +the map everything there is to know in regard to directions. In this +respect, study of the ground itself will show no more than will study +of the map.</p> + +<p>After "What direction?" comes "How far?" To answer this, one must +understand that the map distance between any two points shown bears a +fixed and definite relation or proportion to the real distance between +the two points.</p> + +<p>For instance: We measure on a map and find the distance between two +points to be 1 inch. Then we measure the real distance on the ground +and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence the relation between the map +distance and the real distance is 1 to 10,000, or 1/10000. Now, if the +map is properly drawn, the same relation will hold good for all +distances, and we can obtain any ground distance by multiplying by +10,000 the corresponding map distance.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page313" name="page313"></a>(p. 313)</span> This relation need not be 1/10000, but may be anything from +1/100 that an architect might use in making a map or plan of a house +up to one over a billion and a half, which is about the proportion +between map and real distances in a pocket-atlas representation of the +whole world on a 6-inch page. Map makers call this relation the +"scale" of the map and put it down in a corner in one of three ways.</p> + +<p>For the sake of an illustration, say the relation between map and +ground distances is 1 to 100; that is, 1 inch on the map is equal to +100 on the ground. The scale may be written:</p> + +<p>First. 1 inch equals 100.</p> + +<p>Second. 1/100.</p> + +<p>Third. As shown by figure <a href="#img063">3</a> (p. 259).</p> + +<p>These expressions mean one and the same thing. A variation of the +first method on a map of different scale might be: 1 inch equals 1 +mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 inches, then the real distance +between any two points shown on the map is 63,360 times the map +distance.</p> + +<p>To find the ground distance by the third kind of scale, copy it on the +edge of a slip of paper, apply the slip directly to the map, and read +off the distance; and so we answer the question, "How far?"</p> + +<p>After direction and distance comes the interpretation of the signs, +symbols, and abbreviations on the map. Those authorized are given on +pages 272 and 273 (a reprint of Appendix 4, Field Service Regulations, +1914); but there are a good many other conventional signs in common +use. A key to them is published by the War Department and is called +"Conventional Signs, United States Army." From these you read at once +the natural and artificial features of the country shown on your map. +It should be borne in mind that these conventional signs are not +necessarily drawn to scale, as are the distances. They show the +position and outline of the features rather than the size. This for +the reason that many of the features shown, if drawn to scale, would +be so small that one could not make them out except with a magnifying +glass. If the exact dimensions are of any importance, they will be +written in figures on the map. For instance, bridges.</p> + +<p>In addition to the above conventional signs, we have contours to show +the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape of <span class="pagenum"><a id="page314" name="page314"></a>(p. 314)</span> the ground. +Abroad, hachures are much used, but they serve only to indicate +elevation, and, as compared to contours, are of little value. Contours +resemble the lines shown in figure <a href="#img063">4</a> (p. 259).</p> + +<p>Hachures are shown in figure <a href="#img063">5</a> (p. 259), and may be found on any +European map. They simply show slopes, and, when carefully drawn, show +steeper slopes by heavier shading and gentler slopes by the fainter +hachures. The crest of the mountain is within the hachures. (See fig. +<a href="#img063">5</a>, p. 259.)</p> + +<p><i>Contours.</i>—A certain student, when asked by his instructor to define +"space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can not put it into +words." The instructor replied: "I suppose that under those +circumstances, Mr. ——, the definition really would not help much." +And so it is with contours—the definition does not help much if you +know a contour when you meet it on a map. For examples of contours, +turn to the map facing page 274, and, starting at the United States +penitentiary, note the smooth, flowing, irregular curved lines marked +880, 860, 840, 840, 860, etc.</p> + +<p>The only other lines on the map that at all resemble contours are +stream lines, like "Corral Creek," but the stream lines are readily +distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross the contours +squarely, while the contours run approximately parallel to each other. +Note the stream line just to the west of South Merritt Hill.</p> + +<p>The contours represent lines on the ground that are horizontal and +whose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edge of a flood +would follow the irregularities of the hills about it. Those lines +that contours stand for are just as level as the water's edge of a +lake, but horizontally they wander back and forth to just as great a +degree.</p> + +<p>The line marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes through on that +particular piece of ground every point that is 880 feet above sea +level. Should the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet, the +penitentiary would be on an island, the edge of which is marked by the +880 contour.</p> + +<p>Contours show several things; among them the height of the ground they +cross. Usually the contour has labeled on it in figures the height +above some starting point, called the <b>datum plane</b>—generally sea +level. If, with a surveying instrument, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page315" name="page315"></a>(p. 315)</span> you put in on a piece +of ground a lot of stakes, each one of which is exactly the same +height above sea level—that is, run a line of levels—then make a map +showing the location of the stakes, a line drawn on the map through +all the stake positions is a contour, and shows the position of all +points of that particular height.</p> + +<p>On any given map all contours are equally spaced in a vertical +direction, and the map shows the location of a great number of points +at certain fixed levels. If you know the vertical interval between any +two adjacent contours, you know the vertical interval for all the +contours on that map, for these intervals on a given map are all the +same.</p> + +<p>With reference to a point through which no contour passes, we can only +say that the point in question is not higher than the next contour up +the hill, nor lower than the next one down the hill. For the purposes +of any problem, it is usual to assume that the ground slopes evenly +between the two adjacent contours and that the vertical height of the +point above the lower contour is proportional to its horizontal +distance from the contour, as compared to the whole distance between +the two contours. For instance, on the map, find the height of point +A. The horizontal measurements are as shown on the map. The vertical +distance between the contours is 20 feet. A is about one-quarter of +the distance between the 800 and the 820 contours, and we assume its +height to be one-quarter of 20 feet (5 feet) higher than 800 feet. So +the height of A is 805 feet.</p> + +<p>The vertical interval is usually indicated in the corner of the map by +the letters "V. I." For instance: V. I.=20 feet.</p> + +<p>On maps of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is usually +small—perhaps as small as 1 foot; on maps of large areas on a small +scale it may be very great—even 1,000 feet.</p> + +<p>Contours also show <b>slopes</b>. It has already been explained that from any +contour to the next one above it the ground rises a fixed number of +feet, according to the vertical interval of that map. From the scale +of distances on the map the horizontal distance between any two +contours can be found. For example: On the map the horizontal distance +between D and E is 90 yards, or 270 feet. The vertical distance is 20 +feet, the V. I. of the map. The slope then is <span class="pagenum"><a id="page316" name="page316"></a>(p. 316)</span> 20/270 = 1/13.5 += 7-½% = 4-½°, in all of which different ways the slope can be +expressed.</p> + +<a id="img064" name="img064"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img064.jpg" width="300" height="87" alt="" title="Slope"> +</div> + +<p>On a good many contoured maps a figure like this will be found in one +of the corners:</p> + +<a id="img065" name="img065"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img065.jpg" width="400" height="43" alt="" title="Scale"> +</div> + +<p>On that particular map contours separated by the distance</p> + +<a id="img066" name="img066"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img066.jpg" width="250" height="46" alt="" title="Scale"> +</div> + +<p>on the vertical scale show a slope of 1°; if separated by the +distance <a id="img067" name="img067"></a><img src="images/img067.jpg" width="50" height="18" alt="" title="Scale"> they show a 2° slope, etc. A slope +of 1° is a rise of 1 foot in 57. To use this scale of slopes, copy it on the +edge of a piece of paper just as you did the scale of distances and +apply it directly to the map.</p> + +<p>You will notice that where the contours lie closest the slope is +steepest; where they are farthest apart, the ground is most nearly +flat.</p> + +<p>It has already been set forth how contours show height and slope; in +addition to this they show the shape of the ground, or <span class="smcap">GROUND FORMS</span>. +Each single contour shows the shape at its particular level of the +hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the 880 contour about the +penitentiary shows that the hill at that level has a shape somewhat +like a horse's head. Similarly, every contour on the map gives us the +form of the ground at its particular level, and knowing these ground +forms for many levels we can form a fair conception of what the whole +surface is like.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page317" name="page317"></a>(p. 317)</span> A round contour like the letter O outlines a round ground +feature; a long, narrow one indicates a long, narrow ground feature.</p> + +<p>Different hills and depressions have different shapes. A good many of +them have one shape at one level and another shape at another level, +all of which information will be given you by the contours on the map.</p> + +<p>One of the ways to see how contours show the shape of the ground is to +pour half a bucket of water into a small depression in the ground. The +water's edge will be exactly level, and if the depression is +approximately round the water's edge will also be approximately round. +The outline will look something like figure <a href="#img068">6</a>.</p> + +<p>Draw roughly on a piece of paper a figure of the same shape and you +will have a contour showing the shape of the bit of ground where you +poured your water.</p> + +<p>Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your little pond a +small, round bay. The water will rush in and the watermark on the soil +will now be shaped something like figure <a href="#img068">7</a>.</p> + +<p>Alter your drawing accordingly, and the new contour will show the new +ground shape.</p> + +<p>Again do violence to the face of nature by digging with a stick a +narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, and the watermark +will now look something like figure <a href="#img068">8</a>.</p> + +<p>Alter your drawing once more and your contour shows again the hew +ground form. Drop into your main pond a round clod and you will have a +new watermark, like figure <a href="#img068">9</a>, to add to your drawing. This new +contour, of the same level with the one showing the limit of the +depression, shows on the drawing the round island.</p> + +<p>Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the watermark will +be like figure <a href="#img068">10</a>, and the drawing of it, properly placed, will show +another island of another shape. Your drawing now will look like +figure <a href="#img068">11</a>.</p> + +<p>It shows a depression approximately round, off which open a round bay +and a long, narrow bay. There is also a round elevation and a long, +narrow one; a long, narrow ridge, jutting out between the two bays, +and a short, broad one across the neck of the round bay.</p> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page318" name="page318"></a>(p. 318)</span> + +<a id="img068" name="img068"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img068.jpg" width="350" height="498" alt="" title=""> +<p>Fig. 6 to 11.</p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page319" name="page319"></a>(p. 319)</span> Now flood your lake deeply enough to cover up the features +you have introduced. The new water line, about as shown by the dotted +line in figure <a href="#img068">11</a>, shows the oblong shape of the depression at a +higher level; the solid lines show the shape farther down; the +horizontal distance between the two contours at different points shows +where the bank is steep and where the slope is gentler.</p> + +<p>Put together the information each of these contours gives you, and you +will see how contours show the shape of the ground. On the little map +you have drawn you have introduced all the varieties of ground forms +there are; therefore all contour forms.</p> + +<p>The contours on an ordinary map seem much more complicated, but this +is due only to the number of them, their length, and many turns before +they finally close on themselves. Or they may close off the paper. But +trace each one out, and it will resolve itself into one of the forms +shown in figure <a href="#img068">11</a>.</p> + +<p>Just as the high-tide line around the continents of North and South +America runs a long and tortuous course, but finally closes back on +itself, so will every contour do likewise. And just as truly as every +bend in that high-tide mark turns out around a promontory, or in +around a bay, so will every bend in a contour stand for a hill or a +valley, pointing to the lowlands if it be a hill, and to the height if +it mark a valley.</p> + +<p>If the map embrace a whole continent or an island, all the contours +will be of closed form, as in figure <a href="#img068">11</a>, but if it embrace only a part +of the continent or island, some of the contours will be chopped off +at the edge of the map, and we have the open form of contours, as we +would have if figure <a href="#img068">11</a> were cut into two parts.</p> + +<p>The closed form may indicate a hill or a basin; the open form, a ridge +or a valley; sometimes a casual glance does not indicate which.</p> + +<p>Take up, first, the contour of the open type. If the map shows a +stream running down the inside of the contour, there is no difficulty +in saying at once that the ground feature is a valley; for instance, +V, V, V, and the valley of Corral Creek on the map. But if there is no +stream line, does the contour bend show a valley or a ridge?</p> + +<p>First of all, there is a radical difference between the bend of a +contour round the head of a valley and its bend round the nose of a +ridge.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page320" name="page320"></a>(p. 320)</span> Compare on the map the valleys V and the ridges R. The bend +of the contour round the head of the valley is much sharper than the +bend of the contour round the nose of the ridge. This is a general +truth, not only in regard to maps, but also in regard to ground forms. +Study any piece of open ground and note how much wider are the ridges +than the valleys. Where you find a "hog back" or "devil's backbone," +you have an exception to the rule, but the exceptions are not frequent +enough to worry over.</p> + +<p>To tell whether a given point is on a ridge or in a valley, start from +the nearest stream shown on the map and work across the map to the +undetermined point, keeping in mind that in a real trip across the +country you start from the stream, go up the hill to the top of a +ridge, down the other side of the hill to a watercourse, then up a +hill to the top of a ridge, down again, up again, etc. That is all +traveling is—valley, hill, valley, hill, valley, etc., though you +wander till the crack o' doom. And so your map travels must +go—valley, hill, valley, hill—till you run off the map or come back +to the starting point.</p> + +<p>On the map, follow the R-V line, V indicating valley and R ridge or +hill. Note first the difference in sharpness in the contour bends; +also how the valley contours point to the highland and the ridge +contours to the lowland.</p> + +<p>The contours go thus:</p> + +<a id="img069" name="img069"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<p>Sketch Low</p> +<img src="images/img069.jpg" width="500" height="90" alt="" title=""> +<p>High land</p> +</div> + +<p>The streams flow down the valleys, and the sharp angle of the contour +points always <i>up</i> stream. Note also how the junction of a stream and +its tributary usually makes an angle that points <i>down</i> stream.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page321" name="page321"></a>(p. 321)</span> "Which way does this stream run?"</p> + +<p>Water flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a stream, contours +representing higher ground must be to your right and to your left. Get +the elevations of these contours. Generally the nearest contour to the +bank of the stream will cross the stream, and there will be an angle +or sharp turn in the contour at this crossing. If the point of the +angle or sharp turn is toward you, you are going downstream; if away +from you, you are going upstream.</p> + +<p>If the contours are numbered, you have only to look at the numbers to +say where the low and where the high places are; but to read a map +with any speed one must be quite independent of these numbers. In +ordinary map reading look, first of all, for the stream lines. The +streams are the skeleton upon which the whole map is hung. Then pick +out the hilltops and ridges, and you have a body to clothe with all +the details that will be revealed by a close and careful study of what +the map maker has recorded.</p> + +<p>As to closed contours, they may outline a depression or a hill On the +map "881" or "885" might be hills or ponds, as far as their shape is +concerned. But, clearly, they are hills, for on either side are small +streams running <i>away</i> from them. If they were ponds, the stream lines +would run <i>toward</i> the closed contours. The test of "hill, valley, +hill," will always solve the problem when there are not enough stream +lines shown to make evident at once whether a closed contour marks a +pond or a hill. Look in the beginning for the stream lines and +valleys, and, by contrast, if for no other reason, the hills and +ridges at once loom up.</p> + +<p>To illustrate the subject of contours to aid those who have difficulty +in reading contoured maps the following is suggested:</p> + +<p>1. Secure modeling clay and build a mound.</p> + +<p>2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at equal vertical +intervals into zones; then insert vertical dowels through the mound of +clay.</p> + +<p>3. Remove the top zone, place on paper, and draw outline of the bottom +edge. Trim your paper roughly to the outline drawn. Indicate where the +holes made by the dowels pierce the paper.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page322" name="page322"></a>(p. 322)</span> 4. Do the above with each zone of your mound.</p> + +<p>5. Place these papers in proper order on dowels similarly placed to +ones in original mound at, say, 1 inch vertical interval apart. A +skeleton mound results.</p> + +<p>6. Replace the zones of the clay mound and form the original clay +mound along the side of skeleton mound.</p> + +<p>7. Now force all the paper sheets down the dowels onto the bottom +sheet, and we have a map of clay mound with contours.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Note.</span>—One-inch or 2-inch planks can be made into any desired form by +the use of dowels and similar procedure followed.</p> + +<p>People frequently ask, "What should I see when I read a map?" and the +answer is given, "The ground as it is." This is not true any more than +it is true that the words "The valley of the Meuse," bring to your +mind vine-clad hills, a noble river, and green fields where cattle +graze. Nor can any picture ever put into your thought what the Grand +Canyon really is. What printed word or painted picture can not do, a +map will not. A map says to you, "Here stands a hill," "Here is a +valley," "This stream runs so," and gives you a good many facts in +regard to them. But you do not have to "see" anything, any more than +you have to visualize Liege in order to learn the facts of its +geography. A map sets forth cold facts in an alphabet all its own, but +an easy alphabet, and one that tells with a few curving lines more +than many thousand words could tell.</p> + +<h3>Section 2. Sketching.</h3> + +<p>Noncommissioned officers and selected privates should be able to make +simple route sketches. This is particularly useful in patrolling, as +thereby a patrol leader is able to give his commander a good idea of +the country his patrol has traversed. Sketches should be made on a +certain scale, which should be indicated on the sketch, such as 3 +inches on the sketch equals 1 mile on the ground. The north should be +indicated on the sketch by means of an arrow pointing in that +direction. Any piece of paper may be used to make the sketch on. The +back of the field-message blank is ruled and prepared for this +purpose. The abbreviations and conventional signs shown on the +following pages should be used in making such simple sketches.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page323" name="page323"></a>(p. 323)</span> Field Maps and Sketches.</p> + +<p>The following abbreviations and signs are authorized for use on field +maps and sketches. For more elaborate map work the authorized +conventional signs as given in the manual of "Conventional Signs, +United States Army Maps,"; are used.</p> + +<p>Abbreviations other than those given should not be used.</p> + +<p class="center">ABBREVIATIONS.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" summary="Abbrevations"> +<colgroup> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="20%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>A.</td> +<td>Arroyo.</td> +<td>G.S.</td> +<td>General Store.</td> +<td>Pt.</td> +<td>Point.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>abut.</td> +<td>Abutment.</td> +<td>gir.</td> +<td>Girder.</td> +<td>q.p.</td> +<td>Queen-post.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ar.</td> +<td>Arch.</td> +<td>G.M.</td> +<td>Gristmill.</td> +<td>R.</td> +<td>River.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>b.</td> +<td>Brick.</td> +<td>I.</td> +<td>Iron.</td> +<td>R.H.</td> +<td>Roundhouse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>B.S.</td> +<td>Blacksmith Shop.</td> +<td>I.</td> +<td>Island.</td> +<td>R.R.</td> +<td>Railroad.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>bot.</td> +<td>Bottom.</td> +<td>Jc.</td> +<td>Junction.</td> +<td>S.</td> +<td>South.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Br.</td> +<td>Branch.</td> +<td>k.p.</td> +<td>King-post.</td> +<td>s.</td> +<td>Steel.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>br.</td> +<td>Bridge.</td> +<td>L.</td> +<td>Lake.</td> +<td>S.H.</td> +<td>Schoolhouse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>C.</td> +<td>Cape.</td> +<td>Lat.</td> +<td>Latitude.</td> +<td>S.M.</td> +<td>Sawmill.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>cem.</td> +<td>Cemetery.</td> +<td>Ldg.</td> +<td>Landing.</td> +<td>Sta.</td> +<td>Station.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>con.</td> +<td>Concrete.</td> +<td>L.S.S.</td> +<td>Life-Saving Station.</td> +<td>st.</td> +<td>Stone.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>cov.</td> +<td>Covered.</td> +<td>L.H.</td> +<td>Lighthouse</td> +<td>str.</td> +<td>Stream.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cr.</td> +<td>Creek.</td> +<td>Long.</td> +<td>Longitude.</td> +<td>T.G.</td> +<td>Tollgate.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>d.</td> +<td>Deep.</td> +<td>Mt.</td> +<td>Mountain.</td> +<td>Tres.</td> +<td>Trestle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>cul.</td> +<td>Culvert.</td> +<td>Mts.</td> +<td>Mountains.</td> +<td>tr.</td> +<td>Truss.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>D.S.</td> +<td>Drug Store.</td> +<td>N.</td> +<td>North.</td> +<td>W.T.</td> +<td>Water Tank.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>E.</td> +<td>East.</td> +<td>n.f.</td> +<td>Not fordable.</td> +<td>W.W.</td> +<td>Water Works.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Est.</td> +<td>Estuary.</td> +<td>P.</td> +<td>Pier.</td> +<td>W.</td> +<td>West.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>f.</td> +<td>Fordable.</td> +<td>pk.</td> +<td>Plank.</td> +<td>w.</td> +<td>Wood.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ft.</td> +<td>Fort.</td> +<td>P.O.</td> +<td>Post Office</td> +<td>wd.</td> +<td>Wide.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class="center">SIGNS—FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" summary="Signs"> +<colgroup> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="40%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td rowspan="4">Telegraph Line</td> +<td>Symbol (modified below)</td> +<td><img src="images/tab001.jpg" width="250" height="27" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Along improved road</td> +<td><img src="images/tab002.jpg" width="250" height="16" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Along unimproved road</td> +<td><img src="images/tab003.jpg" width="250" height="12" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Along trail</td> +<td><img src="images/tab004.jpg" width="250" height="10" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr><td colspan="3"> </td></tr> +<tr> +<td rowspan="3">Railroads</td> +<td>Single track</td> +<td><img src="images/tab005.jpg" width="250" height="14" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Double track</td> +<td><img src="images/tab006.jpg" width="250" height="15" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Trolley</td> +<td><img src="images/tab007.jpg" width="250" height="15" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr><td colspan="3"> </td></tr> +<tr> +<td rowspan="3">Roads</td> +<td>Improved</td> +<td><img src="images/tab008.jpg" width="250" height="18" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Unimproved</td> +<td><img src="images/tab009.jpg" width="250" height="11" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Trail</td> +<td><img src="images/tab010.jpg" width="250" height="14" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr><td colspan="3"> </td></tr> +<tr> +<td rowspan="5">Fences</td> +<td>barbed wire</td> +<td><img src="images/tab011.jpg" width="250" height="11" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>smooth wire</td> +<td><img src="images/tab012.jpg" width="250" height="16" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>wood</td> +<td><img src="images/tab013.jpg" width="250" height="16" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>stone</td> +<td><img src="images/tab014.jpg" width="250" height="15" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>hedge</td> +<td><img src="images/tab015.jpg" width="250" height="17" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page324" name="page324"></a>(p. 324)</span> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" summary="Signs"> +<colgroup> + <col width="15%"> + <col width="15%"> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="15%"> + <col width="15%"> + <col width="10%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Bridge</td> +<td colspan="5"><img src="images/tab016.jpg" width="50" height="47" alt="" title=""> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td colspan="5">Indicate character and span by abbreviations.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Example:</td> +<td><img src="images/tab017.jpg" width="50" height="33" alt="" title=""> +<td colspan="3"><img src="images/tab018.jpg" width="40" height="25" alt="" title=""> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td colspan="5">Meaning wooden kingpost bridge, 40 feet long, 20 feet wide, and 10 +feet above the water.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Streams</td> +<td colspan="5"><img src="images/tab019.jpg" width="120" height="23" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td colspan="5">Indicate character by abbreviations.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Example:</td> +<td colspan="5"><img src="images/tab020.jpg" width="120" height="40" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td colspan="5">Meaning a stream 15 feet wide, 8 feet deep, and not fordable.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>House</td> +<td><img src="images/tab021.jpg" width="20" height="22" alt="" title=""></td> +<td>Church</td> +<td><img src="images/tab022.jpg" width="20" height="22" alt="" title=""></td> +<td>School house</td> +<td><img src="images/tab023.jpg" width="40" height="20" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Woods</td> +<td><img src="images/tab024.jpg" width="50" height="27" alt="" title=""></td> +<td>Orchards</td> +<td><img src="images/tab025.jpg" width="50" height="26" alt="" title=""></td> +<td>Cultivated Land</td> +<td><img src="images/tab026.jpg" width="50" height="30" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td colspan="5">If boundary lines are fences they are indicated as such.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5">Brush, crops or grass, important as cover or forage</td> +<td><img src="images/tab027.jpg" width="70" height="29" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cemetery</td> +<td colspan="3"><img src="images/tab028.jpg" width="60" height="21" alt="" title=""></td> +<td>Trees, isolated</td> +<td><img src="images/tab029.jpg" width="50" height="22" alt="" title=""></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cut and fill—</td> +<td> </td> +<td><img src="images/tab030.jpg" width="140" height="45" alt="" title=""></td> +<td colspan="2">cut 10 feet deep</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td><img src="images/tab031.jpg" width="140" height="53" alt="" title=""></td> +<td colspan="2">fill 10 feet high</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<a id="img070" name="img070"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<a href="images/img070.jpg"> +<img src="images/img070tb.jpg" width="400" height="256" alt="" title=""></a> +<p>Map.</p> +</div> + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page325" name="page325"></a>(p. 325)</span> CHAPTER XI.<br> + +MESSAGE BLANKS.</h2> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" summary="Message"> +<colgroup> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td rowspan="2" class="center bordb bordt bordl bordr">U. S. ARMY FIELD<br> MESSAGE.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">No.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">Sent<br> by.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">Time.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">Rec'd<br> by.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">Time.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordr">Check.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="6" class="center bordb bordr">(These spaces for Signal Operators only.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td rowspan="4" class="bordt bordl bordr bordb">Communicated by<br> +Buzzer, Phone,<br> +Telegraph, Wireless,<br> +Lantern, Helio, Flag,<br> +Cyclist, Foot Messenger,<br> +Mounted Messenger, Motor<br> +Car, Flying Machine.<br> +Underscore means used.</td> +<td colspan="6" class="center bordr">[Name of sending detachment.]</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>From</i></td> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb bordr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>At</i></td> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb bordr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>Date</i></td> +<td class="bordb"> </td> +<td class="right valign"><i>Hour</i></td> +<td class="bordb"> </td> +<td class="right valign"><i>No</i></td> +<td class="bordb bordr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordl valign"><i>To</i></td> +<td colspan="6" class="bordb bordr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordb bordr bordl"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordb bordr bordl"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordb bordr bordl"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordb bordr bordl"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordb bordr bordl"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordl valign"><i>Received</i></td> +<td colspan="6" class="bordb bordr"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="7" class="bordl bordr bordb"> </td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>The heading "From" is filled in with the <i>name</i> of the detachment +sending the information: as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent +on the same day from the same source to the same person are numbered +consecutively. The address is written briefly, thus: "Commanding +officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the writer's surname +only and rank are given.</p> + +<p>This blank is four and a half by six and three-quarters inches, +including the margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled in +squares, the side of each square representing 100 yards on a scale of +3 inches to one mile, for use in making simple sketches explanatory, +of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of forty +with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and +one-fourth inches and is printed as follows:</p> + +<p class="center">UNITED STATES ARMY FIELD MESSAGE.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" summary="Message"> +<colgroup> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> + <col width="10%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>To</i></td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +<td class="right valign"><i>No</i></td> +<td class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="3" class="center valign">(For signal operator only.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>When sent</i></td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +<td class="right valign"><i>No</i></td> +<td class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>Rate of speed</i></td> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>Name of messenger</i></td> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>When and by whom rec'd</i></td> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="center"><b>This Envelope will be Returned to Bearer.</b></td> +</tr> +</table> + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page326" name="page326"></a>(p. 326)</span> CHAPTER XII.<br> + +SIGNALS AND CODES.</h2> + +<p class="center">(Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.)</p> + + +<p class="title">General Instructions for Army Signaling.</p> + +<p><b>1.</b> Each signal station will have its call, consisting of one or two +letters, as Washington, "W"; and each operator or signalist will also +have his personal signal of one or two letters, as Jones, "Jo." These +being once adopted will not be changed without due authority.</p> + +<p><b>2.</b> To lessen liability of error, numerals which occur in the body of a +message should be spelled out.</p> + +<p><b>3.</b> In receiving a message the man at the telescope should call out +each letter as received, and not wait for the completion of a word.</p> + +<p><b>4.</b> A record of the date and time of the receipt or transmission of +every message must be kept.</p> + +<p><b>5.</b> The duplicate manuscript of messages received at, or the original +sent from, a station should be carefully filed.</p> + +<p><b>6.</b> In receiving messages nothing should be taken for granted, and +nothing considered as seen until it has been positively and clearly in +view. Do not anticipate what will follow from signals already given. +Watch the communicating station until the last signals are made, and +be very certain that the signal for the end of the message has been +given.</p> + +<p><b>7.</b> Every address must contain at least two words and should be +sufficient to secure delivery.</p> + +<p><b>8.</b> All that the sender writes for transmission after the word "To" is +counted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page327" name="page327"></a>(p. 327)</span> <b>9.</b> Whenever more than one signature is attached to a message +count all initials and names as a part of the message.</p> + +<p><b>10.</b> Dictionary words, initial letters, surnames of persons, names of +cities, towns, villages, States, and Territories, or names of the +Canadian Provinces will be counted each as one word; e.g., New York, +District of Columbia, East St. Louis should each be counted as one +word. The abbreviation of the names of cities, towns, villages, +States, Territories, and provinces will be counted the same as if +written in full.</p> + +<p><b>11.</b> Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use, figures, +decimal points, bars of division, and in ordinal numbers the affixes +"st," "d," "nd," "rd," and "th" will be each counted as one word. +Letters and groups of letters, when such groups do not form dictionary +words and are not combinations of dictionary words, will be counted at +the rate of five letters or fraction of five letters to a word. When +such groups are made up of combinations of dictionary words, each +dictionary word so used will be counted.</p> + +<p><b>12.</b> The following are exceptions to paragraph 55, and are counted as +shown:</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" summary="Word" style="width: 30%; margin-left: 20%;"> +<colgroup> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="10%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>A. M</td> +<td>1 word</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>P. M</td> +<td>1 word</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>O. K</td> +<td>1 word</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Per cent</td> +<td>1 word</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><b>13.</b> No message will be considered sent until its receipt has been +acknowledged by the receiving station.</p> + + +<a id="generalservicecode" name="generalservicecode"></a> +<p class="title">The International Morse or General Service Code.</p> + +<p><b>18.</b> The International Morse Code is the General Service Code and is +prescribed for use by the Army of the United States and between the +Army and the Navy of the United States. It will be used on radio +systems, submarine cables using siphon recorders, and with the +heliograph, flash-lanterns, and all visual signaling apparatus using +the wigwag.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" summary="Alphabet" style="width: 60%; margin-left: 10%;"> +<colgroup> + <col width="5%"> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="5%"> + <col width="20%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td colspan="4"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page328" name="page328"></a>(p. 328)</span> <i>Alphabet.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A</td> +<td class="thick">· —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>B</td> +<td class="thick">— · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>C</td> +<td class="thick">— · — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>D</td> +<td class="thick">— · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>E</td> +<td class="thick">·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>F</td> +<td class="thick">· · — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>G</td> +<td class="thick">— — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>H</td> +<td class="thick">· · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I</td> +<td class="thick">· ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>J</td> +<td class="thick">· — — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>K</td> +<td class="thick">— · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>L</td> +<td class="thick">· — · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>M</td> +<td class="thick">— —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>N</td> +<td class="thick">— ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>O</td> +<td class="thick">— — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>P</td> +<td class="thick">· — — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Q</td> +<td class="thick">— — · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>R</td> +<td class="thick">· — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>S</td> +<td class="thick">· · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>T</td> +<td class="thick">—</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>U</td> +<td class="thick">· · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>V</td> +<td class="thick">· · · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>W</td> +<td class="thick">· — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>X</td> +<td class="thick">— · · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Y</td> +<td class="thick">— · — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Z</td> +<td class="thick">— — · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="4"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="4"><i>Numerals.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1</td> +<td class="thick">· — — — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2</td> +<td class="thick">· · — — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>3</td> +<td class="thick">· · · — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>4</td> +<td class="thick">· · · · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>5</td> +<td class="thick">· · · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>6</td> +<td class="thick">— · · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>7</td> +<td class="thick">— — · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>8</td> +<td class="thick">— — — · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>9</td> +<td class="thick">— — — — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>0</td> +<td class="thick">— — — — —</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="3" style="margin-left: 10%;" summary="Punctuation"> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"><i>Punctuation.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Period</td> +<td class="thick">· · · · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Comma</td> +<td class="thick">· — · — · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Interrogation</td> +<td class="thick">· · — — · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hyphen or dash</td> +<td class="thick">— · · · · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Parenthesis (before and after the words)</td> +<td class="thick">— · — — · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Quotation mark (beginning and ending)</td> +<td class="thick">· — · · — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Exclamation</td> +<td class="thick">— — · · — —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Apostrophe</td> +<td class="thick">· — — — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Semicolon</td> +<td class="thick">— · — · — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Colon</td> +<td class="thick">— — — · · ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bar indicating fraction</td> +<td class="thick">— · · — ·</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Underline (before and after the word or words it is wished to underline)</td> +<td class="thick">· · — — · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Double dash (between preamble and address, between address and body +of message, between body of message and signature, and immediately before +a fraction)</td> +<td class="thick">— · · · —</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cross</td> +<td class="thick">· — · — ·</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<p class="title">Visual Signaling: in General.</p> + +<p><b>21.</b> Methods of visual signaling are divided as follows:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) By flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight (without +shutter.) (General Service Code.)</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) By heliograph, flash lantern, or searchlight (with shutter.) +(General Service Code.)</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page329" name="page329"></a>(p. 329)</span> (<i>c</i>) By Ardois. (General Service Code.)</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) By hand flags or by stationary semaphore. (Two-arm semaphore +Code.)</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) By preconcerted signals with Coston lights, rockets, bombs, Very +pistols, small arms, guns, etc.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) By flag signals by permanent hoists. (International Code.)</p> + +<p><b>22.</b> The following conventional signals, with exceptions noted, will be +used in the first four classes.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" summary="Signals"> +<colgroup> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="40%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td class="center"><i>Exceptions.</i><br> Ardois and semaphore.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>End of word.</td> +<td>Interval.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>End of sentence.</td> +<td>Double interval.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>End of message.</td> +<td>Triple interval.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Signal separating preamble from address; address from text; text from signature.</td> +<td>— · · · —</td> +<td>Double interval, signature preceded also by "Sig" interval.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Acknowledgement.</td> +<td>R.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Error.</td> +<td>· · · · · · · ·</td> +<td>A.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Negative.</td> +<td>K.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Preparatory.</td> +<td>L.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Annulling.</td> +<td>N.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Affirmative.</td> +<td>P.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Interrogatory.</td> +<td>· · — — · ·</td> +<td>O.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Repeat after word.</td> +<td>Interrogatory. A (word).</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Repeat last message.</td> +<td>Interrogatory three times.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Send faster.</td> +<td>QRQ</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Send slower.</td> +<td>QRS</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cease sending.</td> +<td>QRT</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Wait a moment.</td> +<td>· — · · ·</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Execute.</td> +<td>IX, IX</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Move to your right.</td> +<td>MR</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Move to your left.</td> +<td>ML</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Move up.</td> +<td>MU</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Move down.</td> +<td>MD</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Finished (end of work).</td> +<td>· · · — · —</td> +<td>None.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class="title">Visual Signaling: By Flag (Wig-Wag), Torch, Hand Lantern, or Beam or +Searchlight (Without Shutter).</p> + +<p class="title">GENERAL SERVICE CODE.</p> + +<p><b>23.</b> For the flag used with the General Service Code there are three +motions and one position. The position is with the flag held +vertically, the signalman facing directly toward the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page330" name="page330"></a>(p. 330)</span> station +with which it is desired to communicate. The first motion (the dot) is +to the right of the sender, and will embrace an arc of 90°, starting +with the vertical and returning to it, and will be made in a plane at +right-angles to the line connecting the two stations. The second +motion (the dash) is a similar motion to the left of the sender. The +third motion (front) is downward directly in front of the sender and +instantly returned upward to the first position. Front is used to +indicate an interval.</p> + +<p><b>24.</b> The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the +shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling, +when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the +flag or torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of +the beam 90° to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar +movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically +for front.</p> + +<p><b>25.</b> To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed as +a point of reference to the motion. The lantern is most conveniently +swung out upward to the right of the footlight for a dot, to the left +for a dash, and raised vertically for front.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Note.</span>—To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at +intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the +call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In +using the searchlight without shutter throw the beam in a vertical +position and move it through an arc of 180° in a plane at right angles +to the line connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To +acknowledge a call, signal "Acknowledgment" followed by the call +letter of the acknowledging station.</p> + + +<p class="title">Signaling with Heliograph, Flash lantern, and Searchlight (With +Shutter.)</p> + +<p class="title">GENERAL SERVICE CODE.</p> + +<p><b>26.</b> The first position is to turn a steady flash on the receiving +station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use a short +flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. <span class="pagenum"><a id="page331" name="page331"></a>(p. 331)</span> The elements +of a letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals.</p> + +<p><b>27.</b> To call a station, make its call letter until acknowledged.</p> + +<p><b>28.</b> If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal A until +acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a steady flash and +adjust. When adjustment is satisfactory to the called station, it will +cut off its flash and the calling station will proceed with its +message.</p> + +<p><b>29.</b> If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror or light needs +adjustment, he will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady +flash. When the adjustment is satisfactory the receiver will cut off +his flash and the sender will resume his message.</p> + +<p><b>30.</b> To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a steady +flash.</p> + +<p class="title">SOUND SIGNALS.</p> + +<p><b>56.</b> Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet, and +drum may well be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. They +may be used with the dot and dash code.</p> + +<p>In applying the General Service Code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or +trumpet, one short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash. +With the drum, one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid +succession a dash. Although these signals can be used with a dot and +dash code, they should be so used in connection with a preconcerted or +conventional code.</p> + + +<p class="title">Signaling by Two-Arm Semaphore.</p> + +<p class="title">HAND FLAGS.</p> + +<p><b>43.</b> Signaling by the two-arm semaphore is the most rapid method of +sending spelled-out messages. It is, however, very liable to error if +the motions are slurred over or run together in an attempt to make +speed. Both arms should move rapidly and simultaneously, but there +should be a perceptible pause at the end of each letter before making +the movements for the next letter. Rapidity is secondary to accuracy. +For alphabet see pages following.</p> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page332" name="page332"></a>(p. 332)</span> + +<a id="img071" name="img071"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img071.jpg" width="350" height="567" alt="" title="Hand-signal"> +</div> + +<span class="pagenum"><a id="page333" name="page333"></a>(p. 333)</span> + +<a id="img072" name="img072"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img072.jpg" width="350" height="574" alt="" title="Hand-signal"> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page334" name="page334"></a>(p. 334)</span> <span class="smcap">Note.</span>—In making the interval the flags are crossed downward +in front of the body (just above the knees); the double interval is +the "chop-chop" signal made twice; the triple interval is "chop-chop" +signal made three times. In calling a station face it squarely and +make its call. If there is no immediate reply wave the flags over the +head to attract attention, making the call at frequent intervals. When +the sender makes "end of message" the receiver, if message is +understood, extends the flags horizontally and waves them until the +sender does the same, when both leave their stations. Care must be +taken with hand flags to hold the staffs so as to form a prolongation +of the arms.</p> + + +<p class="title">LETTER CODES.</p> + +<p class="title">INFANTRY.</p> + +<p><b>47.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" summary="Letters"> +<colgroup> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="30%"> + <col width="40%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="center bordt bordb bordr">Letter of alphabet.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordb bordr">If signaled from the rear to the firing line.</td> +<td class="center bordt bordb">If signaled from the firing line to the rear.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">AM</td> +<td class="bordr">Ammunition going forward.</td> +<td>Ammunition required.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">CCC</td> +<td class="bordr">Charge (mandatory at all times).</td> +<td>Am about to charge if no instructions to the contrary.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">CF</td> +<td class="bordr">Cease firing.</td> +<td>Cease firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">DT</td> +<td class="bordr">Double time or "rush."</td> +<td>Double time or "rush."</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">F</td> +<td class="bordr">Commence firing</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">FB</td> +<td class="bordr">Fix bayonets.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">FL</td> +<td class="bordr">Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">G</td> +<td class="bordr">Move forward.</td> +<td>Preparing to move forward.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">HHH</td> +<td class="bordr">Halt.</td> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">K</td> +<td class="bordr">Negative.</td> +<td>Negative.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">LT</td> +<td class="bordr">Left.</td> +<td>Left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">O</td> +<td class="bordr">What is the (R. N., etc.)?</td> +<td>What is the (R. N., etc.)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">(Ardois and semaphore only.)</td> +<td class="bordr">Interrogatory.</td> +<td>Interrogatory.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr thick">· · — — · ·</td> +<td class="bordr">What is the (R. N., etc.)?</td> +<td>What is the (R. N.. etc.)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">(All methods but ardois and semaphore.)</td> +<td class="bordr">Interrogatory.</td> +<td>Interrogatory.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">P</td> +<td class="bordr">Affirmative.</td> +<td>Affirmative.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page335" name="page335"></a>(p. 335)</span> RN</td> +<td class="bordr">Range.</td> +<td>Range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">RT</td> +<td class="bordr">Right.</td> +<td>Right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">SSS</td> +<td class="bordr">Support going forward.</td> +<td>Support needed.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr">SUF</td> +<td class="bordr">Suspend firing.</td> +<td>Suspend firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="bordr bordb">T</td> +<td class="bordr bordb">Target.</td> +<td class="bordb">Target.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p class="title">CAVALRY.</p> + +<p><b>48.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="General service code."> +<colgroup> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="80%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="right">AM—</td> +<td>Ammunition going forward (if signaled from the rear to the + front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Ammunition required (if signaled from the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CCC—</td> +<td>Charge (if signaled from the rear to the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>About to charge if no instructions to the contrary.(if signaled + from the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CF—</td> +<td>Cease firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">DT—</td> +<td>Double time, rush, or hurry.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">F—</td> +<td>Commence firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">FL—</td> +<td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">G—</td> +<td>Move forward (if signaled from the rear to the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Preparing to move forward (if signaled from the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">HHH—</td> +<td>Halt.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">K—</td> +<td>Negative.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LT—</td> +<td>Left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">M—</td> +<td>Bring up the horses (if signaled from front to rear).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Horses going forward (if signaled from rear to front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">O—</td> +<td>What is the (R. N., etc.) Interrogatory. (Ardois and semaphore only.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right"><span class="thick">··—··</span>—</td> +<td>What is the (R, N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">P—</td> +<td>Affirmative.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">R—</td> +<td>Acknowledgment.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RN—</td> +<td>Range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RT—</td> +<td>Right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SSS—</td> +<td>Support going forward (if signaled from the rear to the front).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Support needed (if signaled from the front.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SUF—</td> +<td>Suspend firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">T—</td> +<td>Target.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page336" name="page336"></a>(p. 336)</span> FIELD ARTILLERY.</p> + +<p><b>49.</b> For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="General service code."> +<colgroup> + <col width="25%"> + <col width="75%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="right"><span class="thick">········</span>—</td> +<td>Error. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">A—</td> +<td>Error. (Ardois and semaphore only.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AD—</td> +<td>Additional.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AKT—</td> +<td>Draw ammunition from combat train.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AL—</td> +<td>Draw ammunition from limbers.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AM—</td> +<td>Ammunition going forward.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AMC—</td> +<td>At my command.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">AP—</td> +<td>Aiming point.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">B (numerals)—</td> +<td>Battery (so many) rounds.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">BS (numerals)—</td> +<td>(Such.) Battalion station.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">BL—</td> +<td>Battery from the left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">BR—</td> +<td>Battery from the right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CCC—</td> +<td>Charge (mandatory at all times). Am about to charge if not + instructed to contrary.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CF—</td> +<td>Cease firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CS—</td> +<td>Close station.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">CT—</td> +<td>Change target.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">D—</td> +<td>Down.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">DF—</td> +<td>Deflection.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">DT—</td> +<td>Double time. Rush. Hurry.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">F—</td> +<td>Commence firing.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">FCL (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 1st piece close by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">FL—</td> +<td>Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">FOP (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 1st piece open by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">G—</td> +<td>Move forward. Preparing to move forward.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">HHH—</td> +<td>Halt. Action suspended.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">IX—</td> +<td>Execute. Go ahead. Transmit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">JI—</td> +<td>Report firing data.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">K—</td> +<td>Negative. No.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">KR—</td> +<td>Corrector.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">L—</td> +<td>Preparatory. Attention.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LCL (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 4th piece close by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LOP (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 4th piece open by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LT—</td> +<td>Left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LL—</td> +<td>Left from the left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LR—</td> +<td>Left from the right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">LE (numerals)—</td> +<td>Less (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">MD—</td> +<td>Move down.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">ML—</td> +<td>Move° to your left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">MR—</td> +<td>Move° to your right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">MU—</td> +<td>Move up.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">MO (numerals)—</td> +<td>Move (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">N—</td> +<td>Annul, cancel.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">O—</td> +<td>What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (Ardois and + semaphore only.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page337" name="page337"></a>(p. 337)</span> <span class="thick">· · — — · ·</span>—</td> +<td>What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All methods but + Ardois and semaphore.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">P—</td> +<td>Affirmative. Yes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">PS—</td> +<td>Percussion. Shrapnel.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">QRQ—</td> +<td>Send faster.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">QRS—</td> +<td>Send slower.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">QRT—</td> +<td>Cease sending.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">R—</td> +<td>Acknowledgment. Received.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RS—</td> +<td>Regimental station.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RL—</td> +<td>Right from the left.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RR—</td> +<td>Right from the right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RN—</td> +<td>Range.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">RT—</td> +<td>Right.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">S—</td> +<td>Subtract.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SCL (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 2d piece close by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SOP (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 2d piece open by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SH—</td> +<td>Shell.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SI—</td> +<td>Site.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">SSS—</td> +<td>Support needed.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">T—</td> +<td>Target.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">TCL (numericals)—</td> +<td>On 3d piece close by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">TOP (numerals)—</td> +<td>On 3d piece open by (so much).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">U—</td> +<td>Up.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="right">Y (letter)—</td> +<td>Such battery station.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page338" name="page338"></a>(p. 338)</span> CHAPTER XIII.<br> + +FIRST-AID RULES.</h2> + + +<p>The bandages and dressings contained in the first-aid packet have been +so treated as to destroy any germs thereon. Therefore, when dressing a +wound, be careful not to touch or handle that part of the dressing +which is to be applied to the wound.</p> + +<p>A sick or injured person should always be made to lie down on his +back, if practicable, as this is the most comfortable position, and +all muscles may be relaxed.</p> + +<p>All tight articles of clothing and equipment should be loosened, so as +not to interfere with breathing or the circulation of the blood. +Belts, collars, and the trousers at the waist should be opened.</p> + +<p>Don't let mere onlookers crowd about the patient. They prevent him +from getting fresh air and also make him nervous and excited.</p> + +<p>In case of injury the heart action is generally weak from shock, and +the body, therefore, grows somewhat cold. So don't remove any more +clothing than is necessary to expose the injury.</p> + +<p>Cut or rip the clothing, but don't pull it. Try to disturb the patient +as little as possible.</p> + +<p>Don't touch a wound with your fingers or a handkerchief, or with +anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wash the wound with +water, as you may infect it.</p> + +<p>Don't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) unless +ordered to do so by a doctor. While in a few cases stimulants are of +benefit, in a great many cases they do positive harm, especially where +there has been any bleeding.</p> + +<p>The heart may be considered as a pump and the arteries as a rubber +hose, which carry the blood from the heart to every part of the body. +The veins are the hose which carry the blood back to the heart. Every +wound bleeds some, but, unless a large artery or a large vein is cut, +the bleeding will stop <span class="pagenum"><a id="page339" name="page339"></a>(p. 339)</span> after a short while if the patient is +kept quiet and the first-aid dressing is bound over the wound so as to +make pressure on it.</p> + +<p>When a large artery is cut the blood gushes out in spurts every time +the heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop the flow of +blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere between the heart and the +leak.</p> + +<p>If the leak is in the arm or hand, apply pressure as in figure <a href="#img073">1</a>.</p> + +<a id="img073" name="img073"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img073.jpg" width="400" height="378" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 1.</span></p> +</div> + +<p>If the leak is in the leg, apply pressure as in figure <a href="#img074">2</a>.</p> + +<a id="img074" name="img074"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img074.jpg" width="400" height="382" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 2.</span></p> +</div> + +<p>If the leak is in the shoulder or armpit, apply pressure as in figure +<a href="#img075">3</a>.</p> + +<a id="img075" name="img075"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img075.jpg" width="350" height="412" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 3.</span></p> +</div> + +<p>The reason for this is that at the places indicated the arteries may +be pressed against a bone more easily than at any other places.</p> + +<p>Another way of applying pressure (by means of a tourniquet) is shown +in figure <a href="#img076">4</a>. Place a pad of tightly rolled cloth or paper, or any +suitable object, over the artery. Tie a bandage loosely about the +limb and then insert your bayonet, or a <span class="pagenum"><a id="page340" name="page340"></a>(p. 340)</span> stick, and twist up +the bandage until the pressure of the pad on the artery stops the +leak. Twist the bandage slowly and stop as soon as the blood ceases to +flow, in order not to bruise the flesh or muscles unnecessarily.</p> + +<a id="img076" name="img076"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img076.jpg" width="400" height="430" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 4.</span>—Improvised tourniquet.</p> +</div> + +<p>A tourniquet may cause pain and swelling of the limb, and if left on +too long may cause the limb to die. Therefore, about every half hour +or so loosen the bandage very carefully, but if the bleeding continues +pressure must be applied again. In this case apply the pressure with +the thumb for five or ten minutes, as this cuts off only the main +artery and leaves some of the smaller arteries and the veins free to +restore some of the circulation. When a tourniquet is painful it is +too tight and should be carefully loosened a little.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page341" name="page341"></a>(p. 341)</span> If the leg or arm is held upright, this also helps to reduce +the bleeding in these parts, because the heart then has to pump the +blood uphill.</p> + +<p>A broken bone is called a fracture. The great danger in the case of a +fracture is that the sharp, jagged edges of the bones may stick +through the flesh and skin, or tear and bruise the arteries, veins, +and muscles. If the skin is not broken, a fracture is not so serious, +as no germs can get in. <b>Therefore never move a person with a broken +bone until the fracture has been so fixed that the broken ends of the +bone can not move.</b></p> + +<p>If the leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and if +necessary pull upon the end firmly to get the bones in place. Then +bind the limb firmly to a splint to hold it in place. A splint may be +made of any straight, stiff material—a shingle or piece of board, a +bayonet, a rifle, a straight branch of a tree, etc. Whatever material +you use must be well padded on the side next to the limb. Be careful +never to place the bandages over the fracture, but always above and +below. (Figs. <a href="#img077">5</a>, <a href="#img078">6</a>, <a href="#img079">7</a>, <a href="#img080">8</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img077" name="img077"></a> +<div class="floatleft"> +<img src="images/img077.jpg" width="224" height="350" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 5.</span></p> +</div> + +<a id="img078" name="img078"></a> +<div class="floatright"> +<img src="images/img078.jpg" width="305" height="350" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 6.</span></p> +</div> +<p class="nofloat"> </p> + +<a id="img079" name="img079"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img079.jpg" width="400" height="106" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 7.</span></p> +</div> + +<a id="img080" name="img080"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img080.jpg" width="100" height="252" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 8.</span></p> +</div> + +<p>Many surgeons think that the method of binding a broken leg to the +well one, and of binding the arm to the body, is <span class="pagenum"><a id="page342" name="page342"></a>(p. 342)</span> the best +plan in the field as being the quickest and one that serves the +immediate purpose.</p> + +<p>With wounds about the body, the chest, and abdomen you must not meddle +except to protect them when possible, without much handling, with the +materials of the packet.</p> + + +<p class="title">FAINTING, SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION.</p> + +<p>The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat exhaustion are very +similar. The face is pale, the skin cool and moist, the <span class="pagenum"><a id="page343" name="page343"></a>(p. 343)</span> pulse +is weak, and generally the patient is unconscious. Keep the patient +quiet, resting on his back, with his head low. Loosen the clothing, +but keep the patient warm, and give stimulants (whisky, hot coffee, +tea, etc.).</p> + + +<p class="title">SUNSTROKE.</p> + +<p>In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, the skin is dry and very +hot, and the pulse is full and strong. In this case place the patient +in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make every effort to lessen +the heat in the body by cold applications to the head and surface +generally. Do not, under any circumstances, give any stimulants or hot +drinks.</p> + + +<p class="title">FREEZING AND FROSTBITE.</p> + +<p>The part frozen, which looks white or bluish white, and is cold, +should be very slowly raised in temperature by brisk but careful +rubbing in a cool place, and never near a fire. Stimulants are to be +given cautiously when the patient can <span class="pagenum"><a id="page344" name="page344"></a>(p. 344)</span> swallow, and followed +by small amounts of warm liquid nourishment. The object is to restore +the circulation of the blood and the natural warmth gradually and not +violently. Care and patience are necessary to do this.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page345" name="page345"></a>(p. 345)</span> RESUSCITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED.</p> + +<p>In the instruction of the Army in First Aid the method of +resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as described by "Schaefer," +will be taught instead of the "Sylvester Method," heretofore used. The +Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also applicable in cases +of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and of the failure of +respiration following concussion of the brain.</p> + +<p>Being under water for four or five minutes is generally fatal, but an +effort to revive the apparently drowned should always be made, unless +it is known that the body has been under water for a very long time. +The attempt to revive the patient should not be delayed for the +purpose of removing his clothes or placing him in the ambulance. Begin +the procedure as soon as he is out of the water, on the shore or in +the boat. The first and most important thing is to start artificial +respiration without delay.</p> + +<p>The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out by one +person without assistance, and because its procedure is not exhausting +to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, to continue it for +one or two hours. When it is known that a person has been under water +for but a few minutes continue the artificial respiration for at least +one and a half to two hours before considering the case hopeless. Once +the patient has begun to breathe watch carefully to see that he does +not stop again. Should the breathing be very faint, or should he stop +breathing, assist him again with artificial respiration. After he +starts breathing do not lift him nor permit him to stand until the +breathing has become full and regular.</p> + + +<p class="title">SCHAEFER METHOD.</p> + +<p>As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him face to the +ground, clasp your hands under his waist, and raise the body so any +water may drain out of the air passages while the head remains low. +(Figure <a href="#img081">9</a>.)</p> + +<a id="img081" name="img081"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img081.jpg" width="500" height="282" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 9.</span>—Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Inspiration.</p> +</div> + +<p>The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his body beyond +his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and nose do not +touch the ground. This position causes <span class="pagenum"><a id="page346" name="page346"></a>(p. 346)</span> the tongue to fall +forward of its own weight and so prevents its falling back into the +air passages. Turning the head to one side prevents the face coming +into contact with mud or water during the operation. This position +also facilitates the removal <span class="pagenum"><a id="page347" name="page347"></a>(p. 347)</span> from the mouth of foreign +bodies, such as tobacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., and favors +the expulsion of mucus, blood, vomitus, serum, or any liquid that may +be in the air passages.</p> + +<a id="img082" name="img082"></a> +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/img082.jpg" width="500" height="264" alt="" title=""> +<p><span class="smcap">Fig. 10</span>—Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Expiration.</p> +</div> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page348" name="page348"></a>(p. 348)</span> The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient's +thighs, and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, +with his thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his hands so +that the little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands are on +the pelvic bones, the object of the work is defeated; hence the bones +of the pelvis are first located in order to avoid them. The hands must +be free from the pelvis and resting on the lowest rib. By operating on +the bare back it is easier to locate the lower ribs and avoid the +pelvis. The nearer the ends of the ribs the hands are placed without +sliding off the better. The hands are thus removed from the spine, the +fingers being nearly out of sight.</p> + +<p>The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the heels +(thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the weight coming +straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy to bend the arms +at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because the muscles of the +back are stronger than the muscles of the arms.</p> + +<p>The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought from +his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. This weight +is gradually increased until at the end of the three seconds of +vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient the force is felt +to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then the weight is suddenly +removed. If there is danger of not returning the hands to the right +position again, they can remain lightly in place; but it is usually +better to remove the hands entirely. If the operator is light and the +patient an overweight adult, he can utilize over 80 per cent of his +weight by raising his knees from the ground and supporting himself +entirely on his toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly +placed on the ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner +he can work as effectively as a heavy man.</p> + +<p>A light feather or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin and held +near the nose by some one will indicate by its movements whether or +not there is a current of air going and coming with each forced +expiration and spontaneous inspiration.</p> + +<p>The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The rate +of operation should not exceed this. The lungs must be thoroughly +emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling <span class="pagenum"><a id="page349" name="page349"></a>(p. 349)</span> takes +care of itself. Pressure and release of pressure—one complete +respiration—occupies about five seconds. If the operator is alone, he +can be guided in each act by his own deep, regular respiration or by +counting or by his watch lying by his side. If comrades are present, +he can be advised by them.</p> + +<p>The duration of the efforts as artificial respiration should +ordinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any +evidences of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, or +movements. There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 minutes +in patients who will recover from electric shock, but where there is +doubt the patient should be given the benefit of the doubt. In +drowning, especially, recoveries are on record after two hours or more +of unconsciousness; hence, the Schaefer method, being easy of +operation, is more likely to be persisted in.</p> + +<p>Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and held +continuously within 3 inches of the face and nose. If other ammonia +preparations are used, they should be diluted or held farther away. +Try it on your own nose first.</p> + +<p>When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him not to +bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them might be +broken.</p> + +<p>Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while +unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot-water bottles as soon as +they can be obtained.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page350" name="page350"></a>(p. 350)</span> CHAPTER XIV.<br> + +LAWS AND REGULATIONS.</h2> + + +<h3>Section 1. General provisions.</h3> + +<p>The Army of the United States is governed by certain laws called "The +Articles of War" and certain regulations called "Army Regulations."</p> + +<p>The following list includes the offenses most often committed by +soldiers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather than +viciousness. Violations of any rule or regulation should be carefully +guarded against, since they not only subject the offender to +punishment, but also bring discredit on his comrades, his +organization, and on the military profession:</p> + +<p>1. Selling, pawning, or, through neglect, losing or spoiling any +Government property, such as uniforms, blankets, equipment, +ammunition, etc.</p> + +<p>2. Disobedience of the orders of any officer or noncommissioned +officer.</p> + +<p>3. Disrespect to an officer or noncommissioned officer.</p> + +<p>4. Absence from camp without leave.</p> + +<p>5. Absence from any drill, formation, or other duty without authority.</p> + +<p>6. Drunkenness on duty or off duty, whether in camp or when absent +either with or without leave.</p> + +<p>7. Bringing liquor into camp.</p> + +<p>8. Noisy or disorderly conduct in camp or when absent either with or +without leave.</p> + +<p>9. Entering on private property, generally for the purpose of +stealing fruit, etc.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page351" name="page351"></a>(p. 351)</span> 10. Negligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, +particularly while on guard or as a sentinel over prisoners.</p> + +<p>11. Wearing an unauthorized uniform or wearing the uniform in an +improper manner.</p> + +<p>12. Urinating in or around camp.</p> + +<p>13. Failing to salute properly.</p> + +<p>14. Disrespect or affront to a sentinel.</p> + +<p>15. Abuse or neglect of his horse.</p> + +<p>"The basic principles of the combat tactics of the different arms are +set forth in the Drill Regulations of those arms for units as high as +brigades." (<i>Preface, Field Service Regulations.</i>)</p> + +<p>"The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the +principles for training and for increasing the probability of success +in battle. In the interpretation of the regulations the spirit must be +sought. Quibbling over the minutiæ of form is indicative of failure to +grasp the spirit." (<i>Paragraph 4, Infantry Drill Regulations.</i>)</p> + +<p>Field Service Regulations govern all arms of the Army of the United +States.</p> + +<h3>Section 2. The Army of the United States.</h3> + +<p>The Army of the United States shall consist of the Regular Army, the +Volunteer Army, the Officers' Reserve Corps, the Enlisted Reserve +Corps, the National Guard while in the service of the United States, +and such other land forces as are now or may hereafter be authorized +by law. (Sec. 1, act of June 3, 1916.)</p> + + +<h3>Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned +officers.</h3> + +<p>The following are the grades of rank of officers and noncommissioned +officers:</p> + +<p>1. Lieutenant general.</p> + +<p>2. Major general.</p> + +<p>3. Brigadier general.</p> + +<p>4. Colonel.</p> + +<p>5. Lieutenant colonel.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page352" name="page352"></a>(p. 352)</span> 6. Major.</p> + +<p>7. Captain.</p> + +<p>8. First Lieutenant.</p> + +<p>9. Second lieutenant.</p> + +<p>10. Aviator, Signal Corps.</p> + +<p>11. Cadet.</p> + +<p>12. (<i>a</i>) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major, senior grade, +Coast Artillery Corps; (<i>b</i>) quartermaster sergeant, senior grade, +Quartermaster Corps; master hospital sergeant, Medical Department; +master engineer, senior grade, Corps of Engineers; master electrician, +Coast Artillery Corps; master signal electrician; band leader; (<i>c</i>) +hospital sergeant, Medical Department; master engineer, junior grade, +Corps of Engineers; engineer, Coast Artillery Corps.</p> + +<p>13. Ordnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermaster Corps; +supply sergeant, regimental.</p> + +<p>14. Sergeant major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major, junior +grade, Coast Artillery Corps; supply sergeant, battalion, Corps of +Engineers.</p> + +<p>15. (<i>a</i>) First sergeant; (<i>b</i>) sergeant, first class, Medical +Department; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; sergeant, +first class, Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first class, Signal Corps; +electrician sergeant, first class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician +sergeant, Artillery Detachment, United States Military Academy; +assistant engineer, Coast Artillery Corps; (<i>c</i>) master gunner, Coast +Artillery Corps; master gunner, Artillery Detachment, United States +Military Academy; band sergeant and assistant leader, United States +Military Academy band; assistant band leader; sergeant bugler; +electrician sergeant, second class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician +sergeant, second class, Artillery Detachment, United States Military +Academy; radio sergeant.</p> + +<p>16. Color sergeant.</p> + +<p>17. Sergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant; stable +sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps.</p> + +<p>18. Corporal.</p> + +<p>In each grade and subgrade date of commission, appointment, or warrant +determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph 9, Army Regulations, +1913.)</p> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page353" name="page353"></a>(p. 353)</span> Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers.</h3> + +<p>The insignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps, shoulder loops, +or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat) of officers are +as follows:</p> + +<ul class="none"> +<li>General: Coat of arms and two stars.</li> +<li>Lieutenant general: One large star and two smaller ones.</li> +<li>Major general: Two silver stars.</li> +<li>Brigadier general: One silver star.</li> +<li>Colonel: One silver spread eagle.</li> +<li>Lieutenant colonel: One silver leaf.</li> +<li>Major: One gold leaf.</li> +<li>Captain: Two silver bars.</li> +<li>First lieutenant: One silver bar.</li> +</ul> + +<p>The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated by chevrons worn on +the sleeve.</p> + + +<h3>Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War.</h3> + +<p class="center">(Relating to enlisted men.)</p> + +<p class="center">CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND EXPLAINED.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 110.</span> Articles 1, 2, and 29, 54 to 96, inclusive, and 104 to 109, +inclusive, shall be read and explained to every soldier at the time of +his enlistment or muster in, or within six days thereafter, and shall +be read and explained once every six months to the soldiers of every +garrison, regiment, or company in the service of the United States.</p> + + +<p class="title">DEFINITIONS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Article 1.</span> The following words when used in these articles shall be +construed in the sense indicated in this article, unless the context +shows that a different sense is intended, namely:</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a commissioned +officer;</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) The word "soldier" shall be construed as including a +noncommissioned officer, a private, or any other enlisted man;</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) The word "company" shall be understood as including a troop or +battery; and</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="page354" name="page354"></a>(p. 354)</span> (<i>d</i>) The word "battalion" shall be understood as including a +squadron.</p> + + +<p class="title">PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 2.</span> The following persons are subject to these articles and shall +be understood as included in the term "any person subject to military +law" or "persons subject to military law" whenever used in these +articles: <i>Provided</i>, That nothing contained in this act, except as +specifically provided in article 2, subparagraph (<i>c</i>), shall be +construed to apply to any person under the United States naval +jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically provided by law;</p> + +<p>(<i>a</i>) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regular Army of the +United States; all volunteers, from the dates of their muster or +acceptance into the military service of the United States; and all +other persons lawfully called, drafted, or ordered into or to duty or +for training in the said service, from the dates they are required by +the terms of the call, draft, or order to obey the same.</p> + +<p>(<i>b</i>) Cadets.</p> + +<p>(<i>c</i>) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for +service with the armies of the United States by order of the +President: <i>Provided</i>, That an officer or soldier of the Marine Corps +when so detached may be tried by military court-martial for an offense +committed against the laws for the government of the naval service +prior to his detachment, and for an offense committed against these +articles he may be tried by a naval court-martial after such +detachment ceases.</p> + +<p>(<i>d</i>) All retainers to the camp and all persons accompanying or +serving with the armies of the United States without the territorial +jurisdiction of the United States, and in times of war all such +retainers and persons accompanying or serving with the armies of the +United States in the field, both within and without the territorial +jurisdiction of the United States, though not otherwise subject to +these articles.</p> + +<p>(<i>e</i>) All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martial.</p> + +<p>(<i>f</i>) All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers' Home at +Washington, D. C.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page355" name="page355"></a>(p. 355)</span> ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 29.</span> Any soldier who, without having first received a regular +discharge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia when in the +service of the United States, or in the Navy or Marine Corps of the +United States, or in any foreign army, shall be deemed to have +deserted the service of the United States, and, where enlistment is in +one of the forces of the United States mentioned above, to have +fraudulently enlisted therein.</p> + + +<p class="title">FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 54.</span> Any person who shall procure himself to be enlisted in the +military service of the United States by means of willful +misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications for +enlistment, and shall receive pay or allowances under such enlistment, +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 55.</span> Any officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the +military service any person whose enlistment or muster in is +prohibited by law, regulations, or orders shall be dismissed from the +service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">MUSTER ROLLS—FALSE MUSTER.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 56.</span> At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery, or company the +commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer +certificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers have +been absent and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding +officer of every troop, battery, or company shall give like +certificates, stating how long absent noncommissioned officers and +private soldiers have been absent and the reasons of their absence. +Such reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in the muster rolls +opposite the names of the respective absent officers and soldiers, and +the certificates, together with the muster rolls, shall be transmitted +by the mustering officer to the Department of War as <span class="pagenum"><a id="page356" name="page356"></a>(p. 356)</span> +speedily as the distance of the place and muster will admit. Any +officer who knowingly makes a false muster of man or animal, or who +signs or directs or allows the signing of any muster roll knowing the +same to contain false muster or false statement as to the absence or +pay of an officer or soldier, or who wrongfully takes money or other +consideration on mustering in a regiment, company, or other +organization, or on signing muster rolls, or who knowingly musters as +an officer or soldier a person who is not such officer or soldier, +shall be dismissed from the service and suffer such other punishment +as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">FALSE RETURNS—OMISSION TO RENDER RETURNS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">ART. 57.</span> Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent troop, +battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the beginning of every +month, transmit, through the proper channels, to the War Department an +exact return of the same, specifying the names of the officers then +absent from their posts, with the reasons for and the time of their +absence. Every officer whose duty it is to render to the War +Department or other superior authority a return of the state of the +troops under his command, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, funds, +or other property thereunto belonging, who knowingly makes a false +return thereof shall be dismissed from the service and suffer such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. And any officer who, +through neglect or design, omits to render such return shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DESERTION.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 58.</span> Any person subject to military law who deserts or attempts to +desert the service of the United States shall, if the offense be +committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct, and, if the offense be committed at any +other time, any punishment, excepting death, that, a court-martial +may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page357" name="page357"></a>(p. 357)</span> ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 59.</span> Any person subject to military law who advises or persuades +or knowingly assists another to desert the service of the United +States shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct, and if +the offense be committed at any other time any punishment, excepting +death, that a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">ENTERTAINING A DESERTER.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 60.</span> Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier in +his command is a deserter from the military or naval service or from +the Marine Corps, retains such deserter in his command without +informing superior authority or the commander of the organization to +which the deserter belongs, shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 61.</span> Any person subject to military law who fails to repair at the +fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, or goes from the +same without proper leave, or absents himself from his command, guard, +quarters, station, or camp without proper leave, shall be punished as +a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DISRESPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT, VICE PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY +OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 62.</span> Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words +against the President, Vice President, the Congress of the United +States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or legislature of any +State, Territory, or other possession of the United States in which he +is quartered shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such other +punishment as a court-martial may direct. Any other person subject to +military law who so offends shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 63.</span> Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with +disrespect toward his superior officer shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page358" name="page358"></a>(p. 358)</span> ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 64.</span> Any person subject to military law who, on any pretense +whatsoever, strikes his superior officer, or draws or lifts up any +weapon or offers any violence against him, being in the execution of +his office, or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior +officer, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 65.</span> Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who attempts or +threatens to strike or assault, or willfully disobeys the lawful order +of a noncommissioned officer while in the execution of his office, or +uses threatening or insulting language, or behaves in an insubordinate +or disrespectful manner toward a noncommissioned officer while in the +execution of his office, shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">MUTINY OR SEDITION.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 66.</span> Any person subject to military law who attempts, to create or +who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any mutiny or sedition in any +company, party, post, camp, detachment, guard, or other command shall +suffer death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">FAILURE TO SUPPRESS MUTINY OR SEDITION.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 67.</span> Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny or +sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the same, or +knowing or having reason to believe that a mutiny or sedition is to +take place, does not without delay give information thereof to his +commanding officer shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 68.</span> All officers and noncommissioned officers have power to part +and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders among persons subject to +military law and to order officers <span class="pagenum"><a id="page359" name="page359"></a>(p. 359)</span> who take part In the same +into arrest, and other persons subject to military law who take part +in the same into arrest or confinement, as circumstances may require, +until their proper superior officer is acquainted therewith. And +whosoever, being so ordered, refuses to obey such officer or +noncommissioned officer or draws a weapon upon or otherwise threatens +or does violence to him shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">ARREST OR CONFINEMENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 69.</span> An officer charged with crime or with a serious offense under +these articles shall be placed in arrest by the commanding officer, +and in exceptional cases an officer so charged may be placed in +confinement by the same authority. A soldier charged with crime or +with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in +confinement, and when charged with a minor offense he may be placed in +arrest. Any other person subject to military law charged with crime or +with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in +confinement or in arrest, as circumstances may require; and when +charged with a minor offense such person may be placed in arrest. Any +person placed in arrest under the provisions of this article shall +thereby be restricted to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such +limits shall be enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks +his arrest or who escapes from confinement before he is set at liberty +by proper authority shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and any other person +subject to military law who escapes from confinement or who breaks his +arrest before he is set at liberty by proper authority shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION UPON CHARGES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art 70.</span> No person put in arrest shall be continued in confinement more +than eight days, or until such time as a court-martial can be +assembled. When any person is put in arrest for the purpose of trial, +except at remote military posts or stations, the officer by whose +order he is arrested shall see <span class="pagenum"><a id="page360" name="page360"></a>(p. 360)</span> that a copy of the charges on +which he is to be tried is served upon him within eight days after his +arrest, and that he is brought to trial within 10 days thereafter, +unless the necessities of the service prevent such trial; and then he +shall be brought to trial within 30 days after the expiration of said +10 days. If a copy of the charges be not served, or the arrested +person be not brought to trial, as herein required, the arrest shall +cease. But persons released from arrest, under the provisions of this +article, may be tried, whenever the exigencies of the service shall +permit, within 12 months after such release from arrest: <i>Provided</i>, +That in time of peace no person shall, against his objection, be +brought to trial before a general court-martial within a period of +five days subsequent to the service of charges upon him.</p> + + +<p class="title">REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEP PRISONERS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 71.</span> No provost marshal or commander of a guard shall refuse to +receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer +belonging to the forces of the United States, provided the officer +committing shall, at the time, deliver an account in writing, signed +by himself, of the crime or offense charged against the prisoner. Any +officer or soldier so refusing shall be punished as a court-martial +may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">REPORT OF PRISONERS RECEIVED.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 72.</span> Every commander of a guard to whose charge a prisoner is +committed shall, within 24 hours after such confinement, or as soon as +he is relieved from his guard, report in writing to the commanding +officer the name of such prisoner, the offense charged against him, +and the name of the officer committing him; and if he fails to make +such report he shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">RELEASING PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 73.</span> Any person subject to military law who, without proper +authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his charge, or who, +through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner so committed to +escape, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page361" name="page361"></a>(p. 361)</span> DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 74.</span> When any person subject to military law, except one who is +held by the military authorities to answer, or who is awaiting trial +or result of trial, or who is undergoing sentence for a crime or +offense punishable under these articles, is accused of a crime or +offense committed within the geographical limits of the States of the +Union and the District of Columbia, and punishable by the laws of the +land, the commanding officer is required, except in time of war, upon +application duly made, to use his utmost endeavor to deliver over such +accused person to the civil authorities, or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him, in order that he may be +brought to trial. Any commanding officer who upon such application +refuses or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver over +such accused person to the civil authorities or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him shall be dismissed from the +service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + +<p>When under the provisions of this article delivery is made to the +civil authorities of an offender undergoing sentence of a +court-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction, shall be held +to interrupt the execution of the sentence of the court-martial, and +the offender shall be returned to military custody, after having +answered to the civil authorities for his offense, for the completion +of the said court-martial sentence.</p> + + +<p class="title">MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 75.</span> Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before the +enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or delivers up any fort, +post, camp, guard, or other command which it is his duty to defend, or +speaks words inducing others to do the like, or casts away his arms or +ammunition, or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage, or by +any means whatsoever occasions false alarms in camp, garrison, or +quarters, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page362" name="page362"></a>(p. 362)</span> SUBORDINATES COMPELLING COMMANDER TO SURRENDER.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 76.</span> If any commander of any garrison, fort, post, camp, guard, or +other command is compelled by the officers or soldiers under his +command to give it up to the enemy or to abandon it, the officers or +soldiers so offending shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">IMPROPER USE OF COUNTERSIGN.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 77.</span> Any person subject to military law who makes known the parole +or countersign to any person not entitled to receive it according to +the rules and discipline of war, or gives a parole or countersign +different from that which he receives, shall, if the offense be +committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">FORCING A SAFEGUARD.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 78.</span> Any person subject to military law who, in time of war, +forces a safeguard shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">CAPTURED PROPERTY TO BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SERVICE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 79.</span> All public property taken from the enemy is the property of +the United States and shall be secured for the service of the United +States, and any person subject to military law who neglects to secure +such property or is guilty of wrongful appropriation thereof shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DEALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 80.</span> Any person subject to military law who buys, sells, trades, +or in any way deals in or disposes of captured or abandoned property, +whereby he shall receive or expect any profit, benefit, or advantage +to himself or to any other person directly or indirectly connected +with himself, or who fails whenever such property comes into his +possession or custody or within his control to give notice thereof to +the proper authority and to turn over such property to the proper +authority <span class="pagenum"><a id="page363" name="page363"></a>(p. 363)</span> without delay, shall, on conviction thereof, be +punished by fine or imprisonment, or by such other punishment as a +court-martial, military commission, or other military tribunal may +adjudge, or by any or all of said penalties.</p> + + +<p class="title">RELIEVING, CORRESPONDING WITH, OR AIDING THE ENEMY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 81.</span> Whosoever relieves the enemy with arms, ammunition, supplies, +money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects or holds +correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, either +directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other punishment +as a court-martial or military commission may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">SPIES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 82.</span> Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking or +acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts, +quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or +elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court-martial or by a military +commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer death.</p> + + +<p class="title">MILITARY PROPERTY—WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS, DAMAGE, OR WRONGFUL +DISPOSITION OF.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 83.</span> Any person subject to military law who willfully or through +neglect suffers to be lost, spoiled, damaged, or wrongfully disposed +of any military property belonging to the United States shall make +good the loss or damage and suffer such punishment as a court-martial +may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OF MILITARY PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 84.</span> Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of or willfully +or through neglect injures or loses any horse, arms, ammunition, +accouterments, equipments, clothing, or other property issued for use +in the military service shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DRUNK ON DUTY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 85.</span> Any officer who is found drunk on duty shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, be dismissed from <span class="pagenum"><a id="page364" name="page364"></a>(p. 364)</span> the service +and suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if +the offense be committed in time of peace he shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. Any person subject to military law, except +an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">MISBEHAVIOR OF SENTINEL.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 86.</span> Any sentinel who is found drunk or sleeping upon his post, or +who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as +a court-martial may direct; and if the offense be committed in time of +peace he shall suffer any punishment, except death, that a +court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">PERSONAL INTEREST IN SALE OF PROVISIONS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 87.</span> Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, barracks, camp, +or other place where troops of the United States may be serving who, +for his private advantage, lays any duty or imposition upon or is +interested in the sale of any victuals or other necessaries of life +brought into such garrison, fort, barracks, camp, or other place for +the use of the troops, shall be dismissed from the service and suffer +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">INTIMIDATION OF PERSONS BRINGING PROVISIONS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 88.</span> Any person subject to military law who abuses, intimidates, +does violence to, or wrongfully interferes with any person bringing +provisions, supplies, or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or +quarters of the forces of the United States shall suffer such +punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">GOOD ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 89.</span> All persons subject to military law are to behave themselves +orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the march; and any person +subject to military law who commits any waste or spoil, or willfully +destroys any property whatsoever <span class="pagenum"><a id="page365" name="page365"></a>(p. 365)</span> (unless by order of his +commanding officer), or commits any kind of depredation or riot, shall +be punished as a court-martial may direct. Any commanding officer who, +upon complaint made to him, refuses or omits to see reparation made to +the party injured, in so far as the offender's pay shall go toward +such reparation, as provided for in article 105, shall be dismissed +from the service or otherwise punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">PROVOKING SPEECHES OR GESTURES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 90.</span> No person subject to military law shall use any reproachful +or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any person subject +to military law who offends against the provisions of this article +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">DUELING.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 91.</span> Any person subject to military law who fights or promotes or +is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or who having +knowledge of a challenge sent or about to be sent, fails to report the +fact promptly to the proper authority, shall, if an officer, be +dismissed from the service or suffer such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct; and if any other person subject to military +law shall suffer such punishment as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title">MURDER—RAPE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 92.</span> Any person subject to military law who commits murder or rape +shall suffer death or imprisonment for life, as a court-martial may +direct; but no person shall be tried by court-martial for murder or +rape committed within the geographical limits of the States of the +Union and the District of Columbia in time of peace.</p> + + +<p class="title">VARIOUS CRIMES.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 93.</span> Any person subject to military law who commits manslaughter, +mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery, larceny, embezzlement, perjury, +assault with intent to commit any felony, or assault with intent to do +bodily harm, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page366" name="page366"></a>(p. 366)</span> FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 94.</span> Any person subject to military law who makes or causes to be +made any claim against the United States or any officer thereof, +knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or</p> + +<p>Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil or +military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim against +the United States or any officer thereof, knowing such claim to be +false or fraudulent; or</p> + +<p>Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United +States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance or +payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or</p> + +<p>Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, or procures, or advises +the making or use of, any writing or other paper, knowing the same to +contain any false or fraudulent statements; or</p> + +<p>Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or any officer thereof, makes, or procures, or advises the making of, +any oath to any fact or to any writing or other paper, knowing such +oath to be false; or</p> + +<p>Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, or procures, or +advises the forging or counterfeiting of any signature upon any +writing or other paper, or uses, or procures, or advises the use of +any such signature, knowing the same to be forged or counterfeited; or</p> + +<p>Who, having charge, possession, custody, or control of any money or +other property of the United States, furnished or intended for the +military service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes to be +delivered, to any person having authority to receive the same, any +amount thereof less than that for which he receives a certificate or +receipt; or</p> + +<p>Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying the +receipt of any property of the United States furnished or intended for +the military service thereof, makes or delivers to any person such +writing, without having full <span class="pagenum"><a id="page367" name="page367"></a>(p. 367)</span> knowledge of the truth of the +statements therein contained and with intent to defraud the United +States; or</p> + +<p>Who steals, embezzles, knowingly and willfully misappropriates, +applies to his own use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly sells or +disposes of any ordnance, arms, equipments, ammunition, clothing, +subsistence stores, money, or other property of the United States +furnished or intended for the military service thereof; or</p> + +<p>Who knowingly purchases or receives in pledge for any obligation or +indebtedness from any soldier, officer, or other person who is a part +of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, arms, +equipment, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or other property +of the United States, such soldier, officer, or other person not +having lawful right to sell or pledge the same;</p> + +<p>Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, or +by such other punishment as a court-martial may adjudge, or by any or +all of said penalties. And if any person, being guilty of any of the +offenses aforesaid while in the military service of the United States, +receives his discharge or is dismissed from the service, he shall +continue to be liable to be arrested and held for trial and sentence +by a court-martial in the same manner and to the same extent as if he +had not received such discharge nor been dismissed.</p> + + +<p class="title">CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND GENTLEMAN.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 95.</span> Any officer or cadet who is convicted of conduct unbecoming +an officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service.</p> + + +<p class="title">GENERAL ARTICLE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 96.</span> Though not mentioned in these articles, all disorders and +neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, all +conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military service, and +all crimes or offenses not capital of which persons subject to +military law may be guilty shall be taken cognizance of by a general +or special or summary court-martial, according to the nature and +degree of the offense, and punished at the discretion of such court.</p> + + +<p class="title"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page368" name="page368"></a>(p. 368)</span> DISCIPLINARY POWERS OF COMMANDING OFFICERS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 104.</span> Under such regulations as the President may prescribe, and +which he may from time to time revoke, alter, or add to, the +commanding officer of any detachment, company, or higher command may, +for minor offenses not denied by the accused, impose disciplinary +punishments upon persons of his command without the intervention of a +court-martial, unless the accused demands trial by court-martial.</p> + +<p>The disciplinary punishments authorized by this article may include +admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges, extra fatigue, and +restriction to certain specified limits, but shall not include +forfeiture of pay or confinement under guard. A person punished under +authority of this article who deems his punishment unjust or +disproportionate to the offense may, through the proper channel, +appeal to the next superior authority, but, may in the meantime be +required to undergo the punishment adjudged. The commanding officer +who imposes the punishment, his successor in command, and superior +authority shall have power to mitigate or remit any unexecuted portion +of the punishment. The imposition and enforcement of disciplinary +punishment under authority of this article for any act or omission +shall not be a bar to trial by court-martial for a crime or offense +growing out of the same act or omission; but the fact that a +disciplinary punishment has been enforced may be shown by the accused +upon trial, and when so shown shall be considered in determining the +measure of punishment to be adjudged in the event of a finding of +guilty.</p> + + +<p class="title">REDRESS OF INJURIES TO PERSON OR PROPERTY.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 105.</span> Whenever complaint is made to any commanding officer that +damage has been done to the property of any person or that his +property has been wrongfully taken by persons subject to military law, +such complaint shall be investigated by a board consisting of any +number of officers from one to three, which board shall be convened by +the commanding officer and shall have, for the purpose of such +investigation, power to summon witnesses and examine them upon oath or +affirmation, to receive depositions or other documentary evidence, +and to assess the damages sustained <span class="pagenum"><a id="page369" name="page369"></a>(p. 369)</span> against the responsible +parties. The assessment of damages made by such board shall be subject +to the approval of the commanding officer, and in the amount approved +by him shall be stopped against the pay of the offenders. And the +order of such commanding officer directing stoppages herein authorized +shall be conclusive on any disbursing officer for the payment by him +to the injured parties of the stoppages so ordered.</p> + +<p>Where the offenders can not be ascertained but the organization or +detachment to which they belong is known, stoppages to the amount of +damages inflicted may be made and assessed in such proportion as may +be deemed just upon the individual members thereof who are shown to +have been present with such organization or detachment at the time the +damages complained of were inflicted, as determined by the approved +findings of the board.</p> + + +<p class="title">ARREST OF DESERTERS BY CIVIL OFFICIALS.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 106.</span> It shall be lawful for any civil officer having authority +under the laws of the United States, or of any State, Territory, +District, or possession of the United States, to arrest offenders, +summarily to arrest a deserter from the military service of the United +States and deliver him into the custody of the military authorities of +the United States.</p> + + +<p class="title">SOLDIERS TO MAKE GOOD TIME LOST.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 107.</span> Every soldier who in an existing or subsequent enlistment +deserts the service of the United States or without proper authority +absents himself from his organization, station, or duty for more than +one day, or who is confined for more than one day under sentence, or +while awaiting trial and disposition of his case, if the trial results +in conviction, or through the intemperate use of drugs or alcoholic +liquor, or through disease or injury the result of his own misconduct, +renders himself unable for more than one day to perform duty, shall be +liable to serve, after his return to a full-duty status, for such +period as shall, with the time he may have served prior to such +desertion, unauthorized absence, confinement, <span class="pagenum"><a id="page370" name="page370"></a>(p. 370)</span> or inability to +perform duty, amount to the full term of that part of his enlistment +period which he is required to serve with his organization before +being furloughed to the Army Reserve.</p> + + +<p class="title">SOLDIERS—SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 108.</span> No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the military service +of the United States, shall be discharged from said service without a +certificate of discharge, signed by a field officer of the regiment or +other organization to which the enlisted man belongs or by the +commanding officer when no such field officer is present; and no +enlisted man shall be discharged from said service before his term of +service has expired, except by order of the President, the Secretary +of War, the commanding officer of a department, or by a sentence of a +general court-martial.</p> + + +<p class="title">OATH OF ENLISTMENT.</p> + +<p><span class="smcap">Art. 109.</span> At the time of his enlistment every soldier shall take the +following oath or affirmation: "I, ————, do solemnly swear (or +affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance to the United +States of America; that I will serve them honestly and faithfully +against all their enemies whomsoever; and that I will obey the orders +of the President of the United States and the orders of the officers +appointed over me, according to the Rules and Articles of War." This +oath or affirmation may be taken before any officer.</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page371" name="page371"></a>(p. 371)</span> CHAPTER XV.<br> + +ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY.</h2> + + +<h3>COMMON WORDS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Common words."> +<colgroup> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="60%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Afternoon (this)</td> +<td>Cet après-midi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Army (an)</td> +<td>Une armée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bandage</td> +<td>Un bandage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bath</td> +<td>Un bain.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bayonet</td> +<td>Une baïonnette.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bed</td> +<td>Un lit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Blanket</td> +<td>Une couverture.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Boy</td> +<td>Un garçon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bullet</td> +<td>Une balle,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un pruneau (soldier slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Camp</td> +<td>Un camp,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un campement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cartridge</td> +<td>Une cartouche.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Child</td> +<td>Un enfant,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une enfant.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cook</td> +<td>Un cuisinier,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un cuistot (slang),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une cuisinière, (fem.).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dance</td> +<td>Un bal,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une danse (one dance).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dark</td> +<td>Obscur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Day</td> +<td>Un jour.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dead</td> +<td>Mort.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Deserter</td> +<td>Un déserteur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Door</td> +<td>Une porte.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Farm</td> +<td>Une ferme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Firearms</td> +<td>Des armes à feu.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field gun</td> +<td>Une pièce de campagne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Flag</td> +<td>Un drapeau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un étendard (standard).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page372" name="page372"></a>(p. 372)</span> Forest</td> +<td>Une forêt,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un bois (woods),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un boqueteau (clump of trees).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Friend</td> +<td>Un ami,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une amie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Girl</td> +<td>Une jeune fille.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Guide</td> +<td>Un guide.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Gun</td> +<td>Un fusil.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Halt!</td> +<td>Halte!</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hand</td> +<td>Une main.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hat</td> +<td>Un chapeau,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un képi (cap),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un casque (helmet),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un feutre (campaign hat).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Head</td> +<td>La tête.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Headquarters</td> +<td>Le quartier-général.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Horse</td> +<td>Un cheval.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Interpreter</td> +<td>Un interprète.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Knife</td> +<td>Un couteau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Lake</td> +<td>Un lac.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Man</td> +<td>Un homme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Meat</td> +<td>De la viande.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Name</td> +<td>Un nom.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Night</td> +<td>La nuit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Noon</td> +<td>Midi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Machine gun</td> +<td>Une mitrailleuse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Mess call</td> +<td>La soupe.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Password</td> +<td>Le mot de passe.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Pay</td> +<td>Le prêt (enlisted men),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>La solde (officers).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Prisoner</td> +<td>Un prisonnier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Recruit</td> +<td>Une recrue,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un bleu (slang),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un bleuet (slang),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un blanc-bec (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Restaurant</td> +<td>Un restaurant,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un café.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Road</td> +<td>Un chemin,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une route.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Retreat</td> +<td>La retraite.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page373" name="page373"></a>(p. 373)</span> Reveille</td> +<td>Le réveil,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>La diane</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Saber</td> +<td>Un sabre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Saddle</td> +<td>Une selle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shoe</td> +<td>Des chaussures (shoes in general),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Des souliers (low shoes),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Des bottines (high shoes),</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Des brodequins (marching shoes).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shotgun</td> +<td>Un fusil de chasse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sick</td> +<td>Malade.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Soup</td> +<td>Une soupe,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un potage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Spy</td> +<td>Un espion.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Supper</td> +<td>Le souper.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sword</td> +<td>Une épée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Tent</td> +<td>Une tente.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shelter tent</td> +<td>Une tente-abri.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>NUMERALS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Numerals."> +<colgroup> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="60%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>One</td> +<td>Un, une.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Two</td> +<td>Deux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Three</td> +<td>Trois.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Four</td> +<td>Quatre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Five</td> +<td>Cinq (pronounce <i>sank</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Six</td> +<td>Six (pronounce <i>cease</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Seven</td> +<td>Sept (pronounce <i>set</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eight</td> +<td>Huit (pronounce <i>weet</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Nine</td> +<td>Neuf.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ten</td> +<td>Dix (pronounce <i>deess</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eleven</td> +<td>Onze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Twelve</td> +<td>Douze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thirteen</td> +<td>Treize.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fourteen</td> +<td>Quatorze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fifteen</td> +<td>Quinze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sixteen</td> +<td>Seize.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Seventeen</td> +<td>Six-sept.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eighteen</td> +<td>Dix-huit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Nineteen</td> +<td>Dix-neuf.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Twenty</td> +<td>Vingt (pronounce <i>vant</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Twenty-one</td> +<td>Vingt-et-un.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page374" name="page374"></a>(p. 374)</span> Thirty</td> +<td>Trente.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thirty-one</td> +<td>Trente-et-un.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thirty-two</td> +<td>Trente-deux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Forty</td> +<td>Quarante.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fifty</td> +<td>Cinquante.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sixty</td> +<td>Soixante.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Seventy</td> +<td>Soixante-dix.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Seventy-one</td> +<td>Soixante-et-onze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Seventy-two</td> +<td>Soixante-douze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eighty</td> +<td>Quatre-vingts.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eighty-one</td> +<td>Quatre-vingt-un.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ninety</td> +<td>Quatre-vingt-dix.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ninety-one</td> +<td>Quatre-vingt-onze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>One hundred</td> +<td>Cent.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>One hundred and one</td> +<td>Cent un.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Two hundred</td> +<td>Deux cents.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Two hundred and one</td> +<td>Deux cent un.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>One thousand</td> +<td>Mille.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Two thousand</td> +<td>Deux mille.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>One thousand one hundred</td> +<td>Mille cent; onze cents.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thousands of soldiers</td> +<td>Des milliers de soldats.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A million</td> +<td>Un million.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Two million men</td> +<td>Deux millions d'hommes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A score</td> +<td>Une vingtaine.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>About forty men</td> +<td>Une quarantaine d'hommes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hundreds of men</td> +<td>Des centaines d'hommes.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Currency."> +<colgroup> + <col width="25%"> + <col width="75%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>1 cent</td> +<td>Un sou; cinq centimes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>10 cents</td> +<td>Dix sous; cinquante centimes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>20 cents (about)</td> +<td>Un francs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1 dollar</td> +<td>Cinq francs.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; bank notes of +50 francs, 100 francs, and higher. The gold pieces are probably +replaced by bank notes now.)</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Measures."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>1 meter (1.0936 yards)</td> +<td>Un mètre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1 kilometer (0.62138 mile)</td> +<td>Un kilomètre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page375" name="page375"></a>(p. 375)</span> 1 league (2.48552 miles)</td> +<td>Une lieue.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1 hectare (2.4711 acres)</td> +<td>Un hectare.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1 gram (15.43239 grain Troy)</td> +<td>Un gramme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>1 kilogram (2.204621 pounds avoirdupois)</td> +<td>Un kilogramme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>220.46 pounds avoirdupois</td> +<td>Un quintal; 100 kilos.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois</td> +<td>Une tonne; 1,000 kilos.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p><span class="smcap">Note.</span>—For all ordinary purposes, the "Kilomètre" = <sup>5</sup>/<sub>8</sub> of a + mile; the "Centimètre" = <sup>4</sup>/<sub>10</sub> of an inch.</p> + +<p>(Coal is sold by the <i>tonne</i>; grain and hay by the <i>quintal</i>. Dix +quintaux de blé, de foin=10 quintals of grain, of hay.)</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Measures."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>1.0567 quart (liquid)</td> +<td>Un litre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>26.417 gallons</td> +<td>Un hectolitre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>0.9081 quart (dry)</td> +<td>Un litre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>2.8379 bushels</td> +<td>Un hectolitre.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>(The <i>litre</i>, which is the principal unit of both fluid and dry +measures, is the contents of 1 cubic <i>décimètre</i> (décimètre = <sup>1</sup>/<sub>10</sub> +mètre).)</p> + + +<h3>DAYS, MONTHS, AND SEASONS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Days, months, and seasons."> +<colgroup> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="60%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Sunday</td> +<td>Dimanche.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Monday</td> +<td>Lundi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Tuesday</td> +<td>Mardi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Wednesday</td> +<td>Mercredi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thursday</td> +<td>Jeudi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Friday</td> +<td>Vendredi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Saturday</td> +<td>Samedi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>January</td> +<td>Janvier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>February</td> +<td>Février.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>March</td> +<td>Mars.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>April</td> +<td>Avril.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>May</td> +<td>Mai.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>June</td> +<td>Juin.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>July</td> +<td>Juillet.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>August</td> +<td>Août (pronounced <i>oo</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>September</td> +<td>Septembre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>October</td> +<td>Octobre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>November</td> +<td>Novembre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>December</td> +<td>Décembre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The seasons</td> +<td>Les saisons.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Winter</td> +<td>L'hiver.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page376" name="page376"></a>(p. 376)</span> Spring</td> +<td>Le printemps.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Summer</td> +<td>L'été.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fall</td> +<td>L'automne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Year</td> +<td>Un an; une année.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Month</td> +<td>Un mois.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Week</td> +<td>Une semaine.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Day</td> +<td>Un jour.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hour</td> +<td>Une heure.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Minute</td> +<td>Une minute.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Second</td> +<td>Une seconde.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>COMMON PHRASES</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Common phrases."> +<colgroup> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="40%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Good morning, sir, madam, miss.</td> +<td>Bonjour, monsieur, madame,</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Good afternoon</td> +<td>mademoiselle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Good evening, sir</td> +<td>Bonsoir, monsieur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Good night, sir</td> +<td>Bonne nuit, monsieur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Pardon me</td> +<td>Pardon; je vous demande pardon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Don't mention it</td> +<td>Je vous en prie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How do you do?</td> +<td>Comment allez-vous?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Comment ça va?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Comment vous portez-vous?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Very well, thank you</td> +<td>Très bien, merci.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Je vais bien, merci.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Ca va bien, merci.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Je me porte bien, merci.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Do not trouble yourself</td> +<td>Ne vous gênez pas.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Ne vous dérangez pas.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am very glad to see you</td> +<td>Je suis bien aise de vous voir.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Je suis content (heureux) de vous voir.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>What time is it?</td> +<td>Quelle heure est-il?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>It is 10 o'clock</td> +<td>Il est dix heures.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Take care; look out</td> +<td>Prenez garde.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Do not bother me</td> +<td>Ne me dérangez pas.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Stop here</td> +<td>Arrêtez-vous ici.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Does Mr. — live here?</td> +<td>M. — demeure-t-il ici?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Come in</td> +<td>Entrez.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>You are very kind</td> +<td>Vous êtes très aimable.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>At what time does the first train start?</td> +<td>A quelle heure part le premier train?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page377" name="page377"></a>(p. 377)</span> What is the name of this station?</td> +<td>Comment s'appelle cette station (gare)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I want</td> +<td>Je désire..Je veux (stronger).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I do not want it.</td> +<td>Je n'en veux pas.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Let me know what I owe you.</td> +<td>Dites-moi ce que je vous dois.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are you not mistaken?</td> +<td>Ne faites-vous pas erreur?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Ne vous trompez-vous pas?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Please give me</td> +<td>Veuillez me donner.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Move on.</td> +<td>Avancez.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Circulez. (Policeman.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I want something to eat.</td> +<td>Je désire quelque chose à manger.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where is it?</td> +<td>Où est-ce?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Go and look for it.</td> +<td>Allez le chercher.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Take this letter to the post office.</td> +<td>Portez cette lettre à la poste.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How much is it?</td> +<td>Combien?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Combien cela coûte-t-il?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>It is dear.</td> +<td>C'est cher.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Thank you.</td> +<td>Merci.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Je vous en remercie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Don't mention it.</td> +<td>Il n'y a pas de quoi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>De rien.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Allow me to present my friend.</td> +<td>Permettez-moi de vous présenter mon ami ——.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am glad to make your acquaintance.</td> +<td>Je suis enchanté de faire votre connaissance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How far is it?</td> +<td>A quelle distance est-ce?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>What can I do for you?</td> +<td>Que puis-je faire pour vous?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Do you speak English?</td> +<td>Parlez-vous anglais?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I do not speak French very well.</td> +<td>Je ne parle pas très bien le français.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where do you come from?</td> +<td>D'où venez-vous?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How did you come?</td> +<td>Comment êtes-vous venu?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>On foot, in a carriage, in an auto, by rail, by boat, +on a bicycle, horseback, in an aeroplane.</td> +<td>A pied, en voiture, en auto, en chemin de fer, +en bateau, à bicyclette, à cheval, en aéroplane.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>MILITARY TITLES, RANKS, AND GRADES.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Titles, ranks and grades."> +<colgroup> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="60%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>General officers</td> +<td>Les officers généraux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>General staff</td> +<td>L'état-major général.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field officers</td> +<td>Les officiers supérieurs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Company officers</td> +<td>Les officiers subalternes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page378" name="page378"></a>(p. 378)</span> Enlisted men</td> +<td>Les hommes de troupe.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Noncommissioned officers</td> +<td>Les sous-officiers.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Private soldiers</td> +<td>Les simples soldats.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Colonel</td> +<td>Le colonel (addressed<a id="footnotetag15" name="footnotetag15"></a><a href="#footnote15" title="Go to footnote 15"><span class="smaller">[15]</span></a> as "Mon colonel").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Major</td> +<td>Le commandant ("Mon commandant").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Captain</td> +<td>Le capitaine ("Mon capitaine").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Le piston (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>First lieutenant</td> +<td>Le lieutenant (en premier) ("Mon lieutenant").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Second lieutenant</td> +<td>Le sous-lieutenant ("Mon lieutenant").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A doctor</td> +<td>Un (médecin) major.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A sergeant</td> +<td>Un sergent (addressed as "Sergent").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un maréchal des logis (mounted service).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A corporal</td> +<td>Un caporal ("Caporal").</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un brigadier (mounted service).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A private</td> +<td>Un simple soldat.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A body of troops</td> +<td>Une troupe.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>French troops</td> +<td>Des troupes françaises.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A wagoner</td> +<td>Un conducteur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un fourgonnier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A horseshoer</td> +<td>Un maréchal-ferrant.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A saddler</td> +<td>Un sellier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A signaler</td> +<td>Un signaleur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A deserter</td> +<td>Un déserteur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A soldier of Infantry</td> +<td>Un fantassin.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cavalry</td> +<td>Un cavalier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Artillery</td> +<td>Un artilleur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Engineers</td> +<td>Un sapeur-mineur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Quartermaster Corps.</td> +<td>Un homme de l'intendance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Signal Corps</td> +<td>Un homme du corps des signaux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hospital Corps</td> +<td>Un infirmier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Line of Communications</td> +<td>Un garde des voies et communications, G. V. C.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Infantry</td> +<td>L'infanterie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page379" name="page379"></a>(p. 379)</span> Cavalry</td> +<td>La cavalerie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Artillery</td> +<td>L'artillerie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Engineers</td> +<td>Le génie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Signal Corps</td> +<td>Le corps des signaux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hospital Corps</td> +<td>Le corps de santé.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Le service de santé.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Aviation Corps</td> +<td>Le corps d'aviation.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>MILITARY TERMS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Military terms."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>The headquarters</td> +<td>Le quartier général.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The train</td> +<td>Le train des équipages.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Railway service</td> +<td>Le service des chemins de fer.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Telegraph service</td> +<td>Le service des télégraphes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Rural guards</td> +<td>La gendarmerie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Des gendarmes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A paymaster</td> +<td>Un trésorier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A chaplain</td> +<td>Un aumônier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An army</td> +<td>Une armée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>General So-and-so's army</td> +<td>L'armée—(l'armée Foch).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An army corps</td> +<td>Un corps d'armée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A division</td> +<td>Une division.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A brigade</td> +<td>Une brigade.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A regiment</td> +<td>Un régiment.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A battalion</td> +<td>Un bataillon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A company</td> +<td>Une compagnie.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A platoon</td> +<td>Un peloton.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A section</td> +<td>Une section.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A squad</td> +<td>Une escouade.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A detachment</td> +<td>Un détachement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Barracks</td> +<td>Une caserne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A camp</td> +<td>Un camp (more or less permanent).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un campement (temporary).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A cantonment</td> +<td>Un cantonnement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Line</td> +<td>(Une) ligne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Column</td> +<td>(Une) colonne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>As skirmishers</td> +<td>En tirailleurs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Follow me, as skirmishers</td> +<td>A moi, en tirailleurs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Scouts</td> +<td>Des éclaireurs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A patrol</td> +<td>Une patrouille.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The advance guard</td> +<td>L'avant-garde.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page380" name="page380"></a>(p. 380)</span> The rear guard</td> +<td>L'arrière-garde.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Flankers</td> +<td>Des flanc-gardes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The main body</td> +<td>Le gros (de la colonne).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Combat train</td> +<td>Le train de combat.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field train</td> +<td>Le train régimentaire.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Outposts</td> +<td>Des avant-postes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cossack posts</td> +<td>Des avant-postes à la cosaque.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A sentinel</td> +<td>Une sentinelle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un factionnaire.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>On post</td> +<td>En faction.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>De faction.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Guard mounting</td> +<td>La garde montante (also <i>new guard</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The sentinel challenges: "Halt! Who's there?"</td> +<td>La sentinelle crie: "Halte! Qui vive?"</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The answer is: "France"</td> +<td>La réponse est: "France."</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Advance with the countersign</td> +<td>Avance au ralliement.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>(The person challenged gives the <i>mot d'ordre</i>, which is the name + of some general, and the sentinel replies with the <i>mot de ralliement</i>, + which is the name of a battle or a city.)</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Military terms."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Go away; you can't pass</td> +<td>(Passe) au large.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Halt, or I fire</td> +<td>Halte, ou je fais feu.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Put down your arms</td> +<td>Déposez vos armes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hands up!</td> +<td>Levez les bras.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Face about</td> +<td>(Faites) demi-tour.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Come here</td> +<td>Venez ici.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A spy</td> +<td>Un espion.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A flag of truce</td> +<td>Un drapeau blanc.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un drapeau parlementaire.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>UNIFORMS, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Equipment."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Clothing</td> +<td>Les vêtements, l'habillement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Change your clothes</td> +<td>Changez de vêtements.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Overcoat (worn by French infantry)</td> +<td>Une capote.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Trousers</td> +<td>Un pantalon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Breeches</td> +<td>Une culotte.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shirt</td> +<td>Une chemise.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Blouse</td> +<td>Un dolman, une vareuse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page381" name="page381"></a>(p. 381)</span> Cap</td> +<td>Un képi.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Campaign hat (United States)</td> +<td>Un (chapeau de) feutre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Helmet</td> +<td>Un casque (de tranchée).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cap with visor worn by French off duty.</td> +<td>Un bonnet de police.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Tam-o'-shanter worn by Alpine chasseurs.</td> +<td>Un béret.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shoes in general.</td> +<td>Des chaussures.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Service shoes</td> +<td>Des brodequins.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Leggins</td> +<td>Des guêtres.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Wrap putties</td> +<td>Des bandes molletières.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Leather putties</td> +<td>Des houseaux (or housseaux).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Full-dress uniform</td> +<td>La grande tenue.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dress uniform</td> +<td>La petite tenue.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field uniform</td> +<td>La tenue de campagne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Overcoat (mounted men)</td> +<td>Un manteau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Overcoat (officers)</td> +<td>Un manteau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un manteau-capote.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fatigue coat</td> +<td>Le bourgeron.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fatigue trousers (overalls)</td> +<td>Un pantalon de treillis.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fatigue uniform</td> +<td>La tenue de corvée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Magazine rifle</td> +<td>Un fusil à répétition.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The barrel</td> +<td>Le canon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The bolt</td> +<td>Le verrou.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The ramrod</td> +<td>La baguette.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The butt</td> +<td>La crosse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The gun sling</td> +<td>La bretelle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The trigger</td> +<td>La détente.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Rear sight</td> +<td>La hausse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Front sight</td> +<td>Le guidon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A bayonet</td> +<td>Une baïonnette.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Rosalie (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ball cartridge</td> +<td>Une cartouche à balle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Blank cartridge</td> +<td>Une cartouche à blanc.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dummy cartridge</td> +<td>Une fausse cartouche.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Belt</td> +<td>Un ceinturon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cartridge box</td> +<td>Une cartouchière.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>First-aid packet</td> +<td>Un paquet de pansement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The pack</td> +<td>Le sac.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A haversack</td> +<td>Un étui-musette.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Canteen</td> +<td>Un bidon.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page382" name="page382"></a>(p. 382)</span> Tin cup</td> +<td>Un quart.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Mess can</td> +<td>Une gamelle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Equipment</td> +<td>L'équipement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Compass</td> +<td>Une boussole.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field glasses</td> +<td>Des jumelles (de campagne).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Whistle</td> +<td>Un sifflet.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Revolver</td> +<td>Un revolver.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>QUESTIONS ABOUT THE ROADS, ETC.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Questions."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Pardon me, sir, do you speak English?</td> +<td>Pardon, monsieur, parlez-vous anglais?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>(German, French, Italian, Russian)</td> +<td>(Allemand, français, italien, russe.)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>All right, then show me, please, the road to ——</td> +<td>Très bien, alors indiquez-moi, je vous prie, le chemin de ——.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is it far from here?</td> +<td>Est-ce loin d'ici?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How long does it take to go there?</td> +<td>Combien faut-il de temps pour y aller?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How many kilometers?</td> +<td>Combien de kilomètres?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is there a short cut? (road)</td> +<td>Y a-t-il un chemin de traverse?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is there a short cut? (trail)</td> +<td>Y a-t-il un sentier plus court?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where does this road go?</td> +<td>Où mène cette route?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are we on the right road to go to ——?</td> +<td>Sommes-nous sur le bon chemin pour aller à ——?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Does this road go through Compiègne?</td> +<td>Cette route passe-t-elle par Compiègne?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shall we find any villages on our road?</td> +<td>Trouverons-nous des villages sur notre chemin?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there any other roads going to ——?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il d'autres chemins pour aller à ——?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is this road in good condition?</td> +<td>Cette route est-elle en bon état?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there hills?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il des côtes (des coteaux)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are they steep?</td> +<td>Sont-elles raides?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Does the road go through open or wooded country?</td> +<td>La route, traverse-t-elle un pays découvert ou boisé?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can we get through with artillery?</td> +<td>Peut-on passer avec de l'artillerie?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can we get through with heavily loaded wagons (auto trucks)?</td> +<td>Peut-on passer avec de grosses voitures chargées (avec des camions-automobiles)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page383" name="page383"></a>(p. 383)</span> Is this road practicable for artillery?</td> +<td>Cette route est-elle praticable pour l'artillerie?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can infantry march on the sides of the roads?</td> +<td>L'infanterie peut-elle marcher sur les côtés de la route?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is the ground practicable</td> +<td>Le terrain est-il praticable?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is the ground marshy</td> +<td>Le terrain est-il marécageux?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>What is the nature of the ground</td> +<td>Quelle est la nature du sol?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Does the telegraph line follow this road as far as X?</td> +<td>Est-ce que la ligne télégraphique (le télégraphe) suit cette route jusqu'à X?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where does your railroad come from?</td> +<td>D'où vient votre chemin de fer?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where does it go to?</td> +<td>Où va-t-il?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is it single tracked or double tracked the whole way?</td> +<td>Est-il à une voie ou à deux voies sur tout le parcours?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where is the station? Is it far?</td> +<td>Où est la gare? Est-elle loin d'ici?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>How can the river be crossed?</td> +<td>Comment peut-on passer la rivière?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is there a bridge? a ferry?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il un pont? un bac?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there fords?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il des passages à gué (des gués)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can we get boats?</td> +<td>Peut-on trouver des bateaux?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>In that wood are there clearings, ravines, brooks, marshes, pools?</td> +<td>Dans ce bois, y a-t-il des clairières, des ravins, des ruisseaux, des mares?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there any places near here for watering horses?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il des endroits près d'ici pour abreuver les chevaux?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is the water good?</td> +<td>L'eau est-elle bonne?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is this water drinkable?</td> +<td>Est-ce de l'eau potable?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there watering troughs?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il des abreuvoirs?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Where is there good grass for the animals?</td> +<td>Où y a-t-il de bonne herbe pour les animaux?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can we buy provisions?</td> +<td>Peut-on acheter des vivres?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Is there a field where we can camp?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il un champ où nous pouvons camper (installer notre campement)?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can you give me any information about the enemy?</td> +<td>Pouvez-vous me donner des renseignements sur l'ennemi?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Please find me a guide who knows the country?</td> +<td>Veuillez me trouver un guide qui connaisse le pays.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>We are going to follow this trail (tracks).</td> +<td>Nous allons suivre cette piste.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Crossroads</td> +<td>Un carrefour.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3><span class="pagenum"><a id="page384" name="page384"></a>(p. 384)</span> TOWNS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Questions."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Where is the post-office and telegraph office?</td> +<td>Où est le bureau des postes et télégraphes?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The postmaster</td> +<td>Le directeur des postes et télégraphes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The mail</td> +<td>Le courrier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>When was the last mail distributed?</td> +<td>A quelle heure a-t-on fait la dernière distribution?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>General delivery</td> +<td>Poste restante.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Are there any letters for ——?</td> +<td>Y a-t-il des lettres pour ——?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I should like to send a telegram.</td> +<td>Je voudrais expédier un télégramme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Have you received a telegram for ——?</td> +<td>Avez-vous reçu un télégramme (une dépêche) pour ——?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A telegraph instrument</td> +<td>Un appareil (télégraphique).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can you tell me where the mayor's office is?</td> +<td>Pourriez-vous me dire où se trouve la mairie?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I couldn't tell you; I am a stranger here.</td> +<td>Je ne saurais vous renseigner; je ne connais pas la ville.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Good morning, sir, are you the mayor?</td> +<td>Bonjour, Monsieur, êtes-vous le maire?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>No, sir, I am his assistant.</td> +<td>Non, Monsieur, je suis son adjoint.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I should like to speak to the mayor himself.</td> +<td>Je voudrais parler au maire lui-même.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Listen, sir. A detachment will arrive here to-morrow morning at 5 o'clock.</td> +<td>Écoutez, monsieur. Un détachement arrivera, ici demain matin à cinq heures.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Can you arrange to lodge 2,000 men for two days?</td> +<td>Pouvez-vous prendre des dispositions pour loger 2,000 hommes pendant deux jours?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A policeman</td> +<td>Un sergent de ville, un agent de la paix.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>RAILROADS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Railroads."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>The station agent</td> +<td>Le chef de gare.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The conductor</td> +<td>Le conducteur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The engineer</td> +<td>Le mécanicien.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The fireman</td> +<td>Le chauffeur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The brakeman</td> +<td>Le serre-freins.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page385" name="page385"></a>(p. 385)</span> The telegraph operator</td> +<td>Le télégraphiste.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An engine</td> +<td>Une locomotive.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Passenger cars</td> +<td>Des wagons (de voyageurs).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Flat cars</td> +<td>Des trucks.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Box cars</td> +<td>Des wagons de marchandises.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Stock cars</td> +<td>Des wagons à bestiaux.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An express train</td> +<td>Un train express.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A through train</td> +<td>Un train direct.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A local train</td> +<td>Un train omnibus.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A passenger train</td> +<td>Un train de voyageurs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A freight train</td> +<td>Un train de marchandises.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>To entrain the troops</td> +<td>Embarquer les troupes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>To detrain the troops</td> +<td>Débarquer les troupes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>To get on a train</td> +<td>Monter dans un train.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>To get off a train</td> +<td>Descendre d'un train.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The railroad track</td> +<td>La voie (ferrée).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A side track</td> +<td>Une voie de garage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A ticket</td> +<td>Un billet.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A round trip ticket</td> +<td>Un billet d'aller et retour.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>One way only</td> +<td>Aller seulement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The ticket window</td> +<td>Le guichet.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>At what time does the Paris train start?</td> +<td>A quelle heure part le train pour Paris?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>It is late (15 minutes late).</td> +<td>Il est en retard (de quinze minutes).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Do we have to change cars?</td> +<td>Faut-il changer de train?</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The train stops</td> +<td>Le train s'arrête.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>All aboard!</td> +<td>En voiture!</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The train starts</td> +<td>Le train s'ébranle.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>RATIONS AND FOOD.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Food."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Provisions (in general)</td> +<td>Les vivres.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The ration</td> +<td>La ration.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fresh beef</td> +<td>De la viande fraîche.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bacon</td> +<td>Du lard.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Flour</td> +<td>De la farine.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Soft bread</td> +<td>Du pain frais.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Hard bread (crackers)</td> +<td>Du biscuit.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Field bread</td> +<td>Du pain de guerre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page386" name="page386"></a>(p. 386)</span> Corn meal</td> +<td>De la farine de maïs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Coffee</td> +<td>Du café.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sugar</td> +<td>Du sucre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Eggs</td> +<td>Des œufs.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Chickens</td> +<td>Des poulets.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Potatoes</td> +<td>Des pommes de terre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Peas</td> +<td>Des pois.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>String beans</td> +<td>Des haricots verts.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Vegetables (in general)</td> +<td>Des légumes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An apple</td> +<td>Une pomme.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A pear</td> +<td>Une poire.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A cherry</td> +<td>Une cerise.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A peach</td> +<td>Une pêche.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cheese</td> +<td>Du fromage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Wine</td> +<td>Du vin.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Beer</td> +<td>De la bière.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A glass of beer</td> +<td>Un bock.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am hungry.</td> +<td>J'ai faim.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bring me something to eat, please.</td> +<td>Apportez-moi quelque chose à manger, s'il vous plaît.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am thirsty.</td> +<td>J'ai soif.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Please give me, a glass of water.</td> +<td>Veuillez me donner un verre d'eau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak.</td> +<td>Garçon, je désire un bifteck.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Some black coffee</td> +<td>Du café noir.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Coffee with milk</td> +<td>Du café au lait.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Rolls</td> +<td>Des petits pains.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Crescent rolls</td> +<td>Des croissants.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>HOSPITALS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Hospitals."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>A field hospital</td> +<td>Une ambulance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A hospital (in general)</td> +<td>Un hôpital (plural: des hôpitaux).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A dressing station</td> +<td>Un poste de secours.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A first-aid dressing</td> +<td>Un pansement sommaire.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Red Cross</td> +<td>La Croix Rouge.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A doctor</td> +<td>Un médecin.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un docteur.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A surgeon</td> +<td>Un chirurgien.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A military surgeon</td> +<td>Un (médecin) major.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page387" name="page387"></a>(p. 387)</span> Assistant surgeon</td> +<td>Un aide-major.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A male nurse, hospital corps man</td> +<td>Un infirmier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A female nurse</td> +<td>Une infirmière.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>An ambulance</td> +<td>Une ambulance.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A stretcher (litter)</td> +<td>Un brancard.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A litter bearer</td> +<td>Un brancardier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A roll of bandages</td> +<td>Un rouleau de bandage.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A first-aid packet</td> +<td>Un paquet de pansement.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A wounded man</td> +<td>Un blessé.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am sick</td> +<td>Je suis malade.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I have a fever</td> +<td>J'ai la fièvre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I have chills and fever</td> +<td>J'ai des frissons de fièvre.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I am constipated</td> +<td>Je suis constipé.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>I have diarrhea</td> +<td>J'ai la diarrhée.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>POINTS OF THE COMPASS.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Compass."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>North</td> +<td>Le nord.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>South</td> +<td>Le sud.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>East</td> +<td>L'est.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>West</td> +<td>L'ouest.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Northeast</td> +<td>Le nord-est.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Southeast</td> +<td>Le sud-est.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Northwest</td> +<td>Le nord-ouest.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Southwest</td> +<td>Le sud-ouest.</td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<h3>TRENCH WARFARE.</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Compass."> +<colgroup> + <col width="50%"> + <col width="50%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td>Trench warfare</td> +<td>La guerre des tranchées.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>La guerre de position.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>La guerre de taupe (<i>moles</i>).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Trench</td> +<td>Une tranchée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Communication trench</td> +<td>Un boyau (de communication).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>The parapet</td> +<td>Le parapet.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A loophole</td> +<td>Un créneau.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une meurtrière.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A grenade</td> +<td>Une grenade.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>A grenadier, bomber</td> +<td>Un grenadier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Barbed wire</td> +<td>Du fil de fer barbelé.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Barbed wire entanglement</td> +<td>Un réseau de fils de fer barbelés.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="pagenum"><a id="page388" name="page388"></a>(p. 388)</span> Trench mortar</td> +<td>Un mortier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un crapouillaud.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td><i>Minenwerfer</i> (German).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Bomb</td> +<td>Une bombe.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Howitzer</td> +<td>Un obusier.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Machine gun</td> +<td>Une mitrailleuse.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Fieldpiece</td> +<td>Une pièce de campagne.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>75 millimeter field gun</td> +<td>Une pièce de soixante-quinze.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Siege gun</td> +<td>Une pièce de siège.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>120 long</td> +<td>Cent vingt long.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>120 short</td> +<td>Cent vingt court.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>77 (German)</td> +<td>Soixante-dix-sept (allemand).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shell</td> +<td>Un obus.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une marmite (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un colis à domicile (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Shrapnel</td> +<td>Un shrapnell.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un rageur (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Periscope</td> +<td>Un périscope.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Trench knife</td> +<td>Un couteau de tranchée.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Dugout</td> +<td>Un abri dans les tranchées.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un cagibi (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une cagna (slang)</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Un gourbi (slang).</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> </td> +<td>Une guitoune (slang).</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<a id="notep388" name="notep388"></a> +<p><span class="smcap">Note.</span>—In addressing an officer of grade superior to his own, an + officer must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing a + junior uses the title of the grade only. Thus: A major to a + colonel says "Mon colonel," but the colonel to the major would + say "Commandant."</p> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page389" name="page389"></a>(p. 389)</span> APPENDIX.</h2> +<a id="appendix" name="appendix"></a> + +<p class="title">FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT.</p> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" summary="Last will."> +<colgroup> + <col width="5%"> + <col width="40%"> + <col width="20%"> + <col width="25%"> + <col width="10%"> +</colgroup> +<tr> +<td class="center" colspan="5">Last Will and Testament<br> OF</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="3">————</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>I,</i></td> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="valign"><i>of</i></td> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"><i>do make, publish, and declare this my last will and testament.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><i>I give, devise, and bequeath to</i><a id="footnotetag16" name="footnotetag16"></a><a href="#footnote16" title="Go to footnote 16"><span class="smaller">[16]</span></a></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"><i>And I do give, devise, and bequeath all the rest and residue of</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><i>my estate, both real and personal, to</i></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><i>heirs and assigns forever</i>,<a id="footnotetag17" name="footnotetag17"></a><a href="#footnote17" title="Go to footnote 17"><span class="smaller">[17]</span></a></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><span class="pagenum"><a id="page390" name="page390"></a>(p. 390)</span> <i>I hereby appoint</i></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="4" class="bordb"> </td> +<td class="right valign"><i>executor</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="3" class="valign"><i>of this my last will and testament, and I desire that</i></td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"><i>shall not be required to give bond for the performance of the + duties of that office</i>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><i>Witness my hand this</i><a id="footnotetag18" name="footnotetag18"></a><a href="#footnote18" title="Go to footnote 18"><span class="smaller">[18]</span></a></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"><i>day of</i></td> +<td class="bordb valign"> </td> +<td colspan="2">, <i>191</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="3"> </td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2" class="valign"><i>Signed, published, and declared by</i></td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +<tr> +<td colspan="5" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="5"><i>the above-named testator, as and for his last will and testament, + in the presence of us, who, at his request and in his + presence, and in the presence of each other, have subscribed + our names as witnesses thereto.</i><a id="footnotetag19" name="footnotetag19"></a><a href="#footnote19" title="Go to footnote 19"><span class="smaller">[19]</span></a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td>Residence:</td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td>Residence:</td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td colspan="3" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan="2"> </td> +<td>Residence:</td> +<td colspan="2" class="bordb"> </td> +</tr> +</table> + + + + +<h2><span class="pagenum"><a id="page391" name="page391"></a>(p. 391)</span> INDEX.</h2> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Abbreviations on maps, +<a href="#page323">323</a></li> +<li>Advance guards, +<a href="#page210">210</a></li> +<li>Advance party of advance guard, +<a href="#page211">211</a></li> +<li>Advice to riflemen, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li>Aiming rifle, +<a href="#page235">235</a></li> +<li>Alignments, +<a href="#page235">235</a></li> +<li>Ammunition, +<a href="#page020">20</a></li> +<li>Arm signals, +<a href="#page154">154</a></li> +<li>Arms (<i>see</i> Field kit), +<a href="#page030">30</a></li> +<li>Articles of War:</li> + <li class="add1em">Extracts from, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> + <li class="add1em">Reading, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> +<li>Assembling Infantry equipment, +<a href="#page033">33</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Ball cartridges, +<a href="#page020">20</a></li> +<li>Battle sight, +<a href="#page020">20</a></li> +<li><a id="bayonetmanual" name="bayonetmanual"></a> +Bayonet, manual of:</li> +<li class="add1em">Attacks, +<a href="#page075">75</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Combat, +<a href="#page084">84</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Combined movements, +<a href="#page083">83</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Defenses, +<a href="#page079">79</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Fencing exercises, +<a href="#page085">85</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Foot movements, +<a href="#page085">85</a></li> +<li class="add1em">General rules, +<a href="#page085">85</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Instruction without bayonet, +<a href="#page081">81</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Instruction with rifle, +<a href="#page074">74</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Instruction without rifle, +<a href="#page074">74</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Suggestions for fencing at will, +<a href="#page093">93</a></li> +<li>Blanket roll, +<a href="#page033">33</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Calling the shot, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li>Care of feet, +<a href="#page047">47</a></li> +<li>Care of rifle, +<a href="#page021">21</a></li> +<li>Company, school of:</li> +<li class="add1em">Close order drill—</li> +<li class="add2em">Alignments, +<a href="#page146">146</a></li> +<li>Cossack post, +<a href="#page215">215</a></li> +<li>Course in small-arms firing, +<a href="#page243">243</a></li> +<li>Courtesies in conversation, +<a href="#page018">18</a></li> +<li>Courtesy, military, +<a href="#page013">13</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>English-French vocabularies, +<a href="#page371">371</a></li> +<li>Equipment:</li> +<li class="add1em">Assembling, +<a href="#page033">33</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Part of, +<a href="#page033">33</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Facings, +<a href="#page061">61</a></li> +<li>Feet, care of, +<a href="#page047">47</a></li> +<li>Field kit, +<a href="#page030">30</a></li> +<li>Field service:</li> +<li class="add1em">Outposts—</li> +<li class="add1em">Combat, +<a href="#page181">181</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Principles of Infantry training, +<a href="#page180">180</a></li> +<li>Fire:</li> +<li class="add1em">Control, +<a href="#page192">192</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Direction, +<a href="#page191">191</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Discipline, +<a href="#page192">192</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Ranges, +<a href="#page193">193</a></li> +<li>Firing with rests, +<a href="#page243">243</a></li> +<li>First-aid rules, +<a href="#page338">338</a></li> +<li>Flank guards, +<a href="#page213">213</a></li> +<li>Forage ration, +<a href="#page041">41</a></li> +<li>Form for last will and testament, +<a href="#page389">389</a></li> +<li>French-English vocabulary, +<a href="#page371">371</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li><a id="guardduty" name="guardduty"></a> +Guard duty (extracts from Manual of Interior):</li> +<li class="add1em">Classification of interior guards, +<a href="#page255">255</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Color sentinels, +<a href="#page271">271</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Commander of the guard, +<a href="#page258">258</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Compliments from guards, +<a href="#page284">284</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Corporal of the guard, +<a href="#page266">266</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Countersigns, +<a href="#page282">282</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Details, +<a href="#page255">255</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Flags, +<a href="#page296">296</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Guard mounting, +<a href="#page259">259</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Formal, +<a href="#page256">256</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Informal, +<a href="#page256">256</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Guard patrols, +<a href="#page283">283</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Guarding prisoners, +<a href="#page289">289</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Introduction, +<a href="#page254">254</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Musician of the guard, +<a href="#page271">271</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Orderlies, +<a href="#page271">271</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Orders for sentinels, +<a href="#page273">273</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Paroles, +<a href="#page282">282</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Prisoners, +<a href="#page286">286</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Privates of the guard, +<a href="#page273">273</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Relieving the old guard, +<a href="#page306">306</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Retreat gun, +<a href="#page298">298</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Reveille gun, +<a href="#page298">298</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rosters, +<a href="#page255">255</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Sergeant of the guard, +<a href="#page263">263</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Watchmen, +<a href="#page283">283</a></li> +<li>Guard mounting, +<a href="#page298">298</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Formal, +<a href="#page299">299</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Informal, +<a href="#page297">297</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Hygiene, personal, +<a href="#page043">43</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Individual cooking, +<a href="#page030">30</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Recipes, +<a href="#page034">34</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>International Morse code, +<a href="#page327">327</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Laws governing Army, +<a href="#page350">350</a></li> +<li><a id="lineobservation" name="lineobservation"></a> +Line of observation, +<a href="#page102">102</a></li> +<li>Loadings and firings, +<a href="#page095">95</a></li> +<li>Loyalty, +<a href="#page011">11</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Manual of arms, +<a href="#page030">30</a></li> +<li>Manual of the Bayonet. (<i>See</i> <a href="#bayonetmanual">Bayonet</a>, Manual of.)</li> +<li>Manual of Interior Guard Duty. (<i>See</i> <a href="#guardduty">Guard duty</a>.)</li> +<li>Manual of Tent Pitching. (<i>See</i> <a href="#tentpitchingmanual">Tent Pitching</a>, Manual of.)</li> +<li>Maps:</li> +<li class="add1em">Abbreviations, +<a href="#page323">323</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Contours, +<a href="#page313">313</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Datum plane, +<a href="#page314">314</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Directions, +<a href="#page309">309</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Distances, +<a href="#page312">312</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Ground forms, +<a href="#page316">316</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Hachures, +<a href="#page314">314</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Making (sketching), +<a href="#page322">322</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Orienting, +<a href="#page311">311</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Reading, +<a href="#page313">313</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Ridges, +<a href="#page317">317</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Scales, +<a href="#page313">313</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Signs, +<a href="#page323">323</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Slopes, +<a href="#page315">315</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Stream lines, +<a href="#page319">319</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Valleys, +<a href="#page316">316</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Vertical intervals, +<a href="#page315">315</a></li> +<li>Marching, +<a href="#page223">223</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Preparation for, +<a href="#page223">223</a></li> +<li>Markmanship, preliminary training, +<a href="#page233">233</a></li> +<li>Message blanks, +<a href="#page235">235</a></li> +<li>Metal fouling solution for cleaning rifle, +<a href="#page026">26</a></li> +<li>Military courtesy, +<a href="#page013">13</a></li> +<li>Morse, international code. (<i>See</i> <a href="#generalservicecode">General service code</a>.)</li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>National anthem, +<a href="#page017">17</a></li> +<li>Noncommissioned officers:</li> +<li class="add1em">Corporal of guard, +<a href="#page352">352</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Insignia, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Precedence, +<a href="#page352">352</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rank, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Sergeant of guard, +<a href="#page352">352</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Oath of enlistment, 9</li> +<li>Obedience, 9</li> +<li>Observation, line of. (<i>See</i> <a href="#lineobservation">Line of observation</a>.)</li> +<li>Officers:</li> +<li class="add1em">Insignia, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Precedence, +<a href="#page352">352</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rank, +<a href="#page353">353</a></li> +<li>Orienting maps, +<a href="#page311">311</a></li> +<li>Outguards, +<a href="#page215">215</a></li> +<li>Outposts, +<a href="#page213">213</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Pack, +<a href="#page035">35</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Close, +<a href="#page035">35</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Open, +<a href="#page035">35</a></li> +<li>Patrolling, +<a href="#page199">199</a></li> +<li>Patrols:</li> +<li class="add1em">Advance guards, +<a href="#page210">210</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Outposts, +<a href="#page213">213</a></li> +<li>Personal hygiene, +<a href="#page043">43</a></li> +<li>Pickets, +<a href="#page215">215</a></li> +<li>Pistol:</li> +<li class="add1em">Cleaning, +<a href="#page104">104</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Practice, +<a href="#page104">104</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li><a id="rations" name="rations"></a> +Rations:</li> +<li class="add1em">Carried on person, +<a href="#page037">37</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Cooking, +<a href="#page037">37</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Emergency, +<a href="#page041">41</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Forage, +<a href="#page041">41</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Grain, +<a href="#page042">42</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Kinds of, +<a href="#page038">38</a></li> +<li>Reading maps, +<a href="#page309">309</a></li> +<li>Rear guards, +<a href="#page312">312</a></li> +<li>Regulations governing Army, +<a href="#page350">350</a></li> +<li>Rifle:</li> +<li class="add1em">Aiming, +<a href="#page242">242</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Care of, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Cleaning, +<a href="#page242">242</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Coordination in firing, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Trenches, +<a href="#page219">219</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Salutes:</li> +<li class="add1em">Hand, +<a href="#page014">14</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rifle, +<a href="#page014">14</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Saber, +<a href="#page015">15</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Sentinels, +<a href="#page016">16</a></li> +<li>Saluting, +<a href="#page013">13</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rules governing, +<a href="#page015">15</a></li> +<li>Scales on maps, +<a href="#page324">324</a></li> +<li>Soda solution for cleaning rifle, +<a href="#page026">26</a></li> +<li>Soldier, school of:</li> +<li class="add1em">Duties of instructor, +<a href="#page057">57</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Eyes right or left, +<a href="#page061">61</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Facings, +<a href="#page061">61</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Instruction without arms, +<a href="#page058">58</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Manual of arms, +<a href="#page030">30</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Position of the soldier on attention, +<a href="#page059">59</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Rifle salute, +<a href="#page071">71</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Salute with the hand, +<a href="#page014">14</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Salute with saber, +<a href="#page016">16</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Steps and marchings, +<a href="#page061">61</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Back step, +<a href="#page064">64</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Change step, +<a href="#page065">65</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Quick time, +<a href="#page062">62</a></li> +<li class="add2em">Side step, +<a href="#page063">63</a></li> +<li class="add2em">The half step, +<a href="#page063">63</a></li> +<li class="add2em">To halt, +<a href="#page064">64</a></li> +<li class="add2em">To march by the flank, +<a href="#page064">64</a></li> +<li class="add2em">To march to the rear, +<a href="#page064">64</a></li> +<li class="add2em">To mark time, +<a href="#page063">63</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The bayonet, +<a href="#page075">75</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The inspection, +<a href="#page072">72</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The rests, +<a href="#page070">70</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To dismiss the squad, +<a href="#page072">72</a></li> +<li>Solutions for cleaning rifle, +<a href="#page026">26</a></li> +<li>Squad, school of:</li> +<li class="add1em">Alignments, +<a href="#page146">146</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Instruction, +<a href="#page074">74</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Kneeling and lying down, +<a href="#page074">74</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Loadings and firings, +<a href="#page095">95</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Observation, +<a href="#page102">102</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The assembly, +<a href="#page172">172</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The oblique march, +<a href="#page158">158</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The use of cover, +<a href="#page101">101</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To cease firing, +<a href="#page100">100</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To deploy as skirmishers, +<a href="#page169">169</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To fire at will, +<a href="#page099">99</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To fire by clip, +<a href="#page099">99</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To fire by volley, +<a href="#page098">98</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To form squad, +<a href="#page142">142</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To load, +<a href="#page096">96</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To set the sight, +<a href="#page098">98</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To stack and take arms, +<a href="#page073">73</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To suspend firing, +<a href="#page099">99</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To take intervals and distance, +<a href="#page065">65</a></li> +<li class="add1em">To unload, +<a href="#page097">97</a></li> +<li>Steps and marchings, +<a href="#page061">61</a></li> +<li>Subsistence. (<i>See</i> <a href="#rations">Rations</a>.)</li> +<li>Surplus kit, +<a href="#page032">32</a></li> +<li>Swabbing solution for cleaning rifle, +<a href="#page026">26</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Target practice:</li> +<li class="add1em">Advice to riflemen, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Aiming rifle, +<a href="#page235">235</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Battle sight, +<a href="#page236">236</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Calling the shot, +<a href="#page240">240</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Coordination, +<a href="#page241">241</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Firing positions, +<a href="#page238">238</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Preliminary training in markmanship, +<a href="#page233">233</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Sight adjustment, +<a href="#page233">233</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Table of sight corrections, +<a href="#page235">235</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Targets, +<a href="#page244">244</a></li> +<li class="add1em">The course in small-arms firing, +<a href="#page243">243</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Trigger squeeze, +<a href="#page237">237</a></li> +<li>Targets, +<a href="#page244">244</a></li> +<li><a id="tentpitchingmanual" name="tentpitchingmanual"></a> +Tent Pitching, Manual of:</li> +<li class="add1em">Conical wall tent, +<a href="#page177">177</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Folding tents, +<a href="#page178">178</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Pitch all type Army tents (except shelter and conical wall tents), +<a href="#page176">176</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Striking tents, +<a href="#page178">178</a></li> +<li>Trigger squeeze, +<a href="#page237">237</a></li> +<li>Two-arm semaphore code, +<a href="#page231">231</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Uniforms, +<a href="#page027">27</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Care of, +<a href="#page027">27</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Disposing of, +<a href="#page027">27</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Dress, +<a href="#page028">28</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Full dress, +<a href="#page028">28</a></li> +<li class="add1em">How worn, +<a href="#page028">28</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Service, +<a href="#page028">28</a></li> +<li>Use of cover, +<a href="#page101">101</a></li> +</ul> + +<ul class="index"> +<li>Visual signaling (<i>see</i> Signals):</li> +<li class="add1em">In general, +<a href="#page328">328</a></li> +<li class="add1em">Flag, +<a href="#page329">329</a></li> +<li>Vocabulary—English-French, +<a href="#page391">391</a></li> +</ul> + +<h2>Footnotes</h2> + +<p><a id="footnote1" name="footnote1"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag1" class="smaller">1</a> To be omitted if rifle is provided with spare-part +container.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote2" name="footnote2"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag2" class="smaller">2</a> In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910, with canteen +cover, dismounted, may be issued.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote3" name="footnote3"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag3" class="smaller">3</a> One saddle for each troop and the saddles for the 2 color +sergeants are to be provided with a guidon stirrup.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote4" name="footnote4"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag4" class="smaller">4</a> In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910, with canteen +cover, dismounted, may be issued.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote5" name="footnote5"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag5" class="smaller">5</a> In campaign or simulated campaign, when an organization +is restricted to its prescribed field-train transportation, surplus +kits, overcoats, and sweaters are stored on the line of communications +or other designated place with the permanent camp equipment of the +organization.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote6" name="footnote6"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag6" class="smaller">6</a> The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Cavalry Drill +Regulations, 1916.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote7" name="footnote7"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag7" class="smaller">7</a> Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal +of execution in each case is made as prescribed in par. 990.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote8" name="footnote8"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag8" class="smaller">8</a> In signals marked thus (combination signals) the +preparatory signal consists of more than one element; the signal of +execution follows the last element of the preparatory signal.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote9" name="footnote9"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag9" class="smaller">9</a> See pars. 239, 333. When a gait signal is added to the +preparatory command the resulting signal is given as a combination +signal.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote10" name="footnote10"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag10" class="smaller">10</a> The traverse should be at least 6 feet wide instead of 3 +feet, as shown in figure <a href="#img057">5</a>.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote11" name="footnote11"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag11" class="smaller">11</a> Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol" appears +the regulation applies with equal force to the revolver, if applicable +to that weapon.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote12" name="footnote12"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag12" class="smaller">12</a> The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Small Arms Firing +Manual, 1913.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote13" name="footnote13"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag13" class="smaller">13</a> The instructor should take cognizance of the fact that +the proper aiming point is often affected by the personal and fixed +peculiarities of the firer, and if unable to correct such +abnormalities permit firer to direct sight at such point as promises +effective results.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote14" name="footnote14"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag14" class="smaller">14</a> The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a grade on the +active list of the Navy of the United States on Mar. 3, 1899. By +section 7 of the act of Mar. 3, 1899, the nine junior rear admirals +are authorized to receive the pay and allowances of a brigadier +general of the Army.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote15" name="footnote15"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag15" class="smaller">15</a> See <a href="#notep388">note</a>, p. 388.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote16" name="footnote16"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag16" class="smaller">16</a> Here insert specific legacies and devises.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote17" name="footnote17"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag17" class="smaller">17</a> If the residue of the estate is given to several +persons, add here the manner in which it is to be divided, as "in +equal shares as tenants in common."</p> + +<p><a id="footnote18" name="footnote18"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag18" class="smaller">18</a> If the will is made in Nevada, or if the testator has real estate +in that State, he should affix his seal.</p> + +<p><a id="footnote19" name="footnote19"></a> +<a href="#footnotetag19" class="smaller">19</a> If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it is wholly in +the handwriting of the testator, there should be seven witnesses and a +notary at the "sealing up." If wholly in his handwriting, no +formalities are required.</p> + +<p class="p4 tn">Transcriber's note: Obvious printer's errors have been corrected. +Hyphenation and accentuation have been standardised, all other +inconsistencies are as in the original. The author's spelling has been +maintained.</p> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of Cavalry +of the Army of the United States 1917 to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for +Cavalry Instruction and Training + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED *** + +***** This file should be named 35139-h.htm or 35139-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/1/3/35139/ + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/35139-h/images/img001.jpg b/35139-h/images/img001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c18362 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img001.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img002.jpg b/35139-h/images/img002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..53713f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img002.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img003.jpg b/35139-h/images/img003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e2edcf --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img003.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img004.jpg b/35139-h/images/img004.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..60ac1cb --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img004.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img005.jpg b/35139-h/images/img005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..254114b --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img005.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img006.jpg b/35139-h/images/img006.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e1570a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img006.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img007.jpg b/35139-h/images/img007.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..db54d92 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img007.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img008.jpg b/35139-h/images/img008.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b42406d --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img008.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img009.jpg b/35139-h/images/img009.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..77d7f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img009.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img010.jpg b/35139-h/images/img010.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbf3a38 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img010.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img011.jpg b/35139-h/images/img011.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..56a2e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img011.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img012.jpg b/35139-h/images/img012.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4997b7b --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img012.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img013.jpg b/35139-h/images/img013.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2487120 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img013.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img014.jpg b/35139-h/images/img014.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..719375f --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img014.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img015.jpg b/35139-h/images/img015.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..922ee63 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img015.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img016.jpg b/35139-h/images/img016.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d277b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img016.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img017.jpg b/35139-h/images/img017.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bb944e --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img017.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img018.jpg b/35139-h/images/img018.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc311a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img018.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img019.jpg b/35139-h/images/img019.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..99f74e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img019.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img020.jpg b/35139-h/images/img020.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..251da4c --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img020.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img021.jpg b/35139-h/images/img021.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..909ff56 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img021.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img022.jpg b/35139-h/images/img022.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ba4a28 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img022.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img023.jpg b/35139-h/images/img023.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0da8c29 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img023.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img024.jpg b/35139-h/images/img024.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d6f390 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img024.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img025.jpg b/35139-h/images/img025.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c11a2b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img025.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img026.jpg b/35139-h/images/img026.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..421829e --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img026.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img027.jpg b/35139-h/images/img027.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b8261ea --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img027.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img028.jpg b/35139-h/images/img028.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..744a1a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img028.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img029.jpg b/35139-h/images/img029.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d43cb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img029.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img030.jpg b/35139-h/images/img030.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2708083 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img030.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img031.jpg b/35139-h/images/img031.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad17798 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img031.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img032.jpg b/35139-h/images/img032.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0cbb6ad --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img032.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img033.jpg b/35139-h/images/img033.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1453854 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img033.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img034.jpg b/35139-h/images/img034.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..79a17dc --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img034.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img035.jpg b/35139-h/images/img035.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..39cd311 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img035.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img036.jpg b/35139-h/images/img036.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aca844c --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img036.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img037.jpg b/35139-h/images/img037.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..40f0bd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img037.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img038.jpg b/35139-h/images/img038.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4eb7a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img038.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img039.jpg b/35139-h/images/img039.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f91426f --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img039.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img040.jpg b/35139-h/images/img040.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba6e031 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img040.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img041.jpg b/35139-h/images/img041.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b81fef --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img041.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img042.jpg b/35139-h/images/img042.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5101231 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img042.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img043.jpg b/35139-h/images/img043.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..18d9759 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img043.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img044.jpg b/35139-h/images/img044.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c78113 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img044.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img045.jpg b/35139-h/images/img045.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..909d0a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img045.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img046.jpg b/35139-h/images/img046.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..38cedc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img046.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img047.jpg b/35139-h/images/img047.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc11474 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img047.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img048.jpg b/35139-h/images/img048.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0491fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img048.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img049.jpg b/35139-h/images/img049.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..48ac557 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img049.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img050.jpg b/35139-h/images/img050.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..335b1c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img050.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img051.jpg b/35139-h/images/img051.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2741b70 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img051.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img052.jpg b/35139-h/images/img052.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1dacf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img052.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img053.jpg b/35139-h/images/img053.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f35da6 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img053.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img054.jpg b/35139-h/images/img054.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..885b316 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img054.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img055.jpg b/35139-h/images/img055.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..40c8234 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img055.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img056.jpg b/35139-h/images/img056.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e865ca --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img056.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img057.jpg b/35139-h/images/img057.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..769ed5b --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img057.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img058.jpg b/35139-h/images/img058.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..843f587 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img058.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img059.jpg b/35139-h/images/img059.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe5e6b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img059.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img060.jpg b/35139-h/images/img060.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8fe040 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img060.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img061.jpg b/35139-h/images/img061.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..048cc3a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img061.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img062.jpg b/35139-h/images/img062.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..333b18a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img062.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img063.jpg b/35139-h/images/img063.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7631a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img063.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img064.jpg b/35139-h/images/img064.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f028bc --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img064.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img065.jpg b/35139-h/images/img065.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..25113e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img065.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img066.jpg b/35139-h/images/img066.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de731c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img066.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img067.jpg b/35139-h/images/img067.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc04da8 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img067.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img068.jpg b/35139-h/images/img068.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..049cce0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img068.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img069.jpg b/35139-h/images/img069.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e6329a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img069.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img070.jpg b/35139-h/images/img070.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..74f30f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img070.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img070tb.jpg b/35139-h/images/img070tb.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b82d45e --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img070tb.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img071.jpg b/35139-h/images/img071.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddf7f70 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img071.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img072.jpg b/35139-h/images/img072.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a36b7c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img072.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img073.jpg b/35139-h/images/img073.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1c6160 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img073.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img074.jpg b/35139-h/images/img074.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc0fd8f --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img074.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img075.jpg b/35139-h/images/img075.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8995a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img075.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img076.jpg b/35139-h/images/img076.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5035e2c --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img076.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img077.jpg b/35139-h/images/img077.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c4f488 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img077.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img078.jpg b/35139-h/images/img078.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..905b709 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img078.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img079.jpg b/35139-h/images/img079.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5498a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img079.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img080.jpg b/35139-h/images/img080.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d033c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img080.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img081.jpg b/35139-h/images/img081.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..67327d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img081.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/img082.jpg b/35139-h/images/img082.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dec8a22 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/img082.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab001.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa911ff --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab001.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab002.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..be1ba68 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab002.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab003.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c6f85d --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab003.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab004.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab004.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d85b7d --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab004.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab005.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3924748 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab005.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab006.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab006.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5db97b --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab006.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab007.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab007.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f93d64 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab007.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab008.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab008.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d60e47a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab008.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab009.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab009.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..09d1e34 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab009.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab010.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab010.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..db58db8 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab010.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab011.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab011.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..358e7fe --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab011.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab012.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab012.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d5f9cd --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab012.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab013.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab013.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0ed4d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab013.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab014.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab014.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d868c7b --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab014.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab015.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab015.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..278a14e --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab015.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab016.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab016.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6db4e2d --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab016.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab017.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab017.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1da1dff --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab017.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab018.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab018.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b38748c --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab018.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab019.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab019.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5831139 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab019.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab020.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab020.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d92bf33 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab020.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab021.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab021.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f363ef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab021.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab022.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab022.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5dd6874 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab022.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab023.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab023.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aed61f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab023.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab024.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab024.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..29d98d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab024.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab025.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab025.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8dff7e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab025.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab026.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab026.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..87bf64a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab026.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab027.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab027.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..799a81a --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab027.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab028.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab028.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..346b5e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab028.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab029.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab029.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..752d06c --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab029.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab030.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab030.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..594acb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab030.jpg diff --git a/35139-h/images/tab031.jpg b/35139-h/images/tab031.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6fce76 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139-h/images/tab031.jpg |
